Public Works and Government Services Canada Architectural and Engineering Services

BATH INSTITUTION
Hwy 33, Bath, Ontario
BB36 - ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 BB37 - ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5

PWGSC Project No. R.043794.001

SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 1 OF 5:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, EXISTING CONDITIONS, ELECTRICAL/ COMMUNICATIONS SITE, AND CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS

Issued for Bid 2011-05-18

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-05-18

Section

Title

Pages

VOLUME 1 OF 5 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, EXISTING CONDITIONS, ELECTRICAL/COMMUNICATIONS - SITE, AND CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 29 83 PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 32 16.06 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM) 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 29.06 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 55 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA 01 35 56 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 13 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 52 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 56 00 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 01 61 00 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 71 00 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 74 11 CLEANING 01 74 20 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 91 31 COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN 01 91 51 BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM) Division 02 - Existing Conditions 02 42 92 DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE 02 81 01 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 3 2 2 3 13 7 6 6 7 13 3 10 5 4 4 3 6 3 3 3 2 2 8 3 4 31 5 12 5

Division 26 - Electrical (Site) 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 12 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2 26 05 31 SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS 2 26 05 32 OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 3 26 05 34 CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 5 26 05 43.01 INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS 4 Division 27 - Communications (Site) 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-05-18

31 23 10

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

9 2 2 4 5 6 3 4 13 5 4

Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 32 11 20 GRANULAR BASE 32 11 24 GRANULAR SUB-BASE 32 12 17 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 91 19.13 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING 32 92 19.16 HYDRAULIC SEEDING Division 33 - Utilities 33 01 30 MAINTENANCE HOLE REPAIRS 33 05 14 MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS 33 11 17 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 34 02 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS 33 44 01 STORM SEWERS Appendix 'A' Appendix 'B' Appendix 'C'

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT, Nov 25, 2010, prepared by DBA Engineering Ltd. 38 ADDITIONAL BOREHOLES Report, Apr 19, 2011, prepared by DBA Engineering Ltd. ADDENDUM TO REPORT - ADDITIONAL BOREHOLES, May 10, 2011, prepared by DBA Engineering Ltd. 35 1

Refer to Volumes 2 to 5 for the remainder of the specifications: VOLUME 2 OF 5 - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36) VOLUME 3 OF 5 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36) VOLUME 4 OF 5 - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5 (BB37) VOLUME 5 OF 5 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5 (BB37)

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUMMARY OF WORK

Section 01 11 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

PRECEDENCE

.1

For Federal Government projects, Division 1 Sections take precedence over technical specification sections in other Divisions of this Project Manual.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1

Work of this Contract comprises general construction of medium security housing units buildings, located at Bath Institution, Bath, Ontario, and further identified as "Bath Institution Medium Security Housing Units, Building BB36 - Accommodation Unit #4, Building BB37 - Accommodation Unit #5".

1.3 CONTRACT METHOD

.1

Construct Work under single, stipulated price contract.

1.4

COST BREAKDOWN

.1

Within 48 hours of notification of acceptance of bid furnish a cost breakdown by Section aggregating contract price. Show separately cost of equipment purchased exempt from Ontario Retail Sales Tax under your Ontario Sales Tax licence number. Within 48 hours of acceptance of bid submit a list of subcontractors.

.2

.3

1.5

WORK BY OTHERS

.1

The Contractor shall for the purpose of the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects, and for the duration of the Work of the Contract: .1 Assume the role of Constructor in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdictions. .2 Agree, in the event of two or more Contractors working at the same time and space at the work site, without limiting the General Conditions GC3.7, to the Departmental Representative's order to: .3 Assume, as the Constructor, the responsibility for the Departmental Representative's other Contractors; or

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUMMARY OF WORK

Section 01 11 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 WORK BY OTHERS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .4 Accept the Departmental Representative's other Contractor's role as Constructor and conform to that Contractor's Site Specific Health and Safety Plan.

1.6

WORK SEQUENCE

.1

Construct Work in stages to accommodate continued use and operations of the Institution during construction. Coordinate Progress Schedule with Departmental Representative during construction. Maintain fire access/control.

.2 .3

1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE

.1

Contractor shall limit use of site for Work, for storage, and for access, to allow: .1 Institution occupancy and operations. Coordinate use of site under direction of Departmental Representative. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract.

.2 .3

1.8 INSTITUTION OCCUPANCY

.1

Institution will be occupied during entire construction period for execution of normal operations. Cooperate with Departmental Representative and Director in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate Institution operations.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUMMARY OF WORK

Section 01 11 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WORK RESTRICTIONS

Section 01 14 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 01 32 16.06 - Construction Progress Schedule - Critical Path Method (CPM). Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.

1.2 EXISTING SERVICES

.1

Notify, Departmental Representative and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission. Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Departmental Representative 48 hours of notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions minimum. Carry out interruptions after normal working hours of occupants, preferably on weekends. Provide for personnel pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00.

.2

.3 .4

1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1

Submit schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06.

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WORK RESTRICTIONS

Section 01 14 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

Section 01 29 83 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

.1

Particular requirements for inspection and testing to be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative are specified under various sections.

1.2 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT

.1

Departmental Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing laboratory except as follows: .1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities. .2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience. .3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying systems, mechanical and electrical equipment and systems. .4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance. .5 Tests specified to be carried out by Contractor under the supervision of Departmental Representative. .6 Additional tests specified in the following paragraph. Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratory reveal Work not in accordance with contract requirements, pay costs for additional tests or inspections as required by Departmental Representative to verify acceptability of corrected work.

.2

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

.1

Provide labour, equipment and facilities to: .1 Provide access to Work to be inspected and tested. .2 Facilitate inspections and tests. .3 Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test. .4 Provide storage on site for laboratory's exclusive use to store equipment and cure test samples. Notify Departmental Representative sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test. Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

Section 01 29 83 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.4

Pay costs for uncovering and making good Work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved by Departmental Representative.

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PROJECT MEETINGS

Section 01 31 19 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

ADMINISTRATIVE

.1

Schedule and administer project meetings throughout the progress of the work at the call of Departmental Representative. Prepare agenda for meetings. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date to Departmental Representative. Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings. Preside at meetings. Record the meeting minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify actions by parties. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after meetings and transmit to meeting participants and, affected parties not in attendance Departmental Representative. Representative of Contractor, subcontractor and suppliers attending meetings will be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of party each represents.

.2 .3

.4 .5 .6

.7

.8

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

.1

Within 15 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in contract to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities. Departmental Representative, Contractor, major subcontractors, field inspectors and supervisors will be in attendance. Establish time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum 5 days before meeting. Incorporate mutually agreed variations to Contract Documents into Agreement, prior to signing. Agenda to include: .1 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PROJECT MEETINGS

Section 01 31 19 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING (Cont'd)

.5

Agenda to include:(Cont'd) Schedule of Work: in accordance with .2 Section 01 32 16.06. .3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips. Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences in accordance with Section 01 52 00. .5 Site security in accordance with Section 01 56 00. .6 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements. .7 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .8 Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .9 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .10 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, hold backs. .11 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms. .12 Insurances, transcript of policies.

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

.1

During course of Work and 2 weeks prior to project completion, schedule progress meetings bi-weekly. Contractor, major subcontractors involved in Work and Departmental Representative are to be in attendance. Notify parties minimum 5 days prior to meetings. Record minutes of meetings and circulate to attending parties and affected parties not in attendance within 3 days after meeting. Agenda to include the following: .1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. .2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting. .3 Field observations, problems, conflicts. .4 Problems which impede construction schedule. .5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules.

.2

.3 .4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PROJECT MEETINGS

Section 01 31 19 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS (Cont'd)

.5

Agenda to include the following:(Cont'd) Corrective measures and procedures to .6 regain projected schedule. .7 Revision to construction schedule. .8 Progress schedule, during succeeding work period. .9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required. .10 Maintenance of quality standards. .11 Review proposed changes for affect on construction schedule and on completion date. .12 Other business.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

PRECEDENCE

.1

For Federal Government projects Division 1 Sections take precedence over technical specification sections in other Divisions of the specifications.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

.1

Activity: element of Work performed during course of Project. Activity normally has expected duration, and expected cost and expected resource requirements. Activities can be subdivided into tasks. Actual Finish Date (AF): point in time that Work actually ended on activity Actual Start Date (AS): point in time that Work actually started on activity. Bar Chart (Gantt chart): graphic display of schedule-related information. In typical bar chart, activities or other Project elements are listed down left side of chart, dates are shown across top, and activity durations are shown as date-placed horizontal bars. Baseline: original approved plan (for Project, work package, or activity), plus or minus approved scope changes. Completion Milestones: they are firstly Certificate of Substantial Performance and secondly Certificate of Completion. Constraint: applicable restriction that will affect performance of Project. Factors that affect activities can be scheduled. Control: process of comparing actual performance with planned performance, analyzing variances, evaluating possible alternatives, and taking appropriate corrective action as needed. Critical Activity: any activity on a critical path. Most commonly determined by using critical path method.

.2 .3 .4

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.10

Critical Path: series of activities that determines duration of Project. In deterministic model, critical path is usually defined as those activities with float less than or equal to specified value, often zero. It is longest path through Project.
Critical Path Method (CPM): network analysis technique used to predict Project duration by analyzing which sequence of activities (which path) has least amount of scheduling flexibility (least amount of float). Data Date (DD): date at which, or up to which, Project's reporting system has provided actual status and accomplishments. Duration (DU): number of work periods (not including holidays or other non-working periods) required to complete activity or other Project element. Usually expressed as workdays or work weeks. Early Finish Date (EF): in critical path method, earliest possible point in time on which uncompleted portions of activity (or Project) can finish, based on network logic and schedule constraints. Early finish dates can change as Project progresses and changes are made to Project plan. Early Start Date (ES): in critical path method, earliest possible point in time on which uncompleted portions of activity (or Project) can start, based on network logic and schedule constraints. Early start dates can change as Project progresses and changes are made to Project Plan. Finish Date: point in time associated with activity's completion. Usually qualified by one of following: actual, planned, estimated, scheduled, early, late, baseline, target, or current. Float: amount of time that activity may be delayed from its early start without delaying Project finish date. Float is mathematical calculation, and can change as Project progresses and changes are made to Project plan. This resource is available to both PWGSC and Contractor. Lag: modification of logical relationship that directs delay in successor task.

.11

.12

.13

.14

.15

.16

.17

.18

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.3 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.19

Late Finish Date (LF): in critical path method, latest possible point in time that activity may be completed without delaying specified milestone (usually Project finish date).
Late Start Date (LS): in critical path method, latest possible point in time that activity may begin without delaying specified milestone (usually Project finish date). Lead: modification of logical relationship that allows acceleration of successor task. Logic Diagram: see Project network diagram. Master Plan: summary-level schedule that identifies major activities and key milestones. Milestone: significant event in Project, usually completion of major deliverable. Monitoring: capture, analysis, and reporting of Project performance, usually as compared to plan. Near-Critical Activity: activity that has low total float. Non-Critical Activities: activities which when delayed, do not affect specified Contract duration. Project Control System: fully computerized system utilizing commercially available software packages. Project Network Diagram: schematic display of logical relationships of Project activities. Always drawn from left to right to reflect Project chronology. Project Plan: formal, approved document used to guide both Project execution and Project control. Primary uses of Project plan are to document planning assumptions and decisions, facilitate communication among stakeholders, and document approved scope, cost, and schedule baselines. Project plan may be summary or detailed. Project Planning: development and maintenance of Project Plan. Project Planning, Monitoring and Control System: overall system operated by Departmental

.20

.21 .22 .23 .24 .25

.26 .27

.28

.29

.30

.31 .32

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.3 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.32

(Cont'd) Representative to enable monitoring of Project Work in relation to established milestones. Project Schedule: planned dates for performing activities and planned dates for meeting milestones. Dynamic, detailed record of tasks or activities that must be accomplished to satisfy project objectives. Monitoring and control process involves using project schedule in executing and controlling activities and is used as basis for decision making throughout project life cycle. Quantified days duration: working days based on 5 day work week, discounting statutory holidays. Risk: uncertain event or condition that, if it occurs, has positive or negative effect on Project's objectives. Scheduled Finish Date Work was scheduled to Scheduled finish date of dates delimited by finish date. (SF): point in time that finish on activity. is normally within range early finish date and late

.33

.34 .35

.36

.37

Scheduled Start Date (SS): point in time that Work was scheduled to start on activity. Scheduled start date is normally within range of dates delimited by early start date and late start date. Start Date: point in time associated with activity's start, usually qualified by one of following: actual, planned, estimated, scheduled, early, late, target, baseline, or current. Work Breakdown Structure (WBS): deliverable-oriented grouping of project elements that organizes and defines total Work scope of Project. Each descending level represents increasingly detailed definition of Project Work.

.38

.39

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1

Construction Progress Schedule (Project Time Management): describes processes required to ensure timely completion of Project. These processes ensure that various elements of Project are properly co-ordinated. It consists of planning, time estimating, scheduling, progress monitoring and control.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (Cont'd)

.2

Planning: this is most basic function of management, that of determining presentation of action and is essential. .1 It involves focusing on objective consideration of future, and integrating forward thinking with analysis; therefore, in planning, implicit assumptions are made about future so that action can be taken today. .2 Planning and scheduling facilitates accomplishment of objectives and should be considered continuous interactive process involving planning, review, scheduling, analysis, monitoring and reporting.
Ensure that planning process is iterative and results in generally top-down processing with more detail being developed as planning progresses, and decisions concerning options and alternatives are made. This implies progressively more reliability of scheduling data. Detail Project schedule is used for analysis and progress monitoring. Ensure project schedule efficiencies through monitoring. .1 When activities begin on time and are performed according to estimated durations without interruptions, original Critical Path will remain accurate. Changes and delays will however, create an essential need for continual monitoring of Project activities. .2 Monitor progress of Project in detail to ensure integrity of Critical Path, by comparing actual completions of individual activities with their scheduled completions, and review progress of activities that has started but are not yet completed. .3 Monitoring should be done sufficiently often so that causes of delays are immediately identified and removed if possible. Project monitoring and reporting: as Project progresses, keep team aware of changes to schedule, and possible consequences. In addition to Bar Charts and CPM networks, use narrative reports to provide advice on seriousness of difficulties and measures to overcome them. .1 Narrative reporting begins with statement on general status of Project followed by summarization of delays, potential problems, corrective measures and Project status criticality.

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.5 CPM REQUIREMENTS

.1

Ensure Master Plan and Detail Schedule are practical and remain within specified Contract duration. Master Plan and Detail Schedule deemed impractical by Departmental Representative are revised and resubmitted for approval. Acceptance of Master Plan and Detail Schedule showing scheduled Contract duration shorter than specified Contract duration does not constitute change to Contract. Duration of Contract may only be changed through bilateral Agreement. Consider Master Plan and Detail Schedule deemed practical by Departmental Representative, showing Work completed in less than specified Contract duration, to have float. First Milestone on Master Plan and Detail Schedule will identify start Milestone with an "ES" constraint date equal to Award of Contract date. Calculate dates for completion milestones from Plan and Schedule using specified time periods for Contract. Certificate of Substantial Performance with "LF" constraint equal to calculated date. Calculations on updates to be such that if early finish of Certificate of Substantial Performance falls later than specified Contract duration then float calculation to reflect negative float. Delays to non-critical activities, those with float may not be basis for time extension. Do not use float suppression techniques such as software constraints, preferential sequencing, special lead/lag logic restraints, extended activity times or imposed dates other than required by Contract. Allow for and show Master Plan and Detail Schedule adverse weather conditions normally anticipated. Specified Contract duration has been predicated assuming normal amount of adverse weather conditions. Provide necessary crews and manpower to meet schedule requirements for performing Work within specified Contract duration. Simultaneous use of

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7 .8

.9 .10

.11

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 7 2011-05-18

1.5 CPM REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)

.12

(Cont'd) multiple crews on multiple fronts on multiple critical paths may be required. Arrange participation on and off site of subcontractors and suppliers, as required by Departmental Representative, for purpose of network planning, scheduling, updating and progress monitoring. Approvals by Departmental Representative of original networks and revisions do not relieve Contractor from duties and responsibilities required by Contract. Ensure that it is understood that Award of Contract or time of beginning, rate of progress, Certificate of Substantial Performance and Certificate of Completion as defined times of completion are of essence of this contract.

.13

.14

1.6

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit to Departmental Representative Project Control System for planning, scheduling, monitoring and reporting of project progress. Submit Project Control System to Departmental Representative for approval; failure to comply with each required submission, may result in progress payment being withheld in accordance with Federal Government's GC5 Terms of Payment. Include costs for execution, preparation and reproduction of schedule submittals in bid documents. Submit letter ensuring that schedule has been prepared in co-ordination with major sub-contractors. Refer to article "Progress monitoring and reporting" of this specification Section for frequency of Project control system submittals. Submit Project planning, monitoring and control system data as part of initial schedule submission and monthly status reporting and as required by Departmental Representative in following form. .1 USB drive or CD files in original scheduling software containing schedule and cash flow information, labelled with data date,

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 8 2011-05-18

1.6 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.7

(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) specific update, and person responsible for update. .2 Master Plan Bar Chart. .3 Construction Detail schedule Bar Chart. .4 Listing of project activities including milestones and logical connectors, networks (sub-networks) from Project start to end. Sort activities by activity identification number and accompany with descriptions. List early and late start and finish dates together with durations, codes and float. .5 Criticality report listing activities and milestones with negative, zero and up to 5 days total float used as first sort for ready identification of critical or near critical paths through entire project. List early and late starts and finishes dates, together with durations, codes and float for critical activities. .6 Progress report in early start sequence, listing for each trade, activities due to start, underway, or finished within two months from monthly update date. List activity identification number, description and duration. Provide columns for entry of actual start and finish dates, duration remaining and remarks concerning action required.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Use experienced personnel, fully qualified in planning and scheduling to provide services from start of construction to Certificate of Completion, including Commissioning.

1.8 PROJECT MEETING

.1

Meet with Departmental Representative within 5 working days of Award of Contract date, to establish Work requirements and approach to project construction operations.

1.9 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE (WBS)

.1

Prepare construction Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) within 5 working days of Award of Contract date. Develop WBS through at least five levels: Project, stage, element, sub-element and work package.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 9 2011-05-18

1.10 PROJECT MILESTONES

.1

Mandatory and recommended project milestones form targets for both Master Plan and Detail Schedule of CPM construction network system. .1 Excavation completed. .2 Substructure completed. .3 Superstructure completed. .4 Building closed-in and weatherproofed. .5 Interior finishing and fitting, mechanical and electrical work completed. .6 Certificate of Substantial Performance. .7 Outside work completed. .8 Certificate of Completion.

1.11

MASTER PLAN

.1

Structure and base CPM construction networks system on WBS coding in order to ensure consistency throughout Project. Prepare comprehensive construction Master Plan (CPM logic diagram) and dependent Cash Flow Projection within working days of finalizing Agreement to confirm validity or alternates of identified milestones. .1 Master Plan will be used as baseline. .1 Revise baseline as conditions dictate and as required by Departmental Representative. .2 Departmental Representative will review and return revised baseline within 5 work days. Reconcile revisions to Master Plan and Cash Flow Projections with previous baseline to provide continuous audit trail. Initial and subsequent Master Plans will include: .1 USB drive or CD containing schedule and cash flow information, clearly labelled with data date, specific update, and person responsible for update. .2 Bar chart identifying coding, activity durations, early/late and start/finish dates, total float, completion as percentile, current status and budget amounts. .3 Network diagram showing coding, activity sequencing (logic), total float, early/late dates, current status and durations. .4 Actual/projected monthly cash flow: expressed annually and monthly and shown in both graphical and numerical form.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 10 2011-05-18

1.12 DETAIL SCHEDULE

.1

Provide detailed project schedule (CPM logic diagram) within 5 working days of Award of Contract date showing activity sequencing, interdependencies and duration estimates. Include listed activities as follows: .1 Shop drawings. .2 Samples. .3 Approvals. .4 Procurement. .5 Construction. .6 Installation. .7 Site works. .8 Testing. .9 Commissioning and acceptance. Detail CPM schedule to cover in detail period of construction beginning from Award of Contract date. .1 Show remaining activities for CPM construction network system up to Certificate of Completion and develop complete detail as project progresses. .2 Detail activities completely and comprehensively throughout duration of project. Relate Detail Schedule activities to basic activities and milestones developed and approved in Master Plan. Clearly show sequence and interdependence of construction activities and indicate: .1 Start and completion of all items of Work, their major components, and interim milestone completion dates. .2 Activities for procurement, delivery, installation and completion of each major piece of equipment, materials and other supplies, including: .1 Time for submittals, resubmittals and review. .2 Time for fabrication and delivery of manufactured products for Work. .3 Interdependence of procurement and construction activities. .3 Include sufficient detail to assure adequate planning and execution of Work. Activities should generally range in duration from 3 to 15 workdays each. Provide level of detail for project activities such that sequence and interdependency of Contract tasks are demonstrated and allow co-ordination and control of project activities. Show continuous flow from left to right.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 11 2011-05-18

1.12 DETAIL SCHEDULE (Cont'd)

.6

Ensure activities with no float are calculated and clearly indicated on logical CPM construction network system as being, whenever possible, continuous series of activities throughout length of Project to form "Critical Path". Increased number of critical activities is seen as indication of increased risk.
Insert Change Orders in appropriate and logical location of Detail Schedule. After analysis, clearly state and report to Departmental Representative for review effects created by insertion of new Change Order.

.7

1.13 REVIEW OF THE CONSTRUCTION DETAIL SCHEDULE

.1

Allow 5 work days for review by Departmental Representative of proposed construction Detail Schedule. Upon receipt of reviewed Detail Schedule make necessary revisions and resubmit to Departmental Representative for review within 5 work days. Promptly provide additional information to validate practicability of Detail Schedule as required by Departmental Representative. Submittal of Detail Schedule indicates that it meets Contract requirements and will be executed generally in sequence.

.2

.3

.4

1.14 COMPLIANCE WITH DETAIL SCHEDULE

.1 .2

Comply with reviewed Detail Schedule. Proceed with significant changes and deviations from scheduled sequence of activities that cause delay, only after written receipt of approval by Departmental Representative. Identify activities that are behind schedule and causing delay. Provide measures to regain slippage. .1 Corrective measures may include: .1 Increase of personnel on site for effected activities or work package. .2 Increase in materials and equipment. .3 Overtime work or additional work shifts. Submit to Departmental Representative, justification, project schedule data and supporting evidence for approval of extension to Contract completion date or interim milestone

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 12 2011-05-18

1.14 COMPLIANCE WITH DETAIL SCHEDULE (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) date when required. Include as part of supporting evidence: .1 Written submission of proof of delay based on revised activity logic, duration and costs, showing time impact analysis illustrating influence of each change or delay relative to approved contract schedule. .2 Prepared schedule indicating how change will be incorporated into the overall logic diagram. Demonstrate perceived impact based on date of occurrence of change and include status of construction at that time. .3 Other supporting evidence requested by Departmental Representative. .4 Do not assume approval of Contract extension prior to receipt of written approval from Departmental Representative. In event of Contract extension, display in Detail Schedule that scheduled float time available for work involved has been used in full without jeopardizing earned float. .1 Departmental Representative will determine and advise Contractor number of allowable days for extension of Contract based on project schedule updates for period in question, and other factual information. .2 Construction delays affecting project schedule will not constitute justification for extension of contract completion date.

.5

1.15 PROGRESS MONITORING AND REPORTING

.1

On ongoing basis, Detail Schedule on job site must show "Progress to Date". Arrange participation on and off site of subcontractors and suppliers, as, and when necessary, for purpose of network planning, scheduling, updating and progress monitoring. Inspect Work with Departmental Representative at least once monthly to establish progress on each current activity shown on applicable networks. Update and reissue project Work Breakdown Structure and relevant coding structures as project develops and changes. Perform Detail Schedule update monthly with status dated (Data Date) on last working day of month. Update to reflect activities completed to date, activities in progress, logic and duration changes.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM)

Sect 01 32 16.06 Page 13 2011-05-18

1.15 PROGRESS MONITORING AND REPORTING (Cont'd)

.4

Do not automatically update actual start and finish dates by using default mechanisms found in project management software.
Submit to Departmental Representative copies of updated Detail Schedule. Requirements for monthly progress monitoring and reporting are basis for progress payment request. Submit monthly written report based on Detail Schedule, showing Work to date performed, comparing Work progress to planned, and presenting current forecasts. Report must summarize progress, defining problem areas and anticipated delays with respect to Work schedule, and critical paths. Explain alternatives for possible schedule recovery to mitigate any potential delay. Include in report: .1 Description of progress made. .2 Pending items and status of: permits, shop drawings, Change Orders, and possible time extensions. .3 Status of Contract completion date and milestones. .4 Current and anticipated problem areas, potential delays and corrective measures. .5 Review of progress and status of Critical Path activities.

.5 .6

.7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 33 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

ADMINISTRATIVE

.1

Submit to Departmental Representative submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete. Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units. Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are acceptable. Review submittals prior to submission to Departmental Representative. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and considered rejected. Notify Departmental Representative, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations. Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Departmental Representative's review of submittals. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Departmental Representative review. Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site. Submit number of hard copies specified for each type and format of submittal and in also submit

.2 .3 .4 .5

.6

.7 .8

.9

.10 .11

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 33 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE (Cont'd)

.11

(Cont'd) in electronic format as pdf files. Forward pdf files on CD or through email.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1

The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work. Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario of Canada. Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been co-ordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications. Allow 3 working days for Departmental Representative's review of each submission. Adjustments made on shop drawings by Departmental Representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work. Make changes in shop drawings as Departmental Representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Departmental Representative in writing of revisions other than those requested. Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: .1 Date. .2 Project title and number. .3 Contractor's name and address. .4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample. .5 Other pertinent data.

.2

.3

.4 .5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 33 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA (Cont'd)

.8

Submissions shall include: Date and revision dates. .1 .2 Project title and number. .3 Name and address of: .1 Subcontractor. .2 Supplier. .3 Manufacturer. .4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents. .5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and clearances. .3 Setting or erection details. .4 Capacities. .5 Performance characteristics. .6 Standards. .7 Operating weight. .8 Wiring diagrams. .9 Single line and schematic diagrams. .10 Relationship to adjacent work.
After Departmental Representative's review, distribute copies. Submit three copy of shop requested in Departmental request. hard copies and one electronic drawings for each requirement specification Sections and as Representative may reasonably

.9 .10

.11

Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of test reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. .1 Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. .2 Testing must have been within 3 years of date of contract award for project.

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 33 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA (Cont'd)

.13

Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of certificates for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. .1 Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. .2 Certificates must be dated after award of project contract complete with project name.
Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of manufacturers instructions for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. .1 Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Data for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative. Delete information not applicable to project. Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project. If upon review by Departmental Representative, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. The review of shop drawings by Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) is for sole

.14

.15

.16

.17

.18 .19 .20

.21

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 33 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA (Cont'd)

.21

(Cont'd) purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept. .1 This review shall not mean that PWGSC approves detail design inherent in shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of construction and Contract Documents. .2 Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of Work of sub-trades.

1.3

SAMPLES

.1

Submit for review samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. Label samples with origin and intended use. Deliver samples prepaid to Departmental Representative's business address. Notify Departmental Representative in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements of Contract Documents. Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples. Adjustments made on samples by Departmental Representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work. Make changes in samples which Departmental Representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents. Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.

.2 .3

.4 .5

.6

.7

1.4

MOCK-UPS

.1

Erect mock-ups in accordance with 01 45 00.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 33 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.5 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

.1

Submit electronic and hard copy of colour digital photography in jpg format, standard resolution monthly with progress statement and as directed by Departmental Representative. Project identification: name and number of project and date of exposure indicated. Number of viewpoints: viewpoints and their location as determined by Departmental Representative. Frequency of photographic documentation: as directed by Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

.4

1.6 CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS

.1

Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers' Safety and Insurance Board Experience Report.

1.7 FEES, PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES

.1 .2 .3 .4

Provide authorities having jurisdiction with information requested. Pay fees and obtain certificates and permits required. Furnish certificates and permits. Submit acceptable certificate stating that suspended ceiling systems provide adequate support for electrical fixtures, as required by current bulletin of Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 33 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 35 29.06 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Standards Association (CSA): Canada .1 CSA S350-M1980(R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures. National Building Code 2010 (NBC): .1 NBC 2010, Division B, Part 8, Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites. National Fire Code 2010 (NFC): .1 NFC 2010, Division B, Part 2 Emergency Planning, subsection 2.8.2 Fire Safety Plan. Province of Ontario: .1 Occupational Health and Safety Act Revised Statutes of Ontario 1990, Chapter O.1 as amended, and Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91 as amended. .2 Workplace Safety and Insurance Act, 1997. .3 Municipal statutes and authorities. Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat (TBS): .1 Treasury Board, Fire Protection Standard April 1, 2010 www.tbs-sct.gc.ca/pol/doc-eng.aspx ?id=17316&section=text. Fire Commissioner of Canada (FCC): .1 FC-301 Standard for Construction Operations, June 1982. .2 FC-302 Standard for Welding and Cutting, June 1982. Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services 4900 Yonge Street 8th Floor North York, Ontario M2N 6A8 and copies may be obtained from: Human Resources and Social Development Canada Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0J2

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: Within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 35 29.06 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must include: .1 Results of site specific safety hazard assessment. .2 Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operations found in work plan. .3 Measures and controls to be implemented to address identified safety hazards and risks. .4 Provide a Fire Safety Plan, specific to the work location, in accordance with NBC, Division B, Article 8.1.1.1 prior to commencement of work. The plan shall be coordinated with, and integrated into, the Facility Emergency Procedures and Evacuation Plan in place at the site. Departmental Representative will provide Facility Emergency Procedures and Evacuation Plan. Deliver two copies of the Fire Safety Plan to the Departmental Representative not later than 14 days before commencing work. .5 Contractor's and sub-contractors' Safety Communication Plan. .6 Contingency and Emergency Response Plan addressing standard operating procedures specific to the project site to be implemented during emergency situations. Coordinate plan with existing Facility Emergency Response requirements and procedures provided by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide comments to Contractor within 5 days after receipt of plan. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Departmental Representative within 3 days after receipt of comments from Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative's review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility for construction Health and Safety. Submit names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health. Submit records of Contractor's Health and Safety meetings when requested. Submit 3 copies of Contractor's authorized representative's work site health and safety

.3

.4

.5 .6 .7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 35 29.06 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.2 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.7

(Cont'd) inspection reports to Departmental Representative, weekly. Submit copies of orders, directions or reports issued by health and safety inspectors of the authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of incident and accident reports. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Submit Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB)- Experience Rating Report. Medical Surveillance: where prescribed by legislation, regulation or safety program, submit certification of medical surveillance for site personnel prior to commencement of Work, and submit additional certifications for any new site personnel to Departmental Representative.

.8

.9 .10 .11 .12

1.3 FILING OF NOTICE

.1

File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to commencement of Work.

1.4

WORK PERMIT

.1 .2

Obtain building permits related to project prior to commencement of Work. Obtain Hot Work Permit from Departmental Representative.

1.5 SAFETY ASSESSMENT

.1

Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.

1.6

MEETINGS

.1

Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Departmental Representative prior to commencement of Work.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2

Comply with the Acts and regulations of the Province of Ontario. Comply with specified standards and regulations to ensure safe operations at site.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 35 29.06 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1

Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to beginning site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications. Departmental Representative may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns either accepting or requesting improvements. Relief from or substitution for any portion or provision of minimum Health and Safety standards specified herein or reviewed site-specific Health and Safety Plan shall be submitted to Departmental Representative in writing.

.2

.3

1.9 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1

Comply with Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1990 Chapter O.1, as amended.

1.10

RESPONSIBILITY .1

Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work. Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan. Where applicable the Contractor shall be designated "Constructor", as defined by Occupational Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario.

.2

.3

1.11 UNFORSEEN HAZARDS

.1

Should any unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during performance of Work, immediately stop work and advise Departmental Representative verbally and in writing. Follow procedures in place for Employees Right to Refuse Work as specified in the Occupational Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 35 29.06 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.12 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS

.1

Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province of Ontario, and in consultation with Departmental Representative. .1 Contractor's Safety Policy. .2 Constructor's Name. .3 Notice of Project. .4 Ministry of Labour Orders and reports. .5 Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects for Province of Ontario. .6 Address and phone number of nearest Ministry of Labour office. .7 Material Safety Data Sheets. .8 Written emeregency Response Plan. .9 Site Specific Safety Plan. .10 Valid certificate of first aider on duty. .11 WSIB "In Case of Injury At Work" poster. .12 Location of toilet and cleanup facilities.

1.13 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE

.1

Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority having jurisdiction or by Departmental Representative. Provide Departmental Representative with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health and safety issues identified. Departmental Representative may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not corrected.

.2

.3

1.14

BLASTING

.1

Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted.

1.15 POWDER ACTUATED DEVICES

.1

Powder actuated devices are not permitted.

1.16

WORK STOPPAGE

.1

Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work. Assign responsibility and obligation to and competent supervisor to stop or start Work when,

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 35 29.06 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.16 WORK STOPPAGE (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) at competent supervisor's discretion, it is necessary or advisable for reasons of health or safety. Departmental Representative may also stop Work for health and safety considerations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 35 43 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

DEFINITIONS

.1

Environmental Pollution and Damage: presence of chemical, physical, biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health and welfare; unfavourably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically. Environmental Protection: prevention/control of pollution and habitat or environment disruption during construction. Control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.

.2

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to site, submit Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by Departmental Representative. Environmental Protection Plan is to present comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues which must be addressed during construction. Address topics at level of detail commensurate with environmental issue and required construction tasks. Environmental protection plan: include: .1 Names of persons responsible for ensuring adherence to Environmental Protection Plan. .2 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from site. .3 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for training site personnel. .4 Descriptions of environmental protection personnel training program. .5 Erosion and sediment control plan which identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided including monitoring and reporting requirements to assure

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 35 43 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.4

Environmental protection plan:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations. .6 Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on site. .7 Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plans include measures to minimize amount of mud transported onto paved public roads by vehicles or runoff. .8 Work area plan showing proposed activity in each portion of area and identifying areas of limited use or non-use. Plan to include measures for marking limits of use areas including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas. .9 Spill Control Plan: including procedures, instructions, and reports to be used in event of unforeseen spill of regulated substance. .10 Non-Hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris. .11 Air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust, debris, materials, and trash, do not become air borne and travel off project site. .12 Contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on job site; identifies intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials. .13 Waste water management plan that identifies methods and procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. .14 Historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 35 43 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.2 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.4

Environmental protection plan:(Cont'd) .15 Pesticide treatment plan: to be included and updated, as required. .16 Halocarbon Control Plan: submit documentation specified in PWGSC Ontario Region Halocarbon Information Sheet dated March 2010 including a signed, completed copy of the information sheet.

1.3

FIRES

.1

Fires and burning of rubbish on site are not permitted.

1.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTES

.1 .2

Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on site unless approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner into waterways, storm or sanitary sewers.

1.5

DRAINAGE

.1

Provide erosion and sediment control plan that identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided. Plan: include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) to be substituted for erosion and sedimentations control plan. Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations and site free from water. Do not pump water containing suspended materials into waterways, sewer or drainage systems. Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authority requirements.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 35 43 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.6 SITE CLEARING AND PLANT PROTECTION

.1 .2

Protect trees and plants on site and adjacent properties where indicated. Wrap in burlap, trees and shrubs adjacent to construction work, storage areas and trucking lanes, and encase with protective wood framework from grade level to height of 2 m. Protect roots of designated trees to dripline during excavation and site grading to prevent disturbance or damage. Avoid unnecessary traffic, dumping and storage of materials over root zones. Minimize stripping of topsoil and vegetation. Restrict tree removal to areas indicated or designated by Departmental Representative.

.3

.4 .5

1.7 WORK ADJACENT TO WATERWAYS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

Do not operate construction equipment in waterways. Do not use waterway beds for borrow material without Departmental Representative's approval. Do not dump excavated fill, waste material or debris in waterways. Design and construct temporary crossings to minimize erosion to waterways. Do not skid logs or construction materials across waterways. Avoid indicated spawning beds when constructing temporary crossings of waterways. Do not blast under water or within 100 m of indicated spawning beds.

1.8 POLLUTION CONTROL

.1 .2 .3

Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control features installed under this contract. Control emissions from equipment and plant to local authorities' emission requirements. Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials from contaminating air and waterways beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 35 43 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.8 POLLUTION CONTROL (Cont'd)

.4

Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. Provide dust control for temporary roads.
Spills of deleterious substances: .1 Immediately contain, limit spread and clean up in accordance with provincial regulatory requirements. .2 Report immediately to Ontario Spills Action Centre: 1-800-268-6060. .3 Further information on dangerous goods emergency cleanup and precautions including a list of companies performing this work can be obtained from the Transport Canada 24-hour number (613) 996-6666 collect.

.5

1.9

HALOCARBONS

.1

Comply with Federal Halocarbon Regulations 2003 under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act 1999, EPAM and PWGSC Ontario Region Halocarbon Information Sheet dated March 2010.

1.10 HISTORICAL/ ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONTROL

.1

Provide historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands known to be on project site: and/or identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously known to be onsite or in area are discovered during construction. Plan: include methods to assure protection of known or discovered resources and identify lines of communication between Contractor personnel and Departmental Representative.

.2

1.11

NOTIFICATION

.1

Departmental Representative will notify Contractor in writing of observed noncompliance with Federal, Provincial or Municipal environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of Contractor's Environmental Protection plan. Contractor: after receipt of such notice, inform Departmental Representative of proposed corrective action and take such action for approval by Departmental Representative.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

Section 01 35 43 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.11 NOTIFICATION (Cont'd)

.3

Departmental Representative will issue stop order of work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.
No time extensions granted or equitable adjustments allowed to Contractor for such suspensions.

.4

1.12 RISK

SPECIES AT

.1

If peregrine falcons are encountered the Contractor shall cease all work and contact Departmental Representative for advice regarding mitigation measures. Contractor shall protect and not disturb the falcons and their offspring in accordance with Section 01 35 43. Falcons will become aggressive if disturbed.

.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 55 Page 1 2011-05-18

1

PURPOSE

.1

To ensure that both the construction project and the institutional operations may proceed without undue disruption or hindrance and that the security of the Institution is maintained at all times.

2

DEFINITIONS

.1

"Contraband" means: .1 An intoxicant, including alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics. .2 Tobacco or associated tobacco products. .3 An igniting device, lighter or matches. .4 A weapon or a component thereof, ammunition for a weapon, and anything that is designed to kill, injure or disable a person or that is altered so as to be capable of killing, injuring or disabling a person, when possessed without prior authorization. .5 An explosive or a bomb or a component thereof. .6 Currency over any applicable prescribed limit, when possessed by an inmate without prior authorization. .7 Any item not described in paragraphs 2.1.1 to 2.1.6 that could jeopardize the security of a Penitentiary or the safety of persons, when that item is possessed without prior authorization. "Unauthorized Smoking and related Items" means all smoking items including, but not limited to, cigarettes, cigars, tobacco, chewing tobacco, cigarette making machines, matches and lighters. "Commercial Vehicle" means any motor vehicle used for the shipment of material, equipment and tools required for the construction project. "CSC" means Correctional Service Canada. "Director" means Director, Warden or Superintendent of the Institution as applicable. "Construction Employees" means persons working for the General Contractor, the sub-contractors, equipment operators, material suppliers, testing and inspection companies and regulatory agencies. "Departmental Representative" means the project manager from Public Works and Government Services Canada.

.2

.3

.4 .5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 55 Page 2 2011-05-18

2

DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.8

"Perimeter" means the fenced or walled area of the Institution that restrains the movement of the inmates.
"Construction Limits" means the area as shown on the contract drawings that the Contractor will be allowed to work". This area may or may not be isolated from the security area of the Institution. "CPIC" means RCMP Canadian Police Information Centre.

.9

.10

3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Co-operate with institutional personnel in ensuring that security requirements are observed by all construction employees.

4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMITTANCE

.1

Submit to the Director a signed security clearance request form for each construction employee seeking admission to the Institution. Allow two (2) weeks for processing of security clearances (CPIC's). Employees will not be admitted to the Institution without a valid security clearance (CIPC) in place and a recent picture identification such as a provincial driver's license. Security clearances obtained from other CSC Institutions are not valid at this Institution. The Director requires that facial photographs (ID Cards) be displayed prominently on the Construction Employees' clothing at all times while Construction Employees are in the Institution. Entry to Institutional Property will be refused to any person there may be reason to believe may be a security risk. Any person employed on the construction site will be subject to immediate removal from Institutional Property if they: .1 Appear to be under the influence of alcohol, drugs or narcotics. .2 Behave in an unusual or disorderly manner. .3 Are in possession of contraband. Smoking is prohibited anywhere on CSC property.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 55 Page 3 2011-05-18

5

VEHICLES

.1

All unattended vehicles on CSC property shall have windows closed; doors and trunks shall be locked and keys removed. The keys shall be securely in the possession of the owner or an employee of the company that owns the vehicle. Failure to comply with the above will result in an immediate shutdown of the job site and a stoppage of work for an indefinite period of time at the Contractor's expense. The Director may limit at any time the number and type of vehicles allowed within the Institution. If the Director permits trailers to be left inside the secure perimeter of the Institution, or within the fenced construction site compound, these trailers' doors will be locked at all times. All windows will be securely locked when left unoccupied. All trailer windows shall be covered with expanded metal mesh. All storage trailers inside and outside the perimeter shall be locked when not in use.

.2

.3

6

PARKING

.1

Parking area(s) to be used by Construction Employees will be designated by the Director. Parking in other locations will be prohibited and vehicles may be subject to removal.

7

SHIPMENTS

.1

All shipments of project material, equipment and tools shall be addressed in the Contractor's name to avoid confusion with the Institution's own shipments. The Contractor must have his/her own employees on site to receive any deliveries or shipments. CSC staff will NOT accept receipt of deliveries or shipments of any material, equipment or tools.

8

WORK HOURS

.1

Work hours within the construction site are: 07:00 hrs to 17:00 hrs, seven days per week.

9

OVERTIME WORK

.1

No overtime work will be allowed without permission of the Director. Give a minimum forty-eight (48) hours advance notice when overtime work on the construction project is necessary and approved. If overtime work is required because of an emergency such as the

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 55 Page 4 2011-05-18

9

OVERTIME WORK (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) completion of a concrete pour or work to make the construction safe and secure, the Contractor shall advise the Director as soon as this condition is known and follow the directions given by the Director.

10 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

.1

Keep all tools and equipment under constant supervision, particularly power-driven and cartridge-driven tools, cartridges, files, saw blades, rod saws, wire, rope, ladders and any sort of jacking device. Ensure that these tools and equipment are not accessible to inmates on the outside of the fenced perimeter enclosure. Ensure that at the end of each work day, and when not in use, all tools and equipment are locked in a secure room or in secure lockable tool boxes. All missing or lost tools or equipment shall be reported immediately to the Director.

.2

.3

11

HARDWARE

.1

Security Hardware/ Keys - Existing: .1 Turn over all removed security hardware to the Director of the Institution for disposal or for safekeeping until required for re-installation. Security Hardware/ Keys - New: .1 Arrange with the security hardware supplier to have the cylinders and keys for the security hardware to be delivered from the manufacturer directly to the Institution, specifically the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO). .2 The SMO will provide a receipt to the Contractor for security hardware and keys. .3 Provide a copy of the security hardware and keys receipt to the Departmental Representative. Construction Hardware/ Keys: .1 The Contractor will use standard construction cylinders for locks for his/her use during the construction period. .2 The Contractor will issue instructions to his/her employees and sub-trades, as necessary, to ensure safe custody of the construction set of keys.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 55 Page 5 2011-05-18

11

HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.3

Construction Hardware/ Keys:(Cont'd) .3 Upon completion of each phase of the construction, the CSC representative will, in conjunction with the lock manufacturer: .1 Accept the operational keys and cylinders directly from the lock manufacturer. .2 CSC will arrange for removal and return of the construction cores and install the operational cores in all locks. Upon putting operational security keys into use, the CSC construction escort shall obtain these keys as they are required from the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO) and open doors as required by the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue instructions to his/her employees advising them that all security keys shall always remain with the CSC construction escort.

.4

12 PRESCRIPTION DRUGS

.1

Employees of the Contractor who are required to take prescription drugs during the workday shall obtain approval of the Director to bring a one day supply only into the Institution.

13

CONTRABAND

.1

Weapons, ammunition, explosives, alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics are prohibited on Institutional Property. Discovery of Contraband on the construction site and the identification of the person(s) responsible for the Contraband shall be reported immediately to the Director. Contractors shall be vigilant with both their staff and the staff of their sub-contractors and suppliers that the discovery of Contraband may result in cancellation of the security clearance of the affected employee. Serious infractions may result in the removal of the company from the Institution for the duration of the construction. Presence of arms and ammunition in vehicles of Contractors, sub-contractors and suppliers or employees of these will result in the immediate cancellation of security clearances for the driver of the vehicle.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 55 Page 6 2011-05-18

14

SEARCHES

.1 .2

All vehicles and persons entering Institutional property may be subject to search. When the Director suspects, on reasonable grounds, that an employee of the Contractor is in possession of Contraband or unauthorized items, he/she may order that person to be searched.

15 ACCESS TO AND REMOVAL FROM INSTITIUION PROPERTY

.1

Construction personnel and commercial vehicles will not be admitted to the Institution or the fenced primary construction site after normal working hours, unless approved by the Director. Access to the primary construction site will be controlled by Contractor, and during normal course of business Institutional staff will not be permitted on to the site due to Health and Safety Regulations.

.2

16 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES

.1

Vehicles shall be refused access to Institutional Property if, in the opinion of the Director, they contain any article which may jeopardize the security of the Institution. Private vehicles of Construction Employees will not be allowed within the security wall or fence of medium or maximum security Institutions without the permission of the Director. When equipment is permitted to remain on the construction site overnight or over the weekend this equipment must be securely locked and disabled.

.2

.3

17 SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION

.1

Construction activities and all related movement of personnel and vehicles will be subject to surveillance and inspection by CSC security staff members to ensure that established security requirements are met. CSC staff members will ensure that an understanding of the need to carry out surveillance and inspections, as specified above, is established among Construction Employees and maintained throughout the construction project.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 55 Page 7 2011-05-18

18 STOPPAGE OF WORK

.1

The Director may request at any time that the Contractor, his/her employees, sub-contractors and their employees not enter or leave the work site immediately due to a security situation occurring within the Institution. The Contractor's site supervisor shall note the name of the staff member making the request and the time of the request and obey the order as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall advise the Departmental Representative within 24 hours of this delay to the progress of the work.

.2

19 CONTACT WITH INMATES

.1

Unless specifically authorized, it is forbidden to come into contact with inmates, to talk with them, to receive objects from them or to give them objects. Any employee doing any of the above will be removed from the site and his/her security clearance revoked. It is forbidden to take pictures of inmates, of CSC staff members or of any part of the Institution other than those required as part of this Contract.

.2

20 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION PROJECT

.1

Upon completion of the construction project or, when applicable, the takeover of a facility, the Contractor shall remove all remaining construction material, tools and equipment that are not specified to remain in the Institution as part of the construction contract.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 1 2011-05-18

1

PURPOSE

.1

To ensure that both the construction project and the institutional operations may proceed without undue disruption or hindrance and that the security of the Institution is maintained at all times.

2

DEFINITIONS

.1

"Contraband" means: .1 An intoxicant, including alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics. .2 Tobacco or associated tobacco products. .3 An igniting device, lighter or matches. .4 A weapon or a component thereof, ammunition for a weapon, and anything that is designed to kill, injure or disable a person or that is altered so as to be capable of killing, injuring or disabling a person, when possessed without prior authorization. .5 An explosive or a bomb or a component thereof. .6 Currency over any applicable prescribed limit, when possessed by an inmate without prior authorization. .7 Any item not described in paragraphs 2.1.1 to 2.1.6 that could jeopardize the security of a Penitentiary or the safety of persons, when that item is possessed without prior authorization. "Unauthorized Smoking and related Items" means all smoking items including, but not limited to, cigarettes, cigars, tobacco, chewing tobacco, cigarette making machines, matches and lighters. "Commercial Vehicle" means any motor vehicle used for the shipment of material, equipment and tools required for the construction project. "CSC" means Correctional Service Canada. "Director" means Director, Warden or Superintendent of the Institution as applicable. "Construction Employees" means persons working for the General Contractor, the sub-contractors, equipment operators, material suppliers, testing and inspection companies and regulatory agencies. "Departmental Representative" means the project manager from Public Works and Government Services Canada.

.2

.3

.4 .5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 2 2011-05-18

2

DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.8

"Perimeter" means the fenced or walled area of the Institution that restrains the movement of the inmates.
"Construction Limits" means the area as shown on the contract drawings that the Contractor will be allowed to work". This area may or may not be isolated from the security area of the Institution. "CPIC" means RCMP Canadian Police Information Centre. "Commissioner" means designated representative of Director, to monitor construction related activities including surveillance of inmate labour.

.9

.10 .11

3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall meet with the Director or his/her representative to: .1 Discuss the nature and extent of all activities involved in the Project. .2 Establish mutually acceptable security procedures in accordance with this instruction and the institution's particular requirements. Contractor shall: .1 Ensure that all Construction Employees are aware of the security requirements. .2 Ensure that a copy of the security requirements is always prominently on display at the job site. .3 Co-operate with institutional personnel in ensuring that security requirements are observed by all Construction Employees. Ensure sub-contractors provide lists of contact names and "after hours" telephone numbers, in case the Contractor needs to contact them after work hours on behalf of the Institution. This information will be considered confidential and the Contractor is responsible for its secure storage. The Contractor shall also provide the Director or designated representative of the Institution with a list of Contractor's company contact names and "after hours" telephone numbers, in case of emergency.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 3 2011-05-18

4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES

.1

Submit to the Director a signed security clearance request form for each construction employee seeking admission to the Institution. Allow two (2) weeks for processing of security clearances (CPIC's). Employees will not be admitted to the Institution without a valid security clearance (CPIC) in place and a recent picture identification such as a provincial driver's license. Security clearances obtained from other CSC Institutions are not valid at this Institution. The Director may require that facial photographs may be taken of Construction Employees and these photographs may be displayed at appropriate locations in the Institution or in an electronic database for identification purposes. The Director may require that Photo ID cards be provided for all Construction Employees. ID cards will then be left at the designated entrance to be picked upon arrival at the institution and shall be displayed prominently on the Construction Employees' clothing at all time while Construction Employees are in the institution. Photograph ID's issued to construction employees by the Institution must be added to tool lists and returned to the Institution at the completion of their work activity at the site. Entry to Institutional Property will be refused to any person there may be reason to believe may be a security risk. Any person employed on the construction site will be subject to immediate removal from Institutional Property if they: .1 Appear to be under the influence of alcohol, drugs or narcotics. .2 Behave in an unusual or disorderly manner. .3 Are in possession of contraband. Smoking is prohibited anywhere on CSC property.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

5

VEHICLES

.1

All unattended vehicles on CSC property shall have windows closed; doors and trunks shall be locked and keys removed. The keys shall be securely in the possession of the owner or an employee of the company that owns the vehicle. Failure to comply with the above will result in an immediate shutdown of the job site and

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 4 2011-05-18

5

VEHICLES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) stoppage of work for an indefinite period of time at the Contractor's expense. The Director may limit at any time the number and type of vehicles allowed within the Institution. Drivers of delivery vehicles for material required by the project will not require security clearances but must remain with their vehicle the entire time that the vehicle is in the Institution. The Director may require that these vehicles be escorted by Institutional Staff or Commissionaires while in the Institution. If the Director permits trailers to be left inside the secure perimeter of the Institution, these trailers' doors will be locked at all times. All windows will be securely locked when left unoccupied. All trailer windows shall be covered with expanded metal mesh. All storage trailers inside and outside the perimeter shall be locked when not in use. Sub-contractors will be responsible for providing locks and keys for their trailers, and to supply an extra key to the Contractor, in case access is required after work hours.

.2

.3

.4

6

PARKING

.1

Parking area(s) to be used by Construction Employees will be designated by the Director. Parking in other locations will be prohibited and vehicles may be subject to removal. All Contractor's vehicles brought inside the Institution will have to be removed at the end of each day.

7

SHIPMENTS

.1

All shipments of project material, equipment and tools shall be addressed in the Contractor's name to avoid confusion with the Institution's own shipments. The Contractor must have his/her own employees on site to receive any deliveries or shipments. CSC staff will NOT accept receipt of deliveries or shipments of any material, equipment or tools.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 5 2011-05-18

8

TELEPHONES

.1

There will be no installation of telephones, Facsimile machines and computers with Internet connections permitted within the perimeter of the Institution unless prior approval of the Director is received. The Director will ensure that approved telephones, facsimile machine and computers with internet connections are located where they are not accessible to inmates. All computers will have an approved password protection that will stop an internet connection to unauthorized personnel. Wireless cellular and digital telephones, including but not limited to devices for telephone messaging, pagers, BlackBerries, telephone used as 2-way radios, are not permitted within the Institution unless approved by the Director. If wireless cellular telephones are permitted, the user will not permit their use by any inmate. The Director may approve but limit the use of two way radios.

.2

.3

.4

9

WORK HOURS

.1

Work hours within the Institution are: Monday to Friday 08:00 hrs to 16:00 hrs except as noted below. .1 Workers can access the site on foot through the Sally Port except on Fridays when they can enter the Institution through the front entrance. Work will not be permitted during weekends and statutory holidays without the permission of the Director. A minimum of two days (48 hours) advance notice will be required to obtain the required permission. In case of emergencies or other special circumstances, this advance notice may be waived by the Director.

.2

10

OVERTIME WORK

.1

No overtime work will be allowed without permission of the Director. Give a minimum forty-eight (48) hours advance notice when overtime work on the construction project is necessary and approved. If overtime work is required because of an emergency such as the completion of a concrete pour or work to make the construction safe and secure, the Contractor shall advise the Director as soon as this

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 6 2011-05-18

10

OVERTIME WORK (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) condition is known and follow the directions given by the Director. Costs to the Departmental Representative for such events may be attributed to the Contractor. When overtime work, weekend, or statutory holiday work is required and approved by the Director, extra staff members may be posted by the Director or his/her designate, to maintain the security surveillance. The Departmental Representative may post extra staff for inspection of construction activities. The actual cost of this extra staff may be subject to reclamation by the Departmental Representative.

.2

11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

.1

The Contractor and sub-contractors are to maintain a complete list of all tools and equipment on site and make this inventory available for inspection when required. Tool lists are to be prepared by the Contractor in consultation with the Commissioner at the entrance to the Institution, upon arrival. The tool lists will then be vetted by institutional security and, once approved, the Contractor, sub-contractors, and tools will be permitted access. Throughout the construction project maintain up-to-date the list of tools and equipment specified above. .1 On a daily basis, the Contractor and sub-contractors shall utilize a sign-out system for any tools issued. At a minimum the sign-out system shall include a name of the tool, to whom it was issued, and confirmation that it was returned. All tools not issued shall be secured at all times. Particular attention is to be given to the distribution and location of power-driven and cartridge-driven tools, cartridges, files, saw blades, rod saws, wire, rope, ladders and any sort of jacking device. Store all tools and equipment in a secure room or in secure lockable tool boxes. location of room and/or location and type of tool boxes are subject to the approval of the Director. Lock secure storage room and/or all tool boxes when not in use. Keys to remain in the

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 7 2011-05-18

11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) possession of the employees of the Contractor. Sub-contractors shall provide the Contractor with a copy of keys to secure stoarge room and/or tool boxes, in case access is required after hours. Scaffolding shall be secured and locked when not erected and when erected, will be secured in a manner agreed upon with the Institutional designate. All missing or lost tools or equipment shall be reported immediately to the Director. The Director will ensure that the security staff members (Commissioners) carry out checks and verifications of the Contractor's tools and equipment against the list provided by the Contractor. These checks may be carried out at the following intervals: .1 At the beginning and conclusion of every construction project. .2 Weekly, when the construction project extends longer than a one week period. .3 The Contractor may be subject to random checks by security staff to ensure proper storage and security of tools throughout the project. Inspection is to be done by the Commissioners with the assistance of The Contractor and/or sub-contractor, and may take about one and a half (1-1/2) hours to complete. During this procedure every tool listed by the Contractor and/or sub-contractor has to be located and accounted for. At the end of each work day the Contractor and all sub-contractors are required to ensure all tools are accounted for before leaving the site for the day. Once tools have been verified by the Contractor and/or each sub-contractor, the Contractor and/or sub-contractors shall proceed to the Commissioner's on-site office (immediately prior to leaving the Institution) to submit verbal and written declarations to this effect, to the Commissioner on duty. The written declaration amounts to a person signing a logbook to record this activity. Certain tools/equipment such as cartridges, drill bits and hacksaw blades are highly controlled items. The Contractor will be given at the beginning of the day, a quantity that

.6

.7 .8

.9

.10

.11

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 8 2011-05-18

11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)

.11

(Cont'd) will permit one day's work. Used blades/cartridges will be returned to the Director's representative at the end of each day. If propane or natural gas is used for heating the construction, the Institution will require that an employee of the Contractor supervise the construction site during non-working hours. If torches or grinders are required tools to perform Work, Contractor must complete a Hot Work Permit as supplied by CSC. Completed original form(s) are copied and posted on the work site in a conspicuous location. Original documents are to remain with the Institutional Fire Chief. If the Contractor needs to remove tools from the site, he/she shall be responsible to notify the Commissioner on duty, who will record this information, noting name of the Contractor, tool, date, and will initial the entry. Tool lists are to be modified accordingly. If the Contractor needs to bring additional tools or return previously removed tools to the work site, the Contractor is responsible to alert the Commissioner, upon entering the Institution. Modify tool lists accordingly.

.12

.13

.14

12

HARDWARE

.1

Security Hardware/ Keys - Existing: .1 Turn over all removed security hardware to the Director of the Institution for disposal or for safekeeping until required for re-installation. Security Hardware/ Keys - New: .1 Arrange with the security hardware supplier to have the cylinders and keys for the security hardware to be delivered from the manufacturer directly to the Institution, specifically the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO). .2 The SMO will provide a receipt to the Contractor for security hardware and keys. .3 Provide a copy of the security hardware and keys receipt to the Departmental Representative. Construction Hardware/ Keys:

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 9 2011-05-18

12

HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.3

Construction Hardware/ Keys:(Cont'd) .1 The Contractor will use standard construction cylinders for locks for his/her use during the construction period. .2 The Contractor will issue instructions to his/her employees and sub-trades, as necessary, to ensure safe custody of the construction set of keys. .3 Upon completion of each phase of the construction, the CSC representative will, in conjunction with the lock manufacturer: .1 Accept the operational keys and cylinders directly from the lock manufacturer. .2 CSC will arrange for removal and return of the construction cores and install the operational cores in all locks. Upon putting operational security keys into use, the CSC construction escort shall obtain these keys as they are required from the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO) and open doors as required by the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue instructions to his/her employees advising them that all security keys shall always remain with the CSC construction escort.

.4

13 PRESCRIPTION DRUGS

.1

Employees of the Contractor who are required to take prescription drugs during the workday shall obtain approval of the Director to bring a one day supply only into the Institution.

14 SMOKING RESTRICTIONS

.1

Contractors and construction employees are not permitted to smoke inside correctional facilities or outdoors within the perimeter of a correctional facility and must not possess unauthorized smoking items within the perimeter of a correctional facility. Contractors and construction employees who are in violation of this policy will be requested to immediately cease smoking or dispose of any unauthorized smoking items and, if they persist, will be directed to leave the institution. Smoking is only permitted outside the perimeter of a correctional facility in an area to be designated by the Director.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 10 2011-05-18

15

CONTRABAND

.1

Weapons, ammunition, explosives, alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics are prohibited on Institutional Property. Discovery of Contraband on the construction site and the identification of the person(s) responsible for the Contraband shall be reported immediately to the Director. Contractors shall be vigilant with both their staff and the staff of their sub-contractors and suppliers that the discovery of Contraband may result in cancellation of the security clearance of the affected employee. Serious infractions may result in the removal of the company from the Institution for the duration of the construction. Presence of arms and ammunition in vehicles of Contractors, sub-contractors and suppliers or employees of these will result in the immediate cancellation of security clearances for the driver of the vehicle.

.2

.3

.4

16

SEARCHES

.1 .2

All vehicles and persons entering Institutional property may be subject to search. When the Director suspects, on reasonable grounds, that an employee of the Contractor is in possession of Contraband or unauthorized items, he/she may order that person to be searched. All employees entering the Institution may be subject to screening of personal effects for traces of Contraband drug residue.

.3

17 ACCESS TO AND REMOVAL FROM INSTITIUION PROPERTY

.1

Construction personnel and commercial vehicles will not be admitted to the Institution after normal working hours, unless approved by the Director.

18 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES

.1

Escorted commercial vehicles will be allowed to enter or leave the Institution through the vehicle access gate during the following hours: .1 07:00 hrs to 11:30 hrs. .2 12:30 hrs to 14:30 hrs.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 11 2011-05-18

18 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES (Cont'd)

.2

At the Sally Port, vehicles will be allowed within the Sally Port from 16:00 hrs to 24:00 hrs.
Construction vehicles shall not leave the Institution until an inmate count is completed. The Contractor shall advise the Director twenty four (24) hours in advance to the arrival on the site of heavy equipment such as concrete trucks, cranes, etc. Vehicles being loaded with soil or other debris, or any vehicle considered impossible to search, must be under continuous supervision by CSC Staff or Commissionaires working under the authority of the Director. Commercial Vehicles will only be allowed access to Institutional Property when their contents are certified by the Contractor or his/her representative as being strictly necessary to the execution of the construction project. Vehicles shall be refused access to Institutional Property if, in the opinion of the Director, they contain any article which may jeopardize the security of the Institution. Private vehicles of Construction Employees will not be allowed within the security wall or fence of medium or maximum security Institutions without the permission of the Director. With prior approval of the Director, a vehicle may be used in the morning and evening to transport a group of employees to the work site. This vehicle will not remain within the Institution the remainder of the day. With the approval of the Director, certain equipment may be permitted to remain on the construction site overnight or over the weekend. This equipment must be securely locked, with the battery removed. The Director may require that the equipment be secured with a chain and padlock to another solid object.

.3 .4

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 12 2011-05-18

19 MOVEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES ON INSTITUTIONAL PROPERTY

.1

Subject to the requirements of good security, the Director will permit the Contractor and his/her employees as much freedom of action and movement as is possible. However, notwithstanding paragraph above, the Director may: .1 Prohibit or restrict access to any part of the Institution. .2 Require that in certain areas of the Institution, either during the entire construction project or at certain intervals, Construction Employees only be allowed access when accompanied by a member of the CSC security staff. During the lunch and coffee/health breaks, all employees will remain within the construction site. Employees are not permitted to eat in the officer's lounge and dining room.

.2

.3

20 SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION

.1

Construction activities and all related movement of personnel and vehicles will be subject to surveillance and inspection by CSC security staff members to ensure that established security requirements are met. CSC staff members will ensure that an understanding of the need to carry out surveillance and inspections, as specified above, is established among Construction Employees and maintained throughout the construction project.

.2

21 STOPPAGE OF WORK

.1

The Director may request at any time that the Contractor, his/her employees, sub-contractors and their employees not enter or leave the work site immediately due to a security situation occurring within the Institution. The Contractor's site supervisor shall note the name of the staff member making the request and the time of the request and obey the order as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall advise the Departmental Representative within 24 hours of this delay to the progress of the work.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

Section 01 35 56 Page 13 2011-05-18

22 CONTACT WITH INMATES

.1

Unless specifically authorized, it is forbidden to come into contact with inmates, to talk with them, to receive objects from them or to give them objects. Any employee doing any of the above will be removed from the site and his/her security clearance revoked. It is forbidden to take pictures of inmates, of CSC staff members or of any part of the Institution other than those required as part of this Contract.

.2

23 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION PROJECT

.1

Upon completion of the construction project or, when applicable, the takeover of a facility, the Contractor shall remove all remaining construction material, tools and equipment that are not specified to remain in the Institution as part of the construction contract.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 41 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES AND CODES

.1

Perform Work in accordance with National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010, National Fire Code of Canada (NFC) 2010 and Ontario Building Code (OBC) 2006, including all amendments up to bid closing date and other codes of provincial or local application provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent requirements apply. Meet or exceed requirements of: .1 Contract documents. .2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.

.2

1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL DISCOVERY

.1

Stop work immediately and notify Departmental Representative if materials which may contain designated substances or PCB's, other than those identified in Section 01 35 29.06 are discovered in course of work.

1.3 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1

Comply with smoking restrictions.

1.4 RELICS AND ANTIQUITIES

.1

Relics and antiquities, and items of historical or scientific interest such as cornerstones and contents, commemorative plaques, inscribed tables, and similar objects found on site shall remain the property of Parks Canada. Protect such articles and request directives from Departmental Representative. Should historic objects be uncovered during excavating, stop work immediately and notify the Departmental Representative. Do not resume work until directed to by the Departmental Reperesentative. Archaeology staff from Parks Canada will monitor the project work and may require temporary stop of work to carry out site investigations.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 41 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 ACCESSIBLE DESIGN

.1

Comply with CAN/CSA-B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment, unless specified otherwise. In any case of conflict or discrepancy between the building codes and CAN/CSA-B651, the requirements of CAN/CSA-B651 shall apply.

1.6 STATISTICAL INFORMATION

.1

Provide statistical information to Departmental Representative: .1 Within ten working days after March 31 and September 30 occurring between commencement of work and final completion .2 Within ten working days after final completion. Include in statistical information: .1 Statement of total person days of labour used on site in performance of contract, including labour provided under sub-contracts. .2 Estimate of total value in dollars of material delivered to site and installed, including material provided and installed under sub-contracts. This information is required by Government of Canada solely to provide statistics that will aid in assessing socio-economic benefits of this project.

.2

.3

1.7

TAXES

.1

Pay applicable Federal, Provincial and Municipal taxes.

1.8

EXAMINATION

.1 .2

Examine existing conditions and determine conditions affecting work. Conduct concrete floor moisture testing using Calcium Chloride moisture tests. .1 Submit test results to Departmental Representative for approval prior to installing 2 any flooring. Conduct one test per 100 m of area being covered.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 41 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

.1

The abbreviations and acronyms are commonly found in the Project Manual and represent the associated organizations or terms.

1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS

.1

A: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15

AB: anchor bolt. AC: acoustic. AC PAN: acoustic panel. ACU: acoustic unit ceiling. AFF: above finished floor. AC PLAS: acoustic plaster. ACT: acoustic tile. ACR CU LVR: acrylic cube louvre. ADH: adhesive. ADJ: adjustable. A/C: air conditioner. AL: aluminum. ANOD: anodized. ARCH: architecture. ARCH BLK: architectural block.

.2

B: .1 B: base. .2 BEAST: benthic assessment of sediment. .3 BH: borehole. .4 BL: bottom layer. .5 BLK: block. .6 BLKD: bulkhead. .7 BM: beam. .8 BOT: bottom. .9 BMP: best management practice. .10 B PL: base plate. .11 BRG: bearing. .12 BRK: brick. .13 BSMT: basement. .14 BTEX: benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, and xylenes. .15 BUR: built-up roof. C: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 CAL: caliper. CANTIL: cantilever. CB: catch basin. CC: centre to centre. CCN: contemplated change notice. CDF: controlled density fill. CEC: Canadian Electical Code. CF: chair fabric. CHAN: channel.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)

.3

C:(Cont'd) .10 CHS: Canadian Hydrographic Service. .11 CJ: construction joint. .12 CL: centreline. .13 CK: cork. .14 CLG: ceiling. .15 CLR: clear. .16 COL: column. .17 CONC: concrete. .18 CONC BLK: concrete block. .19 CONC BRK: concrete brick. .20 CONT: continuous. .21 CONT J: control joint. .22 COMPL: complete. .23 CM: centimetre. .24 CPL: cement plaster. .25 CPM: critical path method. .26 CPT: carpet. .27 CPTT: carpet tile. .28 CT: ceramic tile. .29 CVT: conductive vinyl tile. .30 C/W: complete with. D: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 E: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 D: deep. DD: dutch door. DEG: degree. DF: drinking fountain. DIA: diameter. DIM: dimension. DL: dead load. DMNT: demountable. DP: dampproofing. DR: door. DRP: drapery. DWL: dowel. EA: each. ECF: engineered containment facility. EE: each end. EF: each face. EL: elevation. ELEC: electric. ELEV: elevator. EM: expanded metal. ENCL: enclosure. EQ: equal. EXH: exhaust. EXIST: existing. EXPJ: expansion joint. EXP STRUCT: exposed structure. EXT: exterior. EW: each way.

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)

.6

F: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16
G: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 H: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 I: .1 .2 .3 .4 J: .1

FC: fuel contributed. FD: floor drain. FDN: foundation. FEAT W: feature wall. FEXT: fire extinguisher. FH: fire hose. FHC: fire hose cabinet. FHR: fire hose rack. FIN: finish. FIP: federal identity program. FL: floor. FLD: field. FLUOR: fluorescent. FR: frame. FRR: fire resistance rating. FTG: footing.
GALV: galvanized steel. GBD: gypsum board. GC: General Conditions. GF: ground floor. GFCI: ground fault circuit interrupter. GL: glass or glazing. GL BLK: glass block. GPC: gypsum plaster ceiling. GPW: gypsum plaster wall. HB: hose bib. HC: hollow core. HCWD: hollow core wood door. HDW: hardware. HDWD: hardwood. HM: hollow metal. HOR: horizontal. HOR EF: horizontal each face. HP: hydro pole. HPA: Hamilton Port Authority. HRV: heat recovery ventilator. HT: height. HTR: heater. HWT: hot water tank. HYD: hydrant. ICF: insulated concrete formwork. ID: inside diameter. INS: insulation. INTLK: interlock. JT: joint.

.7

.8

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)

.11 .12

K: .1
L: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 M: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 N: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 O: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 P: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5

KPL: kick plate.
LAV: lavatory. LDG: landing. LG: long. LINO: linoleum. LL: live load. MAS: masonry. MAS FL: masonry flashing. MAX: maximum. MCL: metal cube louvre. MECH: mechanical. MET: metal. MET DK: metal deck. MET FL: metal flashing. MET GRID CLG: metal grid ceiling. MET GRTG: metal grating. MET LIN CLG: metal linear ceiling. MET T PTN: metal toilet partition. MH: maintenance hole. MIN: minimum. MLP: metal lath and plaster. MO: masonry opening. MR: marble. MT: metal threshold. MWP: membrane waterproofing. NBC: National Building Code. NF: near face. NFC: National Fire Code. NIC: not in contract. NRC: noise reduction coefficient. NRP: non removable pin. NTS: not to scale. OBC: Ontario Building Code. OC: on centre. OD: outside diameter. OPNG: opening. OPR: operator. OVHD: overhead. OWSJ: open web steel joist. P: prefinished. PAH: polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons. PARG: parging. PCC: precast concrete. PCT: porcelain ceramic tile.

.13

.14

.15

.16

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)

.16

P:(Cont'd) PED ACS FLG: pedestal access flooring. .6 PF: panel fabric. .7 .8 PL: plate. .9 PLAM: plastic laminate. .10 PLAS: plaster. .11 PLYWD: plywood. .12 PR: pair. .13 PREFAB: prefabricated. .14 PRFL: profile. .15 PT: paint. .16 PTN: partition. .17 PVC: polyvinyl cholide. Q: .1 .2 .3 R: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 S: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 QTB: quarry tile base. QTF: quarry tile floor. QTR: quarry tile roof. R: radius. RA: return air. RB: resilient base. RC: reinforced concrete. RCPT: receptacle. RD: roof drain. REINF: reinforced/reinforcing. REQD: required. REQT: requirement. RFT: rubber floor tile. RM: room. RO: rough opening. RP: radiant panel. RRS: recycled rubber sheet. RRT: recycled rubber tile. RSD: rolling steel door. RSF: rubber sheet flooring. RWL: rain water leader. SAN SEW: sanitary sewer. SCHED: schedule. SC: solid core. SCRN: screen. SCWD: solid core wood door. SD: smoke developed. SDT: static dissipative tile. SECT: section. SL: sliding. SPEC: specification. SS: stainless steel. STC: sound tranmission class. STD: standard. STL: steel. STL BM: steel beam.

.17

.18

.19

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)

.19

S:(Cont'd) .16 STL FL DK: steel floor deck. .17 STL PL: steel plate. .18 STN: stone. .19 STR: structure or structural. .20 ST SEW: storm sewer. .21 S&U: stain and urethane. .22 S&V: stain and varnish. .23 SVT: solid vinyl tile. T: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 U: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 V: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 T: top. T&B: top and bottom. TCB: turbidity control plan. TEL: telephone. TER: terrazzo. TERT: terrazzo tile. THKNS: thickness. THR: threshold. TMPD: tempered. TOPG: topping. TRANSV: transverse. TYP: typical. U: urethane. UCUT: undercut. UGRD: underground. UOS: unless otherwise specified. U/S: underside. UR: urinal. VCF: vinyl coated fabric. VCT: vinyl compositition tile. VERT: vertical. VERT B: vertical blinds. VERT EF: vertical each face. VSF: vinyl sheet flooring. VT: vinyl tile. VWC: vinyl wall covering.

.20

.21

.22

.23

W: .1 WC: water closet. .2 W-C: wall connectors. .3 WD: wood. .4 WDV: wood veneer. .5 WH: wall hydrant. .6 WHMIS: workplace hazardous materials information system. .7 WP: waterproofing. .8 WR: washroom. .9 WSIB: Workplace Safety and Insurnace Board. .10 WT: weight.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 7 2011-05-18

1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)

.23

W:(Cont'd) .11 WTP: water treatment plant.

1.3 STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS

.1

Standards writing organizations: .1 AA - Aluminum Association. .2 ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association. .3 ANSI - American National Standards Institute. .4 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating and Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. .5 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. .6 AWI/AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. .7 AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association. .8 AWWA - American Water Works Association. .9 BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. .10 CCDC - Canadian Construction Documents Committee. .11 CCMPA - Canadian Concrete Masonry Producers Association. .12 CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board. .13 CNTA - Canadian Nursery Trades Association. .14 CPCA - Canadian Painting Contractors Association. .15 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. .16 CSA - Canadian Standards Association. .17 CSC - Construction Specifications Canada. .18 CSDMA - Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association. .19 CSI - Construction Specifications Institute. .20 CSSBI - Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. .21 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. .22 DHI - Door and Hardware Insitute. .23 EEMAC - Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada. .24 ESA - Electrical Safety Authority. .25 FCC - Fire Commissioner of Canada. .26 FSC - Forest Stewardship Council. .27 GANA - Glass Association of North America. .28 HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 8 2011-05-18

1.3 STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .29 IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc. .30 ISO - International Organization for Standardization. .31 IWFA - International Window Film Association. .32 LEED - LEED Canada, Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design. .33 MPI - Master Painters Insitute. .34 NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. .35 NCPI - National Clay Pipe Institute. .36 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. .37 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. .38 OPSD - Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings. .39 OPSS - Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications. .40 PPI - Plasctics Pipe Institute. .41 SDI - Steel Door Intitute. .42 SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District. .43 TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association. .44 TIAC - Thermal Insulation Association of Canada. .45 TTMAC - Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada. .46 UL - Underwriters Laboratories. .47 ULC - Underwriters Laboratories of Canada. .48 US EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency. .49 WH - Warnock Hersey.

1.4 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES

.1

Departments, agencies and crown corporations. .1 CEAA - Canadian Environmental Assessment Agency. .2 CSC - Correctional Service Canada. .3 CRA - Canada Revenue Agency. .4 DND - Department of National Defence. .5 EC - Environment Canada. .6 FHBRO - Federal Heritage Buildings Review Office. .7 HC - Health Canada. .8 HCD - Heritage Conservation Directorate. .9 LC - Labour Canada. .10 PC - Parks Canada. .11 PWGSC - Public Works and Government Services Canada. .12 RCMP - Royal Canadian Mounted Police.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 9 2011-05-18

1.4 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .13 TBS - Treasury Board Secretariat. .14 TC - Transport Canada.

1.5 PROVINCIAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES

.1 .2 .3 .4

MOEE - Ontario Ministry of Environment and Energy. MOL - Ontario Ministry of Labour. MTO and MOT - Ontario Ministry of Transportation. TSSA - Technical Standards and Safety Authority.

1.6 INTERNATIONAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENCIES

.1 .2

DOHMH - New York City Department of Health and Mental Hygiene, USA. GSA - Government Services Administration, USA.

1.7 UNITS OF MEASURE METRIC

.1

The following abbreviations of units of measure are commonly found in the Project Manual: .1 C: Celsius. .2 cm: centimetre. .3 kg: kilogram. .4 kg/m3: kilogram per cubic metre. .5 kN: kilonewton. .6 kPa: kilopascals. .7 kw: kilowatts. .8 l/s: litre per second. .9 m: metre. .10 m3: cubic metre. .11 mg/kg: milligrams per kilogram. .12 mg/L: milligrams per litre. .13 mm: millimetres. .14 MPa: megapascal. .15 NTU: nephelometric turbidity unit. .16 ppm: parts per million. .17 ug/L: micrograms per litre. .18 ug/m3: micrograms per cubic metre.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Section 01 42 13 Page 10 2011-05-18

1.8 UNITS OF MEASURE IMPERIAL

.1

The following abbreviations of units of measure are commonly found in the Project Manual: .1 F: Fahrenheit. .2 ft: foot/feet. .3 ga: guage. .4 gpm: gallons per minute. .5 in: inches. .6 lbs: pounds. .7 NTU: nephelometric turbidity unit. .8 psi: pounds-force per square inch. .9 ppm: parts per million.

1.9

LEED TERMS

.1

Acronyms .1 CI: .2 EQ: .3 MR: .4 NC:

specific to LEED: commercial interiors. environmental quality. material and resources. new construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

QUALITY CONTROL

Section 01 45 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

INSPECTION

.1

Allow Departmental Representative access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress. Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Departmental Representative instructions, or law of Place of Work. If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work. Departmental Representative may order any part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental Representative shall pay cost of examination and replacement.

.2

.3

.4

1.2 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES

.1

Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by Departmental Representative for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work. Cost of such services will be borne by Departmental Representative. Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies. Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents. If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Departmental Representative at no cost to Departmental Representative. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

QUALITY CONTROL

Section 01 45 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3

ACCESS TO WORK

.1

Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants. Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

.2

1.4

PROCEDURES

.1

Notify appropriate agency and Departmental Representative in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made. Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in Work. Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

.2

.3

1.5

REJECTED WORK

.1

Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Departmental Representative as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents. Make good other contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly. If in opinion of Departmental Representative it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental Representative may deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

1.6

REPORTS

.1 .2

Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports to Departmental Representative. Provide inspection and test copies to subcontractor of work being inspected or tested, manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

QUALITY CONTROL

Section 01 45 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.7 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

.1 .2

Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested. The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work shall be appraised by Departmental Representative and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.8

MOCK-UPS

.1

Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups. Construct in all locations as specified in appropriate Sections and as directed by Departmental Representative. Prepare mock-ups for Departmental Representative's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in Work. Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. If requested, Departmental Representative will assist in preparing a schedule fixing dates for preparation. Reviewed and accepted mock-ups become standard of workmanship and material against which installed work will be verified. Service Chase - Accommodation Unit #5: .1 Provide field-erected mock-up of a second floor, between-cell mechanical service chase designated by Departmental Representative, using specified materials and workmanship. Include all mechanical and electrical services and fixtures. .2 Erect at location directed by Departmental Representative. .3 Purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate installation accessibility, maintenance and servicing clearances. .4 Remove mock-up after project completion. Reuse components elsewhere in project. Cells - Accommodation Unit #5: .1 Construct mock-up of two side-by-side cells in location designated by Departmental

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

.8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

QUALITY CONTROL

Section 01 45 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.8 MOCK-UPS (Cont'd)

.8

Cells - Accommodation Unit #5:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Representative using specified materials and workmanship. .2 Purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate back-to-back clearances and resulting relationships of devices to user provided furnishings, view lines and access. .3 Cell mock-up may be combined with service chase mock-up described above. .4 Remove mock-up after project completion. Reuse components elsewhere in project. Control Consoles - Accommodation Units #4 and #5: .1 Construct mock-ups of control stations in in locations designated by Departmental Representative. .2 Construct mock-ups of wood, illustrating all components to finished dimensions indicated, showing all projections and interferences. .3 Purpose of mock-ups is to demonstrate viewing lines, component location and to prove ergonomic suitability of designs. Accommodation Unit #4 Mechanical Room: .1 Construct mock-up of second floor mechanical room 'BD', 'FH', or 'KM', in location designated by Departmental Representative. .2 Use actual components or materials to simulate all components and installations, true to size and shape, showing all projections, clearances and interferences. .3 Purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate installation accessibility, maintenance and servicing clearances. .4 Remove mock-up after project completion. Reuse components elsewhere in project. CORCAN Furniture: .1 Provide full size mock-up of every type of furniture for this project, to be fabricated by CORCAN, as fabricated by CORCAN in accordance with CORCAN specifications and Architectural Drawings. For summary of in-contract furniture and appliances refer to drawings. .2 Incorporate reviewed and approved mock-up into finished work. Paint Colours: .1 Provide 2400 x 2400 mm mock-up of each paint colour in final location and in finished lighting conditions for review by Departmental Representative.

.9

.10

.11

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

QUALITY CONTROL

Section 01 45 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.8 MOCK-UPS (Cont'd)

.12

Paint Colours:(Cont'd) .2 Do mock-up using paint formulas for finished surfaces as specified in Section 09 91 00. .3 Incorporate reviewed mock-up into finished work.

1.9

MILL TESTS

.1

Submit mill test certificates as required by specification Sections.

1.10 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1

Submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building equipment systems. Submit Commissioning Documentation in accordance with Section 01 91 00. Refer to Sections of Mechanical and Electrical Divisions for definitive requirements.

.2 .3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Section 01 51 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUBMITTALS

.1

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 .2

Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.

1.3

DEWATERING

.1

Provide temporary drainage and pumping facilities to keep excavations and site free from standing water.

1.4

WATER SUPPLY

.1 .2

Provide continuous supply of potable water for construction use. Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company and pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal. Pay for utility charges at prevailing rates.

.3

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

.1

Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance, maintenance and fuel. Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted. Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to: .1 Facilitate progress of Work. .2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold. .3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces. .4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and curing of materials. .5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment. Maintain temperatures of minimum 10°C in areas where construction is in progress.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Section 01 51 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION (Cont'd)

.5

Ventilating: Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, .1 mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction. .2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. .3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons. .4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials. .5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities. .6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.
Permanent heating system of building, may not be used when available. Ensure Date of Substantial Performance and Warranties for heating system do not commence until entire system is in as near original condition as possible and is certified by Departmental Representative. Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment to: .1 Conform with applicable codes and standards. .2 Enforce safe practices. .3 Prevent abuse of services. .4 Prevent damage to finishes. .5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside. Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and protection during construction.

.6 .7

.8

.9

1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

.1

Maximum power supply of 347/600 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz is available and will be provided for construction use at no cost. Connect to existing power supply in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code. Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipment in excess of 60 amps is responsibility of Contractor.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Section 01 51 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT (Cont'd)

.3

Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination on all floors is not less than 162 lx.
Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this Contract may be used for construction requirements only with prior approval of Departmental Representative provided that guarantees are not affected. Make good damage to electrical system caused by use under this Contract. Replace lamps which have been used for more than 3 months. Do not use temporary power for space heating nor for cold weather concreting.

.4

.5

1.7 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION FACILITIES

.1

Provide and pay for temporary telephone, fax, data hook up, lines and equipment necessary for own use and use of Departmental Representative.

1.8 FIRE PROTECTION

.1

Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of Work required by insurance companies having jurisdiction and governing codes, regulations and bylaws. Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.

.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

.1

Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Section 01 51 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (Cont'd)

.3

Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

Section 01 52 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUBMITTALS

.1

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1

Prepare site plan indicating proposed location and dimensions of area to be fenced and used by Contractor, number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to fenced area and details of fence installation. Identify areas which have to be gravelled to prevent tracking of mud. Indicate use of supplemental or other staging area. Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.

.2 .3 .4 .5

1.3

SCAFFOLDING

.1

Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging, platforms and temporary stairs as required.

1.4

HOISTING

.1

Provide, operate and maintain hoists/cranes required for moving of workers, materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with subcontractors for use thereof. Hoists/cranes shall be operated by qualified operator.

.2

1.5 SITE STORAGE/LOADING

.1

Confine work and operations of employees to areas defined by Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber site and premises with products. Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

Section 01 52 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.6 CONSTRUCTION PARKING

.1

Parking will be permitted on site in a designated area outside perimeter walls, and as directed by the Director, in accordance with Section 01 35 13, provided it does not disrupt performance of Work. Provide and maintain adequate access to project site. Build and maintain temporary roads where indicated or directed by Departmental Representative and provide snow removal during period of Work. If authorized to use existing roads for access to project site, maintain such roads for duration of Contract and make good damage resulting from Contractors' use of roads. Clean construction runways and taxi areas where used by Contractor's equipment.

.2 .3

.4

.5

1.7

OFFICES

.1

Provide office heated to 22°C, lighted 750 lx and ventilated, of sufficient size to accommodate site meetings and furnished with drawing laydown table. Provide a clearly marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location. Subcontractors may provide their own offices as necessary. Direct location of these offices in coordination with Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

1.8 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE

.1

Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials. Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in a manner to cause least interference with work activities.

.2

1.9 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1

Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances. Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

Section 01 52 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.10 CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE

.1 .2

Signs and notices for safety and instruction shall be in both official languages. Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration of project, and dispose of off site on completion of project or earlier if directed by Departmental Representative.

1.11 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

.1 .2

Provide access and temporary relocated roads as necessary to maintain traffic. Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads during construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by Departmental Representative. Provide measures for protection and diversion of traffic, including provision of watch-persons and flag-persons, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment and work, and erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs Protect travelling public from damage to person and property. Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from site to interfere as little as possible with public traffic. Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit on these roads. Contractor: responsible for repair of damage to roads caused by construction operations. Construct access and haul roads necessary. Haul roads: constructed with suitable grades and widths; sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic shall be avoided. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for safe movement of traffic. Dust control: adequate to ensure safe operation at all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and hauling roads: subject to approval by Departmental Representative.

.3

.4 .5

.6

.7 .8

.9

.10 .11

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

Section 01 52 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.11 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC (Cont'd)

.12

Lighting: to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul road and work areas during night work operations.
Provide snow removal during period of Work. Remove, upon completion of work, haul roads designated by Departmental Representative.

.13 .14

1.12

CLEAN-UP

.1 .2 .3 .4

Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily. Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways. Store materials resulting from demolition activities that are salvageable. Stack stored new or salvaged material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

Section 01 56 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 .2

Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.

1.2

HOARDING

.1

Erect temporary site enclosure using modular freestanding fencing: galvanized, minimum 2.1 m high, chain link or welded steel mesh, pipe rail. Provide one lockable truck entrance gate and at least one pedestrian door as directed and conforming to applicable traffic restrictions on adjacent streets. Equip gates with locks and keys. Maintain fence in good repair. Erect temporary site enclosure, as indicated on drawings, using new 1.2 m high snow fence wired to rolled steel "T" bar fence posts spaced at 2.4 m o.c. Provide lockable gates as indicated. Maintain fence in good repair.

.2

1.3 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES

.1

Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors and roofs. Provide as required by governing authorities.

.2

1.4 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1

Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs. Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building interior work for temporary heat. Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure and snow loading.

.2

.3

1.5 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

.1

Provide dust tight screens or insulated partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

Section 01 56 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 DUST TIGHT SCREENS (Cont'd)

.2

Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.

1.6

ACCESS TO SITE

.1

Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work.

1.7 PUBLIC TRAFFIC FLOW

.1

Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, traffic signals, barricades and flares, lights, or lanterns as required to perform Work and protect the public.

1.8

FIRE ROUTES

.1

Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency response vehicles.

1.9 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

.1 .2

Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of Work. Be responsible for damage incurred.

1.10 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES

.1

Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment during performance of Work. Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings. Confirm with Departmental Representative locations and installation schedule 3 days prior to installation. Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

Section 01 56 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 61 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1 .2 .3

Within text of specifications, reference may be made to reference standards. Conform to these standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications. If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable standards, Departmental Representative reserves right to have such products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance. The cost for such testing will be born by Departmental Representative in event of conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance. Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of Bids, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted. OPSS Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications and OPSD Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings quoted in these specifications are available online at http://www.raqsa.mto.gov.on.ca/ techpubs/ops.nsf/OPSHomepage.

.4

.5

.6

1.3

QUALITY

.1

Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided. Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 61 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 QUALITY (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection. Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with Departmental Representative based upon requirements of Contract Documents. Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building. Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.

.3

.4

.5

1.4

AVAILABILITY

.1

Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable, notify Departmental Representative of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work. In event of failure to notify Departmental Representative at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Departmental Representative reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

.2

1.5 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1

Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable. Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in Work. Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 61 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION (Cont'd)

.4 .5

Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.
Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather. Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture. Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion. Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Departmental Representative's satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.

.6

.7

.8

.9

1.6

TRANSPORTATION

.1

Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.

1.7 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers. Notify Departmental Representative in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Departmental Representative may establish course of action. Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Departmental Representative to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 61 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.8 QUALITY OF WORK

.1

Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Departmental Representative if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results. Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Departmental Representative reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless. Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Departmental Representative, whose decision is final.

.2

.3

1.9

CO-ORDINATION

.1

Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision. Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.

.2

1.10

CONCEALMENT

.1

In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise. Before installation, inform Departmental Representative if there is interference. Install as directed by Departmental Representative.

.2

1.11

REMEDIAL WORK

.1

Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required. Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.

.2

1.12 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

.1

Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 61 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.12 LOCATION OF FIXTURES (Cont'd)

.2

Inform Departmental Representative of conflicting installation. Install as directed.

1.13

FASTENINGS

.1

Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise. Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials. Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected specification Section. Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable. Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly. Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.

.2 .3

.4

.5 .6

1.14 FASTENINGS EQUIPMENT

.1

Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable for service. Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use Type 304 stainless steel for exterior areas. Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts. Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 61 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.15 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

.1

Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Departmental Representative.

1.16 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1

When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work, Institution occupants and operations, and pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of capped service.

.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

Section 01 71 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Existing survey control points and property limits.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR

.1

Qualified registered land surveyor, licensed to practise in Place of Work, acceptable to Departmental Representative.

1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

.1 .2

Existing base horizontal and vertical control points are designated on drawings. Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Departmental Representative. Report to Departmental Representative when reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. Require surveyor to replace control points in accordance with original survey control.

.3 .4

.5

1.4 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation. Stake for grading, fill, topsoil placement and landscaping features. Stake slopes and berms. Establish pipe invert elevations. Stake batter boards for foundations. Establish foundation and floor elevations. Establish lines and levels for mechanical and electrical work.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

Section 01 71 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 EXISTING SERVICES

.1

Before commencing work, establish location and extent of service lines in area of Work and notify Departmental Representative of findings. Remove abandoned service lines within 2 m of structures. Cap or otherwise seal lines at cut-off points as directed by Departmental Representative.

.2

1.6 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES

.1

Location of equipment, fixtures and outlets indicated or specified are to be considered as approximate. Locate equipment, fixtures and distribution systems to provide minimum interference and maximum usable space and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for safety, access and maintenance. Inform Departmental Representative of impending installation and obtain approval for actual location. Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of various services and equipment when required by Departmental Representative.

.2

.3

.4

1.7

RECORDS

.1 .2

Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned service lines.

1.8

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Submit name and address of Surveyor to Departmental Representative. On request of Departmental Representative, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. Submit certificate signed by surveyor certifying and noting those elevations and locations of completed Work that conform and do not conform with Contract Documents.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

Section 01 71 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXECUTION

Section 01 73 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of elements of project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of separate contractor. Include in request: .1 Identification of project. .2 Location and description of affected Work. .3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration. .4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used. .5 Alternatives to cutting and patching. .6 Effect on Work of separate contractor. .7 Written permission of affected separate contractor. .8 Date and time work will be executed.

.3

1.2

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Required for original installation. Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1.3

PREPARATION

.1

Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage.

.2 .3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXECUTION

Section 01 73 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 PREPARATION (Cont'd)

.5

Provide protection from elements for areas which are to be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water.

1.4

EXECUTION

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work. Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. R.move samples of installed Work for testing Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed on masonry work without prior approval. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. Refinish assemblies by refinishing entire unit. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, full thickness of the construction element.

.7

.8

.9

.10 .11

.12

.13

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXECUTION

Section 01 73 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.4 EXECUTION (Cont'd)

.14

Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLEANING

Section 01 74 11 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1

Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by other contractors. Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Departmental Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site. Clear snow and ice from access to building, bank/pile snow in designated areas only and/or remove from site as directed by Departmental Representative. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and debris. Provide and use clearly marked separate bins for recycling. Refer to Section 01 74 20. Remove waste material and debris from site and deposit in waste container at end of each working day. Dispose of waste materials and debris off site. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.

.2

.3

.4

.5 .6 .7

.8 .9

.10

.11

.12

.13

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLEANING

Section 01 74 11 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2

FINAL CLEANING

.1

When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy. Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by other contractors. Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Departmental Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris. Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass. Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, floors and ceilings. Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces. HEPA vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens. Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer. Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation. Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces. Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, sunken wells, downspouts, and drainage systems.

.2

.3 .4 .5

.6

.7

.8

.9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLEANING

Section 01 74 11 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.2 FINAL CLEANING (Cont'd)

.16 .17

Sweep and wash clean paved areas.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment. Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and other accessible concealed spaces. Remove snow and ice from access to building.

.18 .19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

Section 01 74 20 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE

.1

Carefully source separate materials/equipment and divert, from D&C waste destined for landfill to maximum extent possible. Target for this project is 95% diversion from landfill. Reuse, recycle, compost, anaerobic digest or sell material for reuse except where indicated otherwise. On site sales are not permitted. Source separate waste and maintain waste audits in accordance with the Environmental Protection Act, Ontario Regulation 102/94 and Ontario Regulation 103/94. .1 Provide facilities for collection, handling and storage of source separated wastes. .2 Source separate the following waste: .1 Brick and portland cement concrete. .2 Corrugated cardboard. .3 Wood, not including painted or treated wood or laminated wood. .4 Gypsum board, unpainted. .5 Steel. Submit a waste reduction workplan indicating the materials and quantities of material that will be recycled and diverted from landfill. .1 Indicate how material being removed from the site will be reused, recycled, composted or anaerobically digested. Submit proof that all waste is being disposed of at a licensed land fill site or waste transfer site. A copy of the disposal/waste transfer site's license and a letter verifying that said landfill site will accept the waste must be supplied to Departmental Representative prior to removal of waste from the demolition site.

.2

.3

.4

1.2 WASTE PROCESSING SITES

.1

Province of: Ontario. .1 Ministry of Environment and Energy, 135 St. Clair Avenue West, Toronto, ON, M4V 1P5. .2 Telephone: 800-565-4923 or 416-323-4321. .3 Fax: 416-323-4682. Recycling Council of Ontario: 215 Spadina Avenue, #225, Toronto, ON, M5T 2C7. .1 Telephone: 416-657-2797 .2 Fax: 416-960-8053 .3 Email: rco@rco.on.ca.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

Section 01 74 20 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 WASTE PROCESSING SITES (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.2

Recycling Council of Ontario:(Cont'd) Internet: http://www.rco.on.ca/. .4

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CANADIAN GOVERNMENTAL DEPARTMENTS CHIEF RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

.1

Government Chief Responsibility for the Environment. Province Ontario General Inquiries Ministry of (416) Environment 323-4321 and Energy (800) 135 St Clair 565-4923 Avenue West Toronto, ON M4V 1P5 Environment (416) Canada 734-4494 Toronto, ON Address Fax (416) 323-4682

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

Section 01 77 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 INSPECTION AND DECLARATION

.1

Contractor's Inspection: Contractor and all subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of Work, identify deficiencies and defects, and repair as required to conform to Contract Documents. .1 Notify Departmental Representative in writing of satisfactory completion of Contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made. .2 Request Departmental Representative's Inspection. Departmental Representative's Inspection: Departmental Representative and Contractor will perform inspection of Work to identify obvious defects or deficiencies. Contractor to correct Work accordingly. Completion: submit written certificate that following have been performed: .1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. .2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed. .3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully operational. .4 Certificates required by Boiler Inspection Branch, Fire Commissioner, utility companies have been submitted. .5 Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Departmental Representative and Director's personnel. .6 Work is complete and ready for final inspection. Final Inspection: when items noted above are completed, request final inspection of Work by Departmental Representative and Contractor. If Work is deemed incomplete by Departmental Representative, complete outstanding items and request reinspection.

.2

.3

.4

1.2

CLEANING

.1 .2

In accordance with Section 01 74 11. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

Section 01 77 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning - General Requirements.

1.2

SUBMISSION

.1

Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Departmental Representative's comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Departmental Representative, four final copies of maintenance manuals and commissioning documentation in English and French. Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new, undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided. Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products at own expense. Pay costs of transportation.

.2 .3 .4

.5

.6 .7

.8

1.3

FORMAT

.1 .2 .3

Organize data in the form of an instructional manual. Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face pockets. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify contents of each binder on spine. Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents.

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 FORMAT (Cont'd)

.5 .6

Arrange content by systems, under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.
Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data. Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. Provide CAD files in dwg format on CD or USB drive.

.7 .8

.9

1.4 CONTENTS EACH VOLUME

.1

Table of Contents: provide title of project; .1 date of submission; names, .2 addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor with name of responsible parties; .3 schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume. For each product or system: .1 list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information. Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01 45 00. Training: Refer to Sections 01 79 00 and 01 91 00.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES

.1

In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Departmental Representative one record copy of: .1 Contract Drawings. .2 Specifications. .3 Amendments. .4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. .5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. .6 Field test records. .7 Inspection certificates. .8 Manufacturer's certificates. Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage. Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Departmental Representative. Turn one set, paper copy and electronic copy, of AS-BUILT drawings and specifications over to Departmental Representative on completion of work.

.2

.3

.4

.5 .6

1.6 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS

.1

Record information on set of black line opaque drawings, and in copy of Project Manual, provided by Departmental Representative. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording information. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.6 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS (Cont'd)

.4

Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. .2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. .3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. .4 Field changes of dimension and detail. .5 Changes made by change orders. .6 Details not on original Contract Drawings. .7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.
Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items. .2 Changes made by Amendments and change orders. Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, required by individual specifications sections.

.5

.6

1.7

FINAL SURVEY

.1

Submit final site survey certificate in accordance with Section 01 71 00, certifying that elevations and locations of completed Work are in conformance, or non-conformance with Contract Documents.

1.8 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1

Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications. Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.8 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS (Cont'd)

.4

Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 45 00 and 01 91 00. Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.

.5

.6 .7 .8 .9

.10 .11 .12

.13

.14 .15

1.9 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

.1

Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.9 MATERIALS AND FINISHES (Cont'd)

.2

Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.

.3

.4

1.10

SPARE PARTS

.1

Provide spare parts, and in quantities specified in individual specification sections or as directed by Departmental Representative. Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual. Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

.2 .3 .4

.5

1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1

Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual. Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

.2 .3 .4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

1.12

SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section. Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.

1.13 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1

Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures. Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room. Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.

.2 .3 .4 .5

1.14 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

.1 .2

Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Departmental Representative's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Certificate of Substantial Performance is determined. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Section 01 78 00 Page 8 2011-05-18

1.14 WARRANTIES AND BONDS (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.6 .7

Co-execute submittals when required.
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Section 01 79 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

DESCRIPTION

.1

Demonstrate scheduled operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Departmental Representative's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Performance. Departmental Representative will provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.

.2

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

.1

When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Institution's personnel, and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been completed. Submit training schedule of time and date for demonstration and training of each item of equipment and each system in accordance with the training plan four weeks prior to designated dates, for Departmental Representative's approval. Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration and instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Report shall give time and date of each demonstration and training, with list of persons present.

.2

.3

.4

1.3 CONDITIONS FOR DEMONSTRATIONS

.1 .2

Equipment has been inspected and put into operation. Testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed in accordance with Sections 01 91 00 and 01 91 31 and equipment and systems are fully operational. Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in demonstrations and instructions.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Section 01 79 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4

PREPARATION

.1 .2

Verify that conditions for demonstration and instructions comply with requirements. Verify that designated O&M personnel are present.

1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting,, servicing, and maintenance of each item of equipment at scheduled and/or agreed upon times, at the designated location. Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.

.2

.3 .4

1.6 TIME ALLOCATED .1 FOR INSTRUCTIONS

Ensure amount of time required for instruction of each item of equipment or system as follows: .1 Heating Plant Connection: 2 x 4 hours of instruction. .2 Cooling and Ventilation System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .3 Smoke Control System: 2 x 8 hours of instruction. .4 Control System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .5 Plumbing System: 2 x 8 hours of instruction. .6 Electrical System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .7 Fire Alarm System: 2 x 8 hours of instruction. .8 Emergency Generator System: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .9 Elevators: 2 x 16 hours of instruction. .10 Other systems as required (minimum 2 different occurrences to deal with facility's staff shifts).

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Section 01 79 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 91 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Co-operate with System Commissioning Administrator or testing agency under provisions specified in Section 01 45 00. System Commissioning Administrator: current member in good standing of AABC, NEBB, certified to perform specified services. Comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring association. Perform services under direction of supervisor qualified under certification requirements of sponsoring association.

.2

.3 .4

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards For Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air Distribution-Hydronics Systems, 2002. ASHRAE Guideline 1-2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process. ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building System. NEBB Procedural Standards for Whole Building Systems Commissioning of New Construction, 2009. ANSI/NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems, 2009.

.2 .3

.4 .5

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1

Within 15 working days of Award of Contract, submit name of System Commissioning Administrator proposed to perform services who has managerial responsibilities for coordination of all commissioning activities. Submit documentation to confirm System Commissioning Administrator compliance with quality assurance provision. Submit 3 preliminary specimen copies of each type of startup checklist, product information

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 91 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) and performance verification report forms proposed for use. Submit completed report forms within 3 days after completion of each testing to Departmental Representative for review and verification. Fifteen days prior to Substantial Performance, submit 3 copies of final reports on applicable forms for functional performance verification. Submit post-commissioning reports of testing, adjusting, and balancing postponed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other reasons beyond Contractor's control, promptly after execution of those services.

.4

.5

.6

1.4

REPORT FORMS

.1 .2

System Commissioning Administrator having managerial responsibility shall make reports. Report forms shall include: .1 Startup Checklists. .2 Product Information (PI) Report forms. .3 Performance Verification (PV) Report forms. Ensure each form bears signature of recorder, and that of supervisor of reporting organization. Submit signed form to Departmental Representative for review, approval and signature. Identify each instrument used for testing, adjusting and balancing and its latest date of calibration.

.3

.4

.5

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

.1 .2

Prepare each system for testing and balancing. Cooperate with System Commissioning Administrator or testing organization and provide access to equipment and systems. Provide personnel and operate systems at designated times, and under conditions required for proper testing, adjusting, and balancing.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 91 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd)

.4

Notify testing organization and Departmental Representative 7 days prior to time project will be ready for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Accurately record data for each step. Report to Departmental Representative any deficiencies or defects noted during performance of services. Correct deficiencies identified in accordance with Departmental Representative's written instructions.

.5 .6

.7

1.6

PREPARATION

.1 .2

Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Departmental Representative to facilitate spot checks during testing and functional performance verification. Retain possession of instruments and remove at completion of services. Verify systems installation is complete and in continuous operation. Verify lighting is turned on when lighting is included in cooling load. Verify equipment such as computers, laboratory and electronic equipment are in full operation when these equipment are included in cooling load.

.3 .4 .5 .6

1.7

EXECUTION

.1

Test equipment, balance distribution systems, and adjust devices for HVAC, and all systems, as directed and requested by Departmental Representative. Test hydronic systems, adjust and record liquid flow at each piece of equipment.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 91 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1 .2

American Water Works Association (AWWA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .2 NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Systems. .3 NFPA 20-2010, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Fire Pumps for Fire Protection. Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) .1 PWGSC - Commissioning Guidelines CP.4 -3rd edition-03. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

.3

.4

1.2

DEFINITIONS

.1

This Section describes HVAC System Commissioning. HVAC System Commissioning is to be a joint team effort to: .1 Ensure that all HVAC equipment, controls and systems function together properly and meet design intent. .2 Ensure that system performance parameters are documented for fine-tuning of control sequences and operational procedures. The commissioning process shall encompass and co-ordinate the following areas: .1 System documentation. .2 Equipment start-up and Performance Testing (Pre-Functional Testing). .3 Testing and balancing. .4 Control system calibration. .5 System start-up and Performance Testing (Functional Testing). .6 Training. .7 Deficiency Documentation and Resolution. Commissioning Team: .1 The Commissioning Team shall consist of: .1 Department's Representative. .2 Commissioning Authority. .3 Consultant, as required. .4 Contractor. .5 Mechanical, Electrical, and speciality sub-contractors, as required.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.3

Commissioning Team:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .6 Equipment suppliers, as required by Contractor. .2 The trades represented on the Commissioning Team may include sheet metal, piping and fitting, controls, and balancing, as required. .3 The lead hand for each trade who will perform or supervise the commissioning work is to be designated as a representative to the Commissioning Team.

1.3

RESPONSIBILITY

.1

Commissioning Authority. .1 Verify Pre-Functional and Functional performance of HVAC systems for compliance with design intent as specified in the appropriate Specification sections. .2 Provide the documentation with standard Pre-Functional and Functional performance reports on completion of the testing. .3 Verify submissions for HVAC system operation and maintenance manuals, as-built (record) documents, spare parts listing, special tools listing, and other items as may be specified. .4 Co-ordinate and direct training of personnel for operation and maintenance of HVAC systems and equipment. .5 Co-ordinate and direct each step of the commissioning process, and recommend acceptance or non-acceptance to the Departmental Representative. .6 Prepare, in writing, documentation of any deficiencies discovered during the commissioning process. Submit to Departmental Representative. .7 The Commissioning Authority is not responsible for: .1 Contracting methods. .2 Contracting safety. .3 Product liability/warranties. .4 Maintenance/long-term building operation. .5 System functions which have changed since commissioning. .6 Problems which arise out of recommended resolutions which are not implemented. .7 Testing the operation of each and every component (e.g. shutoff valve, breaker, etc.). .8 Normal wear and tear on equipment and systems.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 3 2011-05-18

.2

Contractor .1 Verify completeness of the building envelope, perimeter, and interior items which affect proper operation and control of HVAC equipment and systems. .2 Be responsible for appointing the commissioning team members from the sub and speciality trades. .3 Assure participation and co-operation of sub-contractors and speciality sub-contractors (mechanical, electrical, TAB, building management, etc.) under the Contractor's supervision as required for the commissioning process. .4 Be responsible for coordinating deficiency corrections. Sub-Contractors and Speciality Sub-Contractors: Ensure that sub-contractors and speciality sub-contractors: .1 Are responsible for providing labour, material, equipment, required within the scope of the respective sub-trade or speciality trade to facilitate the commissioning process. .2 Perform Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Tests as required by the commissioning process. .3 Are responsible for correcting deficiencies with regards to the labour and materials that they provided for the project. Consultant .1 Consultant to provide the Design Intent Documentation for commissioning. .2 Consultant to observe Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Testing, when deemed necessary. .3 Consultant to provide technical capabilities for resolution of deficiencies, where required.

.3

.4

1.4

GENERAL

.1

The Commissioning Process is detailed in ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 The Commissioning Process. The commissioning plan will be modified to reflect the actual construction schedule. Mechanical, Electrical and Transportation System commissioning Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Tests to begin after equipment and systems, along with related equipment, systems, structures and areas are complete.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.4 GENERAL (Cont'd)

.3

The testing and balancing agency to perform the TAB after the Pre-Functional Tests have been completed and documented.
Provide a fully functional facility and its systems: .1 Systems, equipment and components meet user's functional requirements before date of acceptance, and operate consistently at peak efficiencies and within specified energy budgets under normal loads. .2 Facility user and O&M personnel have been fully trained in aspects of installed systems. .3 Optimized life cycle costs. .4 Complete documentation relating to installed equipment and systems. Term "Cx" in this section means "Commissioning". Use this Cx Plan as master planning document for Cx: .1 Outlines organization, scheduling, allocation of resources, documentation, pertaining to implementation of Cx. .2 Communicates responsibilities of team members involved in Cx Scheduling, documentation requirements, and verification procedures. .3 Sets out deliverables relating to O&M, process and administration of Cx. .4 Describes process of verification of how built works meet design requirements. .5 Produces a complete functional system prior to issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. .6 Management tool that sets out scope, standards, roles and responsibilities, expectations, deliverables, and provides: .1 Overview of Cx. .2 General description of elements that make up Cx Plan. .3 Process and methodology for successful Cx. Acronyms: .1 Cx - Commissioning. .2 CA - Commissioning Authority. .3 BMM - Building Management Manual. .4 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems. .5 MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. .6 PI - Product Information. .7 PV - Performance Verification. .8 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. .9 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System.

.4

.5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.4 GENERAL (Cont'd)

.8

Commissioning terms used in this Section: .1 Bumping: short term start-up to prove ability to start and prove correct rotation. .2 Deferred Cx - Cx activities delayed for reasons beyond Contractor's control due to lack of occupancy, weather conditions, need for heating/cooling loads.

1.5 COMMISSIONING SCOPE MEETING

.1

After the contract award and before HVAC system construction begins, a commissioning scope meeting of all members of the Commissioning Team is to be held at a time and place designated by the Departmental Representative. The purpose of the meeting is to familiarize all parties with the requirements of the commissioning process, and to ensure that the responsibilities of each party are clearly understood. Ensure that the appropriate sub-contractors and speciality sub-contractors are in attendance.

1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1

Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Commissioning Authority for review fourteen (14) days prior to the Functional Performance Tests. Refer to Section 01 78 00 for more details.

.2

1.7 START-UP (PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST

.1

Ensure that Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for the Pre-Functional Performance Tests. These tests ensure that all equipment and systems are installed in accordance with the Specifications, Drawings and manufacturers' requirements. Ensure the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for co-ordinating schedule for Pre-Functional tests of various equipment and systems. In the Pre-Functional Test, all HVAC mechanical system and sub-system elements, including control devices, to be checked for the following: .1 Verify that each element has been properly installed, properly identified, and that all connections (including electrical) have been made correctly. .2 Verify that each element has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.7 START-UP (PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) tension, control sequence, flow direction, or other conditions which may cause damage or reduce system performance. .3 Verify that tests, meter readings, and specific mechanical/electrical performance characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. .4 Test format to be supplied, witnessed and completed by the Commissioning Authority. .5 Pre-Functional performance Tests to be completed prior to starting Functional Performance Tests. .6 Pre-Functional Performance Tests need to be performed once only, if there are no deficiencies, as determined by the Commissioning Authority. Re-testing of corrected items is the responsibility of the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors. .7 Completion of the Pre-Functional Performance Tests is the responsibility of the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors who are to sign and date each Test. .8 Notify the Commissioning Authority, in writing, at least fourteen (14) days prior to the date of Pre-Functional Performance Testing. Schedule the Pre-Functional performance tests, over a period of consecutive business days, during the appropriate seasons for the relevant HVAC component.

1.8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING (TAB)

.1

The TAB should commence immediately following the Pre-functional Testing and shall be done in accordance with the Construction Schedule. The Control sub-contractor to assist the TAB agency with equipment and/or manpower to allow their testing of dampers, actuators, and motors to be performed in a timely manner. The TAB agency to submit one (1) draft copy of the TAB report to the Commissioning Authority and provide the necessary reviews prior to the Functional Testing. The TAB agency to submit one (1) copy of the final TAB reports to the Commissioning Authority.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 7 2011-05-18

1.9 CONTROL COMMISSIONING AND CALIBRATION

.1

To be completed by the Control sub-contractor prior to the Functional Testing and in accordance with the specification.

1.10 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS

.1

The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for the Functional Performance Tests. These tests ensure that all equipment and systems operate in accordance with design intent. The tests are dynamic tests, and test the systems through all possible modes of operation. The Functional Performance Testing to be done during two separate periods - one during the cooling season and one during the heating season. The first (cooling) testing period occurs as soon after completion of installation as practical. The heating testing period occurs as soon as weather conditions make it practical to test warm-up, zone heating and economizer functions. The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for co-ordinating the Functional Performance Tests for the HVAC mechanical systems and sub-systems, the life safety systems as well as other functional systems requiring power or mechanical interface. In the Functional Performance Tests, all HVAC mechanical systems, including control systems, life safety systems and other systems requiring M&E interface shall be checked for the following: .1 Verify that each system and sub-system is operating, and complies with Contract Specifications and the Design Intent Document through the entire range of operating conditions. .2 Notify the Commissioning Authority and engineer, in writing, at least fourteen (14) day prior to date of Functional Performance Tests. Schedule each of the two seasonal Functional Performance Test periods over a period of consecutive business days. .3 Re-testing of corrected items is the responsibility of the Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors. .4 The following personnel are to be present during Functional Performance Testing: .1 The Mechanical sub-contractor and other relevant sub-contractors. .2 The Controls sub-contractor.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 8 2011-05-18

1.10 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) The Electrical sub-contractor and .3 other specialized sub-contractors or suppliers. .4 The Elevator sub-contractor. .5 Other specialized system suppliers as required. .6 The Commissioning Authority. .7 Departmental Representative (operation personnel), and consultant may be present for some or all of Functional Performance Testing. .8 Deficiencies in system, sub-system, or element performance will be brought to the attention of the Commissioning Team. Deficiencies will be resolved on a case-by-case basis.

1.11 CONTROL VERIFICATION

.1

Controls verification will be done in conjunction with the Functional Performance Testing and in accordance with the specification.

1.12

TRAINING

.1

Training for facility and administration personnel will be designed and scheduled by the Commissioning Authority. The Commissioning Authority will provide the training schedule detailing the times for the various activities and the locations of the training. This detail will also include the allotted time for video-taping, any manufacturer's literature requirements, and lesson plans for the manufacturer's representatives to follow. The Mechanical sub-contractor and their sub-contractors will ensure that required manufacturers will attend as per the agreed to schedule.

.2

.3

1.13

REPORTS

.1

Documentation, General. .1 The Commissioning Authority is responsible for recording and maintaining detailed inspection and testing data on the test documentation reports. The data record shall be comprehensive and concise.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 9 2011-05-18

1.13 REPORTS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .2 All data must be recorded as soon as possible during the course of the inspection and testing. .3 All documentation to have the date, time, and names of persons participating in the inspection and testing. .4 All test instruments to be documented for valid calibration. .5 The recording work sheets, inspection check lists, and Performance Testing plans must all be approved by the Departmental Representative and the Commissioning Authority prior to the Start of Functional Performance Testing.

.2

The Commissioning Authority to prepare and submit the following reports: .1 Interim Report. Submit after completion of first functional seasonal commissioning period. Report shall document tests performed, any modifications to tests, comparison to TAB and other agency tests, and verification of compliance with design intent for ambient conditions under which initial commissioning was performed. .2 Final Report. Submit after completion of last functional seasonal commissioning period. Report shall verify performance of HVAC equipment and systems during each seasonal commissioning process. Document any field modifications to the testing process and why these modifications were made.

1.14 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

.1

General Requirements. .1 Operating equipment and systems shall be tested in the presence of the Departmental Representative and Commissioning Authority to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. To minimize the time of Commissioning Team members, testing shall be done in four seasonal single blocks of time insofar as possible. .2 The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors to notify the Commissioning Authority, in writing, fourteen (14) days prior to tests scheduled under requirements of this Section. .3 Testing to be conducted under specified design operating conditions as recommended or approved by the Commissioning Authority and

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 10 2011-05-18

1.14 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) Departmental Representative, and outlined in the Pre-Functional and Functional Performance Tests. .4 All elements of systems shall be tested to demonstrate that total systems satisfy all requirements of these Specifications. Testing to be accomplished on hierarchical basis. Test each piece of equipment for proper operation, followed by each sub-system, followed by entire system, followed by any inter-ties of other major systems. .5 All special testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the appropriate sub-contractor, as determined by the Contractor. .6 Provide a copy of all test reports and records to the Commissioning Authority. Test Procedure and Test Documentation. .1 The Commissioning Authority will provide the Mechanical sub-contractor with Pre-Functional and Functional test procedures and test documentation reports. The Mechanical sub-contractor may propose alternate documentation and may alter the test procedures and test documentation to suit as-built conditions. However, the Mechanical sub-contractor is expected to co-operate to the level of detail and general approach of the provided test procedures and test documentation. .2 The Commissioning Authority shall verify test and air balance (TAB) readings for at least 20 percent (20%) of the supply (maximum and minimum primary air), return, and exhaust diffusers, registers and grilles. If more than one-fifth of these readings differ from the documented TAB readings by more than 15 percent, then the TAB shall be repeated in its entirety. The TAB agency shall pay the extra costs. .3 The verification testing procedures shall address all operating characteristics of all mechanical equipment and systems. Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist. .1 The Mechanical and Electrical sub-contractors are responsible for completing Pre-Functional Performance Testing. .2 Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist: .1 Perform and submit one (1) Pre-Functional Performance Test for each of the following: .1 boiler(s) .2 chiller(s) .3 cooling tower(s) .4 heating/cooling units

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 11 2011-05-18

1.14 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .5 air handling unit (s) .6 pump(s) .7 piping .8 ductwork .9 heat recovery equipment .10 rain water harvesting system .11 variable speed drives .12 transformers .13 coordination study .14 grounding testing (Megger) .15 distribution panels breakers and interrupting settings .16 fire alarm .17 preliminary electrical load balance .18 emergency generator pre-startup Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB). .1 Comply with the Specification. Functional Performance Test Checklist. .1 The Mechanical & Electrical sub-contractors shall assist the Commissioning Authority in completing and submitting Functional Performance Testing. .2 Functional Performance Test Checklist: .1 Perform one (1) Functional Performance Test for each of the above noted systems with the addition of: .1 Building Automation System (BAS). .2 Lighting controls. .3 Fire alarm. .4 Fire pump. .5 Smoke control system. .6 Automatic transfer switch(es). .7 Emergency power generator. .8 Power factor correction equipment. .9 Integrated system testing. Training. .1 General: .1 Each of the following manufacturers/suppliers to deliver training to the Departmental Reprsentative appointed staff and management who will provide operating services: .1 Boiler(s) .2 Chiller(s) .3 Cooling tower(s) .4 Heating/cooling units

.4 .5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 12 2011-05-18

1.14 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)

.6

(Cont'd) .1 General:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .5 Air handling unit(s) .6 Pump(s) .7 Heat recovery equipment .8 Rain water harvesting system .9 Variable speed drives .10 Transformers .11 Distribution panels breakers and interrupting settings .12 Preliminary electrical load balance .13 Building Automation System (BAS) .14 Lighting controls .15 Fire alarm .16 Fire pump .17 Smoke control system .18 Automatic transfer switch(es) .19 Emergency power generator .20 Power factor correction equipment .2 Each of the manufacturers required to deliver training as part of this specification to comply with training schedules, formats and structures designed and provided by the Commissioning Authority, who has the final approval on the substance, content and quality of the instruction to be delivered. .3 Submittals. .1 Manufacturer/suppliers to submit lesson plans to the Commissioning Authority two (2) weeks prior to the scheduled training session. .2 Each manufacturer/supplier to revise the lesson plan according to the direction and assistance of Commissioning Authority. .3 If requested by Commissioning Authority the revised lesson plan shall be re-submitted one (1) week prior to the scheduled training sessions. .4 Quality Assurance. .1 The Departmental Representative reserves the right to videotape each training session. .2 Each manufacturer/supplier required to deliver training shall use the following tools to facilitate learning: .1 Visual aids: use of overhead projectors, flipcharts, videos and/or slides.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 13 2011-05-18

1.14 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)

.6

(Cont'd) .1 General:(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) .2 Printed material: each participant shall receive a copy of the material to be reviewed at the commencement of each session.

.7

Deficiency Resolution for HVAC Mechanical System Commissioning. .1 If acceptable performance cannot be achieved, then the necessary corrective measures should be carried out. The consultant and/or the Mechanical sub-contractor should issue appropriate directions in this regard. .2 The allocation of cost of deficiency resolution shall be determined by the Commissioning Team, on a case-by-case basis.

1.15 DEVELOPMENT OF THE CX PLAN

.1

Cx Plan will form part of the tender documents and will continue to evolve with the evolution of the construction process. It shall be updated by the Commissioning Authority with the input of the professionals and the contractors, and to take into account: .1 Approved shop drawings and product data. .2 Approved changes to contract. .3 Contractor's project schedule. .4 Cx schedule. .5 Contractor's, sub-contractor's, suppliers' requirements. .6 Project construction team's and Cx team's requirements. Submit completed Cx Plan to Departmental Representative and obtain written approval.

.2

1.16 REFINEMENT OF CX PLAN

.1

During construction phase, revise, refine and update Cx Plan to include: .1 Changes resulting from facility program modifications. .2 Approved design and construction changes. Revise, refine and update every 6 weeks during construction phase. At each revision, indicate revision number and date. Submit each revised Cx Plan to Departmental Representative for review and obtain written approval.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 14 2011-05-18

1.16 REFINEMENT OF CX PLAN (Cont'd)

.4

Include testing parameters at full range of operating conditions and check responses of equipment and systems.

1.17 COMPOSITION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CX TE

.1

Commissioning Authority to maintain overall responsibility for project and is the main point of contact between members of commissioning team. Departmental Representative will select Cx Team consisting of following members: .1 PWGSC Design Quality Review Team: during construction, will conduct periodic site reviews to observe general progress. .2 PWGSC Quality Assurance Commissioning Manager: ensures Cx activities are carried out to ensure delivery of a fully operational project including: .1 Review of Cx documentation from operational perspective. .2 Review for performance, reliability, durability of operation, accessibility, maintainability, operational efficiency under conditions of operation. .3 Protection of health, safety and comfort of occupants and O&M personnel. .4 Monitoring of Cx activities, training, development of Cx documentation. .5 Work closely with members of Cx Team. .3 Commissioning Authority is responsible for: .1 Organizing Cx. .2 Monitoring operations Cx activities. .3 Witnessing, certifying accuracy of reported results. .4 Witnessing and certifying TAB and other tests. .5 Developing BMM. .6 Ensuring implementation of final Cx Plan. .7 Performing verification of performance of installed systems and equipment. .8 Implementation of Training Plan. .4 Construction Team: Contractor, sub-contractors, suppliers and support disciplines, are responsible for construction/installation in accordance with contract documents, including: .1 Testing. .2 TAB. .3 Performance of Cx activities.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 15 2011-05-18

1.17 COMPOSITION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CX TE (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) .4 Construction Team:(Cont'd) Delivery of training and Cx .4 documentation. .5 Assigning one person as point of contact with Departmental Representative, PWGSC Cx Manager, and consultant, and for administrative and coordination purposes. .6 Demonstrations. .7 Training. .8 Testing. .9 Preparation, submission of test reports. .5 CSC/Property Manager: represents lead role in Operation Phase and onwards and is responsible for: .1 Receiving facility. .2 Day-to-day operation and maintenance of facility.

1.18 CX PARTICIPANTS

.1

Employ the following Cx participants to verify performance of equipment and systems: .1 Installation Contractor/sub-contractor: .1 Equipment and systems except as noted. Equipment manufacturer: equipment specified to be installed and started by manufacturer. .1 To include performance verification. Specialist sub-contractor: equipment and systems supplied and installed by specialist sub-contractor. Specialist Cx agency: .1 Possessing specialist qualifications and installations providing environments essential to client's program but are outside scope or expertise of Cx specialists on this project. Departmental Representative: responsible for intrusion and access security systems. Ensure that Cx participant: .1 Could complete work within scheduled time frame. .2 Available for emergency and troubleshooting service during first year of occupancy by user for adjustments and modifications outside responsibility of O&M personnel, including: .1 Modify ventilation rates to meet changes in off-gassing.

.2

.3

.4

.5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 16 2011-05-18

1.18 CX PARTICIPANTS (Cont'd)

.6

Ensure that Cx participant:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .2 Changes to heating or cooling loads beyond scope of EMCS. .3 Changes to EMCS control strategies beyond level of training provided to O&M personnel. .4 Redistribution of electrical services. .5 Modifications of fire alarm systems. .6 Modifications to voice communications systems. Provide names of participants to Departmental Representative and details of instruments and procedures to be followed for Cx 3 months prior to starting date of Cx for review and approval.

.7

1.19

EXTENT OF CX

.1

Cx Structural and Architectural Systems: .1 Architectural and structural: .1 Accessibility and operational safety: .2 Vertical transportation systems: .1 Passenger elevators. .2 Freight elevators. .3 Dynamic, seismic structural systems. .4 Doors, windows, related hardware: .1 Automatic door operators. .2 Operable partitions. .3 Detention hardware. Commission mechanical systems and associated equipment: .1 Plumbing systems: .1 Domestic CWS and HWS. .2 Domestic water pressure booster system. .3 Regular sanitary waste systems. .4 Reclaimed water systems. .5 Sewage pumps. .6 Bilge/storm/bilge pumps. .7 Storm water systems. .8 Sump pumps. .2 HVAC and exhaust systems: .1 HVAC systems. .2 General exhaust systems. .3 Exhaust systems and related systems. .4 Laboratory fume hoods and related systems. .5 Heat recovery systems. .6 Smoke control systems installed. .7 Stair/elevator shaft pressurization systems.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 17 2011-05-18

1.19 EXTENT OF CX (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) .3 Fire and life safety systems: .1 Special fire suppression systems. .2 Fire pumps, including transfer switches and controllers. .3 Wet pipe sprinkler systems. .4 Dry pipe sprinkler systems. .5 Standpipe and hose systems. .6 Total flooding fire extinguishing systems. .7 Fire extinguishers. .8 Integrated testing of fire & life safety systems for the whole building. .4 Noise and vibration control systems for mechanical systems. .5 Seismic restraint and control measures. .6 IAQ environmental control systems: .1 Indoor conditions. .2 Indoor air quality (IAQ). .7 Environmental control systems. .8 EMCS. .9 Energy metering systems for steam, hot water, chilled water and electricity. Commission electrical systems and equipment: .1 High voltage: .1 High voltage switch gear and transformation equipment. .2 High voltage distribution systems. .2 Low voltage below 750 V: .1 Low voltage equipment. .2 Low voltage distribution systems. .3 Voice communications systems. .4 Electronic data and communications information systems. .3 Emergency power generation systems: .1 Generators. .2 Fuel systems. .3 Transfer switchgear and controllers. .4 Uninterruptible power systems. .4 Lighting systems: .1 Lighting equipment. .2 Distribution systems. .3 Emergency lighting systems, including battery packs. .4 Fire exit emergency signage. .5 Fire alarm systems, equipment: .1 Annunciators. .2 Control panels. .3 Fire alarm battery banks. .4 Devices. .5 Integrated testing of fire & life safety systems for the whole building.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 18 2011-05-18

1.19 EXTENT OF CX (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) .6 Other systems and equipment: .1 Intrusion and access security and safety systems. .2 Lightning protection systems.

1.20 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO O&M PERSPECTIVES

.1

General requirements: .1 Compile English documentation. .2 Documentation to be computer-compatible format ready for inputting for data management. Provide deliverables: .1 Warranties. .2 Project record documentation. .3 Inventory of spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials. .4 Maintenance Management System (MMS) identification system used. .5 WHMIS information. .6 MSDS data sheets. .7 Electrical Panel inventory containing detailed inventory of electrical circuitry for each panel board. Duplicate of inventory inside each panel.

.2

1.21 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO THE CX PROCESS

.1

General: Start-up, testing and Cx requirements, conditions for acceptance and specifications form part of relevant technical sections of these specifications. Definitions: .1 Cx as used in this section includes: .1 Cx of components, equipment, systems, subsystems, and integrated systems. .2 Factory inspections and performance verification tests. Provide deliverables: .1 Cx Specifications. .2 Startup, pre-Cx activities and documentation for systems, and equipment. .3 Completed installation checklists (ICL). .4 Completed product information (PI) report forms. .5 Completed performance verification (PV) report forms. .6 Results of Performance Verification Tests and Inspections. .7 Description of Cx activities and documentation.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 19 2011-05-18

1.21 DELIVERABLES RELATING TO THE CX PROCESS (Cont'd)

.3

Provide deliverables:(Cont'd) Description of Cx of integrated systems .8 and documentation. .9 Tests witnessed by PWGSC Design Quality Review Team and the Commissioning Authority. .10 Cx Reports. .11 Prescribed activities during warranty period. Departmental Representative and Commissioning Authority to witness and certify tests and reports of results provided to Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative and consultant to participate.

.4

.5

1.22 PRE-CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION

.1

Items listed in this Cx Plan include the following: .1 Pre-Start-Up inspections: by Departmental Representative and commissioning team members prior to permission to start up and rectification of deficiencies to Departmental Representative's satisfaction. .2 Departmental Representative to use approved check lists. .3 Departmental Representative will monitor all of these pre-start-up inspections. .4 Include completed documentation with Cx report. .5 Conduct pre-start-up tests: conduct pressure, static, flushing, cleaning, and "bumping" during construction as specified in technical sections. To be witnessed and certified by Departmental Representative and does not form part of Cx specifications. .6 Departmental Representative will monitor some of these inspections and tests. .7 Include completed documentation in Cx report. Pre-Cx activities - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL: .1 Exterior walls: conduct thermographic surveys to ensure appropriate level of tightness after exterior envelope has been completed. Permanent HVAC systems are able to provide appropriate negative or positive pressure, a temperature of at 20 degrees C can be maintained between inside and outside and wind speed is less than 10 kph. .2 Raised floor systems: verify freedom for air movement through-out.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 20 2011-05-18

1.22 PRE-CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) Vertical transportation: .3 Passenger and freight elevators. .1 Equipment:. .4 .1 Dock levellers. .5 Doors, windows, related hardware: .1 Automatic door operators. .2 Operable partitions. .3 Door and window hardware. Pre-Cx activities - MECHANICAL: .1 Plumbing systems: .1 "Bump" each item of equipment in its "stand-alone" mode. .2 Complete pre-start-up checks and complete relevant documentation. .3 After equipment has been started, test related systems in conjunction with control systems on a system-by-system basis. .2 HVAC equipment and systems: .1 "Bump" each item of equipment in its "stand-alone" mode. .2 At this time, complete pre-start-up checks and complete relevant documentation. .3 After equipment has been started, test related systems in conjunction with control systems on a system-by-system basis. .4 Perform TAB on systems. TAB reports to be approved by Departmental Representative. .3 EMCS: .1 EMCS trending to be available as supporting documentation for performance verification. .2 Perform point-by-point testing in parallel with start-up. .3 Carry out point-by-point verification. .4 Demonstrate performance of systems, to be witnessed by Departmental Representative prior to start of 30 day Final Acceptance Test period. .5 Perform final Cx and operational tests during demonstration period and 30 day test period. .6 Only additional testing after foregoing have been successfully completed to be "Off-Season Tests". Pre-Cx activities - LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTEGRATED TESTING.

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 21 2011-05-18

1.22 PRE-CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) Include equipment and systems identified. .1 Fire protection & alarm. .1 Duct mounted smoke detectors. .1 .2 Smoke detectors. .3 Manual pull stations + key operation. .4 Speakers + audibility. .5 Strobes. .6 Sprinklers (zones, alarms, flow & pressure). .7 Standpipe (alarms, flow & pressure). .8 Pressure & flow devices. .9 Pumps (jockey/fire/etc). .10 Pressurization fans. .11 Security door hardware. .12 Emergency power generator and components. .2 Reports of test results to be witnessed and certified by Departmental Representative before verification. Pre-Cx activities - ELECTRICAL: .1 High voltage distribution systems over 750 V. .2 Low voltage distribution systems under 750 V. .1 Requires independent testing agency to perform pre-energization and post-energization tests. .3 Emergency power generation systems .1 Transfer switches: test by simulating loss of power. Verify availability of power at equipment requiring same. .2 Uninterruptible power systems: test under full and partial load conditions. .4 Lighting systems:. .1 Lighting controls. .2 Interface with audio-visual systems. .3 Low voltage systems. .4 Emergency lighting systems: .1 Tests to include verification of lighting levels and coverage, initially by disrupting normal power. .5 Fire alarm systems: test after other safety and security systems are completed. Testing to include a complete verification in accordance with ULC requirements. Demonstrate devices and zones to Departmental Representative. .6 Other low voltage systems including: .1 Communications. .2 Data communications systems.

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 22 2011-05-18

1.22 PRE-CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION (Cont'd)

.5

Pre-Cx activities - ELECTRICAL:(Cont'd) Security, surveillance and intrusion alarm .7 systems: to include verification by Departmental Representative. .8 Lightning protection systems.

1.23

START-UP

.1 .2

Start up components, equipment and systems. Equipment manufacturer, supplier, installing specialist sub-contractor, as appropriate, to start-up, under Contractor's direction, equipment, systems. Departmental Representative to monitor all of these start-up activities. .1 Rectify start-up deficiencies to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Performance Verification (PV): .1 Approved Cx Agent to perform. .1 Repeat when necessary until results are acceptable to Departmental Representative. .2 Use procedures modified generic procedures to suit project requirements. .3 Departmental Representative to witness and certify reported results using approved PI and PV forms. .4 Departmental Representative to approve completed PV reports and provide to Departmental Representative. .5 Departmental Representative reserves right to will verify up to 30% of reported results at random. .6 Failure of randomly selected item shall result in rejection of PV report or report of system startup and testing.

.3

.4

1.24 CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION

.1

Perform Cx by specified Cx agency using procedures developed by Departmental Representative and approved by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative to monitor Cx activities. Upon satisfactory completion, Cx agency performing tests to prepare Cx Report using approved PV forms.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 23 2011-05-18

1.24 CX ACTIVITIES AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION (Cont'd)

.4

Departmental Representative to witness, certify reported results of, Cx activities and forward to Departmental Representative.
Departmental Representative reserves right to verify a percentage of reported results at no cost to contract.

.5

1.25 CX OF INTEGRATED SYSTEMS AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION

.1

Cx to be performed by specified Cx specialist, using procedures developed by Departmental Representative and approved by Departmental Representative. Tests to be witnessed by Departmental Representative and documented on approved report forms. Upon satisfactory completion, Cx specialist to prepare Cx Report, to be certified by Departmental Representative and submitted to Departmental Representative for review. Departmental Representative reserves right to verify percentage of reported results. Integrated systems to include: .1 HVAC and associated systems forming part of integrated HVAC systems. .2 Smoke control systems. .3 Stair shaft pressurization systems. .4 Indoor air quality. .5 Environmental space conditions. .6 Fire alarm systems. .7 Fire pumps and controllers. .8 Voice communications systems. .9 Emergency power generator. .10 Transfer switch and controllers. .11 Emergency lighting systems. .12 Security door hardware. Identification: .1 In later stages of Cx, before hand-over and acceptance Departmental Representative, Contractor, Property Manager and Cx Manager to co-operate to complete inventory data sheets and provide assistance to PWGSC in full implementation of MMS identification system of components, equipment, sub-systems, systems.

.2

.3

.4 .5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 24 2011-05-18

1.26

CX SCHEDULES

.1

Prepare detailed Cx Schedule and submit to Departmental Representative for review and approval same time as project Construction Schedule. Include: .1 Milestones, testing, documentation, training and Cx activities of components, equipment, subsystems, systems and integrated systems, including: .1 Design criteria, design intents. .2 Pre-TAB review: 28 days after contract award, and before construction starts. .3 Cx agents' credentials: 60 days before start of Cx. .4 Cx procedures: 3 months after award of contract. .5 Cx Report format: 3 months after contract award. .6 Discussion of heating/cooling loads for Cx: 3 months before start-up. .7 Submission of list of measurement and balancing instrumentation calibration (within 60 days of testing period) with relevant certificates: 21 days before start of Cx. .8 Notification of intention to start TAB: 21 days before start of TAB. .9 TAB: after successful start-up, correction of deficiencies and verification of normal and safe operation. .10 Notification of intention to start Cx: 14 days before start of Cx. .11 Notification of intention to start Cx of integrated systems: after Cx of related systems is completed 14 days before start of integrated system Cx. .12 Identification of deferred Cx. .13 Implementation of training plans. .14 Cx of smoke management/control systems: after Cx of related systems is completed and 7 days before proposed date of Cx these systems. .15 Cx stair/elevator shaft pressurization systems: before issuance of occupancy certificate. .16 Cx reports: immediately upon successful completion of Cx. .17 Emergency evacuation exercises: after 80% occupancy. .2 Detailed training schedule to demonstrate no conflicts with testing, completion of project and hand-over to Departmental Representative and Property Manager.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 25 2011-05-18

1.26 CX SCHEDULES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .3 Six (6) months in Cx schedule for verification of performance in all seasons and wear conditions. After approval, incorporate Cx Schedule into Construction Schedule. Departmental Representative, Contractor, Contractor's Cx agent, and consultant will monitor progress of Cx against this schedule.

.2 .3

1.27 CX SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

.1

Produce schedule of Cx activities in bar chart format to a scale that will ensure legibility. Bar chart to indicate: .1 Sequences of testing equipment and systems, interrelationship between tests, duration of tests and training periods. .2 Cx resources which will be committed to this project to ensure completion by prescribed dates. .3 Training Plan. .4 Cx Documentation Plan. Water/fire mains and related site fire hydrants: .1 Commission as soon as installation is complete, using procedures described in NFPA reference standards to provide protection for exterior envelope of new building during construction. New incoming water mains: .1 Commission when temporary heat is available. Fire and hose standpipe systems: .1 Temporary fire hose cabinets to be provided by Contractor. .2 Install and provide fire protection during construction, but to be commissioned after building has been closed in. .3 Test completed systems in accordance with NFPA 14. Wet pipe and dry pipe sprinkler systems: .1 Test completed systems in accordance with NFPA 13. Fire pumps, jockey pumps, transfer switches and controllers: .1 Test in accordance with NFPA 20.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 26 2011-05-18

1.27 CX SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)

.6

(Cont'd) Verify jockey pumps have sufficient .2 capacity to prevent repeated starts of fire pumps. Integrated fire protection systems: .1 Upon completion of individual system tests, test integrated systems to verify that components work together as designed. .2 After fire alarm connections are completed and fire pumps and jockey pumps have been commissioned, conduct flow tests of sprinkler systems. Energy meters on steam, chilled water and electrical services: .1 Commission meters after energy-consuming systems have been commissioned to permit changes to ranges and adjustments to reflect actual requirements. Plumbing systems: .1 To be filled, pressure booster pumps "bumped" in a stand-alone mode and pre-start-up inspections completed. Then proceed with flushing, cleaning and disinfection processes. .2 Test plumbing and piping systems in conjunction with related water treatment systems, control systems. Laboratory/medical gases and services: .1 Distribution systems to be pressure tested and pre-start-up inspections completed. Then proceed with flushing and cleaning processes. .2 Followed by tests to verify proper connection of outlets and appropriate piping system in accordance with relevant Canadian Standards Association codes. HVAC systems: .1 Ductwork, piping and conduit systems to be concealed and tested and certified to specified standards before being concealed. This work is specified in relevant technical sections of Division 23. .2 HVAC systems to be initially started up, "bumped" in a stand-alone mode and pre-start-up inspections completed. .3 Start after dust-producing construction procedures have been completed and areas are dust-free. .4 Start HVAC to replace temporary heating systems after Departmental Representative's written approval.

.7

.8

.9

.10

.11

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 27 2011-05-18

1.27 CX SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)

.11

HVAC systems:(Cont'd) Operate HVAC to permit TAB and ensure full .5 compliance with contract documents when weatherstripping, caulking and sealing of exterior envelope has been completed, and interior partitions and doors are installed and ceiling return plenums are in place. Clean-steam humidification systems: .1 Commission after relevant water treatment systems have been commissioned. Hydronic systems: .1 To be filled, pumps "bumped" in stand-alone mode and pre-start-up inspections completed. Then undertake cleaning and flushing processes. .2 Commission after exterior envelope has been completed and exterior has been caulked, but only after relevant water treatment systems have been commissioned. .3 Commission at same time as HVAC systems are being TAB'd. HVAC and related hydronic systems: .1 Test in conjunction with EMCS, and fire and smoke detection systems. Items which have a detrimental effect on operation and maintenance. To receive preliminary attention at this point. To be fully commissioned at same time as relevant equipment and systems. .1 Integrated systems: .1 Performance of HVAC, fire protection, EMCS and systems forming part of integrated systems to be verified after systems has been TAB'd to ensure compliance with prescribed requirements. .2 Vibration isolation and seismic control measures: .1 Test these measures at same time as connected system. .3 Equipment and systems subject to specified codes and standards or subject to approval of an authority having jurisdiction: .1 Commission equipment and systems in accordance with those requirements. .2 Where testing is required as part of a regulatory process, and where Cx procedures are fully developed, are appropriate to project, ensure tests as required by such codes are performed. Departmental Representative to witness tests as part of Quality Assurance role.

.12

.13

.14

.15

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 28 2011-05-18

1.27 CX SCHEDULE FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)

.16

EMCS: Testing and Cx to be specified in Section .1 25 01 11, which defines conditions for acceptance. .2 Point-by-point and end-to-end testing to be carried out by installation Contractor, monitored by Departmental Representative, and verified as part of system verification. .3 Demonstration of operation of systems under operating conditions and over full operating range to take place prior to 30-day test period and to be witnessed by Departmental Representative. Includes simulated opposite-season tests. EMCS programming and operation to be verified after HVAC systems have been TAB'd and to include specified 30-day test period.
Full-scale emergency evacuation tests of entire facility: .1 To be carried out during early stages of Warranty Period using procedures and protocols developed during Cx phase. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): .1 Tests to be carried out where identified. Space environmental conditions: .1 Tests to be carried out where identified. To reduce VOC concentrations to acceptable levels: .1 Flow rates of outside air into HVAC systems to be adjusted as required during Cx, after occupancy and as necessary after occupancy. Final Cx activities: .1 Upon completion of Cx to satisfaction of Departmental Representative lock control devices in their final positions, indelibly mark settings and include in TAB and PV Reports.

.17

.18 .19 .20

.21

1.28 CX SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

.1

Systems to be tested as required by codes: .1 Where testing is required as part of a regulatory process and where Cx procedures are developed and are appropriate to project, perform tests as required by such codes. .2 Departmental Representative to witness these tests as part of Quality Assurance role.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 29 2011-05-18

1.28 CX SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)

.2

Produce a schedule of Cx activities in a bar chart format to a scale that will ensure legibility. Bar chart to indicate: .1 Sequences of testing equipment and systems, interrelationship between tests, duration of tests and training periods. .2 Cx resources which will be committed to this project to ensure completion by prescribed dates. .3 Training plan. .4 Cx documentation plan.
Main distribution system: .1 Testing and Cx to be defined in construction specifications. .2 Contractor to conduct "megger" tests of feeders. .3 Cx to utilize services of an independent testing agency to perform a series of pre-energization and post-energization tests. Low voltage systems: .1 These include PA communications, low voltage lighting and data communications systems. Emergency power systems: .1 Testing and Cx of emergency generator, transfer switch and controllers to be included in construction specification. .2 Test transfer switches by simulating loss of normal power. .3 Verify power available at equipment requiring emergency power. Uninterruptible power systems: .1 Test these systems under load in accordance with procedures prescribed in construction specifications. Emergency lighting systems: .1 Perform tests by interrupting normal power. .2 Verify adequacy of coverage. Fire alarm systems: .1 Verify operation of these systems after aspects of life safety and security systems are complete. .2 Testing to be monitored by Departmental Representative and include complete verification in accordance with ULC requirements. .3 After receipt by Departmental Representative of Cx Report, Cx specialist to

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

.8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 30 2011-05-18

1.28 CX SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (Cont'd)

.8

Fire alarm systems:(Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) demonstrate devices and zones to Cx Manager and Property Manager. Lightning protection systems. Load shedding systems. Cx requirements to be included in construction specifications.

.9 .10 .11

1.29

CX REPORTS

.1

Submit reports of tests, witnessed and certified by Departmental Representative to Departmental Representative who will verify reported results. Include completed and certified PV reports in properly formatted Cx Reports. Before reports are accepted, reported results to be subject to verification by Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

1.30 ACTIVITIES DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

.1

Cx activities must be completed before issuance of Interim Certificate, it is anticipated that certain Cx activities may be necessary during Warranty Period, including: .1 Fine tuning of HVAC systems. .2 Adjustment of ventilation rates to promote good indoor air quality and reduce deleterious effects of VOCs generated by off-gassing from construction materials and furnishings. .3 Full-scale emergency evacuation exercises.

1.31

TRAINING

.1

Refer to Section 01 79 00.

1.32 FINAL SETTINGS

.1

Upon completion of Cx to satisfaction of Departmental Representative lock control devices in their final positions, indelibly mark settings marked and include in Cx Reports.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMISSIONING (CX) PLAN

Section 01 91 31 Page 31 2011-05-18

1.33 CX

PAYMENTS FOR

.1

A line item shall be provided in the progress draw breakdown identifying a suitably budget for the implementation of the Contractor's commissioning efforts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not Used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM)

Section 01 91 51 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

ACRONYMS

.1

Acronyms: .1 BMM - Building Management Manual. .2 Cx - Commissioning. .3 HVAC - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning. .4 PI - Product Information. .5 PV - Performance Verification. .6 TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. .7 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Standard letter size paper 216 mm x 279 mm. Methodology used to facilitate updating. Drawings, diagrams and schematics to be professionally developed. Electronic copy of data to be in a format accepted and approved by Departmental Representative.

1.3

APPROVALS

.1

Prior to commencement, co-ordinate requirements for preparation, submission and approval with Departmental Representative.

1.4 GENERAL INFORMATION

.1

Provide Departmental Representative the following for insertion into appropriate Part and Section of BMM: .1 Complete list of names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers of Contractor, sub-contractors that participated in delivery of project - as indicated in Section 1.2 of BMM. .2 Summary of architectural, structural, fire protection, mechanical and electrical systems installed and commissioned - as indicated in Section 1.4 of BMM. .1 Including sequence of operation as finalized after commissioning is complete as indicated in Section 2.0 of BMM. .3 Description of building operation under conditions of heightened security and emergencies as indicated in Section 2.0 of BMM.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM)

Section 01 91 51 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4 GENERAL INFORMATION (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) System, equipment and components .4 Maintenance Management System (MMS) identification - Section 2.1 of BMM. .5 Information on operation and maintenance of architectural systems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM. .6 Information on operation and maintenance of fire protection and life safety systems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM. .7 Information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM. .8 Operating and maintenance manual - Section 3.2 of BMM. .9 Final commissioning plan as actually implemented. .10 Completed commissioning checklists. .11 Commissioning test procedures employed. .12 Completed Product Information (PI) and Performance Verification (PV) report forms, approved and accepted by Departmental Representative. .13 Commissioning reports.

1.5 CONTENTS OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

.1 .2

For detailed requirements refer to Section 01 78 00. Departmental Representative to review and approve format and organization within 12 weeks of award of contract. Include original manufactures brochures and written information on products and equipment installed on this project. Record and organize for easy access and retrieval of information contained in BMM. Include completed PI report forms, data and information from other sources as required. Inventory directory relating to information on installed systems, equipment and components. Approved project shop-drawings, product and maintenance data. Manufacturer's data and recommendations relating: manufacturing process, installation, commissioning, start-up, O&M, shutdown and training materials.

.3

.4 .5 .6 .7 .8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM)

Section 01 91 51 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 CONTENTS OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (Cont'd)

.9 .10 .11

Inventory and location of spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.
Warranty information. Inspection certificates with expiration dates, which require on-going re-certification inspections. Maintenance program supporting information including: .1 Recommended maintenance procedures and schedule. .2 Information to removal and replacement of equipment including, required equipment, points of lift and means of entry and egress.

.12

1.6 LIFE SAFETY COMPLIANCE (LSC) MANUAL

.1 .2

Samples of LSC Manual will be available from Departmental Representative. Content of Manual: .1 All possible Emergency situations modes including: presence of fire and smoke, power failure, lose of water or pressure, chemical spills and refrigerant release. .2 Failure of elevators and escalators. .3 HVAC emergencies and fuel supply failures. .4 Intrusion and security breach. .5 Emergency provisions for natural disasters, bomb threats and other disruptive situations. .6 Dedicated emergency generators for high security projects, medical facilities and computer systems. .7 Emergency control procedures for fire, power and major equipment failure. .8 Emergency contacts and numbers. .9 Manual to be readily available and comprehensible to non-technical readers.

1.7 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR INSERTION INTO SUPPORTING APPENDICES

.1

Provide Departmental Representative supporting documentation relating to installed equipment and system, including: .1 General: .1 Finalized commissioning plan. .2 WHMIS information manual. .3 Approved "as-built" drawings and specifications. .4 Procedures used during commissioning. .5 Cross-Reference to specification sections.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM)

Section 01 91 51 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.7 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR INSERTION INTO SUPPORTING APPENDICES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) Architectural and structural: .2 Inspection certificates, construction .1 permits. Roof anchor log books. .2 .3 PV reports. .3 Fire prevention, suppression and protection: .1 Test reports. .2 Smoke test reports. .3 PV reports. .4 Mechanical: .1 Installation permits, inspection certificates. .2 Piping pressure test certificates. .3 Ducting leakage test reports. .4 TAB and PV reports. .5 Charts of valves and steam traps. .6 Copies of posted instructions. .5 Electrical: .1 Installation permits, inspection certificates. .2 TAB and PV reports. .3 Electrical work log book. .4 Charts and schedules. .5 Locations of cables and components. .6 Copies of posted instructions. Assist Departmental Representative with preparation of BMM.

.2

1.8

LANGUAGE

.1

English and French Language to be in separate binders.

1.9 IDENTIFICATION OF FACILITY

.1

When submitting information to Departmental Representative for incorporation into BMM, use following system for identification of documentation: .1 Facility. .2 Building. .3 Integrated systems. .4 Systems. .5 Sub-systems. .6 Components. .7 Control points for components.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL (BMM)

Section 01 91 51 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.10 PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTATION

.1

Use current technology for production of documentation. Emphasis on ease of accessibility at all times, maintain in up-to-date state, compatibility with user's requirements. Obtain Departmental Representative's approval before starting Work.

.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

NOT USED

.1

Not used.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/ Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA S350-M1980(R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures. National Fire Code of Canada (2010). Comply with National Building Code of Canada NBC 2010, Division B, Part 8, "Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition Sites", and Provincial requirements. Federal Legislation .1 Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA) 1992. .2 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA) 1999. .3 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA) 1992. .4 Occupational Health and Safety Act.

.2 .3

.4

1.3

DEFINITIONS

.1

Deconstruction: the systematic dismantling of a structure to salvage materials for reuse. What cannot be reused is considered subsequently for recycling. The ultimate objective is to recover potentially valuable resources while diverting from landfill what has traditionally been a significant portion of the waste system. Demolition: rapid destruction of with or without prior removal of hazardous substances. Recyclable be pulled out from the resulting debris. a building designated/ materials may demolition

.2

.3

Salvage: removal of structural and nonstructural components from a building during a deconstruction project for the purpose of reuse. Reuse: the use of a building material in its original form and function (i.e. without drastic

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.4

Reuse:(Cont'd) alteration by melting, shredding, pulverizing, etc.). Recycling: the use of a building material which has been processed in some way for use in a form and function which is different from its original form and function. Designated and Regulated Substances: designated substances are substances that are known for their adverse effect on human health and the environment. These include but are not limited to asbestos, lead, mercury, arsenic, silicate, coke oven emissions, acrylonitrile, benzene, ethylene oxide, isocyanates, and vinyl chloride. Regulated substances include fuels, refrigeration and fire suppression fluids, and PCBs. Hazardous Materials: dangerous substances, chemicals and goods such as biological contaminants, poisons, corrosive agents, flammable substances, ammunition, explosives, radioactive substances, or any other material that, if handled improperly, can endanger human health or well being or the environment. Alternate Disposal: disposal at other than a landfill or an incineration plant. Alternate disposal includes salvage and delivery for reuse or delivery to an authorized facility for recycling. Departmental Representative: throughout this section, the term "Departmental Representative" shall refer to the on-site representative of the Project Management body.

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9

1.4

QUALIFICATIONS

.1

Contractor shall be specialized in performing the work of this section with documented experience in similar types of deconstruction projects. Contractor shall provide a qualified and competent supervisor with previous experience in deconstruction work who shall be present at all times during the deconstruction activities and who shall direct all work. Designate a person on site who would be responsible for worker and general public safety and who will maintain project site safety procedures and requirements and in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (Cont'd)

.3

Ensure workers and subcontractors employed on the project are trained and briefed on the job to carry out work in accordance with the appropriate deconstruction techniques.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1

Conform to applicable codes and regulations for deconstruction of buildings, safety of adjacent structures, noise and dust control, removal of common and hazardous waste and disposal. Complete all deconstruction work according to the requirements of the Canadian Construction Safety Code, Provincial Labour and WSIB Workers Safety and Insurance Board Regulations and Waste Management regulations. Obtain required authorization, certificates and permits from authorities having jurisdiction. Acquire adequate insurance for potential liabilities related to material pickup from the project site, as applicable. Notify Departmental Representative and affected utility companies before starting work, and comply with their requirements. Do not close or obstruct safety exits, adjacent sidewalks, hydrants, parking or storage areas without prior approval of Departmental Representative. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials that were not previously documented. Only those resale/brokerage, storage, recycling, transfer and/or disposal facilities which comply with the provincial and municipal regulations and by-laws shall be used by the Contractor for the disposal of materials generated at the deconstruction project.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1

Salvage materials from the structure and site. Segregate unsalvageables for recycling to achieve maximum diversion of waste that otherwise would be destined for landfill disposal.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.7

SUBMITTALS

.1

Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of deconstruction work and supporting structures and underpinning. Submit plans stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada. Submit a verified list of certified/ authorized equipment dismantlers, material haulers, receivers and/or end users of salvaged materials, recycling facilities, and waste disposal facilities. Submit copies of certified weigh bills, bills of lading, used building material receipts, from authorized disposal sites and reuse and recycling facilities for all material removed from site to Departmental Representative on a weekly basis. Written authorization from Departmental Representative is required to deviate from the haulers, facilities and receiving organizations. With regards to documentation of materials removal, include but not limited to the five items listed below. This information must be submitted to Departmental Representative in a tabulated format on a weekly basis or on specific time periods specified by Departmental Representative. .1 Description of materials. .2 Time and date of removal. .3 Weight, volume, or quantity of material. .4 Breakdown of reuse, recycling and landfill percentages or quantities. .5 End destination of materials. Workers, haulers and subcontractors shall possess applicable, current licenses, Certificates of Approval, and/or permits to remove, handle, transport and dispose of materials provincially, municipally, and/ or federally categorized as designated, hazardous or otherwise regulated substances. Upon written request, submit proof of compliance to Departmental Representative within 24 hours.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Ensure work is performed in compliance with all applicable federal legislation including CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, MVSA, and all applicable provincial regulations and municipal bylaws. Document work activities and produce evidence of compliance immediately upon request by Departmental Representative and/or respective regulatory body.

.2

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS

.1

Contractor shall accept the site as it exists and will be responsible for all deconstruction work as required. Prior to start of work, arrange for a site visit together with Departmental Representative to examine existing exterior and interior site conditions and adjacent structures. Where applicable, the Contractor at his expense shall be responsible for taking pictures of any existing damage to adjacent structures and record same in writing to avoid any disputes at a later date. Where materials or conditions revealed appear to be other than those normally expected or indicated in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall immediately inform the Departmental Representative, should such variance of conditions or materials result in a contemplated change to the cost of the work. Should an alternate method of deconstruction or change of materials be appropriate, the Departmental Representative shall immediately give his decision before the work proceeds. .1 If material resembling spray or trowel applied asbestos or any other designated, or listed as hazardous substance be encountered in course of deconstruction, stop work, take preventative measures, and notify Departmental Representative immediately. Do not proceed until written instructions have been received. .2 Ensure compliance with the handling, transportation and disposal requirements of fuels, PCBs, halocarbons and other regulated substances that are likely to be encountered during removal, disassembly or dismantling of mechanical and electrical equipment. .3 Prior to dismantling and removal of equipment specified for salvage, clearly label all parts/components of mechanical to facilitate re-assembly, as applicable.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) Appropriately label and package all .4 components and parts of mechanical and electrical materials specified for salvage to prevent damage or loss. Protection: .1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walkways, paving, trees, landscaping, and/or adjacent ground grades. Provide bracing and/or shoring as required. Repair damage caused by deconstruction as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Support affected structures and, if safety of structure being deconstructed or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, take preventative measures, cease operations and immediately notify Departmental Representative. .3 Prevent debris from blocking emergency exit routes, surface drainage system, elevators, mechanical and electrical systems which must remain in operation.

.4

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

.1

Do work in accordance with Section 01 35 43.

1.11

SCHEDULING

.1

Ensure project time lines are me without compromising specified minimum rates of material salvage, recovery or diversion. Notify Departmental Representative in writing of delays.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

EQUIPMENT

.1

Employ equipment and techniques to maximize material salvage potential and segregate all recyclable materials. Equipment and heavy machinery used during course of demolition shall meet or exceed all applicable emission requirements, operate in compliance with EPA CFR 86.098-10, Emission Standards for 1998 and Later Model Year Otto-Cycle Heavy Duty Engines and Vehicles and EPA CFR 86.098-11, Emission Standards for 1998 and Later Model Year Diesel Heavy Duty Engines and Vehicles, and MVSA.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.1 EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)

.3

Leave equipment and machinery running only while in use, except where extreme cold temperatures prohibit shutting down.
Use water misting or water efficient wetting equipment/trucks/attachments for dust suppression. Demonstrate that all equipment and tools are being used in a manner which allows for the salvage of materials in best condition possible.

.4

.5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

.1

Locate and protect utility lines. Do not disrupt active or energized utilities traversing deconstruction area, designated to remain undisturbed. Post signs in visible locations and appropriate languages to alert workers, subcontractors, haulers, and public to the job site hazards, travel routes, processing and stockpiling of each material, material storage bin location and use.

.2

3.2

PROTECTION

.1

Carry out deconstruction of a designated portion of existing security fence, only after construction of the new building facilities has been completed, with all site work including new security fences. Coordinate commencement of work with Departmental Representative and Project Schedule. Notify The Departmental Representative minimum 48 hours before start of existing fence disassembly. Carry out work with minimum or no interference to public or private accesses. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. Ensure that deconstruction work does not adversely affect adjacent watercourses, groundwater and wildlife, or contribute to excess air and noise pollution. Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials such as: mineral spirits, oil, petroleum based lubricants, or toxic cleaning solutions into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers. Ensure

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.2 PROTECTION (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) proper disposal procedures are maintained throughout project. Do not pump water containing suspended materials into watercourses, storm or sanitary sewers, or onto adjacent properties. Control runoff or disposal of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authorities. Protect trees, plants and foliage on site and adjacent properties where indicated. Prevent extraneous materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures during deconstruction activities. Cover or wet down dry materials and waste to prevent blowing dust and debris. Control dust and mud tracking on all temporary roads. Stop work immediately if adjacent installations or structures appear to be in danger. Notify Departmental Representative. Do not resume work until directed by Departmental Representative. Provide, install and maintain all necessary and/or legally required railings, guards and warning signs during execution of the work to fully protect all persons from loss, damage, death or injury. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the methods, equipment and/or techniques used during the deconstruction activities do not overload or undermine any structural members or jeopardize the overall safety of the operation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to design, provide, install and maintain an adequate temporary shoring and/or bracing that may be required during the deconstruction activities. Protect existing structures, equipment and machinery which are not to be dismantled or salvaged. Protect from damage all property and site improvements in the immediate surroundings of the project area. Make good all damages to property and improvements including sidewalks, curbs, landscaped or paved areas and other finishes that may be damaged during execution of the deconstruction work.

.5

.6 .7

.8

.9

.10

.11

.12

.13

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.2 PROTECTION (Cont'd)

.14

Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage systems, exits, travel routes, mechanical and electrical systems that are to remain in operation.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to design, provide, install and maintain all necessary lighting and temporary fire protection requirements.

.15

3.3

DISASSEMBLY

.1

Materials removed from existing portion of security fence to be deconstructed are property of Contractor unless directed otherwise. The following materials removed from existing portion of security fence to be deconstructed are to be turned over to Departmental Representative and stored as directed: .1 All components of PIDS. .2 Hardware. .3 All other electrical and electronic equipment. Throughout the course of deconstruction, pay close attention to connections and material assemblies. Employ workmanship procedures which minimize damage to salvageable materials and equipment. Deconstruct in accordance with CSA S350 and all other applicable safety regulations, codes, guidelines and standards. Workers must utilize means of protection where necessary. Maintain structural integrity of structure at all times. Systematically remove all components of portion of existing security fence as indicated, including hardware and all electrical systems and equipment. Disassemble in sequence: components of PIDS and all other electrical equipment, hardware, concertina wires, wire mesh fabric, gates, rails and posts, and footings. Take all appropriate measures to ensure safety.

.2

.3

.4

.5 .6 .7

.8

.9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 10 2011-05-18

3.3 DISASSEMBLY (Cont'd)

.10

Carefully and methodically separate and segregate materials into reusable, recycleable and waste streams.
At end of each day's work, leave work in safe and stable condition. Do not backfill excavations or below grade cavities until inspected by Departmental Representative. Refer to Section 31 23 10. Completely remove all footings and concrete slab and backfill the remaining cavity with imported soils that are free of chemical and aesthetic contamination and are readily compactable to at least 98% Standard Proctor Density. Apply a layer of about 300 mm to 600 mm of screened topsoil across the backfilled area and grade to match surrounding ground contours. The topsoil must be certified as free of chemical and aesthetic contamination and must not inhibit seed germination and growth of landscaping vegetation. Apply grass seed at time periods and with varieties and densities as directed by Departmental Representative.

.11 .12

.13

.14

.15

3.4

PROCESSING

.1

Designate location for processing of materials which eliminates double handling and provides adequate space to maintain efficient material flow. Separate and stock materials in manner which ensures best possible condition of salvaged materials. Keep processing area clean, organized and free of debris. Supply separate, clearly marked disposal bins and containers for all categories of materials. Do not remove waste bins from site until inspected and approved by Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative prior to removal of any material bins from site. Separate and prepare processed materials into organized piles for proper handling and storage or transportation. Provide collection area for

.2

.3 .4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 11 2011-05-18

3.4 PROCESSING (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) materials processed, and designated for alternate disposal.

3.5 STORAGE AND STOCKPILING

.1

Store salvaged materials in designated secure areas and protect from the elements. Clearly label all stockpiles, indicating material type and quantity. Employ reasonable means necessary to protect salvaged materials from vandalism, theft, adverse weather or inadvertent damage by heavy machinery. Stockpile materials designated for off-site destinations in locations which facilitate removal from site and examination by potential end markets, and which does not impede disassembly, processing, or hauling procedures. Maximum permitted duration of material storage on site is between commencement and completion dates stipulated in the project contract documents.

.2

.3

.4

3.6 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL

.1

Load, transport salvaged material and unload at destination so that material is delivered in condition that is acceptable to the end user. Transport recyclable materials in appropriate containers and in accordance with applicable provincial/territorial and municipal requirements. Transport solid waste, contaminated materials and/or hazardous materials/waste in in accordance with TDGA and related provincial/territorial and municipal regulations and by-laws. Contaminated materials and waste must be transported by appropriately licensed/authorized haulers. Salvaged reusable materials, recyclables, waste, and contaminated or hazardous materials removed from the project site shall be transported by and delivered to appropriately licensed or authorized haulers, facilities and receiving organizations listed in waste reduction workplan. Do not deviate from haulers, facilities and receiving organizations listed in

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DECONSTRUCTION OF SECURITY FENCE

Section 02 42 92 Page 12 2011-05-18

3.6 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) waste reduction workplan without prior written authorization from Departmental Representative. Recyclable materials, solid waste, contaminated or hazardous materials removed from the site shall be disposed of at appropriately licensed or authorized facilities only in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Contractor shall provide legal evidence of appropriate disposal to the Departmental Representative. Individuals or organizations receiving salvaged reusable materials must for ever indemnify the Departmental Representative from all claims arising from handling, transportation, and use of the materials. Contractor is responsible to obtain such legal indemnification to the Departmental Representative's satisfaction.

.5

.6

3.7 CLEANING AND RESTORATION

.1 .2 .3

Keep site clean and organized throughout deconstruction activities. Upon completion of project, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean. Fires and burning of waste or materials is not permitted on-site and is strongly discouraged off-site. Do not bury material on-site unless the activity is authorized by the Departmental Representative in writing and the material is processed for use as fill and meets all applicable regulations and codes. Upon completion of project, reinstate all areas, parking surfaces, walkways, light standards, and other adjacent areas or structures affected by Work to condition which existed prior to commencement of Work or better, and /or to match condition of adjacent, undisturbed areas, as directed by Departmental Representative.

.4

.5

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

Section 02 81 01 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA 1999). .1 Export and Import of Hazardous Waste Regulations (SOR/2002-300). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). National Fire Code of Canada 2010. Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDG Act) 1999, (c.34). Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations (T-19.01-SOR/2003-400).

.2

.3 .4 .5

1.2

DEFINITIONS

.1

Dangerous Goods: product, substance, or organism that is specifically listed or meets hazard criteria established in Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations. Hazardous Material: product, substance, or organism that is used for its original purpose; and that is either dangerous goods or a material that may cause adverse impact to environment or adversely affect health of persons, animals, or plant life when released into the environment. Hazardous Waste: any hazardous material that is no longer used for its original purpose and that is intended for recycling, treatment or disposal. Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS): Canada-wide system designed to give employers and workers information about hazardous materials used in workplace. Under WHMIS, information on hazardous materials is provided on container labels, material safety data sheets (MSDS), and worker education programs. WHMIS is put into effect by combination of federal and provincial laws.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

Section 02 81 01 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit to Departmental Representative current Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous material required prior to bringing hazardous material on site. .2 Submit hazardous materials management plan to Departmental Representative that identifies hazardous materials, their use, their location, personal protective equipment requirements, and disposal arrangements.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1

Co-ordinate storage of hazardous materials with Departmental Representative and abide by internal requirements for labelling and storage of materials and wastes. Store and handle hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with applicable federal and provincial laws, regulations, codes, and guidelines. Store and handle flammable and combustible materials in accordance with current National Fire Code of Canada requirements. Keep no more than 45 litres of flammable and combustible liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naphtha for ready use. .1 Store flammable and combustible liquids in approved safety cans bearing the Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada or Factory Mutual seal of approval. .2 Storage of quantities of flammable and combustible liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposes requires the written approval of the Departmental Representative. Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids is prohibited within buildings. Do not transfer of flammable and combustible liquids in vicinity of open flames or heat-producing devices. Do not use flammable liquids having flash point below 38 degrees C, such as naphtha or gasoline as solvents or cleaning agents.

.2

.3

.4

.5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

Section 02 81 01 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (Cont'd)

.8

Store flammable and combustible waste liquids for disposal in approved containers located in safe, ventilated area. Keep quantities to minimum.
Observe smoking regulations, smoking is prohibited in areas where hazardous materials are stored, used, or handled. Storage requirements for quantities of hazardous materials and wastes in excess of 5 kg for solids, and 5 litres for liquids: .1 Store hazardous materials and wastes in closed and sealed containers. .2 Label containers of hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with WHMIS. .3 Store hazardous materials and wastes in containers compatible with that material or waste. .4 Segregate incompatible materials and wastes. .5 Ensure that different hazardous materials or hazardous wastes are not mixed. .6 Store hazardous materials and wastes in secure storage area with controlled access. .7 Maintain clear egress from storage area. .8 Store hazardous materials and wastes in location that will prevent them from spilling into environment. .9 Have appropriate emergency spill response equipment available near storage area, including personal protective equipment. .10 Maintain inventory of hazardous materials and wastes, including product name, quantity, and date when storage began. Ensure personnel have been trained in accordance with Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) requirements. Report spills or accidents immediately to Departmental Representative. Submit a written spill report to Departmental Representative within 24 hours of incident.

.9

.10

.11

.12

1.5

TRANSPORTATION

.1

Transport hazardous materials and wastes in accordance with federal Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations, and applicable provincial regulations.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

Section 02 81 01 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.5 TRANSPORTATION (Cont'd)

.2

If exporting hazardous waste to another country, ensure compliance with federal Export and Import of Hazardous Waste Regulations.
If hazardous waste is generated on site: .1 Co-ordinate transportation and disposal with Departmental Representative. .2 Ensure compliance with applicable federal, provincial and municipal laws and regulations for generators of hazardous waste. .3 Use licensed carrier authorized by provincial authorities to accept subject material. .4 Prior to shipping material obtain written notice from intended hazardous waste treatment or disposal facility that it will accept material and that it is licensed to accept this material. .5 Label containers with legible, visible safety marks as prescribed by federal and provincial regulations. .6 Ensure that trained personnel handle, offer for transport, or transport dangerous goods. .7 Provide photocopy of shipping documents and waste manifests to Departmental Representative. .8 Track receipt of completed manifest from consignee after shipping dangerous goods. Provide a photocopy of completed manifest to Departmental Representative. .9 Report discharge, emission, or escape of hazardous materials immediately to Departmental Representative and appropriate provincial authority. Take reasonable measures to control release.

.3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Only bring on site quantity of hazardous materials required to perform work. Maintain MSDS in proximity to where materials are being used. Communicate this location to personnel who may have contact with hazardous materials.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

Section 02 81 01 Page 5 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

DISPOSAL

.1

Dispose of hazardous waste materials in accordance with applicable federal and provincial acts, regulations, and guidelines. Recycle hazardous wastes for which there is approved, cost effective recycling process available. Send hazardous wastes to authorized hazardous waste disposal or treatment facilities. Burning, diluting, or mixing hazardous wastes for purpose of disposal is prohibited. Disposal of hazardous materials in waterways, storm or sanitary sewers, or in municipal solid waste landfills is prohibited. Dispose of hazardous wastes in timely fashion in accordance with applicable provincial regulations. Minimize generation of hazardous waste to maximum extent practicable. Take necessary precautions to avoid mixing clean and contaminated wastes. Identify and evaluate recycling and reclamation options as alternatives to land disposal, such as: .1 Hazardous wastes recycled in manner constituting disposal. .2 Hazardous waste burned for energy recovery. .3 Lead-acid battery recycling. .4 Hazardous wastes with economically recoverable precious metals.

.2

.3 .4 .5

.6

.7

.8

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (24th Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No. 1-06, Overhead Systems. .3 CAN3-C235-83(R2006), Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to 50,000 V. .4 Do underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.7-06, Underground Systems, except where specified otherwise. Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMAC 2Y-1-1958, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear. Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). The Ontario Electrical Safety Code 2009, and all bulletins (Ontario). Hydro requirements and local applicable codes and regulations.

.2

.3

.4 .5

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2

Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235. Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard. .1 Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment. Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates for control items in English.

.3

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 47 15 and Section 02 61 33.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.3

Submit for review single line electrical diagrams in glazed frames and locate in electrical rooms. .1 Electrical distribution system in main electrical room. .2 Colour Code single line electrical diagrams as follows: .1 Normal Power - Black. .2 Essential Power - Red. .3 Kirk key interlocks - Blue. Provide fire alarm riser diagram, plan and zoning of building in glazed frame under plexiglass at fire alarm control panels to all buildings and an active graphic annunciator depicting buildings, walls, towers, at the main entrance to the Institution at Building A-1. Active Graphic: 750 x 750 mm minimum size. Passive Graphic: 450 x 450 mm minimum size. Shop drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario within 3 weeks of Award of Contract. .2 Submit 3 copies of 600 x 600 mm minimum size drawings and product data to inspection authorities. .3 If changes are required, notify Departmental Representative of these changes before they are made. Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Provide CSA certified equipment and material. .2 Where CSA certified equipment and material is not available, submit such equipment and material to inspection authorities for special approval before delivery to site. .3 Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation. .4 Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract. Pay associated fees. Departmental Representative will provide drawings and specifications required by Electrical Inspection Department and Supply Authority at no cost. .5 Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in PART 3 - Load Balance. .6 Submit certificate of acceptance from Electrical Inspection Department authority having

.4

.5 .6 .7

.8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.3 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.8

Quality Control:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) jurisdiction upon completion of Work to Departmental Representative.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 .2

Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians who hold valid Master Electrical Contractor license or apprentices as per the conditions of Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification. .1 Employees registered in provincial apprentices program: permitted, under direct supervision of qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks. .2 Permitted activities: determined based on training level attained and demonstration of ability to perform specific duties. Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.

.3

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Material Delivery Schedule: provide Departmental Representative with schedule within 2 weeks after award of Contract. Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.2

1.6

SYSTEM STARTUP

.1

Instruct Departmental Representative and operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems, system equipment and components. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with aspects of its care and operation.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS

.1

Materials and products in accordance with Section 01 47 15.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

.1 .2

Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified material and equipment is not available, obtain special approval from inspection authorities before delivery to site and submit such approval as described in PART 1 - Submittals. Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

.3

2.3 ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

.1

Control wiring and conduit: in accordance with Section 26 29 03 except for conduit, wiring and connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in mechanical sections and as shown on mechanical drawings.

2.4

WARNING SIGNS

.1

Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of inspection authorities and Departmental Representative. Decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.

.2

2.5 WIRING TERMINATIONS

.1

Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1

Identify electrical equipment with nameplates as follows: .1 Nameplates: lamicoid 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, black face, white core, lettering accurately aligned and engraved into core mechanically attached with self tapping screws. .2 Lamicoid 3mm thick plastic engraving sheet red face, white core, mechanically attached with self tapping screws for essential (Emergency) power.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION (Cont'd) (Cont'd) Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7

.1

(Cont'd) Sizes as follows: .3 1 line 1 line 2 lines 1 line 2 lines 1 line 2 lines 3 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 3 mm high letters 8 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 12 mm high letters 6 mm high letters

10 x 50 mm 12 x 70 mm 12 x 70 mm 20 x 90 mm 20 x 90 mm 25 x 100 mm 25 x 100 mm .2 .3 .4

Wording on nameplates to be approved by Departmental Representative prior to manufacture. Allow for minimum of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate. Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics. Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage. Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage. Transformers: indicate capacity, primary and secondary voltages.

.5 .6 .7

2.7 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

.1

Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, numbered, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout. Colour coding: to CSA-C22.1. Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

.2 .3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.8 CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

.1 .2 .3

Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables. Code by prepainting couplings, connectors and boxes. Colours: Service Colour up to 250 V yellow up to 600 V brown Telephone/lan green Public address/Intercom purple Cable television (CATV) white Closed Circuit television (CCTV) orange Fire Alarm red Fixed point alarm (Cell Call) blue Door Control black

2.9

FINISHES

.1

Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel. .1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green". .2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray to EEMAC 2Y-1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Do complete installation in accordance with CSA-C22.1 except where specified otherwise. Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.3 No.1 except where specified otherwise.

3.2 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

.1

Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible after equipment is installed.

3.3 CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION

.1

Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete. .1 Sleeves through concrete: plastic, sized for free passage of conduit, and protruding 50 mm.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.3 CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.2 .3

If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors, remove before conduit installation. Install cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded or plastered over, neatly and close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum.

3.4 LOCATION OF OUTLETS

.1 .2

Locate outlets in accordance with Section 26 05 32. Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes. Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm, and information is given before installation. Locate light switches on latch side of doors. .1 Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch side of floor.

.3

.4

3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

.1

Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise. If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation. Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise. .1 Local switches: 1400 mm. .2 Wall receptacles: .1 General: 300 mm. .2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm. .3 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175 mm. .4 In mechanical rooms: 1400 mm. .3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated. .4 Telephone and interphone outlets: 300 mm. .5 Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1500 mm. .6 Fire alarm stations: 1400 mm. .7 Fire alarm bells/strobes: 2100 mm. .8 Television outlets: 300 mm. .9 Door bell pushbuttons: 1500 mm. .10 Manual starters: 1500 mm.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) .11 Isolating switches: 1500 mm. .12 Cell Call: 1400 mm. .13 Cell Call cancellation: 1400 mm.

3.6 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

.1

Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and settings.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Load Balance: .1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes. .2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment. .3 Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 - Submittals: phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test. Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00: .1 Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing. .2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels. .3 Lighting and its control. .4 Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable. .5 Systems: fire alarm system, communications. .6 Insulation resistance testing: .1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument. .2 Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument. .3 Check resistance to ground before energizing. Carry out tests in presence of Departmental Representative. Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd)

.5

Manufacturer's Field Services: Obtain written report from manufacturer .1 verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. .2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE. Verification requirements in accordance with Section 01 47 17 include: .1 Materials and resources. .2 Storage and collection of recyclables. .3 Construction waste management. .4 Resource reuse. .5 Recycled content. .6 Local/regional materials. .7 Certified wood. .8 Low-emitting materials.

.6

3.8

CLEANING

.1

Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint. Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting. At time of final cleaning, clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces that have been exposed to construction dust and dirt. Remove construction materials from wiring devices, coverplates, outlets, cabinets, enclosures, tubs, etc.

.2 .3

.4

3.9

FIREPROOFING

.1

Where cables or conduits pass through floors and fire rated walls proper firestopping for the specific construction shall be used. Refer to Section 07840.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 10 2011-05-18

3.10

POWER SHUTDOWN .1

Power shutdown shall be kept to a minimum. Schedule shutdowns well in advance with Engineer stating time(s) and duration(s). Maintain all electrical services to the occupied areas of the buildings. Power shutdowns will be allowed during normal working hours and has to be approved by the institution. Shutdowns to be 4 hours maximum. Provide temporary services, equipment and wiring as necessary to maintain continuity of services throughout, during construction of this project. Ensure all services, ie. security, fire alarm, telephone, lan, normal and essential power, etc. remain operational during construction.

.2

.3

3.11

REMOVALS

.1 .2

Remove existing electrical equipment, wiring, conduit and other devices. Where existing walls and partitions are to be removed, remove existing outlets, devices and wiring located therein and make safe. Remove existing equipment, devices and outlets as necessary. Relocate or reinstall these items as indicated and as required. Co-ordinate with applicable trades. Maintain continuity of power, lighting, fire alarm and communication circuits as required. Turn over all removed material to the Engineer as described. Remove all existing redundant wiring associated with all devices. Co-ordinate and arrange for telephone company to remove redundant telephone cables. Any material the engineer does not want shall be removed from the site by this contractor.

.3 .4 .5

.6

3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1

Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01780. Include in operation and maintenance data: .1 Details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification,

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 11 2011-05-18

3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) extension and expansion of any portion or feature of installation. .2 Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations, exploded views, technical descriptions of items, and parts lists. Advertising or sales literature not acceptable. .3 Wiring and schematic diagrams and performance curves. .4 Names and addresses of local suppliers for items included in maintenance manuals. .5 Copy of reviewed shop drawings. Provide two distinct manuals, one for operational personnel and one for maintenance personnel. Provide a simplified operation instruction sheet for each system. (ie. fire alarm, door control, intercom, public address, CCTV, CATV, Telephone/Lan, etc.).

.3

3.13

TRIAL USAGE

.1

Power supply, distribution system and equipment may be put into service for trial usage provided such use will not damage equipment or void guarantees. Engineer may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Provide labour and equipment required for testing.

.2 .3

3.14 AS-BUILT RECORDS

.1

As work progresses, maintain accurate records to show deviations from contract drawings. The Engineer will provide a set of clean white prints for this purpose.

3.15 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

.1

Provide information for a computerized maintenance schedule indicating regular maintenance checks, procedures and results for insertion into a computerized maintenance program at the institution by institution personnel.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL

Section 26 05 00 Page 12 2011-05-18

3.15 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd)

Manufacturer: Voltage: Phase: Model: Serial No.: Etc.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 26 05 29 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2 .3

Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Engineer. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

.4 .5

1.2

RESTRICTIONS

.1

Explosive driven fasteners shall not be used except by specific approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS PART 3 - EXECUTION

.1

U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted or suspended.

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Secure equipment to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with epoxy anchors. Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts. Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with expandable inserts. Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before installation.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Section 26 05 29 Page 2 2011-05-18

3.1 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.5

Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members. Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps. .1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller. .2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm. .3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work. Suspended support systems. .1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia threaded rods and spring clips. .2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical. For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 1.5 m on centre spacing. Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs. Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support. Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables. Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Departmental Representative. Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations. Provide channels for mounting of conduit, wiring and devices on walls of tunnels, mechanical rooms and attics. Provide spacers to prevent direct contact between 'U' channels and concrete. File rough edges of cut 'U' channels and paint with galvanized paint. END

.6

.7

.8 .9

.10

.11 .12

.13

.14

.15 .16

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS

Section 26 05 31 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 21st Edition.

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.

.3

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1

Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

2.1 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

.1 .2 .3 .4

Construction: welded steel enclosure. Covers Flush Mounted: 25 mm minimum extension all around. Covers Surface Mounted: screw-on flat covers. Cast junction and pull boxes in tunnels and attics.

2.2

CABINETS

.1 .2

Construction: welded sheet steel hinged door, latch and catch. Type E Empty: flush overlapping sides mounting as indicated.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS

Section 26 05 31 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.2 CABINETS (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION

.3

Type T Terminal: flush overlapping sides mounting as indicated containing 19 mm G1S plywood backboard.

3.1 JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations. Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor except where indicated otherwise. Install terminal block as indicated in Type T cabinets. Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install additional pull boxes soas not to exceed 30 m of conduit run between pull boxes.

3.2

IDENTIFICATION

.1 .2

Equipment Identification: to Section 26 05 00. Identification Labels: size 2 indicating system name voltage and phase.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS

Section 26 05 32 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 21st Edition.

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit samples for floor box in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 .2

Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 0.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1. 102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required. Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped. Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices. Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.

2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES

.1 .2

One-piece electro-galvanized construction. Single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS

Section 26 05 32 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES (Cont'd)

.3

Utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48 mm. 102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets. Extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished plaster or tile walls.

.4 .5

2.3

MASONRY BOXES

.1

Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls.

2.4

CONCRETE BOXES

.1

Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required.

2.5

FLOOR BOXES

.1

Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing rings to suit floor finish with brass faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate short or long ear duplex or single receptacles. Minimum depth: 73 mm for receptacles and communication outlets. Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes with openings drilled and tapped for 16, 21 and 27 mm conduit. Minimum size: 73 mm deep.

.2

2.6

CONDUIT BOXES

.1

Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of devices in mechanical rooms and attics.

2.7 FITTINGS GENERAL

.1 .2 .3 .4

Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats. Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris. Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits. Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS

Section 26 05 32 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work. For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening. Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Do not install reducing washers. Vacuum clean interior of outlet boxes before installation of wiring devices. Identify systems for outlet boxes as required.

.3

.4

.5 .6

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS

Section 26 05 34 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18-98(R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware, A National Standard of Canada. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 18.1-04, Metallic Outlet Boxes. .3 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 18.2-06, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes. .4 CSA C22.2 No. 45-M1981(R2008), Rigid Metal Conduit. .5 CSA C22.2 No. 56-04, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. .6 CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2008), Electrical Metallic Tubing. .7 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-06, Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets. .1 Submit cable manufacturing data. Quality assurance submittals: .1 Test reports: submit certified test reports. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .3 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

.3

1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2 .3

Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS

Section 26 05 34 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

CONDUITS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, hot dipped galvanized steel threaded. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with expanded ends. Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2. Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, aluminum liquid-tight flexible metal.

2.2 CONDUIT FASTENINGS

.1

One hole NPS 2 50 .1 Two than NPS

steel straps to secure surface conduits mm and smaller. hole steel straps for conduits larger 2 50 mm.

.2 .3 .4

Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work. Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 1.2 m on centre. Threaded rods, 6 mm diameter, to support suspended channels.

2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS

.1

Fittings: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit. Ensure factory "ells" where 90 degrees bends for NPS 1 27 mm and larger conduits. Watertight connectors and couplings for EMT. .1 Set-screws are not acceptable.

.2 .3

2.4

FISH CORD

.1

Polypropylene.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS

Section 26 05 34 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1

Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass. Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in unfinished areas such as attics. Use rigid hot dipped galvanized steel threaded conduit for surface mounting in inmate areas. Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) in electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, areas not accessible to inmates and inaccessible ceilings.

.2

.3 .4

.5 .6

Use rigid pvc conduit underground. Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas, transformers, connection to recessed incandescent fixtures and connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp, wet or corrosive locations. Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: NPS 3/4 21 mm. Bend conduit cold: .1 Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter. Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21 mm diameter. Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight. Install fish cord in empty conduits.

.7

.8 .9

.10 .11 .12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS

Section 26 05 34 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.2 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.13

Run 2-NPS 1 27 mm spare conduits up to accessible ceiling space and 2-NPS 1 25 mm spare conduits down to accessible ceiling space from each flush panel. .1 Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab, terminate each conduit in surface type box. Remove and replace blocked conduit sections. .1 Do not use liquids to clean out conduits. Dry conduits out before installing wire.

.14 .15

3.3 SURFACE CONDUITS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance. Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel. Group conduits wherever possible on surface channels. Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated. Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm at crossovers.

3.4 CONCEALED CONDUITS

.1 .2 .3

Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls. Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.

3.5 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

.1 .2 .3

Locate to suit reinforcing steel. .1 Install in centre one third of slab. Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete. Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS

Section 26 05 34 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.5 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (Cont'd)

.4

Provide oversized sleeve for conduits passing through waterproof membrane, before membrane is installed. .1 Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit. Conduits in slabs: minimum slab thickness 4 times conduit diameter. Encase conduits completely in concrete with minimum 27 mm concrete cover. Organize conduits in slab to minimize cross-overs.

.5 .6 .7

3.6 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE SLABS ON GRADE

.1

Run conduits NPS 1 27 mm and larger below slab and encase in 75 mm concrete envelope. .1 Provide 50 mm of sand over concrete envelope below floor slab.

3.7 CONDUITS UNDERGROUND

.1 .2

Slope conduits to provide drainage. Waterproof joints (pvc excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.8

CLEANING

.1 .2

Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS

Sect 26 05 43.01 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1 .2

Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International) Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)

1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2 .3

Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Unused sealant material must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of preservative treated wood through incineration. Do not dispose of preservative treated wood with other materials destined for recycling or reuse. Dispose of treated wood, end pieces, wood scraps and sawdust at sanitary landfill approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

.4

.5

.6 .7 .8

.9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS

Sect 26 05 43.01 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE PROTECTION

.1

38 x 140 mm planks pressure treated with clear wood preservative (not creosote), or copper napthenate or 5% pentachlorophenol solution, water repellent preservative.

2.2

MARKERS

.1

Provide yellow warning tape full length of trench. Refer to details for number required for different services. Tape to read "DANGER ELECTRICAL CABLES".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DIRECT BURIAL OF CABLES

.1

After sand bed specified in Section 31 23 33.01, is in place, lay cables maintaining 75 mm clearance from each side of trench to nearest cable. Do not pull cable into trench. Provide offsets for thermal action and minor earth movements. Offset cables 150 mm for each 60 m run, maintaining minimum cable separation and bending radius requirements. Underground cable splices not acceptable. Minimum permitted radius at cable bends for rubber, plastic or lead covered cables, 8 times diameter of cable; for metallic armoured cables, 12 times diameter of cables or in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cable separation: .1 Maintain 75 mm minimum separation between cables of different circuits. .2 Maintain 300 mm horizontal separation between low and high voltage cables. .3 When low voltage cables cross high voltage cables maintain 300 mm vertical separation with low voltage cables in upper position. .4 At crossover, maintain 75 mm minimum vertical separation between low voltage cables and 150 mm between high voltage cables. .5 Maintain 300 mm minimum lateral and vertical separation for fire alarm and control cables when

.2

.3 .4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS

Sect 26 05 43.01 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.1 DIRECT BURIAL OF CABLES (Cont'd)

.5

Cable separation:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) crossing other cables, with fire alarm and control cables in upper position. .6 Install treated planks on lower cables 0.6 m in each direction at crossings. After sand protective cover specified in Section 31 23 33.01, is in place, install continuous row of overlapping 38 x 140 mm pressure treated planks interlocking cable blocks as indicated to cover length of run.

.6

3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION IN DUCTS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Install cables as indicated in ducts. .1 Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts. Install multiple cables in duct simultaneously. Use CSA approved lubricants of type compatible with cable jacket to reduce pulling tension. To facilitate matching of colour coded multiconductor control cables reel off in same direction during installation. Before pulling cable into ducts and until cables are properly terminated, seal ends of lead covered cables with wiping solder; seal ends of non-leaded cables with moisture seal tape. After installation of cables, seal duct ends with duct sealing compound.

.5

.6

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 .2 .3 .4

Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Perform tests using qualified personnel. Provide necessary instruments and equipment. Check phase rotation and identify each phase conductor of each feeder. Check each feeder for continuity, short circuits and grounds. Ensure resistance to ground of circuits is not less than 50 megohms. Pre-acceptance tests. .1 After installing cable but before splicing and terminating, perform insulation resistance test with 1000 V megger on each phase conductor.

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS

Sect 26 05 43.01 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) Check insulation resistance after each .2 splice and/or termination to ensure that cable system is ready for acceptance testing. Acceptance Tests .1 Ensure that terminations and accessory equipment are disconnected. .2 Ground shields, ground wires, metallic armour and conductors not under test. .3 High Potential (Hipot) Testing. .1 Conduct hipot testing at 100% of original factory test voltage in accordance with manufacturer's ICEA recommendations. Provide Departmental Representative with list of test results showing location at which each test was made, circuit tested and result of each test. Remove and replace entire length of cable if cable fails to meet any of test criteria.

.6

.7

.8

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Section 27 05 28 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1

Empty telecommunications raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, terminal distribution cabinets, conduits, cabletroughs, pull boxes, sleeves and caps, fish wires, service poles, service fittings, concrete encased ducts. Overhead Cabletrough distribution system.

.2

1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2 .3

Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal, conduit and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

.4

.5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIAL

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Conduits: EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34. Underground cable ducts: PVC type, in accordance with Section 33 65 76. Cabletroughs: wire basket type, in accordance with Section 26 05 36. Junction boxes, cabinets type E and T: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Outlet boxes, conduit boxes, and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Fish wire: polypropylene type.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

Section 27 05 28 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1

Install empty raceway system, including distribution system, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, cabletroughs, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH GRADING

Section 31 22 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3

Section 01 29 83 - Payment Procedures: Testing Laboratory Services. Section 31 11 00 - Clearing and Grubbing. Section 31 23 10 - Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM D698-07e1, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (600 kN-m/m3).

1.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 .2

Examine subsurface investigation report which is bound into specification following Section ????. Known underground and surface utility lines and buried objects are as indicated on site plan. Lines shown for information purposes only. Contractor is responsible for obtaining locates prior to commencing work. Refer to dewatering in Section 31 23 10.

.3

1.4

PROTECTION

.1

Protect and/or transplant existing fencing trees, landscaping, natural features, bench marks, buildings, pavement, surface or underground utility lines which are to remain as directed by Departmental Representative. If damaged, restore to original or better condition unless directed otherwise. Maintain access roads to prevent accumulation of construction related debris on roads.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH GRADING

Section 31 22 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Fill material: Type 3 in accordance with of Section 31 23 10. Excavated or graded material existing on site may be suitable to use as fill for grading work if approved by Departmental Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

.1

Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or in any manner in which soil structure is adversely affected as determined by Departmental Representative. Commence topsoil stripping of areas as directed by Departmental Representative after area has been cleared of brush weeds and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. Rototill weeds and grasses and retain as topsoil on site. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m. Dispose of unused topsoil off site.

.2

.3

.4

.5

3.2

GRADING

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Rough grade to levels, profiles, and contours allowing for surface treatment as indicated. Rough grade to following depths below finish grades as indicated: Slope rough grade away from building as indicated (offers more choice). Grade ditches to depth as indicated. Prior to placing fill over existing ground, scarify surface to depth of 150 mm. Maintain fill and existing surface at approximately same moisture content to facilitate bonding.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH GRADING

Section 31 22 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.2 GRADING (Cont'd)

.6

Compact filled and disturbed areas to maximum dry density to ASTM D698, as follows: .1 85% under landscaped areas. .2 95% under paved and walk areas. Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs to remain.

.7

3.3

TESTING

.1

Inspection and testing of soil compaction will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by ULC. Costs of tests will be paid under a Cash Allowance by Departmental Representative. Refer to Sections 01 29 83 and 01 45 00. Submit testing procedure, frequency of tests, testing laboratory as designated by ULC or certified testing personnel to Departmental Representative for review.

.2

3.4 SURPLUS MATERIAL

.1

Remove surplus material and material unsuitable for fill, grading or landscaping off site.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

Section 31 22 13: Rough Grading. Section 31 05 17: Aggregates: General. Section 31 11 00: Clearing and Grubbing. Section 33 11 18: Water Mains. Section 33 44 01: Storm Sewers. Section 33 31 13: Public Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping. Section 33 34 02: Sanitary Sewers and Force Mains.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than 0.075 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. ASTM D422-63(2007), Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft 3) (600 kN-m/m3). ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft 3) (2,700 kN-m/m3). ASTM D4318-10, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series. CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric. CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete.

.2 .3 .4

.5

.6

.7 .8 .9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.10

Typ. for all references to OPSS S14, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Construction Specification for Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

.1

Excavation classes: two classes of excavation will be recognized; common excavation and rock excavation. .1 Rock excavation: excavation of material from solid masses of igneous, sedimentary or metamorphic rock which, prior to its removal, was integral with its parent mass, and boulders or rock fragments having individual volume in excess of 1 m3. .2 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, which are not included under definitions of rock excavation. Topsoil: material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and seeding. Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in work or surplus to requirements. Borrow material: material obtained from locations outside area to be graded, and required for construction of fill areas or for other portions of work. Unsuitable materials: .1 Weak and compressible materials under excavated areas. .2 Frost susceptible materials under excavated areas. .3 Frost susceptible materials: .1 Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than 10 when tested to ASTM D4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM D422 and ASTM C136: Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1. Sieve Designation % Passing 2.00 mm 100 0.10 mm 45-100 0.02 mm 10-80 0.005 mm 0-45 .2 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20% by mass passing 0.075 mm sieve.

.2

.3 .4

.5

.6

Unshrinkable fill: very weak mixture of Portland cement, concrete aggregates and water that resists

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.3 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.6

Unshrinkable fill:(Cont'd) settlement when placed in utility trenches, and capable of being readily excavated.

1.4

SAMPLES

.1

Inform Departmental Representative at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work, of proposed source of fill materials and provide access for sampling.

1.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES

.1

Existing buried utilities and structures: .1 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated are for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed. .2 Prior to commencing excavation work, notify applicable owner or authorities having jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and structures. Owners or authorities having jurisdiction to clearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance during work. .3 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations. .4 Maintain and protect from damage, water, steam, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered as indicated. .5 Where utility lines or structures exist in area of excavation, obtain direction of Departmental Representative before re-routing. Costs for such work to be paid by Departmental Representative. .6 Record location of maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground lines. Existing buildings and surface features: .1 Conduct, with Departmental Representative, condition survey of existing buildings, trees and other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires, rail tracks, pavement, survey bench marks and monuments which may be affected by work. .2 Protect existing buildings and surface features from damage while work is in progress. In event of damage, immediately make repair to approval of Departmental Representative. .3 Where required for excavation, cut roots or branches as approved by Departmental Representative.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.6 SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING

.1

Protect existing features in accordance with Section 01 11 02 01 35 30 and applicable local regulations. Engage services of qualified professional engineer who is registered or licensed in province of Ontario, Canada in which work is to be carried out to design and inspect cofferdams, shoring, bracing and underpinning required for work. Submit design and supporting data at least 2 weeks prior to commencing work. Design and supporting data submitted to bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in province of Ontario, Canada.

.2

.3 .4

1.7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING REQUIRED BY OTHER SECTIONS

.1

Excavation and backfilling for site services, mechanical and electrical work is included in this Section and shall be carried out in accordance with provisions specified herein and as indicated on drawings. This work to be laid out and supervised by trade concerned.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Type 1 fill: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular A aggregate. Maximum size 19.0mm Type 2 fill: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular B Type 2 aggregate. Maximum size 26.5mm. Type 3 fill: selected material from excavation or other sources, approved by Departmental Representative for use intended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 75 mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious materials. Unshrinkable fill: proportioned and mixed to provide: .1 Maximum compressive strength of 0.4 MPa at 28 days. .2 Maximum Portland cement content of 25 kg/m 3. .3 Minimum strength of 0.07 MPa at 24 h. .4 Concrete aggregates: to CAN/CSAA23.1/A23.2. .5 Portland cement: Type 10.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.4 .5

Unshrinkable fill:(Cont'd) .6 Slump: 160 to 200 mm. Shearmat: honeycomb type bio-degradable cardboard 100 mm thick, treated to provide sufficient structural support for poured concrete until concrete cured.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

.1 .2

Remove obstructions, ice and snow, from surfaces to be excavated within limits indicated. Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposed excavation in order that surface may break evenly and cleanly.

3.2 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

.1

Commence topsoil stripping of areas as indicated after area has been cleared of brush, weeds, and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. Do not mix topsoil with subsoil. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m. Dispose of unused topsoil off site.

.2 .3

.4

3.3

STOCKPILING

.1

Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by Departmental Representative. Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation. Protect fill materials from contamination.

.2

3.4 COFFERDAMS, SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING

.1

Construct temporary works to depths, heights and locations as indicated or directed by Departmental Representative. During backfill operation: .1 Unless otherwise as indicated or as directed by Departmental Representative, remove sheeting and shoring from excavations. .2 Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reached respective levels of such bracing.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.4 COFFERDAMS, SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING (Cont'd)

.2

During backfill operation:(Cont'd) Pull sheeting in increments that will ensure .3 compacted backfill is maintained at an elevation at least 500 mm above toe of sheeting. When sheeting is required to remain in place, cut off tops at elevations as indicated.

.3

3.5 DEWATERING AND HEAVE PREVENTION

.1 .2

Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress. Submit for Departmental Representative's approval details of proposed dewatering or heave prevention methods, such as dikes, well points, and sheet pile cut-offs. Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick condition or heave is likely to occur. Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations by groundwater lowering, sheet pile cut-offs, or other means. Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off. Dispose of water in accordance with Section 01561- Environmental Protection and in manner not detrimental to public and private property, or any portion of work completed or under construction. Provide flocculation tanks, settling basins, or other treatment facilities to remove suspended solids or other materials before discharging to storm sewers, water courses or drainage areas.

.3

.4 .5

.6

3.6

EXCAVATION

.1

Excavate to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions as indicated as directed by Departmental Representative. Remove concrete masonry paving walks demolished foundations and rubble and other obstructions encountered during excavation in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Excavation must not interfere with normal 45° splay of bearing from bottom of any footing. Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain. If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.6 EXCAVATION (Cont'd)

.5

For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by Departmental Representative in writing, do not excavate more than 30 m of trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave open more than 15 m at end of day's operation. Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material off site. Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural watercourses. Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or organic matter. Notify Departmental Representative when bottom of excavation is reached. Obtain Departmental Representative's approval of completed excavation. Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom to extent and depth as directed by Departmental Representative. Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows: .1 Fill under bearing surfaces and footings with concrete specified for footings. .2 Fill under other areas with Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 95% of Standard Proctor Density to ASTM D698. Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debris from excavations. Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to density at least equal to undisturbed soil. Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar or grout to approval of Departmental Representative.

.6 .7 .8

.9 .10 .11

.12

.13

3.7 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

.1

Use fill of types as indicated or specified below. Compaction densities are percentages of maximum densities obtained from ASTM D698 ASTM D1557 Standard Proctor Density. .1 Exterior side of perimeter walls: use Type 3 fill to subgrade level. Compact to 95%. .2 Within building area: use Type 2 to underside of base course for floor slabs. Compact to 98%.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.7 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) Under concrete slabs: provide 150 mm .3 compacted thickness base course of Type 1 fill to underside of slab. Compact base course to 100%. .4 Retaining walls: use Type 2 fill to subgrade level on high side for minimum 500 mm from wall and compact to 95%. For remaining portion, use Type 3 fill compacted to 95%. .5 Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated.

3.8 BEDDING AND SURROUND OF UNDERGROUND SERVICES

.1

Place and compact granular material for bedding and surround of underground services as indicated and as specified in Section ?????????. Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.

.2

3.9

BACKFILLING

.1 .2

Vibratory compaction equipment: . Do not proceed with backfilling operations until Departmental Representative has inspected and approved installations. Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice, water and frozen ground. Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice, snow or debris. Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact each layer before placing succeeding layer. Backfill around installations. Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated. Consolidate and level unshrinkable fill with internal vibrators. .1 Place bedding and surround material as specified elsewhere. .2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 h after placing of concrete. .3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installed work to equalize loading. Difference not to exceed 0.6m.

.3 .4 .5

.6 .7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 31 23 10 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.9 BACKFILLING (Cont'd)

.7

(Cont'd) .4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures: .1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum 14 days or until it has sufficient strength to withstand earth and compaction pressure and approval obtained from Departmental Representative or: .2 If approved by Departmental Representative, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in place until removal is approved by Departmental Representative. Install drainage system in backfill as indicated.

.8

3.10

RESTORATION

.1

Upon completion of work, remove waste materials and debris, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by Departmental Representative. Replace topsoil as indicated. Reinstate pavement, sidewalks and lawns to elevation which existed before excavation. Clean and reinstate areas affected by work as directed by Departmental Representative. Use temporary plating to support traffic loads over unshrinkable fill for initial 24 h.

.2 .3 .4 .5

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GRANULAR BASE

Section 32 11 20 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section: 32 11 24 - Granular Sub-Base. Section: 32 12 17 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Granular A: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 01010, April 2004. Maximum size Granular A 19.0 mm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PLACING

.1 .2 .3

Place on a clean surface, properly shaped and compacted and free from snow or ice. Place material in layers not exceeding 150 mm when compacted. Spread each layer uniformly using approved grading equipment and methods.

3.2

COMPACTING

.1 .2

Compact each layer to minimum 100% Standard Proctor Density. Add water as required to maintain material at or near optimum moisture content while compacting.

3.3

FINISHING

.1

Finish compacted surface to within 12 mm of established grade as indicated by a 3 m straightedge placed in any direction Correct irregularities greater than 12 mm by loosening the surface and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GRANULAR BASE

Section 32 11 20 Page 2 2011-05-18

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

The Departmental Representative may perform field and laboratory tests for control of moisture, density and aggregate gradation. Results will control Contractor's operations.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GRANULAR SUB-BASE

Section 32 11 24 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section: 32 11 20 - Granular Base. Section: 32 12 17 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Granular B Type II: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1010, April 2004. Maximum size Granular B Type 2, 26.5 mm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PLACING

.1 .2 .3

Place on a clean surface, properly shaped and compacted and free from snow or ice. Place material in layers not exceeding 150 mm when compacted. Spread each layer uniformly using approved grading equipment and methods.

3.2

COMPACTING

.1 .2

Compact each layer to minimum 100 % Standard Proctor Density. Add water as required to maintain material at or near optimum moisture content while compacting.

3.3

FINISHING

.1

Finish compacted surface to within 12 mm of established grade as indicated by a 3 m straightedge placed in any direction Correct irregularities greater than 12 mm by loosening the surface and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GRANULAR SUB-BASE

Section 32 11 24 Page 2 2011-05-18

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

The Departmental Representative may perform field and laboratory tests for control of moisture, density and aggregate gradation. Results will control Contractor's operations.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

Section 32 12 17 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

PROTECTION

.1

Protect buildings, landscaping, roads, driveways, sidewalks, trees and shrubs on site that may be damaged by paving machinery, equipment or personnel. Make good property damaged due to paving operations. Take necessary precautions to protect workmen and public from hazards of paving operations. Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until paving properly cured. Provide access to building at all times. Arrange paving schedule so as not to interfere with normal use of premises.

.2 .3 .4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Asphalt base course: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1150, November 2010 for type HL 8. Maximum size aggregate 19.0 mm. Asphalt surface course: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1150, November 2010 for type HL 3. Maximum size aggregate 13.2 mm. Primer: emulsified asphalt to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1103, November 2007 for rapid setting type. Granular base: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular A. Maximum size 19.0 mm. Granular sub-base: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular B. Maximum size 26.5mm.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

Section 32 12 17 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

CLEANING

.1 .2 .3

Remove dust, contaminants, loose and foreign materials, oil and grease in designated areas. Use rotary power brooms supplemented by hand brooming as required. Where directed, remove to existing pavement level, sealing compound which has protruded excessively and dispose of removed material as directed. Keep drainage system clear of loose and waste materials.

.4

3.2

EXCAVATING

.1 .2 .3

Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or required for construction of work. Make excavation to clean lines to minimize quantity of fill material required. Earth bottoms of excavations to be dry undisturbed soil, reasonably level, free from loose or organic matter.

3.3

INSPECTION

.1

Check graded subgrade for conformity with elevations and cross-sections before placing granular sub-base and granular base material. Proof-roll subgrade sub-base and base surface with mass and type of roller approved by Departmental Representative. .1 Check for unstable areas. .2 Check for areas requiring additional compaction. Notify Departmental Representative of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. When complete, have Departmental Representative inspect excavations to verify soil bearing capacity, depths and dimensions.

.2

.3 .4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

Section 32 12 17 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.3 INSPECTION (Cont'd)

.6

Excavation, beyond limits shown on drawings, if authorized in writing by Departmental Representative, will be paid for as extra to Contract price in accordance with General Conditions. Quantities will be calculated in place, compaction included. Truck load measurements not acceptable. Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost by filling with Granular A material.

.7

3.4

ASPHALT COURSE

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

Apply primer at approximately 0.5 L/m 2. Place compacted asphaltic concrete base course to thickness as indicated. Place compacted asphaltic concrete surface course to thickness as indicated. Minimum 7°C air temperature when placing mixture. Minimum 120°C mixture temperature when spread. Maximum 149°C mixture temperature at any time. Compact each course with roller when it can support roller mass without undue cracking or displacement. Roller, power driven, minimum mass 9 tonnes, minimum wheel width 600 mm. Roll until roller marks are eliminated. Compact to 96 % laboratory density. Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mixture displacement. Moisten roller wheels to prevent mixture adhesion. Compact mixture with hot tampers in areas inaccessible to roller. Finish surface true to grade and free from deviations exceeding 1:1000 when measured in any direction with a 3 m straight edge.

.8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

Section 32 12 17 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.5

JOINTS

.1

Cut back bituminous course to full depth in straight or curved lines as required to expose fresh vertical surfaces. Remove any broken or loose material. Paint exposed edge of asphaltic joints, edges of manholes and catchbasin frames, curbs and similar items with asphalt primer prior to placing asphalt courses. Where paving comprises two courses overlap longitudinal joints not less that 600 mm. Carefully place and compact hot asphaltic material against joints.

.2

.3 .4

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING

Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada .1 The Canadian System of Soil Classification, Third Edition, 1998. Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment .1 PN1340-2005, Guidelines for Compost Quality. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water .1 EPA 833-R-06-004, May 2007, Developing Your Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan - A Guide for Construction Sites. Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (CNLA) .1 Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock, 8th Edition, 2006.

.2 .3

.4

1.2

DEFINITIONS

.1

Compost: .1 Mixture of soil and decomposing organic matter used as fertilizer, mulch, or soil conditioner. .2 Compost is processed organic matter containing 40% or more organic matter as determined by Walkley-Black or Loss On Ignition (LOI) test. .3 Product must be sufficiently decomposed (i.e. stable) so that any further decomposition does not adversely affect plant growth (C:N ratio below (25) (50)), and contain no toxic or growth inhibiting contaminates. .4 Composed bio-solids to: CCME Guidelines for Compost Quality, Category (A) (B).

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Quality control submittals : .1 Soil testing: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties as described in PART 2 - SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL. .2 Certificates: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING

Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Pre-installation meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, installation instructions and warranty requirements in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06 01 32 16.07.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2

Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused soil amendments from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused soil amendments into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.

.3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

TOPSOIL

.1

Topsoil for seeded areas: mixture of particulates, micro organisms and organic matter which provides suitable medium for supporting intended plant growth. .1 Soil texture based on The Canadian System of Soil Classification, to consist of 20 to 70% sand, minimum 7% clay, and contain 2 to 10% organic matter by weight. .2 Contain no toxic elements or growth inhibiting materials. .3 Finished surface free from: .1 Debris and stones over 50 mm diameter. .2 Course vegetative material, 10 mm diameter and 100 mm length, occupying more than 2% of soil volume. .4 Consistence: friable when moist.

2.2

SOIL AMENDMENTS .1

Fertilizer: .1 Fertility: major soil nutrients present in following amounts: .2 Nitrogen (N): 20 to 40 micrograms of available N per gram of topsoil. .3 Phosphorus (P): 40 to 50 micrograms of phosphate per gram of topsoil. .4 Potassium (K): 75 to 110 micrograms of potassium per gram of topsoil. .5 Calcium, magnesium, sulfur and micro-nutrients present in balanced ratios to

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING

Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS .1 (Cont'd)

Fertilizer:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) support germination and/or establishment of intended vegetation. .6 Ph value: 6.5 to 8.0. Sand: washed coarse silica sand, medium to course textured. Limestone: .1 Ground agricultural limestone. .2 Gradation requirements: percentage passing by weight, 90% passing 1.0 mm sieve, 50% passing 0.125 mm sieve. Fertilizer: industry accepted standard medium containing nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium and other micro-nutrients suitable to specific plant species or application or defined by soil test.

.2 .3

.4

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Advise Departmental Representative of sources of topsoil and manufactured topsoil to be utilized with sufficient lead time for testing. Contractor is responsible for amendments to supply topsoil as specified. Soil testing by recognized testing facility for PH, P and K, and organic matter. Testing of topsoil will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. .1 Soil sampling, testing and analysis to be in accordance with Provincial standards.

.2 .3 .4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

.1

Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction sediment and erosion control drawings sediment and erosion control plan, specific to site, that complies with EPA 833-R-06-004 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING

Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (Cont'd)

.2

Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

.3

3.2 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

.1

Begin topsoil stripping of areas as indicated after area has been cleared of brush weeds and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. .1 Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil where textural quality will be moved outside acceptable range of intended application. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. .1 Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m. Disposal of unused topsoil is to be in an environmentally responsible manner but not used as landfill. Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction.

.2

.3

.4

.5

3.3 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE

.1

Verify that grades are correct. .1 If discrepancies occur, notify Departmental Representative and do not commence work until instructed by Departmental Representative. Grade soil, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of 50 mm diameter and other deleterious materials. .1 Remove soil contaminated with calcium chloride, toxic materials and petroleum products. .2 Remove debris which protrudes more than 75 mm above surface. .3 Dispose of removed material off site. Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to minimum depth of 100 mm. .1 Cross cultivate those areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted soil.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING

Sect 32 91 19.13 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.4 PLACING AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL/PLANTING SOIL

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Place topsoil after Departmental Representative has accepted subgrade. Spread topsoil in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm. For sodded areas keep topsoil 15 mm below finished grade. Spread topsoil as indicated. Manually spread topsoil/planting soil around trees, shrubs and obstacles.

3.5

FINISH GRADING

.1

Grade to eliminate rough spots and low areas and ensure positive drainage. .1 Prepare loose friable bed by means of cultivation and subsequent raking. Consolidate topsoil to required bulk density using equipment approved by Departmental Representative. .1 Leave surfaces smooth, uniform and firm against deep footprinting.

.2

3.6

ACCEPTANCE

.1

Departmental Representative will inspect and test topsoil in place and determine acceptance of material, depth of topsoil and finish grading.

3.7 SURPLUS MATERIAL

.1

Dispose of materials except topsoil not required.

3.8

CLEANING

.1 .2

Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HYDRAULIC SEEDING

Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3

Section 31 22 13 - Rough Grading. Section 31 31 19.13 - Chemical Control of Vegetation. Section 32 91 19.13 - Topsoil Placement and Grading

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (CNLA) .1 Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock, 8th Edition, 2006.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1

Product Data. .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Provide product data for: .1 Seed. .2 Mulch. .3 Tackifier. .4 Fertilizer. .3 Submit in writing to Departmental Representatives days prior to commencing work: .1 Volume capacity of hydraulic seeder in litres. .2 Amount of material to be used per tank based on volume. .3 Number of tank loads required per hectare to apply specified slurry mixture per hectare.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, installation instructions and warranty requirements.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HYDRAULIC SEEDING

Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5

SCHEDULING

.1

Schedule hydraulic seeding to coincide with preparation of soil surface.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2

Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused fertilizer from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused fertilizer into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.

.3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Seed: "Canada pedigreed grade" in accordance with Government of Canada Seeds Act and Regulations. .1 Grass mixture: "Certified", "Canada No.1 Lawn Grass Mixture" in accordance with Government of Canada "Seeds Act" and "Seeds Regulations". .1 Mixture composition: .1 55% Creeping Red Fescue. .2 27% Kentucky Bluegrass. .3 15% Perennial Ryegrass. .4 3% White Clover. Mulch: specially manufactured for use in hydraulic seeding equipment, non-toxic, water activated, green colouring, free of germination and growth inhibiting factors with following properties: .1 Type I mulch: .1 Made from wood cellulose fibre. .2 Organic matter content: 95% plus or minus 0.5%. .3 Value of pH: 6.0. .4 Potential water absorption: 900%. .2 Type II mulch: .1 Made from newsprint, raw cotton fibre and straw, processed to produce fibre lengths of 15 mm minimum and 25 mm maximum. Greater proportions of ingredients to be straw. Tackifier: water dilutable, liquid dispersion. Water: free of impurities that would inhibit germination and growth.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HYDRAULIC SEEDING

Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.5

Fertilizer: .1 To Canada "Fertilizers Act" and "Fertilizers Regulations". .2 Complete synthetic, slow release with 35% of nitrogen content in water-insoluble form. Inoculants: inoculant containers to be tagged with expiry date.

.6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

WORKMANSHIP

.1

Do not spray onto structures, signs, guide rails, fences, plant material, utilities and other than surfaces intended. Clean-up immediately, any material sprayed where not intended, to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Do not perform work under adverse field conditions such as wind speeds over 10 km/h, frozen ground or ground covered with snow, ice or standing water. Protect seeded areas from trespass until plants are established.

.2

.3

.4

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

.1

Fine grade areas to be seeded free of humps and hollows. Ensure areas are free of deleterious and refuse materials. Cultivated areas identified as requiring cultivation to depth of 25 mm. Ensure areas to be seeded are moist to depth of 150 mm before seeding. Obtain Departmental Representative approval of grade and topsoil depth before starting to seed.

.2 .3 .4

3.3 FERTILIZING PROGRAM

.1

Fertilize prior to fine grading incorporating fertilizer equally distributed in accordance with the following program:

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HYDRAULIC SEEDING

Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.3 FERTILIZING PROGRAM (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd)

Date k to k to k to .2

Date

Rate g/ha g/ha g/ha

Ratio

Fertilize during establishment and warranty periods to following program: Date k to k to g/ha g/ha Date Rate Ratio

3.4 PREPARATION OF SLURRY

.1

Measure quantities of materials by weight or weight-calibrated volume measurement satisfactory to Departmental Representative. Supply equipment required for this work. Charge required water into seeder. Add material into hydraulic seeder under agitation. Pulverize mulch and charge slowly into seeder. After all materials are in the seeder and well mixed, charge tackifier into seeder and mix thoroughly to complete slurry.

.2

.3

3.5 SLURRY APPLICATION

.1

Hydraulic seeding equipment: .1 Slurry tank. .2 Agitation system for slurry to be capable of operating during charging of tank and during seeding, consisting of recirculation of slurry and/or mechanical agitation method. .3 Capable of seeding by 50 m hand operated hoses and appropriate nozzles. .4 Tank volume to be certified by certifying authority and identified by authorities "Volume Certification Plate". Slurry mixture applied per hectare. .1 Seed: Grass mixture kg. .2 Mulch: Type I II kg. .3 Tackifier: kg.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HYDRAULIC SEEDING

Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.5 SLURRY APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) Water: Minimum 30,000 L. .4 .5 Fertilizer: kg, ratio. Apply slurry uniformly, at optimum angle of application for adherence to surfaces and germination of seed. .1 Using correct nozzle for application. .2 Using hoses for surfaces difficult to reach and to control application. Blend application 300 mm into adjacent grass areas or sodded areas to form uniform surfaces. Re-apply where application is not uniform. Remove slurry from items and areas not designated to be sprayed. Protect seeded areas from trespass satisfactory to Departmental Representative. Remove protection devices as directed by Departmental Representative.

.3

.4 .5 .6 .7 .8

3.6 MAINTENANCE DURING ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

.1

Perform following operations from time of seed application until acceptance by Departmental Representative. Grass Mixture: .1 Repair and reseed dead or bare spots to allow establishment of seed prior to acceptance. .2 Mow grass to 50 mm whenever it reaches height of 70 mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass. .3 Fertilize seeded areas after first cutting in accordance with fertilizing program. Spread half of required amount of fertilizer in one direction and remainder at right angles ;water in well. .4 Control weeds by mechanical means utilizing acceptable integrated pest management practices. .5 Water seeded area to maintain optimum soil moisture level for germination and continued growth of grass. Control watering to prevent washouts. .6 Water seeded areas to maintain optimum soil moisture level for germination and continued growth. Control watering to prevent washouts.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

HYDRAULIC SEEDING

Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.7

ACCEPTANCE

.1

Seeded areas will be accepted by Departmental Representative provided that: .1 Seeded areas are free of rutted, eroded, bare or dead spots. .2 Areas have been mown at least twice. .3 Areas have been fertilized. Areas seeded in fall will achieve final acceptance in following spring, one month after start of growing season provided acceptance conditions are fulfilled.

.2

3.8 MAINTENANCE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

.1

Perform following operations from time of acceptance until end of warranty period: .1 Repair and reseed dead or bare spots to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.

3.9

CLEANING

.1

Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MAINTENANCE HOLE REPAIRS

Section 33 01 30 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SCOPE OF WORK

.1

Work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all materials, labour, supervision, equipment, plant and to perform all necessary work to repair sanitary storm maintenance holes as specified.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 33 34 02 - Sanitary Sewers and Section 33 44 01 - Storm Sewers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Concrete mix design to produce 25 MPa minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Mortar: .1 Aggregate: to CSA A179-04. .2 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3002-08, Type GU MCN 14.5 MCS 25.0 MPa @ 28 days. Ladder rungs: to CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92(R2007), No. 25M billet steel deformed bars, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M-09. Rungs to be safety pattern (drop step type). Maintenance hole steps: aluminum to OPSD 405.010, Nov. 2008. Adjusting rings: to ASTM C478M-09. Concrete brick: to CSA-A165.2-04. Sealing materials: as specified in Section. 31 01 30. Circular locking maintenance hole covers: to OPSD 401.060, Nov. 2007. Precast reinforced concrete maintenance hole sections: to ASTM C478M-09. Benching: to OPSD 701.021, Nov. 2009. Concrete: 30 MPa @ 28 days.

.3

.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MAINTENANCE HOLE REPAIRS

Section 33 01 30 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MAINTENANCE HOLE CLEANING

.1

Maintenance hole structures which are to be rehabilitated shall have their surfaces cleaned thoroughly, free of dirt and any loose material. Cleaning shall be accomplished with a high pressure water blast equipment capable of removing all loose deleterious foreign matter with pressures from 17,236 kPa to 24,132 kPa (2500-3500 p.s.i.) Such equipment shall provide low water volumes at high pressure.

3.2 PATCHING OBJECTIVE MASONRY CONCRETE

.1 .2 .3

Patch defective rough brick and concrete to produce a smooth flush surface. Patching shall be effected by using fast-set patching mortar. Mix and apply materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's data sheets. Mix only the amount of material which can be placed within the set time. Discard if initial set takes place. To seal: cracks, cold pore joints or defects should be chipped out to a depth and width of 20 mm and sufficient to ensure a sound substrate. Mix mortar and force into repair. To patch: in larger defects, chip defect until sound substrate is reached. In deep patches it may be necessary to build up in layers. Mix mortar and force well into repair. Surfaces to receive repair mortars shall be dampened prior to application and must be frost free.

.4

.5

.6

3.3 RAISING MAINTENANCE HOLES

.1 .2 .3

Raise maintenance hole frames and caves to the specified height. Adjusting hinges or concrete bricks may be used to build up the chimneys. Chimneys to be paved with mortar inside and out to provide a durable smooth surface.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MAINTENANCE HOLE REPAIRS

Section 33 01 30 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.4 GRANTING MAINTENANCE HOLE FRAMES

.1 .2

Clean surfaces and grant maintenance hole frame in place. The finish surface shall be smooth, durable and shall drain as indicated.

3.5 SEALING UNUSED SEWER PIPES

.1 .2

Seal unused sewer lines at the last downstream maintenance holes. Reshape benching to suit.

3.6 MAINTENANCE HOLE RUNGS

.1

Install additional rungs as required and at spacings to match existing ones.

3.7 FLASHING AROUND MAINTENANCE HOLES

.1

Backfill around maintenance holes at the locations shown on the drawings. Fill material is available from the Institution Stockpile. Flash the backfill material to provide positive drainage away from the maintenance hole. Supply and place topsoil, minimum 100 mm thick, over the backfill. Seal exposed area.

.2 .3 .4

3.8 MAINTENANCE HOLE BENCHING

.1

Benching: to OPSD 701.021, Nov. 2009, slope and height indicated on drawings and as directed by Departmental Representative.

3.9

LOCKING COVERS .1

Install circular locking maintenance hole covers to OPSD 401.060, Nov. 2007.

3.10

GUARANTEE

.1

Guarantee restoration for 12 months.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS

Section 33 05 14 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3

Section 31 23 10: Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. Section 33 44 01: Storm sewers. Section 33 34 01: Sanitary sewers and forcemains.

1.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1

Departmental Representative will inspect material at construction site.

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001-08, Type GU. Water, aggregates, admixtures: to CSA-A23.109/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. Frames, gratings, covers: to plan dimensions and to following requirements for designated materials: .1 Metal gratings and covers to bear evenly on frames. A frame with grating or cover to constitute one unit. Assemble and mark unit components before shipment. .2 Sanitary maintenance hole frames and covers: cover cast without perforations and complete with two 25 mm square lifting holes to OPSD 401.010 Nov. 2007, Type A. .3 Storm maintenance hole frames and covers: cover cast with perforations and complete with two 25mm lifting hole to OPSD 401.010 Nov.2007 Type B. .4 Catch basin frames and covers: to OPSD 400.020 Nov. 2007. Complete with bolt holes to secure, as indicated. Precast maintenance holes: to ASTM C478M-09. Ladder rungs: to OPSD 405.010 Nov. 2008. Mortar: .1 Aggregate: to CSA A179-04(R2009). .2 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3002-08. Brick: to CAN/CSA-A82-06, Grade SW, Type FBS.

.3

.4 .5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS

Section 33 05 14 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION

.8

Adjustment rings: precast concrete to ASTM C478M-09.

3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

.1 .2

Excavation and backfill to Section 31 23 10. Excavation requires approval prior to installing maintenance holes or catch basins.

3.2

CONCRETE WORK

.1 .2

Do concrete work to CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09. Position metal inserts to dimensions and details shown or required.

3.3

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Construct units to details indicated, plumb and true to alignment and grade. Complete maintenance holes as pipe laying progresses. Maximum of 3 maintenance holes behind point of pipe laying will be allowed. Pump maintenance hole excavation dry and remove soft and foreign material before placing concrete base. Set precast concrete slab on 300mm minimum of well compacted granular A material. Set bottom section of precast unit in place. Make each successive joint watertight with approved rubber ring gaskets, mastic joint filler, cement mortar, or combination thereof. Clean surplus mortar and joint compounds from interior surface of unit as work progresses. Plug lifting holes with precast concrete plugs set in cement mortar or compound. For sanitary sewers: .1 Place stub outlets and bulkheads at elevations and in positions indicated. .2 Bench to provide a smooth U-shaped channel. Side height of channel to be half diameter of sewer. Adjacent floor to be sloped at 75 mm/m. Channels to be curved smoothly. Slope invert to establish sewer grade. For pipes smaller than 150 use standard fittings, breaking out upper half of fitting upon completion of maintenance hole.

.3

.4 .5

.6 .7 .8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS

Section 33 05 14 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.3 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.9

Installing units in existing systems: .1 Where new unit is within existing run of pipe, carefully remove existing pipe to dimensions required and install new unit as specified. .2 Make joints watertight between new unit and existing pipe. .3 Where deemed expedient to maintain service around existing pipes and when systems constructed under this project are ready to be put into operation, complete the installation with appropriate break-outs, removals, redirection of flows, blocking unused pipes or any other necessary work. Set frame and cover to required elevation, parge and make smooth and watertight. Place frame and cover on top section to elevation indicated. If adjustment required use concrete ring. Clean units of debris and foreign materials; remove fins or sharp protuberances.

.10 .11

.12

3.4 ADJUSTING TOPS EXISTING UNITS

.1

Remove existing gratings, and frames, and store for re-use at locations designated by Departmental Representative. Sectional units: .1 Raise or lower straight walled sectional units by adding or removing precast sections as required. .2 Raise or lower tapered units by removing cone section, adding, removing, or substituting riser sections to obtain required elevation, then replace cone section. Monolithic units: .1 Raise monolithic units by roughening existing top to ensure proper bond and extend to required elevation with: .1 Mortared brick course for 150 mm or less alteration. .2 Cast-in-place concrete. .2 Lower monolithic units with straight wall by removing concrete to elevation indicated for rebuilding. .3 When monolithic units with tapered upper section are to be lowered more than 150 mm remove concrete for entire depth of taper plus as much straight wall as necessary, then rebuild upper section to required elevation with cast-in-place concrete.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS

Section 33 05 14 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.4 ADJUSTING TOPS EXISTING UNITS (Cont'd)

.3

Monolithic units:(Cont'd) Install additional maintenance hole ladder .4 rungs in adjusted portion of units as required. .5 Re-use existing gratings, frames. .6 Re-set gratings and frames to required elevation on full bed of cement mortar, parge and trowel smooth.

3.5 SEALING OVER EXISTING UNITS

.1

Cut galvanized iron sheet to extend 50 mm beyond opening of existing maintenance hole or catch basin grating. Center iron sheet over existing grating and spot or stitchweld to grating.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1

Materials and installation for water mains, hydrants, valves, valve boxes, and valve chambers, including service connections.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 31 23 10 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

1.3

REFERENCES

.1

American Water Works Association AWWA .1 AWWA B300-04, Hypochlorites. .2 AWWA B301-04, Liquid Chlorine. .3 AWWA B303-05, Sodium Chlorite. .4 AWWA C104/A21.4-03, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. .5 AWWA C111/A21.11-00, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. .6 AWWA C110/A21.10-03, Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. .7 AWWA C153/A21.53-00, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. .8 AWWA C200-97, Steel Water Pipe 6 in. (150 mm) and Larger. .9 AWWA C205-00, Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe - 4 Inch (100 mm) and Larger - Shop Applied. .10 AWWA C206-03, 2005 edition, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. .11 AWWA C207-01, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 Inch through 144 Inch (100 mm through 3,600 mm). .12 AWWA C208-01, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. .13 AWWA C300-97, Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type. .14 AWWA C500-02, Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service (Includes Addendum C500a-95). .15 AWWA C504-00, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. .16 AWWA C600-05, Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. .17 AWWA C602-00, Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in place - 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger. .18 AWWA C651-99, Disinfecting Water Mains.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .19 AWWA C800-05, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings (Also Included: Collected Standards for Service Line Materials). .20 AWWA C900-97, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 Inch through 12 Inch (100 mm - 300 mm), for Water Distribution. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A53/A53M-07, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A307-04, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. .3 ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than 75 MU m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. .4 ASTM C478M-08e1, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (Metric). .5 ASTM F714-08, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series. .2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric. .3 CAN/CGSB-1.88-92, Gloss Alkyd Enamel, Air Drying and Baking. .4 CGSB 41-GP-25M-77, Pipe, Polyethylene, for the Transport of Liquids. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B137 Series-02, Thermoplastic Pressure Piping Compendium. (Consists of B137.0, B137.1, B137.2, B137.3, B137.4, B137.4.1, B137.5, B137.6, B137.8, B137.9, B137.10, B137.11 and B137.12). .1 CSA B137.1-02, Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings for Cold-Water Pressure Services. .2 CSA B137.3-02, Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe for Pressure Applications. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA).

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.3 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.6

Transport Canada (TC) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA). The Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual - March 1998(R2002). Ontario Provincial Standard Specificiation (OPSS) and Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD) .1 OPSS 441, November 2010 (typical for all references to OPSS 701), Construction Specification for Watermain Installation in Open Cut. .2 OPSS 442 (typical for all references to OPSS 702), November 2010, Construction Specification for Corrosion Protection of New and Existing Watermains.

.7

.8

1.4

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit complete shop drawings and construction schedule for water mains. Include method for installation of water main. Inform Departmental Representative of proposed source of bedding materials and provide access for sampling at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work. Submit Hydrostatic and leak test procedure identifying location of blow-offs and pressure gauge location 2 weeks prior to commencement. Submit a flushing and disinfection plan 2 weeks prior to commencement. Submit manufacturer's test data and certification that pipe materials meet requirements of this section at least 4 weeks prior to beginning work. Include manufacturer's drawings, information and shop drawings where pertinent. Pipe certification to be on pipe.

.3

.4

.5 .6

.7

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1

Provide record drawings, including directions for operating valves, list of equipment required to operate valves, details of pipe material, location of air and vacuum release valves, hydrant details,

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) maintenance and operating instructions in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .1 Include top of pipe, horizontal location of fittings and type, valves, valve boxes, valve chambers and hydrants.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2 .3

Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 21. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused aggregate materials from landfill to facility for reuse as approved by Departmental Representative. Dispose of unused disinfection material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused disinfection material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where they will pose health or environmental hazard.

.4

.5 .6

.7 .8

.9

.10

.11

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)

.13

Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

1.7 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1

Schedule Work to minimize interruptions to existing services. Maximum interruption time of 6 hours will be permitted. Submit schedule of expected interruptions to Departmental Representative for approval and adhere to interruption schedule as approved by Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative minimum of 48 h in advance of interruption in service. Do not interrupt water service for more than 6 h and confine this period between 10:00 and 16:00 h local time unless otherwise authorized. Notify fire department of any planned or accidental interruption of water supply to hydrants. Provide "Out of Service" sign on hydrant not in use.

.2

.3 .4

.5

.6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS

.1

Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe (PVC): to ANSI/AWWA C900, pressure class 150, DR18, Mpa gasket bell end. .1 CSA-B137.3, PVC Series 160, 1.1 MPa elastomeric gasket coupling. .2 Joints shall be a gasket fitted to the bell groove. The pipe and or fittings shall be joined by push fitting bell and spigot joint to the depth indicated on pipe. .3 Fittings shall conform to AWWA C907 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Fittings and be certified to CSA B 137.2. They shall be UL listed and FM approved. Ductile iron fittings may also be used. They shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. Mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Fittings shall be cement lined and in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.1 PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS (Cont'd)

.2

High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and fittings to ANSI/AWWA C900, DR11 (160 psi). .1 Joints shall be made by either thermal butt fusion or approved socket fusion coupling. .2 Fittings shall be plain end fittings and connected using thermal butt fusion or socket fusion fittings.

2.2 GATE VALVES AND BOXES

.1

Potable water gate valves shall be ANSI/AWWA C-509 resilient seat gate valve type with cast iron or ductile iron body. Valves shall open counter-clockwise. Valve box shall be a 130mm diameter slide valve box complete with extension, cap, and cast iron lid. Valves shall be equipped with "50mm operating nuts". Values shall have flanged ends.

.2 .3

.4 .5

2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

.1 .2

Cathodic protection must be to the OPSS 442 and OPSD 1109 Standard. Anodes to be labelled as follows: "X-XX-XX ANODE".

2.4

TRACING WIRE

.1

Tracing wire to be TWU or RWU, 10 gauge, 7 strands or more, copper, 60°C or higher, 600V, plastic coated or approved equivalent. C-Tap to be approved by CSA and to be sized to connect two tracing wires as specified above. Tapes to be rugged, pressure-sensitive, PVC-based, minimum .25mm thickness. Tapes must protect against water, salts and sewage and be suitable for direct burial applications.

.2 .3

2.5 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIAL

.1

Granular material to: Granular 'A' as per OPSS 1010.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.6 BACKFILL MATERIAL

.1

In accordance with Section 31 23 10 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

2.7 PIPE DISINFECTION

.1

Contractor to proceed with disinfection only after written approval that disinfection plan has been approved by Departmental Representative. Sodium hypochlorite or Calcium hypochlorite in powder form or Liquid chlorine to disinfect water mains. Undertake disinfection of water mains in accordance with OPSS 441. Contractor is responsible for all sampling/testing costs.

.2

.3 .4

2.8

INSULATION

.1

HI-40 DOW rigid insulation, or approved equivalent, 50mm thick insulation board installed as per manufacturer's specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

.1

Clean pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, and appurtenances of accumulated debris and water before installation. .1 Inspect materials for defects to approval of Departmental Representative. .2 Remove defective materials from site as directed by Departmental Representative. .3 Swab all pipes and fittings with liquid chlorine prior to installation.

3.2

TRENCHING

.1 .2

Do trenching work in accordance with Section 31 23 10 - Excavating Trenching and Backfilling. Trench depth to provide cover over pipe of not less than 1.7 m from finished grade or as indicated.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.3 GRANULAR BEDDING

.1

Place granular bedding material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to depth as indicated. Do not place material in frozen condition. Shape bed true to grade to provide continuous uniform bearing surface for pipe. Shape transverse depressions in bedding as required to suit joints. Compact each layer full width of bed to at least 95% SPD

.2 .3 .4 .5

3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION

.1

Terminate building water service 1.0m outside building footprint as indicated on the detail drawings and at location indicated by mechanical drawings. Lay pipes to manufacturer's standard instructions and specifications. Do not use blocks except as specified. Join pipes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Handle pipe by methods recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not use chains or cables passed through pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears on pipe ends. Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade. .1 Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length. .2 Take up and replace defective pipe. Do not exceed permissible deflection at joints as recommended by pipe manufacturer. Keep jointing materials and installed pipe free of dirt and water and other foreign materials. .1 Whenever work is stopped, install a removable watertight bulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry of foreign materials. Position and join pipes with equipment and methods approved by Departmental Representative. Cut pipes in approved manner as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its

.2

.3 .4

.5

.6 .7

.8 .9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.9

(Cont'd) coating and to leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Align pipes before jointing. Install gaskets to manufacturer's recommendations. Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. .1 Remove disturbed or contaminated gaskets. .2 Clean, lubricate and replace before jointing is attempted again. Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe. Minimize deflection after joint has been made. Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is completed to manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure completed joints are restrained by compacting bedding material alongside and over installed pipes. When stoppage of work occurs, block pipes in an approved manner to prevent creep during down time. Do not lay pipe on frozen bedding. Do hydrostatic test and have results approved by Departmental Representative before surrounding and covering joints and fittings with granular material. Backfill remainder of trench. Do not connect any new watermain to an existing watermain without consent of Departmental Representative.

.10 .11

.12

.13 .14 .15

.16

.17 .18 .19

.20 .21

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Install valves to manufacturer's recommendations at locations as indicated. Support valves located in valve boxes by means of concrete located between valve and solid ground. Valves not to be supported by pipe.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 10 2011-05-18

3.6 THRUST BLOCKS AND RESTRAINED JOINTS

.1

Place concrete thrust blocks between valves, tees, plugs, caps, bends, changes in pipe diameter, reducers, hydrants and fittings and undisturbed ground as indicated. Keep joints and couplings free of concrete. For restrained joints: only use restrained joints approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

3.7 CORROSION PROTECTION

.1 .2

Cathodic protection shall be installed to the current standard of the OPSD. Spacing of anodes shall be: .1 100-300mm DI fittings/valves-Z-12-24 @ 1 per each.

3.8

TRACER WIRE

.1

Tracer wire shall be installed as per OPSS standards and shall be connected on all PVC/HDPE pipe, fittings, etc. to form a continuous loop. Test the loop of tracer wire and demonstrate to Departmental Representative that it functions properly after the backfill has been completed.

.2

3.9 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAKAGE TESTING

.1 .2

Do tests in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600 C603. Provide labour, equipment and materials required to perform hydrostatic and leakage tests hereinafter described. Notify Departmental Representative at least 48 hours in advance of proposed tests. .1 Perform tests in presence of Departmental Representative. Where section of system is provided with concrete thrust blocks, conduct tests at least 5 days after placing concrete or 2 days if high early strength concrete is used. Open valves. Expel air from main by slowly filling main with potable water from source and method approved by Departmental Representative. Thoroughly examine exposed parts and correct for leakage as necessary.

.3

.4

.5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 11 2011-05-18

3.9 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAKAGE TESTING (Cont'd)

.8 .9

Examine exposed pipe, joints, fittings and appurtenances while system is under pressure. Remove joints, fittings and appurtenances found defective and replace with new sound material and make watertight. Repeat hydrostatic test until defects have been corrected and leakage amount has been deemed acceptable in the opinion of the Departmental Representative.

.10

3.10

PIPE SURROUND

.1

Upon completion of pipe laying and after Departmental Representative has inspected Work in place, surround and cover pipes as indicated. Hand place surround material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness as indicated. Place layers uniformly and simultaneously on each side of pipe. Do not place material in frozen condition. Compact each layer from pipe invert to underside of backfill to 100% SPD. If cover of 1.5m is not maintained, insulation must be used.

.2

.3 .4 .5 .6

3.11

BACKFILL

.1

Place backfill material, above pipe surround, in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades as indicated. Compact Backfill to 100% SPD.

.2

3.12 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING

.1 .2

Contractor to supply hauled water for flushing and disinfecting. Flushing and disinfecting operations: witnessed by Departmental Representative carried out by Contractor. .1 Notify Departmental Representative at least 4 days in advance of proposed date when disinfecting operations will begin.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 12 2011-05-18

3.12 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING (Cont'd)

.3

All chlorinated water discharged to the natural environment shall be dechlorinated prior to release. Flush water mains through available outlets with a sufficient flow of potable water to produce velocity of 1.5 m/s, within pipe for minimum 10 minutes, or until foreign materials have been removed and flushed water is clear. Provide connections and pumps for flushing as required. Open and close valves, hydrants and service connections to ensure thorough flushing. At a point no more than 3m downstream of the beginning of the watermain, water entering the watermain shall receive a dose of chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will not have less than 25mg/L and not more than 80 mg/L of free chlorine. To ensure that this concentration is adequate, take samples at regular intervals. Samples to be tested by a certified lab to ensure chlorine levels. Measure the chlorine concentration at regular intervals. Allow chlorinated water to stay in watermain for a period of 24 hours. After the 24 hour retention period, a sample is to be tested by a certified laboratory to indicate the level of chlorine. Flush the chlorinated water from the watermain. Continue flushing the watermain until the chlorine residual of the discharge water matches that of the source water. A sample is to be tested by a certified lab to indicate the chlorine level matches the source water. After final flushing, and prior to connecting the new watermain to the distribution system, the contractor shall advise the operating authority who will collect two consecutive sets of acceptable samples, taken at least 24 hours apart shall be collected from the main. At least one set of samples shall be collected form every 360m of the new watermain, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch. All samples shall be tested in accordance with Standard Methods for the examination of water and wastewater for E.Coli, total coliforms, and HPC. Watermain disinfection laboratory tests to be paid by the Contractor.

.4

.5 .6 .7

.8

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Section 33 11 17 Page 13 2011-05-18

3.13 SURFACE RESTORATION

.1

After installing and backfilling over water mains, restore surface to original condition as indicated and as directed by Departmental Representative.

3.14 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

.1

Contractor shall supply to the Departmental Representative an "as-built" drawing indicating the horizontal and vertical alignment of the watermain and appurtenances. All anodes, valves, bends, hydrants tees, changes in material, etc. shall be noted.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS

Section 33 34 02 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 33 05 14: Maintenance holes and catch basins.

1.2 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION

.1

At least 2 weeks prior to commencing work submit manufacturer's test data and certification that pipe materials meet requirements of this section.

1.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1

Provide as built drawings of sewers in accordance with Section 01 11 02 on project completion. Give details of pipe material, location of cleanouts, directions and list of equipment to operate valves, other maintenance and operating instructions.

1.4 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 .2 .3

Schedule work to minimize interruptions to existing services. Maintain existing sewage flows during construction. Submit schedule of expected interruptions for approval and adhere to approved schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PLASTIC PIPE

.1

Gravity sewer pipe and fittings: Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride): to ASTM D3034-08. .1 Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR): 28. .2 Locked-in gasket and integral bell system. .3 Nominal lengths: 4 m.

2.2 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

.1

Cast iron pipe: to CAN/CSA-B70-06 with rubber gasket push-on joints to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Fittings: to CAN/CSA-B70-06. Cast iron service saddles: with oil resistant gaskets, stainless steel clamp and oil resistant "0" rings in branch end.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS

Section 33 34 02 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.3 PIPE BEDDING MATERIALS

.1

Granular material to following requirements: .1 Crushed or screened stone, gravel or sand free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials. .2 Granular 'A': to OPSS 1010, April 2004, maximum size 19 mm. Concrete required for thrust blocks to be 20 MPa.

.2

2.4

INSULATION

.1

HI-40 DOW rigid insulation, or approved equivalent, 50mm thick insulation boards installed as per manufacturer's specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

.1

Clean pipes and fittings of debris and water before installation. Inspect materials for defects before installing. Remove defective materials from site.

3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

.1 .2 .3 .4

Carry out trenching work as required to install sewers to lines and grades indicated. Do not allow contents of any sewer or sewer connection to flow into trench. Trench line require approval prior to placing bedding material and pipe. Do not backfill trenches between joints until pipe grade and alignment have been checked and accepted by Departmental Representative. Do not backfill at joints until pressure and leakage test results are within limits specified unless otherwise approved by Departmental Representative. Protect pipe from freezing if tested at temperatures lower than 5°C. Remove excess excavated material from the site. If cover of 1.5m is not maintained, insulation must be used.

.5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS

Section 33 34 02 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.3

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Place 150 mm granular bedding materials under piping. Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniform bearing surface for barrel of pipe. Do not use blocks when bedding pipe. Shape transverse depressions as required to receive bell if bell and spigot pipe is used. Compact full width of bed to at least 95% Standard Proctor density. Lay and join pipes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Handle pipe carefully with equipment recommended by manufacturer. Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to grade, with pipe invert smooth and high points. Ensure barrel of each contact with shaped bed throughout length. line and free of sags or pipe is in its full

.3 .4 .5 .6 .7

.8 .9 .10

Commence laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction with socket ends of pipe facing upgrade. Do not exceed maximum joint deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not allow water to flow through pipe during construction, except as may be permitted by Departmental Representative. Whenever work is suspended, install removable watertight bulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry of foreign materials. Position and join pipes by approved methods. Do not use excavating equipment to force pipe sections together. Install PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with CAN/CSA-B1800 Series-06. Pipe jointing: .1 Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. .3 Align pipes carefully before joining.

.11

.12

.13 .14

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS

Section 33 34 02 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.3 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.14

Pipe jointing:(Cont'd) .4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel and other foreign material. .5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. Gaskets so disturbed shall be removed, cleaned and lubricated and replaced before joining is attempted. .6 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe. .7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made to avoid joint damage. .8 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is complete as outlined in manufacturer's recommendations. Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings or closure pieces in a neat manner, as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and to leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Make watertight connections to maintenance holes. Use non-shrink grout when suitable gaskets are not available. Place concrete thrust blocks between bends, tees and fittings and undisturbed ground for forcemain lines. Keep pipe couplings free of concrete. Upon completion of pipe laying and after Departmental Representative has inspected pipe joints, place minimum 150 mm granular bedding material around and over top of pipes and compact as for bedding material. Backfill remainder of trench with excavated material. Plug service laterals with water tight caps or plugs as approved by Departmental Representative. Place location marker at ends of plugged or capped unconnected sewer lines.

.15

.16

.17

.18

.19 .20

3.4

FIELD TESTING

.1 .2 .3

Test force main in presence of Departmental Representative. Brace caps, bends and tees to prevent movement during tests. Expel air from main by slowly filling with water. High points to be drilled and tapped and suitable cocks installed to vent air and to be shut when pressure is applied. Remove cocks after

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCEMAINS

Section 33 34 02 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.4 FIELD TESTING (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) satisfactory testing and seal holes with tight fitting plugs. Apply hydrostatic test pressure of 690 kPa based on lowest point in line and corrected to elevation of test gauge for hydrostatic test and 345 kPa for leakage test. Apply pressures for 1 h for pressure test and 2 h for leakage test. Remove defective joints, pipe and fittings where found and replace with new sound material. Define leakage as amount of water from source tank in order to maintain test pressure for 2 h. Allowable leakage to be as defined in AMSI/AWWA C600-10. Repeat testing until test results fall within accepted allowances. Upon the approval of the Departmental Representative CCTV inspection shall be considered an approved alternative to the testing outlined above. Contractor to submit copies of video inspections and reports to Departmentanl Representative for review and approval.

.4

.5 .6 .7

.8 .9

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STORM SEWERS

Section 33 44 01 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 31 23 10:Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. Section 33 05 14: Maintenance holes and catch basins.

1.2 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION

.1

At least 2 weeks prior to commencing work, submit manufacturer's test data and certification that pipe materials meet requirements of this section.

1.3 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 .2 .3

Schedule work to minimize interruptions to existing services. Maintain existing flow during construction. Submit schedule of expected interruptions for review and adhere to approved schedule.

1.4 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1

Make available 1 copy of manufacturer's installation instructions.

2.1

PLASTIC PIPE

.1

Gravity sewer pipe and fittings: Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride): to ASTM D3034-08. .1 Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR): 28. .2 Locked-in gasket and integral bell system. .3 Nominal lengths: 4 m.

2.2 PIPE BEDDING MATERIALS

.1 .2

Granular material: Granular A as per OPSS 1010. Concrete required for cradles, encasement, supports: to Section 03 30 12.

2.3

INSULATION

.1

HI-40 DOW rigid insulation, or approved equivalent, 50mm thick insulation boards installed as per manufacturer's specifications.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STORM SEWERS

Section 33 44 01 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

.1

Clean pipes and fittings of debris and water before installation. Carefully inspect materials for defects before installing. Remove defective materials from site.

3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

.1 .2 .3

Do trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 10. Trench line and depth require approval prior to placing bedding material and pipe. Water jetting of backfill under haunches of corrugated steel pipe may be permitted if recommended by manufacturer and approved by Departmental Representative. If cover of 1.5 is not maintained, insulation must be used.

.4

3.3 GRANULAR BEDDING

.1 .2

Place granular bedding materials to details indicated or directed. Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniform bearing surface for barrel of pipe. Do not use blocks when bedding pipe. Shape transverse depressions as required to receive bell if bell and spigot pipe is used. Compact full width of bed to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density. Use bedding stone in lieu of sand bedding material when directed. Fill excavation below bottom of specified bedding adjacent to maintenance holes or catch basins with bedding material or common backfill as directed.

.3 .4 .5 .6

3.4

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Lay and join pipe in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Handle pipe by approved methods. Do not use chains or cables passed through rigid pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears upon pipe ends.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STORM SEWERS

Section 33 44 01 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.4 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.3

Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade with pipe inverts smooth and free of sags or high points. Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length. Commence laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction with socket ends of pipe facing upgrade. Do not exceed maximum joint deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not allow water to flow through pipes during construction except as may be permitted by Departmental Representative. Position and join pipes by approved methods. Do not use excavating equipment to force pipe sections together. Joints: .1 Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. .3 Align pipes carefully before joining. .4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel and other foreign material. .5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. Gaskets so disturbed shall be removed, cleaned and lubricated and replaced before joining is attempted. .6 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe. .7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made to avoid joint damage. .8 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is complete as outlined in manufacturer's recommendations. When any stoppage of work occurs, block pipes as directed to prevent "creep" during down time. Plug lifting holes with approved prefabricated plugs set in non-shrink grout. Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings or closure pieces in a neat manner, as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and to leave a smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Use prefabricated saddles or approved field connections for connecting pipes to existing sewer

.4 .5 .6

.7

.8

.9 .10 .11

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STORM SEWERS

Section 33 44 01 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.4 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.12

(Cont'd) pipes. Joint to be structurally sound and watertight. Plug open upstream ends of pipes with removable watertight concrete, steel or wooden bulkheads.

.13

END

Public Works and Government Services Canada Architectural and Engineering Services

BATH INSTITUTION
Hwy 33, Bath, Ontario
BB36 - ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 BB37 - ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5

PWGSC Project No. R.043794.001

SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 2 OF 5:
ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36)

Issued for Bid 2011-05-18

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-05-18

Section

Title

Pages

VOLUME 2 OF 5 - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36) Division 03 - Concrete 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 30 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING 03 41 00 PRECAST CONCRETE Division 04 - Masonry 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY Division 05 - Metals 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING 05 41 00 LOAD-BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING 05 50 01 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 51 29 METAL STAIRS Division 06 - Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 40 01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 20 00 INSULATION 07 25 00 MODIFIED BITUMEN (SBS) AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER 07 46 13 PREFORMED METAL CLADDING 07 55 50 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 61 13 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 81 00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 84 00 FIRE STOPPING 07 90 00 JOINT SEALING Division 08 - Openings 08 11 00 METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS 08 14 10 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 80 50 GLAZING 08 90 00 LOUVRES AND VENTS Division 09 - Finishes 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 53 00 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 69 01 ACCESS FLOORING 09 91 00 PAINTING 09 96 00 SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING 4 3 10 4 6 7 5 5 5 7 5 5 8 4 4 6 10 7 6 6 7 5 10 5 9 17 8 4 9 4 3 4 5 6 14 9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-05-18

Division 10 - Specialties 10 11 23 TACKBOARDS 10 28 00 MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS Division 11 - Equipment 11 19 12 DETENTION HARDWARE 11 19 13 DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES ---------------------BB36 ACCOMMODATION BB36 ACCOMMODATION BB36 ACCOMMODATION WINDOWS AND GLAZED UNIT #4 - ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE UNIT #4 - DOOR SCHEDULE UNIT #4 - SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR SCREENS

3 8 2 25 7 9 6 1

Refer to Volumes 1, and 3 to 5 for the remainder of the specifications VOLUME 1 OF 5 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, EXISTING CONDITIONS, ELECTRICAL/ COMMUNICATIONS - SITE, AND CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 3 OF 5 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36) VOLUME 4 OF 5 - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5 (BB37) VOLUME 5 OF 5 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5 (BB37)

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

Section 03 10 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

.1

No measurement will be made under this Section. Include costs in items of work for which concrete formwork and falsework is required.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CSA S269.1-1975(R2003), Falsework for Construction Purposes. .4 CAN/CSA-S269.3-M92(R2008), Concrete Formwork. Council of Forest Industries of British Columbia (COFI) .1 COFI Exterior Plywood for Concrete Formwork.

.2

1.3

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings for formwork and falsework in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate method and schedule of construction, shoring, stripping and re-shoring procedures, materials, arrangement of joints, special architectural exposed finishes, ties, liners, and locations of temporary embedded parts. Comply with CSA S269.1, for falsework drawings. Comply with CAN/CSA-S269.3 for formwork drawings. Indicate formwork design data, such as permissible rate of concrete placement, and temperature of concrete, in forms. Indicate sequence of erection and removal of formwork/falsework as directed by Departmental Representative. Each shop drawing submission shall bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

Section 03 10 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and the Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children. Use sealers, form release and stripping agents that are non-toxic, biodegradable and have zero or low VOC's.

.2 .3 .4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Formwork materials: .1 For concrete without special architectural features, use wood and wood product formwork materials to CSA O121. .2 For concrete with special architectural features, use formwork materials to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Form ties: .1 For concrete not designated 'Architectural', use removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm dia. in concrete surface. .2 For architectural concrete, use snap ties complete with plastic cones and light grey concrete plugs. Form liner: .1 Plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, Grade G1S, T&G, square edge, thickness to suit application conditions, urea formaldehyde free. Form release agent: non-toxic, biodegradable, low VOC. Falsework materials: to CSA S269.1. Sealant: to Section 07 90 00.

.2

.3

.4 .5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

Section 03 10 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

.1

Verify lines, levels and centres before proceeding with formwork/falsework and ensure dimensions agree with drawings. Fabricate and erect falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1 and COFI Exterior Plywood for Concrete Formwork. Refer to architectural drawings for concrete members requiring architectural exposed finishes. Do not place shores and mud sills on frozen ground. Provide site drainage to prevent washout of soil supporting mud sills and shores. Fabricate and erect formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA-S269.3 to produce finished concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations and levels indicated within tolerances required by CSA A23.1/A23.2. Align form joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to minimum. Use 25 mm chamfer strips on external corners and/or 25 mm fillets at interior corners, joints, unless specified otherwise. Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated. Construct forms for architectural concrete, and place ties as indicated and/or as directed. Joint pattern not necessarily based on using standard size panels or maximum permissible spacing of ties. Build in anchors, sleeves, and other inserts required to accommodate Work specified in other sections. Assure that all anchors and inserts will not protrude beyond surfaces designated to receive applied finishes, including painting. Clean formwork in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, before placing concrete.

.2

.3

.4 .5 .6

.7 .8

.9 .10

.11

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

Section 03 10 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.2 REMOVAL AND RESHORING

.1

Leave formwork in place for following minimum periods of time after placing concrete. .1 4 days for walls and sides of beams. .2 7 days for beam soffits, slabs, decks and other structural members. Remove formwork when concrete has reached 75% of its design strength or minimum period noted above, whichever comes later, and replace immediately with adequate reshoring. Provide all necessary reshoring of members where early removal of forms may be required or where members may be subjected to additional loads during construction as required. Space reshoring in each principal direction at not more than 3000 mm apart. Re-use formwork and falsework subject to requirements of CSA A23.1/A23.2.

.2

.3

.4 .5

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE REINFORCING

Section 03 20 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 03 30 11 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A185/A185M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. .2 CSA A23.3-04(R2010), Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings. .3 CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .4 CSA W186-M1990(R2007), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction. Ontario Provincial Standard Specification: .1 OPSS 1442-Nov2007, Material Specification For Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars For Concrete. .2 OPSS 1443-Nov2007, Material Specification For Organic Coatings For Reinforcing Steel Bars For Concrete.

.2

.3

1.3

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1

Submit shop drawings including placing of reinforcement in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate on shop drawings, bar bending details, lists, quantities of reinforcement, sizes, spacings, locations of reinforcement and mechanical splices if approved by Departmental Representative, with identifying code marks to permit correct placement without reference to structural drawings. Indicate sizes, spacings and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers. Prepare reinforcement drawings in accordance with Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice - by Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE REINFORCING

Section 03 20 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)

.3

Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths to CSA A23.3, unless otherwise indicated. Provide Type B tension lap splices unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and the Waste Reduction Workplan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Substitute different size bars only if permitted in writing by Departmental Representative. Reinforcing steel: billet steel, Grade 400, deformed bars to CSA G30.18, unless indicated otherwise. Reinforcing steel: weldable low alloy steel deformed bars to CSA G30.18. Welded steel wire fabric: to ASTM A185/A185M. Provide in flat sheets only. Epoxy coating of non-prestressed reinforcement: to OPSS 1442 and OPSS 1443. Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Mechanical splices: subject to approval of Departmental Representative.

.2

.3 .4 .5 .6 .7

2.2

FABRICATION

.1

Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada. Obtain Departmental Representative's approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than those shown on placing drawings. Upon approval of Departmental Representative, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE REINFORCING

Section 03 20 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.2 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.4

Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar bending details and lists.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Upon request, provide Departmental Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 4 weeks prior to commencing reinforcing work. Upon request inform Departmental Representative of proposed source of material to be supplied.

.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

FIELD BENDING

.1

Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by Departmental Representative. When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady pressure. Replace bars which develop cracks or splits.

.2 .3

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

.1

Place reinforcing steel as indicated on reviewed placing drawings and in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. Prior to placing concrete, obtain Departmental Representative's approval of reinforcing material and placement. Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete pour. Protect epoxy coated portions of bars with covering during transportation and handling.

.2

.3 .4

3.3

FIELD TOUCH-UP

.1

Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated reinforcing steel with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C260/C260M-10a, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .2 ASTM C309-07, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. .3 ASTM C494/C494M-10a, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. .4 ASTM D624-00(2007),Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. .5 ASTM D638-10, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. .6 ASTM D1751-04(2008), Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. .2 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86(R1988), Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005). .3 CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment. .4 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steel.

.2

.3

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM

.1

Provide sealant and polyethylene products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Certification Criteria Document CCD-045-95

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) Sealants and Caulking Compounds, and CCD-126-95 Plastic Film Products. Submit two copies of the licensing criteria statements and the verification of compliance with Sections 3(a) and 3(b) of the CCD to the Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 45 00. Alternatively, material in original containers bearing the 'Ecologo' or products bearing the 'Ecologo' will satisfy this requirement. For primers and sealants, indicate VOC in g/l during application and curing.

.2

1.3

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. At least 4 weeks prior to commencing work, inform Departmental Representative of proposed source of aggregates and provide access for sampling.

1.4

CERTIFICATES

.1 .2

Submit certificates according to Section 01 33 00 and Section 01 78 00. Minimum 4 weeks prior to starting concrete work submit to Departmental Representative manufacturer's test data and certification by qualified independent inspection and testing laboratory that following materials will meet specified requirements: .1 Portland cement .2 Blended hydraulic cement .3 Supplementary cementing materials .4 Grout .5 Admixtures .6 Aggregates .7 Water .8 Joint filler Provide certification that mix proportions selected will produce concrete of quality, yield and strength as specified for concrete mixes, and will comply with CSA A23.1/A23.2.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Minimum 4 weeks prior to starting concrete work submit proposed quality control procedures, in accordance with Section 01 45 00, for Departmental Representative's approval for followings items: .1 Falsework erection .2 Hot weather concrete .3 Cold weather concrete .4 Curing .5 Finishes .6 Formwork removal .7 Joints Concrete pours: submit accurate records of poured concrete items indicating date and location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken as described in PART 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.

.2

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Concrete hauling time: maximum allowable time for concrete to be delivered to site of Work and discharged not to exceed 120 minutes after batching. .1 Modifications to maximum time limit must be agreed to by Departmental Representative and concrete producer as described in CSA A23.1/A23.2. .2 Deviations to be submitted for review to Departmental Representative. Concrete delivery: ensure continuous concrete delivery from plant meets CSA A23.1/A23.2. Carefully coordinate the specified concrete work with weather conditions.

.2 .3

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and Waste Reduction Plan. Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. Designate a cleaning area for tools to limit water use and run-off. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely away for disposal. Prevent plasticizers, water-reducing agents, air-entraining agents and other admixtures and

.2 .3 .4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) additive materials from entering drinking water supplies or streams. Using appropriate safety precautions, collect liquid or solidify liquid with inert, non-combustible material and remove for disposal. Dispose of waste in accordance with applicable local, Provincial and National regulations. Choose least harmful, appropriate cleaning method which will perform adequately.

.6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A3000, Type GU. Blended hydraulic cement: to CAN/CSA-A3000, Type GUb. Supplementary cementing materials: to CAN/CSA-A3000. Water: to CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 9, potable. Aggregates: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Coarse aggregates to be normal density. Air entraining admixture: to ASTM C260/C260M. Chemical admixture: to ASTM C494/C494M. Departmental Representative to approve accelerating or set retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing. Concrete retarders: to ASTM C494/C494M, water based, low VOC, solvent free. Do not allow moisture of any kind to come in contact with the retarder film. Shrinkage compensating grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, Portland cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. .1 Compressive strength: 50 MPa at 28 days, 20 MPa at 24 hours. .2 Net shrinkage at 28 days: maximum 0.30%. Curing and sealing compound: to CSA A23.1/A23.2, white, and to ASTM C309, Type 1, chlorinated rubber.

.8

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.11

Joint filler: Preformed, asphalt saturated fibre to ASTM D1751. Use bond break paper as indicated on drawings.
Concrete reinforcing: to Section 03 20 00. Dampproofing below slabs: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.15 mm polyethylene, Ecologo certified, joints lapped 300 mm minimum. Sealant: multi-component, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Type 1, Class B, Ecologo certified, compatible with joint filler. Anchor bolts: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, minimum 30% recycled content. Dovetail anchor slots: 0.6 mm thick, galvanized steel with insulation filled slots. Ribbed waterstops: extruded PVC Arctic Grade of sizes indicated with shop welded corner and intersecting pieces with legs not less than 150 mm long: .1 Tensile strength: to ASTM D638, minimum 13 MPa. .2 Elongation: to ASTM D638, minimum 0.31%. .3 Tear resistance: to ASTM D624, method A, Die "B", minimum 50 kN/m. Safety stair nosings: .1 Nosing base: extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5, 6 x 47 mm wide, 3-10 mm wide x 4.5 mm deep filler grooves, 12.7 mm exposed nosing edge, continuous integral concrete anchorm. .2 Anti-slip filler: epoxy cement with not less than 65% aluminum oxide/silicon carbide abrasive, uniformly coloured black throughout, finished 2.5 mm above aluminum surfaces.

.12 .13

.14

.15 .16 .17

.18

2.2

MIXES

.1

Design concrete mix in conformance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, mixed proportion method Alternative 1 and as follows: .1 Exposure Classification C-2 with 25% Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag, for pavements, sidewalks, curbs and gutters. Compressive strength at 28 days minimum 32 MPa. .2 Exposure Classification F-2 with 25% Portland cement replaced with cementitious hydraulic slag, for basement walls and basement slabs, and for exposed exterior beams, columns,

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.2 MIXES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) walls and slabs. Compressive strength at 28 days minimum 25 MPa. .3 Slabs-on-Grade: Use Type GU Portland cement. When mean daily temperature exceeds 18°C at time of placement, replace 25% of cement with cementitious hydraulic slag. .1 Water/cement ratio: 0.45 maximum. 3 .2 Cement content: 320 kg/m minimum. .3 Modulus of rapture: 3.5 MPa average, 3.0 MPa minimum. .4 Slump at delivery, before addition of superplasticizer: 50 mm; add superplasticizer, not water, to bring slump to level acceptable to floor finisher for placement. .4 Interior concrete, other than specified above, and not exposed to freezing and thawing or the application of deicing chemicals: .1 Select water/cement ratio and cement content on basis of strength, workability and finishing requirements. .5 Columns: Incorporate superplasticizer to provide 200 mm slump concrete for columns.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

.1

Obtain Departmental Representative's approval before placing concrete. Provide 24 hours notice prior to placing of concrete. Pumping of concrete is permitted only after approval of equipment and mix. Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement. Prior to placing of concrete obtain Departmental Representative's approval of proposed method for protection of concrete during placing and curing in adverse weather. Maintain accurate records of poured concrete items to indicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete. Place steel dowels of deformed steel reinforcing bars and pack solidly with shrinkage

.2 .3 .4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.1 PREPARATION (Cont'd)

.6

(Cont'd) compensating grout to anchor and hold dowels in positions as indicated. Do not place load upon new concrete until authorized by Departmental Representative.

.7

3.2 PLACING AND INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Do concrete work in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. Sleeves and inserts: .1 Do not permit penetrations, sleeves, ducts, pipes or other openings to pass through joists, beams, column capitals or columns, except where indicated or approved by Departmental Representative. .2 Where approved by Departmental Representative, set sleeves, ties, pipe hangers and other inserts and openings as indicated or specified elsewhere. .3 Sleeves and openings greater than 100 x 100 mm not indicated, must be reviewed by Departmental Representative. .4 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware. If inserts cannot be located as specified, obtain approval of modifications from Departmental Representative before placing of concrete. .5 Check locations and sizes of sleeves and openings shown on drawings. .6 Set special inserts for strength testing as indicated and as required by non-destructive method of testing concrete. Bases for lightpoles: .1 Construct bases for lightpoles as indicated on drawings. Anchor bolts to be supplied by lightpole manufacturer and installed under this Section. Anchor bolts: .1 Set anchor bolts to templates under supervision of appropriate trade prior to placing concrete. .2 With approval of Departmental Representative, grout anchor bolts in preformed holes or holes drilled after concrete has set. Drilled holes to manufacturers's recommendations. .3 Set bolts and fill holes with shrinkage compensating grout.

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.2 PLACING AND INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.5

Dovetail anchor slots: Install continuous vertical anchor slot to .1 forms where masonry abuts concrete wall or columns. .2 Install continuous vertical anchor slots at 800 mm on centre where concrete walls are masonry faced.
Grout under base plates using procedures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations which result in 100% contact over grouted area. Waterstops: .1 Install waterstops at construction joints and where indicated on drawings. .2 Install waterstops to provide continuous water seal. .3 Do not distort or pierce waterstop in way as to hamper performance. .4 Do not displace reinforcement when installing waterstops. .5 Use equipment to manufacturer's requirements to field splice waterstops. .6 Tie waterstops rigidly in place. .7 Use only straight heat sealed butt joints in field. .8 Use factory welded corners and intersections unless otherwise approved by Departmental Representative. Joint fillers: .1 Furnish filler for each joint in single piece for depth and width required for joint, unless otherwise authorized by Departmental Representative. .2 When more than one piece is required for joint, fasten abutting ends and hold securely to shape by stapling or other positive fastening. .3 Locate and form joints as indicated. .4 Install joint filler. .5 Use 12 mm thick joint filler to separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces and extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 12 mm of finished slab surface unless indicated otherwise. Dampproof membrane: .1 Install dampproof membrane under concrete slabs-on-grade inside building. .2 Lap dampproof membrane minimum 150 mm at joints and seal. .3 Seal punctures in dampproof membrane before placing concrete. .4 Use patching material at least 150 mm larger than puncture and seal.

.6

.7

.8

.9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.2 PLACING AND INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.10 .11 .12

Provide 25 mm chamfer on exposed corners. Build-in items supplied by other Sections. Sawcut control joints 1/4 of floor slab thickness with 5 mm blade. When concrete has cured 7 days, prime joint and apply sealant to manufacturer's instructions. Terminate nosings within 100 mm of ends of steps in poured concrete stairs; for concrete-filled steel pan stairs, make nosings full stair width less 3 mm clearance. Install nosings flush with top of traffic surface before initial set occurs in concrete.

.13

.14

3.3

TOPPINGS

.1

Toppings: .1 Topping mixture to meet following requirements: .1 Monolithic, thickness as indicated. .2 Bonded overlay, thickness as indicated. .2 In pouring base course, make allowance for monolithic and bonded overlay topping thickness. .3 Apply latex bonding agent modified cement/sand grout to base course in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 and manufacturer's recommendations before placing bonded topping. Observe manufacturer's safety recommendations. .4 Place monolithic topping before base course has completely set, in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 and topping manufacturer's recommendations. .5 Place bonded topping over hardener base course, in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 and topping manufacturer's recommendations. .6 Follow Departmental Representative's instructions in case of conflicting requirements between CSA A23.1/A23.2 and manufacturer's recommendations. .7 Ensure that joints in topping are of same material as those in base course. Also ensure that their locations precisely match those in base course. Provide dividers, edge strips, reinforcing mesh as indicated.

3.4

FINISHING

.1

Finish concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Section 03 30 11 Page 10 2011-05-18

3.4 FINISHING (Cont'd)

.2

Use procedures acceptable to Departmental Representative or those noted in CSA A23.1/A23.2 to remove excess bleed water. Ensure surface is not damaged.
Formed surfaces exposed to view: sack rubbed finish in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2. Interior floor slabs to be left exposed or to receive epoxy, or other covering requiring a smooth surface: initial finishing operations followed by final finishing comprising mechanical floating and steel trowelling in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 22 to produce hard, smooth, dense steel trowelled surface free from blemishes; finish classification Class B. Equipment pads: smooth trowelled surface; in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 22, finish classification Class B. Pavements, walks, curbs and exposed site concrete: screed to plane surfaces and float using aluminum, magnesium, or wood floats in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Table 22, finish classification Class A. Round edges and provide joint spacings using standard tools. Trowel smooth followed by lightly brushed non-slip finish. Hardened floor finish: as specified in 3.3.1.4 in conjunction with application of hardener applied, according to Section 03 35 00. Apply concrete floor sealer to concrete floor slabs as indicated, in accordance with Section 03 35 00 and manufacturer's instructions. Depressions in floors between high spots not greater than 5 mm below a 3 m straight edge and in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Clause 7.5.1.1 and Table 22, finish classification Class B.

.3 .4

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9

3.5

CURING

.1

Cure concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2, Clause 7.4 and Table 20, 2-Additional, and Annex D.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FINISHING

Section 03 35 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 03 30 11 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealer for Floors. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete.

.2

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2

Product quality and quality of work in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Submit written declaration that components used are compatible and will not adversely affect finished flooring products and their installation adhesives.

1.4

PRODUCT DATA

.1 .2

Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. WHMIS MSDS acceptable to Labour Canada and Health and Welfare Canada for concrete floor treatment materials. Indicate VOC content. Include application instructions for concrete floor treatments.

.3

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and the Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FINISHING

Section 03 35 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)

.4 .5

Use sealers and hardeners that are non-toxic, biodegradable and have zero or low VOC's.
Dispose of surplus chemical and finishing materials in accordance with federal, provincial and municipal regulations. Dispose of waste from stripping of floors in a manner that will not have unfavourable effects on the environment.

.6

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1

Temporary lighting: .1 Minimum 1200 W light source, placed 2.5 m above floor surface, for each 40 sqm of floor being treated. Electrical power: .1 Provide sufficient electrical power to operate equipment normally used during construction. Work area: .1 Make the work area water tight protected against rain and detrimental weather conditions. Temperature: .1 Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 10°C from 7 days before installation to at least 48 hours after completion of work and maintain relative humidity not higher than 40% during same period. Moisture: .1 Ensure concrete substrate is within moisture limits prescribed by flooring manufacturer. Safety: .1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. Ventilation: .1 Ventilate area of work as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. .3 Provide continuous ventilation during and after coating application.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FINISHING

Section 03 35 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHEMICAL HARDENERS

.1 .2

Non-metal, sodium silicate based. Water: potable.

2.2 SEALING COMPOUNDS

.1 .2

Surface sealer: to CAN/CGSB-25.20, Type 2 water based, clear. Surface sealers may not be manufactured or formulated with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavelant chromium, and their compounds.

2.3 CURING COMPOUNDS

.1

Select low VOC, water-based, organic-solvent free curing compounds.

2.4

MIXES

.1

Mixing, ratios and application in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION

.1

Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.2

APPLICATION

.1

Apply concrete finishing floor hardener in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. After floor treatment is dry, seal control joints and joints at junction with vertical surfaces with sealant. .1 Sealants: according to Section 07 90 00. Apply floor treatment in accordance with sealer manufacturer's written instructions. Clean overspray and clean sealant from adjacent surfaces.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

CONCRETE FINISHING

Section 03 35 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.3

PROTECTION

.1

Protect finished installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PRECAST CONCRETE

Section 03 41 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A185/A185M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. .3 ASTM C260/C260M-10a, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/ Methods of Test for Concrete, Includes Update No.1(2011). .2 CSA A23.3-04, Design of Concrete. Structures, Includes Update No.1 (2005), Update No.2 (2007), and Update No.3 (2009). .3 CSA A23.4-09, Precast Concrete - Materials and Construction, Includes Update No.1 (July 2010). .4 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005), Includes Update No.1 (2009), Update No.2 (2010). .1 CAN/CSA-A3001-08, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete. .5 CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .7 CAN/CSA-S6-06, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code. .8 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding for Steel. .9 CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding (Developed in co-operation with the Canadian Welding Bureau). .10 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) (Metric version).

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PRECAST CONCRETE

Section 03 41 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.1 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) .11 CSA W186-M1990(R2007), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2

Design precast elements to CSA A23.3 and CSA A23.4 to carry handling stresses. Design precast elements to carry loads specified by Departmental Representative or as indicated, in accordance with applicable codes. Design connections/attachments of precast elements to loads/forces specified by Departmental Representative.

.3

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1

Tolerance of precast elements to CSA A23.4.

1.4

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2 .3

Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Submit shop drawings in accordance with CSA A23.4 and include following items: .1 Design calculations for items designed by manufacturer. .2 Details of prestressed and non-prestressed members, reinforcement and their connections. .3 Camber. .4 Finishing schedules. .5 Methods of handling and erection. .6 Openings, sleeves, inserts and related reinforcement. Submit detailed calculations and design drawings for typical precast elements and connections for review by Departmental Representative 3 weeks prior to manufacture. Shop Drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PRECAST CONCRETE

Section 03 41 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5

QUALIFICATIONS

.1

Precast concrete elements to be fabricated and erected by manufacturing plant certified in appropriate categories according to CSA A23.4. Precast concrete manufacturer to be certified in accordance with CSA's certification procedures for precast concrete plants prior to submitting bid and to specifically verify as part of tender that plant is currently certified in appropriate categories, Concrete Poles, Concrete Ties, Pull Boxes. Only precast elements fabricated in such certified plants to be acceptable to Departmental Representative and plant certification to be maintained for duration of fabrication and erection until warranty expires. Welding companies certified to CSA W47.1.

.2

.3

.4

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 .2 .3

Deliver, handle and store precast units according to manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from contacting earth to prevent from staining. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion, in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

1.7

WARRANTY

.1

Contractor warrants that precast elements will not spall or show visible evidence of cracking, except for normal hairline shrinkage cracks, in accordance with General Conditions, for 12 months warranty period, which is extended to 60 months.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PRECAST CONCRETE

Section 03 41 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Cement to CAN/CSA-A3000, Type GU. Aggregates, water, admixtures, supplementary cementing materials to CSA A23.1/A23.2, CSA A23.4 and CAN/CSA-A3000. Reinforcing steel: to CSA G30.18. Welded wire fabric: to ASTM A185/A185M. Hardware and miscellaneous materials: to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Forms: to CSA A23.4. Anchors and supports: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21 Type 400W galvanized after fabrication. Welding materials: to CSA W48. Welding electrodes: to CSA W48 certified by Canadian Welding Bureau. Galvanizing: to ASTM A123/A123M, hot-dip galvanizing, minimum coating Grade 85 2 (600 g/m ). Steel primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Zinc-rich primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Shims: plastic.

.3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10

.11 .12 .13

2.2

MIXES

.1

Concrete mixes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, use concrete mix designed to produce concrete meeting following requirements: .1 Compressive strength: 35 MPa at 28 days. .2 Class of exposure: C-1. .3 Air content: 5% to 7%. Air entrainment in accordance with CSA A23.1/A23.2 .4 Water/cement ratio to CSA A23.4. .5 Use cement and supplementary cementing materials that conform to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Grout: shrinkage compensating grout to Section 03 30 11.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PRECAST CONCRETE

Section 03 41 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

.1 .2

Manufacture units in accordance with CSA A23.4. Mark each precast unit to correspond to identification mark on shop drawings for location with date cast on part of unit not be exposed. Provide hardware suitable for handling elements. Galvanize steel embedments after fabrication and touch up with zinc-rich primer after welding.

.3 .4

2.4

FINISHES

.1

Finish units to commercial grade to CSA A23.4.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Provide Departmental Representative with certified copies of quality control tests related to this project as specified in CSA A23.4. Provide records from in-house quality control programme based upon plant certification requirements to Departmental Representative for inspection and review. Upon request, provide Departmental Representative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel supplied, showing physical and chemical analysis. Precast plants should keep complete records of supply source of concrete material, steel reinforcement and provide to Departmental Representative for review upon request.

.2

.3

.4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

ERECTION

.1 .2

Do precast concrete work in accordance with CSA A23.4, and CAN/CSA-S6. Do welding in accordance with CSA W59, for welding to steel structures and CSA W186, for welding of reinforcement. Erect precast elements within allowable tolerances as specified.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PRECAST CONCRETE

Section 03 41 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.1 ERECTION (Cont'd)

.4 .5

Non-cumulative erection tolerances in accordance with CSA A23.4.
Set elevations and alignment between units to within allowable tolerances before connecting units. Grout underside of unit bearing plates with shrinkage compensating grout. Fasten precast units in place as indicated on reviewed shop drawings. Use grout to align elevations of surfaces at joints. Slope grout not more than 1:12. Key in grout to 10 mm thickness. Clean field welds with wire brush and touch-up galvanized finish with zinc-rich primer.

.6 .7 .8

.9

3.2

VERIFICATION

.1

Ensure concrete supplier meets performance criteria of concrete as established in Part 2 Products, by Departmental Representative and provide verification of compliance.

3.3

CLEANING

.1

Use cleaning methods as reviewed by Departmental Representative before cleaning soiled precast concrete surfaces.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

UNIT MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A82/A82M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium. .2 CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. .3 CSA A165 Series-04(R2009) (consists of A165.1, A165.2, A165.3). .4 CSA A179-04(R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry. .5 CSA A370-04(R2009), Connectors for Masonry. .6 CSA A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings. .7 CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .8 CSA S304.1-04, Design of Masonry Structures. .9 CSA W186-M1990(R2007), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

.2

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1

Submit product data sheet for each item. Indicate VOC's mortar, grout, parging, colour additives and admixtures. Indicate % recycled content and fly ash content indicating Total Cement Reduction Factor. Submit samples according to Section 01 33 00.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

UNIT MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3

MOCK-UPS

.1

Construct 2400 mm long x 1200 mm high mock-up panel of each masonry unit and colour specified, in location directed by Departmental Representative. Construct mock-up to illustrate exterior corner and jointing. Use specified mortar products. Reviewed mock-up will serve to illustrate workmanship and colour blending. Remove mock-up at project completion.

.2 .3 .4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

.1

Bubble-cured or low pressure steam cured cellular concrete masonry units to CSA A165.1, sizes as indicated: .1 H/15/A/M, hollow, normal weight for standard units: foundation walls, partitions, load-bearing walls. .2 SF/15/A/M, solid, normal weight for architectural concrete block. .3 Special shapes: provide bullnosed units for exposed corners. Provide purpose-made shapes for lintels and bond beams. Provide additional special shapes as indicated. .4 Recycled content: minimum 5% post-consumer recycled content or minimum 20% pre-consumer recycled content. .5 Colour: selected from manufacturer's standard range. Types and colours: .1 Interior: standard units to receive paint finish. .2 Exterior/ interior: architectural concrete masonry units: .1 Split faced - medium ragged surface on exposed face, colour as scheduled, 90 mm thick. Use mitred or L-shapes at corners. .2 Ledge: ledge along top edge, colour as indicated. Mitre at exterior corners. Mortar: to CSA A179, Proportion specification. Select type from table below. .1 Exterior above grade: .1 Type S: loadbearing walls requiring high compressive strength. .2 Type N: loadbearing walls requiring low compressive strength.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

UNIT MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS (Cont'd)

.3

Mortar:(Cont'd) .1 Exterior above grade:(Cont'd) .3 Type N: Non-loadbearing walls, parapet walls. .2 Exterior at or below grade: .1 Type S: foundation walls, retaining walls, manholes, sewers, pavements, walks and patios. .3 Interior: .1 Type N: loadbearing walls and nonloadbearing partitions. .4 Fine grout to Table 3. .5 Parging: Mortar Types S, or N, are suitable for parging. Match mortar used for masonry, or use Type N if masonry mortar is weaker than aforementioned types, or if type is not known. Admixtures for mortar colour: metallic oxide pigment. Connectors: to CSA A370, minimum Level 2 corrosion protection. .1 Adjustable anchors for welding to steel columns. .2 Adjustable shear connector: hot dip galvanized steel connector plate and V-shaped tie, polyethylene insulation support. .3 Dovetail ties: 2.65 mm galvanized steel, to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 coating, 25 mm wide of required length, dovetail head to engage dovetail anchor slots. Horizontal reinforcement: to CSA A371, truss type, heavy duty, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, coating Grade 85, 50 mm narrower than masonry units. Insulation retaining wedges: pvc, U-shape wedge, rib face locking system. Reinforcing bars: to CSA G30.18, Grade 400, deformed. Cell vent weep-hole ventilator: flexible U.V. resistant polypropylene co-polymer, sized to match masonry units, colours selected from manufacturer's standard range. Masonry flashing: SBS modified bitumen reinforced with proprietary glass scrim, 1.2 mm thick, compatible with air/vapour barrier specified in Section 07 25 00.

.4 .5

.6

.7 .8 .9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

UNIT MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS (Cont'd)

.11 .12

Masonry flashing adhesive: as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
Compartment flashing: 1.2 mm thick brake-formed sheet steel hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 coating. Motar dropping control device: 25 mm wide x 250 mm high, recycled polyester or high density polyethylene. Concrete aggregate: to CSA A23.1/A23.2, 10 mm maximum size. Fibre firestopping: bearing ULC label, mineral fibre material capable of being compressed into space at top of masonry partitions. Metal lath: hexagonal wire mesh reinforcement, 38 mm mesh of 1.37 mm galvanized woven wire or 25 mm mesh of 1.20 mm galvanized woven wire. Adjustable anchor to wind-load bearing studs: hot dip galvanized, plate to suit stud depth, sheathing and insulation, side mounted to stud with screw fasteners, complete with V-tie to anchor veneer to plate.

.13

.14 .15

.16

.17

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING AND APPROVAL

.1 .2

In accordance CSA A179. Do not commence masonry work until mortar is tested and approved by Departmental Representative. Concrete mix shall attain: .1 20 MPa compressive strength at 28 days. .2 200 mm slump at time of deposit.

.3

3.2

PROTECTION

.1

Protect in accordance with CSA A371, except following requirements supplement Clause 5.15.2: .1 Maintain temperature of mortar between 5°C and 50°C until used.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

UNIT MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.3 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP

.1 .2

In accordance with CSA A371. Joints of uniform thickness. Tolerances suggested in notes to Clause 5.3 of CSA A371 apply. Align vertical joints. Lay maximum 1800 mm height of masonry per day. Cut masonry with power saw. Fill space between top of non-bearing partitions, underside of deck and underside of structural members with fibre firestopping compressed as recommended by Manufacturer and requirements of ULC tests. Neatly trim on each side of partitions. Obtain lateral support angles, channels, anchors from Section 05 50 01 and install at required spacing. Install mineral fibre joint filler between: .1 Exterior masonry walls and columns. .2 Masonry and lintels. Do masonry reinforcing, tying and connecting in accordance with CSA A370 and CSA A371. If there is conflict in the requirements of these two standards, the more stringent requirement shall apply. Lightly wet set masonry surfaces before laying abutting masonry. Remove surplus mortar and mortar droppings as work progresses. Masonry bond: running bond. Concave joints, strike flush behind resilient base to height of base. Build in items supplied by other sections. Fill built-in interior hollow metal frames with mortar. Control joints: Provide continuous vertical control joints in block partitions in following locations: .1 Where new partitions abutt existing partitions. .2 In new partitions in indicated locations and not spaced farther than 7.5 m o.c. .3 On each side of column.

.3 .4 .5 .6

.7

.8

.9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

UNIT MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.3 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP (Cont'd)

.15

Control joints:(Cont'd) Install bond breaker as indicated. .4 .5 Stop masonry reinforcement each side of control joint. Keep joint free of mortar. Mechanically fasten lath through insulation to concrete and concrete block wall at 400 mm o.c. horizontally and vertically. Overlap joints minimum 100 mm. Extend lath minimum 300 mm below finished grade. Apply 13 mm thick parging where indicated. Reinforced lintels: .1 Install reinforced block lintels at openings. .2 Provide minimum bearing of 200 mm at each side of opening. .3 Install reinforcing bars and fill with concrete. .4 Set block lintels in place using specified mortar. Install masonry flashing over foundation walls on which masonry units bear, over lintels built into masonry and above roof flashing where roof abutts masonry. Extend masonry flashing beyond exterior face and turn down 45° to form a drip, through outer wythe, up backing material minimum 200 mm and turn into joint anchor top edge continuously at inner wythe. Lap joints 100 mm and apply adhesive. Place reinforcing bars in cavities and fill cavity with concrete where indicated. Cell vent weep-hole ventilator in every third vertical masonry joint at top of masonry panels. Cell vent weep-hole ventilator in every third vertical masonry joint at bottom course and first course above lintels. Mechanically fasten metal lath through insulation into foundation wall. Apply 10 mm thick parging to foundation walls insulation. Install compartment flashings at control joints as indicated.

.16

.17 .18

.19

.20

.21 .22 .23

.24 .25 .26

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

UNIT MASONRY

Section 04 20 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.4

CLEANING

.1 .2 .3

Remove excess mortar and smears. Point or replace defective mortar. Scrub surfaces clean.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Section 05 12 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A325M-09, Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric). Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc Rich Coating. .3 CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals. Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)/Canadian Paint Manufacturer's Association (CPMA). .1 CISC/CPMA 2-75, Quick-Drying Primer for use on Structural Steel. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA S16-09, Design of Steel Structures. .3 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .4 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .5 CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. .6 CSA W55.3-08, Certification of Companies for Resistance Welding of Steel and Aluminum. .7 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) .1 SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. .2 SSPC-SP 7/NACE No.4, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Section 05 12 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1

Submit shop drawings including fabrication and erection drawings, and materials list in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Erection drawings: indicate details and information necessary for assembly and erection purposes including: .1 Description of methods. .2 Sequence of erection. .3 Type of equipment used in erection. .4 Temporary bracings. Shop drawings shall bear the stamp of a registered professional engineer, registered in the Province of Ontario, Canada.

.2

.3

1.3

SAMPLES

.1

Submit samples in accordances with Section 01 33 00.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1

Design details and connections in accordance with requirements of CSA S16 and CSA S136 to resist forces, moments, shears and movements indicated. If connection for shear only (standard connection) is required: .1 Select framed beam shear connections from an industry accepted publication such as "Handbook of the Canadian Institute of Steel Construction". .2 If shears are not indicated, select or design connections to support reaction from maximum uniformly distributed load that can be safely supported by beam in bending, provided no point loads act on beam. For non-standard connections, submit sketches and design calculations stamped and signed by qualified professional enginner licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.

.2

.3

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Submit 5 copies of mill test reports 4 weeks prior to fabrication of structural steel. .1 Mill test reports to show chemical and physical properties and other details of steel to be incorporated in project. Mill test reports to be certified by metallurgists qualified to practice in the province or territory where the Work is carried out.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Section 05 12 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIAL

.1

Structural steel including base, cap plates and anchor bolts: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W, minimum 30% total recycled content. Bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A325M. Welding materials: to CSA W48, CSA W59, and certified by Canadian Welding Bureau. Galvanizing: where indicated, hot dip galvanizing to ASTM A123/A123M, minimum zinc 2 coating Grade 85 (600 g/m ). Shop paint primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40, Ecologo certified. .1 Use Steel Structures Painting Council surface preparation specification SSPC-SP 7, Brush-off Blast Cleaning with shop paint primer. Zinc rich primer for galvanized surfaces: zinc rich, readymix to CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ecologo. certified. .1 Use Steel Structures Painting Council surface preparation specification SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning with zinc rich primer.

.2 .3 .4

.5

.6

2.2

FABRICATION

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Fabricate to CSA S16 and CSA S136. Seal members by continuous welds where indicated. Grind smooth. Provide and reinforce holes required. Provide required connectors. Clean, prepare surfaces and shop prime structural steel in accordance with CSA S16 except where members to be encased in concrete. Shop painting. .1 Apply one coat of CISC/CMPD 2 primer in shop to steel surfaces to achieve minimum dry film thickness of 0.038 to 0.0508 mm (1.5 to 2.0 mils), except: .1 Surfaces to be encased in concrete. .2 Surfaces and edges to be field welded. .3 Faying surfaces of friction-type connections.

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Section 05 12 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.2 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.6

(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .4 Below grade surfaces in contact with soil. .5 Surfaces to be fireproofed by spraying. .2 Apply paint under cover, on dry surfaces when surface and air temperatures are above 5°C. .3 Maintain dry condition and 5°C minimum temperature until paint is thoroughly dry. .4 Strip paint from bolts, nuts, sharp edges and corners before prime coat is dry. Provide masonry anchors on columns and beams abutting masonry.

.7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

GENERAL

.1 .2 .3

Structural steel work: in accordance with CSA S16. Welding: in accordance with CSA W59. Companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion welding of steel structures and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding of structural components.

3.2

ERECTION

.1

Erect structural steel as indicated, and in accordance with CSA S16, and in accordance with reviewed erection drawings. Field cutting or altering structural members: only to approval of Departmental Representative. Tolerance: 1:500. Supply other sections with base plates and anchors for building in. Connect with high tensile bolts. Restore damaged surfaces to appearance Grade BSA2, as determined from SSPC-VIS 1-89, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel, using mechanical cleaning methods as required. Touch up connections, scratches and burns with primer.

.2 .3 .4 .5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Section 05 12 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING

.1

Obtain mill test reports and submit copies to the Departmental Representative.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STEEL DECKING

Section 05 31 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA S16-09, Design of steel structures, Includes Update No.1 (2010). .2 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .3 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .4 CSA W55.3-08, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings. .5 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction, (Metal Arc Welding). Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI) .1 CSSBI 10M-08, Standard for Steel Roof Deck. .2 CSSBI 12M-08, Standard for Composite Steel Deck. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010.

.2

.3

.4

.5

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1

Floor deck: .1 Design floor steel deck (either composite or non-composite as specified) in conformance with CSSBI 12M, Articles 7.6 and 7.7, including Appendix, for loading indicated on drawings, including concentrated loads stipulated in NBC, Division B, Table 4.1.5.9. .2 Design of steel floor deck shall be by a professional engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, who shall sign and seal shop drawings prior to submission for review. .3 Design composite deck sections for concrete strength indicated on drawings. .4 Deflection of floor deck shall not exceed 1/360th of span under superimposed load.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STEEL DECKING

Section 05 31 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)

.1

Floor deck:(Cont'd) Steel deck units shall be capable of .5 sustaining the loads of wet concrete and placing and finishing operations, inlcuding unbalanced conditions, without overstressing the deck units or causing undue deflection or vibration, and, unless otherwise specified, without temporary shoring. .6 Requirements of regulatory agencies: .1 Fabricate and install floor deck which forms part of a required fire rated system exactly as specified in Underwriters' Laboratories test design specification that validates required rating. Roof deck: .1 Design roof deck and fasteners in conformance with CSSBI 10M, Article 8.6: .1 To ensure that the roof deck is capable of supporting the dead plus live loads shown on drawings, the concentrated loads stipulated in NBC, Division B, Table 4.1.5.9., and to resist the following minimum gross unfactored uplifts. .1 1.25 kPa for the parallel to the edge of strips and 2.65 KPa for the corner areas denoted as S and C respectively in the Structural Commentary to the National Building Code of Canada, Commentary I, Figure I-9. .2 Canopies: 2.0 kPa. .3 1.00 kPa for all other roof areas. .4 Dead load of roof deck construction may be deducted from these uplifts, after applying relevant load factors for wind load and dead load resisting uplift. .2 Design of steel roof deck shall be by a professional engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario, who shall sign and seal shop drawings prior to submission for review. .3 Limit deflection of roof deck under specified snow load to 1/360th of span.

.2

1.3

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1

Submit shop drawings erection and shoring drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STEEL DECKING

Section 05 31 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)

.2

Submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in the Province of Ontario, Canada.
Submit design calculations if requested by Departmental Representative. Indicate deck plan, profile, dimensions, base steel thickness, metallic coating designation, connections to supports and spacings, projections, openings, reinforcement details and accessories. Indicate details of temporary shoring of steel deck, such as location, time and duration of placement and removal of shoring for concrete fill decks.

.3 .4

.5

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2

Separate waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Dispose of unused paint and caulking material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative.

.3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Zinc-iron Alloy (ZF) coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M structural quality Grade 255, minimum 30% recycled content, with ZF75 coating, for interior surfaces not exposed to weather, painted and unpainted finish, 0.76 mm minimum base steel thickness. Decks to be painted: zinc-iron alloy coated decks suitable for finish painting.
3 Acoustic insulation: fibrous glass 17.5 kg/m density, profiled to suit deck flutes, Ecologo certified.

.2 .3

.4 .5

Closures: as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Cover plates, cell closures and flashings: steel sheet with minimum base steel thickness of

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STEEL DECKING

Section 05 31 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) 0.76 mm, minimum 30% recycled content. Metallic coating same as deck material. Primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ecologo certified. Sealants: to Section 07 90 00.

.6 .7

2.2 TYPES OF DECKING

.1

Steel roof deck: 0.76 mm minimum base steel thickness, 76 mm maximum deep profile, interlocking side laps. Acoustic steel roof deck: 0.76 mm minimum base steel thickness, 76 mm maximum deep profile, non-cellular, perforated on vertical face of flutes, interlocking side laps. Composite steel roof deck: 1.21 mm minimum base steel thickness, 76 mm deep profile, upright embossed fluted profile, interlocking side laps.

.2

.3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

GENERAL

.1 .2 .3

Structural steel work: in accordance with CSA S136, CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M. Welding: in accordance with CSA W59, except where specified otherwise. Companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion welding of steel and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding.

3.2

ERECTION

.1

Erect steel deck as indicated and in accordance with CSA S136, CSSBI 10M and CSSBI 12M, and in accordance with approved erection drawings. Lap ends: to 50 mm minimum. Immediately after deck is permanently secured in place, touch up metallic coated top surface with compatible primer where burned by welding. Prior to concrete placement, steel deck to be free of soil, debris, standing water, loose mil scale and other foreign matter.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STEEL DECKING

Section 05 31 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.2 ERECTION (Cont'd)

.5

Temporary shoring, where required, to be designed to support construction loads, wet concrete and other construction equipment. Do not remove temporary shoring until concrete attains 75% of its specified 28 day compression strength.
Place and support reinforcing steel as indicated.

.6

3.3

CLOSURES

.1

Install closures in accordance with approved details.

3.4 OPENINGS AND AREAS OF CONCENTRATED LOADS

.1 .2

No reinforcement required for openings cut in deck which are smaller than 150 mm square. Frame deck openings with any one dimension between 150 to 300 mm as recommended by manufacturer, except as otherwise indicated. For deck openings with any one dimension greater than 300 mm and for areas of concentrated load, reinforce in accordance with structural framing details, except as otherwise indicated.

.3

3.5

CONNECTIONS

.1

Install connections in accordance with CSSBI recommendations as indicated.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOAD-BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

Section 05 41 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Spec for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI) .1 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute CSSBI 57-02, Lightweight Steel Framing Architectural Design Guide. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010.

.2

.3

.4

.5

1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 .2

Design in accordance with NBC 2010 and CSA S136. Base design on limit states design principles using factored loads and resistances, in accordance with NBC of Canada, unless otherwise specified. Design bridging to prevent member rotation and member translation about the minor axis. Maximum deflections: .1 L/360 for members supporting masonry veneer. .2 L/240 for members supporting metal cladding.

.3 .4

1.3

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1

Submit shop details and erection drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOAD-BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

Section 05 41 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)

.2

Each drawing submission shall bear signature and stamp of qualified professional Engineer registered or licensed in province or territory in which the Work is carried out.
In erection drawings, indicate relevant details such as depth, spacing, bridging lines, bearing and anchorage details. Indicate requirements of related work. In shop details, provide particulars relative to stud geometry, framed openings, splicing details, bearing and anchorage. Indicate member sizes, materials, design thickness exclusive of coatings, coating specifications, connection and bracing details, screw sizes and spacing, anchors. Indicate specified and factored member loads, and stresses under various loadings, deflection and camber. Reproduction of contract drawings for use as erection drawings is not permitted unless approved in writing by Departmental Representative.

.3

.4

.5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Sheet steel: to CSA S136, and ASTM A653/A653M, Grade A, 228 MPa minimum yield, Z275 zinc coating, minimum 30% total recycled content. Screws: pan head, self-drilling, self-tapping sheet metal screws, corrosion protected to minimum requirements of CSSBI, length 9.5 mm. Anchors: concrete expansion anchors or other suitable drilled type fasteners. Bolts, nuts, washers: hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, minimum zinc coating Grade 85 (600 g/m2). Touch up primer: zinc rich, to CAN/CGSB-1-GP-181.

.2

.3 .4

.5

2.2 STEEL STUD DESIGNATIONS

.1

Colour code steel studs in accordance with CSSBI 57.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOAD-BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

Section 05 41 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.3

METAL FRAMING

.1

Fabricate sheet steel studs, track and accessories in accordance with CSA S136 and reviewed shop drawings, and galvanize to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 coating. Steel studs: to CSA S136, fabricated from zinc coated steel, depth as indicated. Minimum steel thickness of 1.22 mm for unsupported heights up to 4.0 metres, 1.52 mm for greater heights. Stud tracks: fabricated from same material and finish as steel studs, depth to suit. .1 Bottom track: single piece. .2 Top track: two piece telescoping. .3 Separator: neoprene, sized to suit. Bridging: fabricated from same material and finish as studs, 38 x 12 x 1.22 mm minimum thickness. Angle clips: fabricated from same material and finish as studs, 38 x 38 mm x depth of steel stud, 1.22 mm minimum thickness. Tension straps and accessories: as recommended by manufacturer.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Prior to commencement of work, submit two certified copies of mill reports covering material properties.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

GENERAL

.1

Do work in accordance with CSSBI 57.

3.2

ERECTION

.1 .2 .3

Provide and install engineered steel stud framing system as indicated on drawings. Erect components to requirements of reviewed shop drawings. Obtain written approval from Departmental Representative prior to field cutting or altering joists or bridging that are not shown on shop drawings.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOAD-BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

Section 05 41 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.2 ERECTION (Cont'd)

.4

Anchor tracks securely to structure at 800 mm o.c. maximum, unless lesser spacing prescribed on shop drawings. Erect studs plumb, aligned and securely attached with two screws minimum, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Seat studs into bottom tracks and two piece telescoping top track. Install 50 mm minimum telescoping track at top of walls where required to accommodate vertical deflection. Nest top track into deflection channel a minimum of 30 mm and a maximum of 40 mm. Do not fasten tracks together. Stagger joints and install neoprene saparator. Install studs at not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, openings, and each side of corners and terminations with dissimilar materials. Brace steel studs with horizontal internal bridging at 1220 mm maximum. Fasten bridging to steel clips fastened to steel studs with screws or by welding. Frame openings in stud walls to adequately carry loads by use of additional framing members and bracing as detailed on shop drawings. Touch up welds with coat of zinc rich primer.

.5

.6 .7

.8

.9

.10

.11

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

.1 .2 .3 .4

Plumb: not to exceed 1/500th of member length. Camber: not to exceed 1/1000th of member length. Spacing: not more than 3.0 mm from design spacing. Gap between end of stud and track web: not more than 4.0 mm.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOAD-BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

Section 05 41 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.4

CUTOUTS

.1

Maximum size of cutouts for services as follows: Member Depth Across Member Depth 40 max. 40 max. 65 max. Along Member Length 105 max. 105 max. 115 max. Centre to Centre Spacing (mm) 600 min. 600 min. 600 min.

92 102 152 .2

Limit distance from centerline of last unreinforced cutout to end of member to less than 300 mm.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL FABRICATIONS

Section 05 50 01 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American National Standards Institute (ANSI): .1 ANSI/NAAMM MBG531-09, Metal Bar Grating Manual. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM): .1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009), Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .2 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. .3 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .4 ASTM A269-10, Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. .5 ASTM A627-03, Standard Test Methods for Tool-Resisting Steel Bars, Flats, and Shapes for Detention and Correctional Facilities. .6 ASTM A666-10, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. .7 ASTM A786/A786M-05(2009), Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. .8 ASTM A1011/A1011M-10, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating .2 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment. .2 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .3 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL FABRICATIONS

Section 05 50 01 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.1 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.5

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): .1 NAAMM Standard AMP 510-92, Metal Stairs Manual, 5th Edition (1992).

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1

Submit shop drawings and product data of each item specified in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. .1 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details and accessories. .2 Indicate each item's conformance with CSA B651.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Stainless steel sheet, strip, plate and flat bar: to ASTM A666, Type 304, AISI No.4 finish, minimum 75% ecycled content, minimum sheet steel thickness 2.0 mm. Embossed stainless steel: to ASTM A666, Type 304, minimum 75% recycled content, AISI No.4 finish. Minimum base sheet thickness 0.726 mm. Embossed weave pattern, Rimex Group 5-SM. Steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, minimum 30% recyced content. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W, Class H, minimum 30% recyced content. Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, extra strong, black finish, minimum 30% recycled content. Tool resisting steel: to ASTM A627, minimum 25% recycled content, Security Grade 1. .1 Composite T.R. Steel, maximum HRC-45. Steel mesh: minimum 4.76 mm diameter welded steel wire, 50.8 x 50.8 mm centre to centre mesh size, prime painted. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Alkyd primer: oil type to CAN/CGSB-1.40, Ecologo certified.

.2

.3 .4

.5 .6

.7

.8 .9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL FABRICATIONS

Section 05 50 01 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.10

Galvanizing: to ASTM A123/A123M hot-dip, unpassivated, minimum coating Grade 85 (600 g/m2). Zinc rich primer for galvanized surfaces: zinc rich, readymix to CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ecologo certified. Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable, 15 MPa at 24 hours, pullout strength 7.9 MPa. Steel gratings welded: bearing bars, cross bars, bent connecting bars and anchors, welding quality, mild carbon steel to ASTM A1011/A1011M. Steel floor plate(checker plate): to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, raised pattern, hot rolled steel, dimensional tolerances to ASTM A786/A786M. Steel bar grating treads: to ANSI/NAAMM MBG531, Type W-19-4 steel with checker plate nosing. Drilled adhesive anchors: injection adhesive anchor consisting of fast curing 2-part adhesive injected into drilled hole, followed by insertion of bolt, rod or reinforing bar. Expansion anchors: stud type expansion anchor driven into drilled hole, expands when nut torqued. Minimum size 10 x 90 mm.

.11

.12 .13

.14

.15 .16

.17

2.2

FABRICATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Fit joints in true planes and securely fasten. Weld to CSA W59. File or grind welds smooth and flush with adjoining surface. Fabricate gratings within limits given in ANSI/NAAMM MBG531. Shop assemble work.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL FABRICATIONS

Section 05 50 01 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Supply other sections with templates, instructions and built-in items. Install work straight, plumb and level to a tolerance of 1:600. Provide required reinforcing and anchorage. Touch-up burnt, scratched or chipped primer.

3.2 LOOSE ANGLE LINTELS, SUPPORT ANGLES AND BEARING PLATES

.1

Supply masonry section with steel loose angle lintels of sizes required to suit masonry openings and with bearing plates shown on structural drawings. Apply alkyd primer to interior lintels. Galvanize exterior lintels. Provide 150 mm bearing at ends. Weld or bolt together back-to-back angles.

.2 .3 .4

3.3 COUNTER BRACKETS AND COMPONENTS

.1 .2 .3

Supply and install steel brackets, posts, supports and angles for support of counters. Drill for countersunk screws and anchor bolts. Apply alkyd primer.

3.4 STEEL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

.1 .2

Supply and install steel pipe handrails and railings. Apply alkyd primer to interior handrails and railings. Galvanize exterior handrails and railings. Provide hinges for swinging gate sections, and retainer clip, as detailed. Secure brackets to wall. Set railing standards in concrete with grout, trowel surface smooth and flush with adjoining surface.

.3 .4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL FABRICATIONS

Section 05 50 01 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.5 LATERAL SUPPORT ANGLES FOR MASONRY PARTITIONS

.1

Supply masonry section with steel angles to provide lateral support of masonry partitions where they abutt the underside of deck. Apply alkyd primer.

.2

3.6

BENCH BRACKETS

.1 .2 .3

Supply Section 04 20 00 with steel bench brackets for mounting in masonry. Galvanize surfaces. Provide galvanized through bolts for securing wood slats and spacers to bracket.

3.7 WINDOW SUPPORT BRACKETS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Provide steel window support brakets. Weld required shapes and supply anchors. Galvanize after fabrication. Provide to Section 04 20 00 for building-in.

3.8

GRATINGS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Supply concrete section with steel angles for mounting in concrete at grating edge. Fabricate gratings within the limits indicated in Metal Bar Grating Manual, ANSI/NAAMM MBG531. Weld required grating anchors. Apply alkyd primer. Touch up burnt, scratched or chipped primer.

3.9

BOLLARDS

.1 .2

Supply concrete section with steel bollards and caps for mounting and filling with concrete. Galvanize bollards.

3.10

LADDERS

.1 .2 .3

Supply and install steel ladders detailed. Stringers 400 mm apart. Rungs 300 mm centres.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL FABRICATIONS

Section 05 50 01 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.10 LADDERS (Cont'd)

.4 .5

Wall brackets 1200 mm centres to maintain 200 mm wall clearance. Apply alkyd primer to interior ladders. Galvanize exterior ladders.

3.11 WINDOW WIRE MESH SECURITY SCREENS

.1

Material and fabrication shall meet Correctional Service Canada Technical Criteria for 'Security Steel'. Fabricate security screen units in accordance with detailed drawings. Steel mesh: minimum 4.76 mm diameter welded steel wire, 50.8 x 50.8 mm centre to centre mesh size, prime painted, screen size as indicated on drawings. Construct perimeter frame of each security screen unit of steel hollow sections as indicated on drawings. Provide anchors at 600 mm centres and as indicated, for building in to adjacent construction. Mitre all joints, fill completely with weld and grind smooth. Weld mesh all around to the frame. Prime for paint finish. Provide security screen units for building-in as indicated on drawings. Touch-up primer burnt by field installation.

.2 .3

.4

.5 .6 .7 .8 .9

3.12 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS

.1

Take delivery of wood sub-assembly for countertops from Section 06 40 01 for installation of stainless steel surfacing. Cut and form stainless steel sheet to fit. Minimum thickness of stainless steel sheet as indicated, 2 mm. Form lightly eased arrises and tight mitres. Weld and grind smooth plain finished stainless steel products.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL FABRICATIONS

Section 05 50 01 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.12 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS (Cont'd)

.5

When embossed stainless steel sheet is welded minimize defacing pattern by welding on inside surfaces and grind smooth.
Adhere stainless steel surfacing to wood sub-assembly using epoxy adhesives. Apply protective covering to metal surfaces.

.6 .7

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL STAIRS

Section 05 51 29 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Section 03 30 11 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry. Section 05 50 01 - Metal Fabrications. Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American National Standards Institute/National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (ANSI/NAAMM) .1 ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531-09, Metal Bar Grating Manual. .2 ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532-09, Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A53/A53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .3 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .4 ASTM A325M-09, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding/Imperial Version).

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL STAIRS

Section 05 51 29 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.5

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM) .1 NAAMM Standard AMP 510-92, Metal Stairs Manual.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), Systems and Specifications Manual, Volume 2.

.6

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1

Design metal stair, balustrade and landing construction and connections to NBC vertical and horizontal live load requirements. Detail and fabricate stairs to NAAMM AMP 510, Metal Stairs Manual.

.2

1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1

Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate construction details, sizes of steel sections and thickness of steel sheet. .3 Submit shop drawing bearing stamp of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Steel sections and plate: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W, minimum 30% recycled content. Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, standard weight, schedule 40 seamless black, minimum 30% recycled content. Steel tubing: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, minimum 30% recycled content, 4.73 mm wall thickness, sizes and dimensions as indicated. Metal bar grating: to ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 and ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532, steel, minimum 30% recycled content, Type W-19-4, nosings as indicated. Steel mesh: minimum 4.76 mm diameter welded steel wire, 50.8 x 50.8 mm and 101.6 x 50.8 mm centre to centre mesh size, prime painted. Welding materials: to CSA W59.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL STAIRS

Section 05 51 29 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.7 .8

Bolts: to ASTM A307. High strength bolts: to ASTM A325M.

2.2

FABRICATION

.1 .2

Fabricate to NAAMM AMP 510, Metal Stairs Manual. Weld connections where possible, otherwise bolt connections. Countersink exposed fastenings, cut off bolts flush with nuts. Make exposed connections of same material, colour and finish as base material on which they occur. Accurately form connections with exposed faces flush; mitres and joints tight. Make risers of equal height. Grind or file exposed welds and steel sections smooth. Shop fabricate stairs in sections as large and complete as practicable. Welder qualifications: .1 Execute welding by firm certified in accordance with CSA W47.1 Division 1 or 2.1. .2 Operators employed on Work shall be qualified according to CSA W47.1 for work specified in this Section 05 51 29. Do not weld galvanized products.

.3

.4 .5 .6

.7

2.3 STEEL PAN STAIRS

.1

Fabricate stairs with closed or open riser of steel pan or bent plate construction, as indicated. Form treads and risers from 3 mm thick steel plate. Secure treads and risers to L 35 x 35 x 5 mm horizontal and vertical welded to stringers. Form wall stringers from steel channels as detailed. Form outer stringers from steel channels with 5 mm thick plate fascia welded on. Where indicated form outer stringers of double channels continuously welded toe-to-toe, with welds ground smooth.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL STAIRS

Section 05 51 29 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.3 STEEL PAN STAIRS (Cont'd)

.5

Form landings from steel plate of thickness indicated, reinforced by L 55 x 55 x 6 mm spaced at 400 mm on centre, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide clip angles for fastening of furring channels, where applied finish is indicated for underside of stairs and landings. Extend stringers around mid landings to form steel base. Close ends of stringers where exposed.

.6

.7 .8

2.4 PLATE/GRATING CHANNEL STAIRS

.1

Form treads from steel plate of thickness indicated, to profile indicated, and secure to stringers with L 35 x 35 x 5 mm supports. Form landings from steel plate, reinforced by L 55 x 55 x 6 mm spaced at 600 mm on centre. Form steel grating treads and landings from metal bar grating to profile indicated and secure to stringers and supports as indicated. Form landings of steel grating and reinforce as required. Form steel plate treads and landings to details indicated. Where indicated use steel channel tread on utility stairs. Form stringers from steel channels.

.2

.3 .4 .5

2.5 PIPE/TUBING BALUSTRADES

.1 .2 .3 .4

Construct balusters and handrails from steel pipe steel tubing. Cap and weld exposed ends of balusters and handrails. Terminate at abutting wall with end flange. Provide steel mesh balustrade, guard and rail infill welded to steel bar frame. Mesh sizes as indicated. Weld balustrades to stringers where indicated. Set railing standards in concrete with grout, trowel surface smooth and flush with adjoining surface.

.5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL STAIRS

Section 05 51 29 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.6

FINISHES

.1

Galvanizing: to ASTM A123/A123M, hot-dip 2 galvanizing with Coating Grade 85 (600 g/m ) minimum. Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Galvanize exterior stairs. Shop coat prime interior stairs.

.2 .3 .4 .5

2.7

SHOP PAINTING

.1 .2 .3 .4

Clean surfaces in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Manual Volume 2. Apply one coat of shop primer except interior surfaces of pans. Apply two coats of primer of different colours to parts inaccessible after final assembly. Use primer as prepared by manufacturer without thinning or adding admixtures. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease, do not paint when temperature is below 7°C. Do not paint surfaces to be field welded.

.5 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF STAIRS

.1 .2

Install in accordance with NAAMM AMP 510, Metal Stairs Manual. Install plumb and true in exact locations, using welded connections wherever possible to provide rigid structure. Provide anchor bolts, bolts and plates for connecting stairs to structure. Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Touch up shop primer to bolts, welds, and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection. END

.3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH CARPENTRY

Section 06 10 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealled) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-O80 Series-08, Wood Preservation, Includes Update No. 1 (2008). .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CAN/CSA-O141-05(R2009), Softwood Lumber. .4 CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood. .5 CSA O325-07, Construction Sheathing. .6 CAN/CSA-O437 Series-93(R2006), Standards for OSB and Waferboard. .7 CSA Z809-08, Sustainable Forest Management. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) .1 FSC Accredited Certified Bodies. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) .1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, December 1, 2010.

.2

.3 .4 .5

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board. Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards. Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panel sheathing identification: by grade mark, in accordance with applicable CSA standards.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH CARPENTRY

Section 06 10 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Waste Management and Disposal: Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Separate wood waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas in the following categories for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion: solid wood/ softwood/ hardwood/ composite wood/ treated painted or contaminated wood. Separate wood waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas in the following categories for re-use on 2 site: sheet materials larger than 0.5 m , framing members larger than 600 mm. Set aside damaged wood and dimensional lumber off-cuts for acceptable alternative uses (e.g. bracing, blocking, cripples, bridging, finger-joining, or ties). Store this separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting station and area of work. Do not burn scrap at the project site.

.2

.3

.4

.5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER MATERIAL

.1

Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, S-DRY, moisture content 19% or less, graded and stamped in accordance with following standards: .1 CAN/CSA-O141. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. .3 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified. Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, cants, curbs, fascia backing and sleepers: to NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, S-DRY, S4S (S2S acceptable for blocking), Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified, spruce, pine or fir (SPF), 121c. and pine, 113d.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH CARPENTRY

Section 06 10 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

.1 .2

Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified. Douglas Fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction, urea formaldehyde free, alternative adhesive to Clauses 6.2 and 7.2. Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction, urea formaldehyde free. Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panels: to CAN/CSA-O437 Series. Preservative treated plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, G1S good one side, pressure treated with CCA to CAN/CSA-O80 Series, minimum retention 4.0 kg/m3 by assay. .1 Preservative: chromated copper arsenate (CCA) to AWPA P5-10 as amended by CAN/CSA-O80-Series. Fire retardant treated plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, G1S, fire retardant treated, maximum flame spread 25, maximum smoke developed 25.

.3 .4 .5

.6

2.3

ACCESSORIES

.1 .2 .3

Nails, spikes and staples: galvanized, to suit application. Bolts: 12.5 mm diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers. Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or inorganic fibre plugs, recommended for purpose by manufacturer. Explosive actuated devices are not permitted. Galvanizing: to ASTM A123/A123M, minimum 2 coating Grade 85 (600 g/m ); use galvanized fasteners for exterior work, interior highly humid areas, pressure-preservative and fire-retardant treated material. Wood preservative: surface applied wood preservative, coloured, or copper naphtenate or 5% pentachlorophenol solution, water repellent preservative. Fire retardant: to provide flame-spread classification of 25 and smoke developed of not more than 25.

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH CARPENTRY

Section 06 10 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION PRESERVATIVE

.1

Treat dimension lumber and panel materials to CAN/CSA-O80 Series using CCA preservative to 3 obtain minimum net retention of 4.0 kg/m by assay. Following water-borne preservative treatment, dry material to maximum moisture content of 15%.

.2

3.2 APPLICATION FIRE RETARDANT

.1

Treat by pressure impregnation with fire-retardant chemicals in accordance with CAN/CSA-O80 Series. Following treatment, kiln dry material to maximum moisture content of 15%.

.2

3.3

PREPARATION

.1 .2

Treat surfaces of material with wood preservative before installation. Re-treat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming or boring with liberal brush application of preservative before installation. Treat material as follows: .1 Wood cants, fascia backing, curbs, nailers, sleepers on roof deck. .2 Wood furring for an outside surface of exterior masonry and concrete walls.

.3

3.4

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Comply with requirements of NBC 2010, supplemented by following paragraphs. Install members true to line, levels and elevations, square and plumb. Construct continuous members from pieces of longest practical length. Install sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, facings, fascia, soffit, siding electrical equipment mounting boards, and other work as required.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ROUGH CARPENTRY

Section 06 10 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.4 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.6 .7

Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.
Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work. Install wood cants, fascia backing, nailers, curbs and other wood supports as required and secure using galvanized fasteners. Install wood backing, dressed, tapered and recessed slightly below top surface of roof insulation for roof hopper. Install sleepers as indicated. Use dust collectors and high quality respirator masks when cutting or sanding wood panels.

.8

.9

.10 .11

3.5

ERECTION

.1 .2

Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity. Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.

3.6

SCHEDULES

.1

Electrical equipment mounting boards: .1 Plywood, DFP, Grade G1S, fire retardant treated, square edge, 19 mm thick, on 19 x 38 mm furring around perimeter and spaced at maximum 300 mm intermediate.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1

Section 05 50 01 - Metal Fabrications.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American National Standards Institute/National Particleboard Association/National Electrical Maufacturers Association (ANSI/NPA/NEMA): .1 ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2010, Cabinet Hardware. .2 ANSI/BHMA A156.11-2010, Cabinet Locks. .3 ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2008, Auxiliary Hardware. .4 ANSI/NPA A208.1-2009, Particleboard. .5 ANSI/NEMA LD 3-2005, High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. ASTM International: .1 ASTM C919-08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .2 ASTM C920-11, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada/Woodwork Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI): .1 Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) 2009. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-11.3-M87, Hardboard. .2 CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Brushable. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment. .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CSA O153-M1980(R2008), Poplar Plywood. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) .1 FSC Accredited Certified Bodies. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) .1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, December 1, 2010.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6 .7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3

MOCK-UPS

.1 .2

Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 45 00. Construct mock-up of control station in housing unit in location designated by Departmental Representative. Construct mock-up of woodwork illustrating all components of installation to finished dimensions indicated, showing all projections and interfaces. Purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate viewing lines, component location, and to prove ergonomic suitability of designs.

.3

.4

1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and AWS Section 1. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for architectural woodwork and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit two copies of drawings. .2 Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details. .1 Scales: profiles full size, details half full size. .3 Indicate materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware. .4 Indicate locations of service outlets in casework, typical and special installation conditions, and connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings. Samples: .1 Submit samples for review and acceptance. .2 Submit duplicate samples of hardwood and hardwood plywood. .3 Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic for colour selection. .4 Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic joints, edging, cutouts and postformed profiles.

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.5

Comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Manufacture and/or install architectural .1 woodwork to the current AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards and subject the work to an inspection at the plant and/or site by an appointed AWMAC Certified Inspector. .2 Include inspection costs in the bid price for this project. Contact your local AWMAC Chapter for details of inspection costs. .3 Replace, rework and/or refinish work that does not meet the AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards as specified, to the standards of AWMAC, at no additional cost to the Departmental Representative. .4 Issue a two (2) year AWMAC Guarantee Certificate if the woodwork fabricator is an AWMAC Manufacturer member in good standing. .5 The AWMAC Guarantee to cover replacing, reworking and/or refinishing any deficient architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials supplied by the woodwork fabricator, which may appear during a two (2) year period following the date of issuance. .6 Provide the Departmental Representative with a two (2) year maintenance bond, in lieu of the AWMAC Guarantee Certificate, to the full value of the architectural woodwork contract if the woodwork fabricator is not an AWMAC Manufacturer member.

1.5

ACCESSIBILITY

.1

Comply with CSA B651, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Exposed hardwood: to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, for use in Custom Grade work, Ash. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified. Exposed softwood: S4S, S-DRY, graded and stamped to NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 202c. "C" CEDAR, INDUSTRIAL CLEAR. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified. Concealed blocking and framing: S4S (S2S acceptable for blocking), S-DRY, graded and stamped to NLGA Standard Grading Rules for

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.3

Concealed blocking and framing:(Cont'd) Canadian Lumber, SPF, 121c. "STUD" and 101d. "D" FINISH. Exposed plywood: hardwood plywood to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 4 - Sheet Products, for use in Custom Grade work, veneer core construction, American White Ash, Plain Sliced, Book Match; individul panel - Balanced Match. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified. Concealed plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, Grade G1S, urea formaldehyde free. Laminated plastic: to ANSI/NEMA LD3, General Purpose Type HGL (1.0 mm thick), Post-Forming Type HGP (1.0 mm thick), texture, pattern, finish as selected by Departmental Representative. Backing sheet of same thickness as face material (BKM, 1.0 mm thick). Laminated plastic core: poplar plywood to CSA O153, Standard Construction, Interior Bond, BB Grade, urea formaldehyde free, or particleboard to ANSI/NPA A208.1, Grade R, 3 industrial, 720 kg/m , minimum 20% recycled content. Laminated plastic adhesive: contact adhesive to CAN/CGSB-71.20, Ecologo certified. Hardboard: to CAN/CGSB-11.3, Type 2 tempered. Sealant: 1 component, silicone base, solvent curing to ASTM C919 and ASTM C920, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, SWRI validated, Ecologo certified, mould and mildew resistant. Bituminous paint: acid and alkali resistant, Ecologo certified.

.4

.5 .6

.7

.8 .9 .10

.11

2.2

HARDWARE

.1

Cabinet hinge: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.9, Type B01601, concealed, self-closing, adjustable, 95° opening, Euro-style hinge, nickel plated finish. Magnetic catch: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.9, Type B13171, heavy duty. Cabinet pull: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.9, Type B32011, finish 628, satin aluminum, 101.6 mm centres, back mounted.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.2 HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.4

Adjustable shelf standard: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.9, Type B84061, surface application, open shelf rest Type B84091.
Drawer slide set: heavy duty to ANSI/BHMA-A156.9, Type B05051, with zinc plate finish. .1 68 kg rating, progressive full extension. Coat hooks: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.16, Type L13111. Drawer lock: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.11, surface mounted, Type E07041, Grade 1, chrome plated finish. Sliding wood door fitting: channel top running rail, clip-mounted running gears, bottom running rail and guides. Edge band: semi-rigid PVC, textured, bullnosed profile, 32 mm deep. Draw bolts: type recommended by laminated plastic manufacturer.

.5

.6 .7

.8

.9 .10

2.3 FABRICATION GENERAL

.1

To AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 10 - Casework, Custom Grade, Construction Type A - frameless, Interface Style 1, Overlay. Shop assemble units in size to allow passage to installed location. Dadoed drawer joints to AWMAC details. Match grain and colour of adjoining exposed natural finished wood. Shop apply laminated plastic with hairline joints, chamfer exposed edges. Apply bituminous paint to edge of cutouts in laminated plastic tops at sinks.

.2 .3 .4 .5 .6

2.4

CASEWORK

.1

Fabricate caseworks to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS Custom Grade quality standards. .1 Case bodies (ends, divisions, gables and bottoms): hardwood plywood, thickness 19 mm, ash veneer faced, veneer core construction. .2 Backs: hardwood plywood, thickness 6 mm, ash veneer faced, veneer core construction.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.4 CASEWORK (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .3 Shelving: hardwood plywood, thickness 19 mm, ash veneer faced, veneer core construction, grain direction - length of shelf. Casework Doors .1 Fabricate doors to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS Custom Grade supplemented as follows: plywood 19 mm thick, ash veneer, veneer core construction. .1 Door style: Style 1, Flush Overlay. Drawers .1 Fabricate drawers to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS Custom Grade. .2 Fronts: hardwood plywood, 19 mm, ash veneer faced, with 6 mm hardwood edges, Flush Overlay. .3 Sides and backs: 13 mm hardwood plywood, ash veneer, with 6 mm hardwood edges. .4 Bottoms: hardwood plywood, ash veneer, 6 mm thickness. .5 All drawers in control post millwork to be provided with locks. Edge Banding: unless otherwise indicated, provide 6 mm thick hardwood edge banding on edges thicker than 12.7 mm, exposed in final assembly. .1 Where indicated apply PVC edge banding. Finishing: shop finish units in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS Custom Grade, Section 5 Finishing: .1 System - 5, Varnish, Conversion. Laminated Plastic Countertops: fabricate to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS Custom Grade, and as follows: .1 Plastic laminate: according to 2.1.6. .2 Core material: exterior grade hardwood plywood with a non-telegraphing grain, thickness as indicated, or particleboard. .3 Backsplashes: coved. .4 Front edges: Type 5, no-drip waterfall edge. Stainless Steel Countertops: stainless steel finish and installation according to Section 05 50 01, and as indicated.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

2.5

FABRICATION

.1

Set nails and countersink screws, apply stained wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and leave ready to receive finish.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.5 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.2

Shop install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Surface mount shelf standards unless noted otherwise.
Shelving to cabinetwork to be adjustable unless otherwise noted. Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings. Fabricate sub-assembly for countertops to receive stainless steel finishes, as indicated. Deliver to Section 05 50 01 for fitting of stainless steel surfacing. Fabricate window stools of plastic laminate adhered to plywood, self-edged with returns. Provide slats for building onto bench brackets provided by Section 05 50 01.

.3 .4

.5

.6 .7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

.1

Swinging doors: .1 1 pair cabinet hinges. .2 1 cabinet pull. .3 1 magnetic catch. Drawers: .1 1 drawer slide set. .2 1 cabinet pull. .3 1 drawer lock (where indicated). Adjustable shelves: .1 4 shelf standards. .2 4 rests per shelf.

.2

.3

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1

Set items in place, plumb, straight and level to a tolerance of 1:400 and rigidly secure in place. Completely assemble units. Join abutting laminated plastic tops with draw bolts. Install casework and its components according to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Custom Grade.

.2 .3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

Section 06 40 01 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.2 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.5 .6

Apply sealant to junction of backsplash and adjacent wall finish.
Adjust hardware after cabinets and doors installed for smooth effortless operation.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSULATION

Section 07 20 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEPARTMENTAL REPRESENTATIVE'S INSPECTION

.1

Air/vapour barrier installation must be inspected by Departmental Representative before work is covered. Notify Departmental Representative when complete installation is ready for inspection.

1.2

PRODUCT DATA

.1 .2 .3

Submit product data sheets for products in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. For primers, adhesives and sealants, indicate VOC in g/L during application and curing. For insulation, indicate VOC in g/L and any other off gassing at time of installation.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM

.1

Provide insulation, polyethylene, adhesive and sealant products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-40-91 for Building Materials: Thermal Insulation; ECP/PCE-35-91 for Building Materials: Acoustical Products; ECP/PCE-44-92 for Adhesives; ECP/PCE-45-92 for Sealants and Caulking Compounds; and ECP/PCE-69-94 Polyethylene Film Products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Rigid insulation: extruded polystyrene (XPS) to CAN/ULC-S701-11, Type 4. Batt insulation: mineral fibre to CAN/ULC-S702-09, Type 1, preformed without membrane, Ecologo certified. Rigid mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702-09, 3 Type 2, density 112 kg/m , thcikness as indicated. .1 Breather membrane for Type 2: minimum permeance 300 ng/(Pa.s.m2).

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSULATION

Section 07 20 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.4

Semi-rigid mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702-09, 3 Type 2, unfaced, minimum 72 kg/m density, thickness as indicated. .1 Breather membrane for Type 2: minimum permeance 300 ng/(Pa.s.m 2).
Insulating fibreboard: to CAN/ULC-S706-09, Type 1 - roof board, surfaces wax impregnated, thickness as indicated. Polyurethane insulation: 2 component, spray-in-place, minimum 95% closed cell content, VOC emmissions-pass, polyurethane foam to CAN/ULC-S705.1-01-AM3-2011, Standard for Thermal Insulation Spray Applied Rigid Foam, Medium Density, Material Specification. Adhesive: type recommended by insulation manufacturer, Ecologo certified to ECP/PCE-44-92. Vapour barrier type at cavity wall and face applied insulation. Vapour barrier: polyethylene to CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86 AMEND.-1988, 0.152 mm thick, Ecologo certified to ECP/PCE-69-94. Sealant: Ecologo certified to ECP/PCE-45-92. Insulation clips: impale type, perforated 50 x 50 mm cold rolled carbon steel 0.8 mm thick, adhesive back, spindle of 2.5 mm diameter annealed steel, length to suit insulation, 25 mm diameter washers of self locking type. Securement channel: 41 x 13 x 0.46 mm thick, sheet steel channel, galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M-10, edges serrated, fastener holes prepunched. Anchors: self-tapping, power-driven masonry type, steel, cadmium coated. Nails: steel, 25 mm head, length to achieve min. 25 mm substrate penetration, galvanized to ASTM A123/A123-09. Skewers: 200 x 6 mm diameter, hardwood. Moulded box vapour barrier: factory-moulded polyethylene box for use with recessed electric switch and outlet device boxes.

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9 .10

.11

.12 .13

.14 .15

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSULATION

Section 07 20 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1

Perimeter insulation: .1 Apply rigid insulation to exterior face of foundation wall. .2 Butt boards tight together. .3 Mechanically fasten in place to manufacturer's instruction. .4 Apply rigid insulation horizontally, over existing service ducts. .5 Fix in place on granular material with 2 wood skewers per board, insert through board into granular material at 30°. Cavity wall insulation: .1 Adhere or fasten insulation impaling clips to block wall in accordance with clip manufacturers instructions. Use 2 clips and disks per 600 x 1200 mm board. Cut off fastener spindle 3 mm beyond disk. .2 Apply rigid insulation to exterior face of inner wythe, ensure contact with adhesive. .3 Fit tight between masonry reinforcing with full board to board contact at butt joints. .4 Install polystyrene insulation boards on outer surface of inner wythe of wall cavity between masonry reinforcing, secured with insulation retaining wedges specified in Section 04 20 00. .5 Maintain space between insulation and outer wythe of masonry free of obstructions. Face applied insulation: .1 Apply 3 mm wet film thickness of adhesive to entire face of rigid insulation. .2 Butter edges of rigid insulation with 3 mm wet film thickness of adhesive. .3 Apply rigid insulation to substrate with sliding motion to ensure adhesive contact. .4 Butt joints with moderate contact. Between framing thermal insulation: .1 Apply batt insulation between framing members to friction fit. .2 Fit batt insulation tight to projections through insulation. .3 Apply continuous vapour barrier over interior face, fold and lap joints 150 mm, seal joints with continuous bead of sealant and staple to framing. Fit vapour barrier tight to projections through vapour barrier. Encase recessed electrical outlet boxes in moulded polyethylene box vapour barriers.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

INSULATION

Section 07 20 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.1 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.4

Between framing thermal insulation:(Cont'd) .4 Apply continuous air barrier over exterior face in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Seal joints with pressure-sensitive tape. Loose insulation: .1 Install vapour barrier to all warm sides of perimeter exterior walls and roof surfaces and fasten securely in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Ensure air circulations to soffit vents are not obstructed. .3 Insert loose insulation between roof cant and blocking and abutting parapet wall for full height of cant and blocking. .4 Staple ventilation strips to underside of deck, extend from soffit to attic space between joist. Sprayed insulation: .1 Install spray-in-place polyurethane insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Install insulation where indicated. Spray insulation to fill voids around window, door, lovre and other openings. .3 Maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

.5

.6

3.2

SCHEDULE

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

Type-1: Extruded polystyrene of thickness indicated. Type-2: Rigid mineral fibre of thickness indicated. Type-3: Semi-rigid mineral fibre of thickness indicated. Type-4: Tapered fibre board. Type-5: Mineral fibre acoustical insulation batt specified in Section 09 21 16. Type-6: Sprayed polyurethane foam. Type-7: Below grade extruded polystyrene perimeter insulation.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMEN (SBS) AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER

Section 07 25 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

.1

Submit product data sheets of air/vapour retarder in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. For adhesives, primers and sealants, indicate VOC in g/L during application and curing.

.2

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM

.1

Provide adhesives, sealant and primer products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environ mental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-69-94 for Adhesives and ECP/PCE-45-92 for Sealants and Caulking Compounds. Submit two copies of the licensing criteria statements and the verification of compliance with Sections 3(a) and 3(b) of the ECP to the Departmental Representative in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Alternatively, material in original containers bearing the 'Ecologo' or products bearing the 'Ecologo' will satisfy this requirement.

.2

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

.1

Install air/vapour barrier in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of installation. Install air/vapour barrier to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits specified and recommended by manufacturer. Install air/vapour barrier when weather conditions, forecast for entire period of installation, fall within manufacturer's recommendations.

.2

.3

1.4

INSPECTION

.1

Air/vapour barriers installation must be inspected by Departmental Representative before work is covered. Notify Departmental

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMEN (SBS) AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER

Section 07 25 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4 INSPECTION (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) Representative when complete installation is ready for inspection.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

To manufacturer's instructions. Do not store material on roof. Store material under cover on elevated platform. Store material in original package, labels intact. Remove and replace damaged, wet or broken material. Stand rolls on end, protect edges. Store material away from open flame or ignition sources.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIAL

.1

Asphalt primer for self adhesive membrane: synthetic rubber, 40% solids by weight, 0.8 kg/l, recomended by membrane manufacturer. Air/vapour barrier membrane (self adhesive): Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) to CGSB 37-GP-56M AMEND.-1985, Type 2a, Class C, Grade 1, glass mat or polyester reinforcing, minimum 2.2 mm thick, polypropylene or polyethylene film surfaces, and as follows: .1 Air permeance: no leakage up to 3000 Pa or <0.01 l/m2.s at 75 Pa pressure differential to AAMA 501-05. .2 Water vapour permeance: maximum 2.8 ng/Pa.s.m2 to ASTM E96/E96M-10, Procedure B. .3 Peel adhesion: to ASTM E330-02(2010). .1 0 delamination at 3000 Pa for 5 sec. .2 10.9 delamination at 1000 Pa for 1 hour. Adhesive: synthetic rubber, solvent type, trowel consistency to CGSB 71-GP-24M AMEND-1983, compatible with air/vapour barrier membrane, Ecologo certified.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMEN (SBS) AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER

Section 07 25 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIAL (Cont'd)

.4

Joint filler: extruded polyethylene, closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa, outsized 30 to 50%, CFC free.
Insulation clips: impale type, cold rolled carbon steel, 50 x 50 x 0.8 mm thick plate, 2.5 mm diameter spindle, length to suit insulation, 25 mm diameter self locking washers, minimum 5 clips per 600 x 1200 mm board. Use self-adhering, mechanically attached or adhesive method to surfaces other than SBS membrane.

.5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Remove loose material and scrape surface smooth. Remove water and condensation from surfaces. Clean surfaces of foreign and bituminous substances.
2 Roll on primer at 2 to 8 m /l in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Allow 30 minutes drying to a tacky surface. Reprime areas not covered with membrane in 24 hours.

.5

Fill gaps and joints over 6 mm wide with joint filler. Reinforce with 305 mm wide strip of membrane.

3.2

APPLICATION

.1 .2

Reinforce inside and outside corners with 305 mm membrane. Apply self adhesive membrane to masonry in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and details. Apply self adhesive membrane to steel beams and columns, aluminum curtain wall and window members, and gypsum board to maintain continuity of air/vapour barrier in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and details. Lap side and end joints minimum 50 mm, heat seal. Apply pressure to set heat sealed edges. Cut membrane around projections. Seal self adhesive membrane with adhesive to manufacturer's instructions.

.3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMEN (SBS) AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER

Section 07 25 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.2 APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.6 .7

Mechanically attach membrane to window and door frames with pressure strips.
Insulation impaling clips: use impaling clips where required by substrate materials other than masonry with reinforcing and insulation retaining wedges. .1 Surface heat membrane to manufacturer's instructions. .2 Press clip into membrane. .3 Allow minimum 20 minutes setting time before proceeding with insulation application.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PREFORMED METAL CLADDING

Section 07 46 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 07 61 13 - Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM A792/A792M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process .3 ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. .4 ASTM D822-01(2006), Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposure Apparatus of Paint and Related Coatings. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. Certification Criteria Document (CCD) .1 CCD-016, Thermal Insulation Materials, 2005. .2 CCD-046, Adhesives, 2004. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S702-09, Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings.

.2

.3

.4 .5

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 .2

Design metal panel wall system in accordance with CSA S136. Design metal panel wall to provide for thermal movement of component materials caused by ambient temperature range of 115°C without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PREFORMED METAL CLADDING

Section 07 46 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA (Cont'd)

.3

Include expansion joints to accommodate structural movements in wall system and between wall system and building structure without permanent distortion, damage to infills, racking of joints, breakage of seals, or water penetration.
Design members to withstand dead load and wind loads calculated in accordance with NBC 2010 and applicable local regulations, to maximum allowable deflection of 1/180th of span. Provide for positive drainage of condensation occuring within wall construction and water entering at joints, to exterior face of wall in accordance with NRC "Rain Screen Principles". Permeance through wall system not to exceed 30 ng/(Pa.s.m2). Design wall system to accommodate specified erection tolerances of structure. Design wall system to allow for movement of air between exterior and interior side of metal cladding. Provide an effective air barrier to prevent infiltration and/or exfiltration of air through wall assembly.

.4

.5

.6 .7 .8

.9

1.4

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 900 x 900 mm samples of wall system, representative of materials, finishes and colours.

1.5

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate dimensions, wall openings, head, jamb, sill and mullion detail, materials and finish, anchor details, compliance with design criteria and requirements of related work. Indicate arrangements of sheets and joints, types and locations of fasteners and special shapes, and relationship of panels to structural frame.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PREFORMED METAL CLADDING

Section 07 46 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)

.4

Clearly delineate the air/vapour seal in the system itself and at the interface with adjacent systems and materials.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2 .3

Divert used metal cut-offs from landfill by disposal into the on-site metals recycling bin. Divert reusable materials for reuse at nearest used building materials facility. Divert unused caulking, sealants, and adhesive materials from landfill through disposal at hazardous material depot. Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and with Waste Reduction Workplan.

.4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Sheet steel: cladding, structural quality, Grade A, to ASTM A653/A653M, with Z275 zinc coating, and to ASTM A792/A792M, with AZ180 coating. Sheet steel: liner sheet, structural quality, Grade A, to ASTM A653/A653M, with Z275 zinc coating: .1 Light duty modified silicone finish, dry film thickness of 0.025 mm (1 mil). For copings and flashings provide prefinished, formed material to match cladding. Thermal insulation: semi-rigid mineral fibre to 3 CAN/ULC-S702, Type 2, unfaced, minimum 72 kg/m density, thickness as indicated, to CCD-016. Insulation adhesive: compatible with insulation type and zinc coated sheet steel, non-combustible after curing, to CCD-046. Screws: cadmium plated steel, stainless steel, head colour same as exterior sheet, dished steel/neoprene, stainless steel/neoprene. Sealants: according to manufacturer's standards.

.2

.3 .4

.5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PREFORMED METAL CLADDING

Section 07 46 13 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.8 .9 .10

Gaskets: closed cell polyurethane foam, adhesive on two sides, release paper protected.
Touch-up paint; as recommended by panel manufacturer. Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.

2.2

COMPONENTS

.1

Exterior sheet horizontal corrugated siding: Aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel sheet to ASTM A792/A792M, commercial quality, Grade 230 with AZ180 coating, regular spangle, extra smooth surface, chemically treated (passivated) for unpainted finish, 0.76 mm base metal thickness, 22 mm deep corrugations at 68 mm centres, 878 mm width coverage. Exterior corners: of same profile, material and finish as adjacent cladding material, factory built and brake formed to required angle, concealed corner brace, hairline exposed joint, pop rivet connections with painted head to match cladding. Exposed joint (perpendicular to profile):end of cladding sheet shop-cut clean and square, backed with tight fitting filler lapping back of joint, exposed components coloured matched to cladding. Accessories: cap flashing, reveals, drip flashings, internal corner flashings, copings and closures for head, jamb, sill and corners, of same material, thickness and finish as exterior cladding, brake formed to shape. Liner sheet: factory formed flat ribbed, 800 mm module, interlocking joint profile, shop installed seal material one side of interlocking joint. Sub-girts: of 1.21 mm minimum base metal thickness, structural quality steel to ASTM A653/A653M, with Z275 zinc coating, profile as indicated to accept liner and exterior sheet with structural attachment to building frame.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PREFORMED METAL CLADDING

Section 07 46 13 Page 5 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

PREPARATION

.1

Protect metal surfaces in contact with concrete, masonry mortar, plaster or other cementitious surface with isolation coating.

3.2 INSTALLATION (FIELD ASSEMBLED)

.1

Install liner sheet and sub-girts to structural wall supports, using self-tapping screws. Interlock and seal side and end joints. Precaulk one side of interlocking joint to ensure continuous air barrier/vapour retarder. Install insulation using adhesive to ensure continuous thermal barrier in conjunction with air barrier and vapour retarder formed by liner sheet. Install exterior finish cladding to internal sub-girts with concealed fasteners. Provide notched and formed top closures, sealed to prevent direct weather penetration at vertical profiles for exterior cladding. Ensure continuity of "pressure equalization" of rain screen principle. Provide alignment bars, brackets, clips, inserts, shims, as required to securely and permanently fasten wall system to building structure.

.2

.3 .4

.5

3.3 CONTROL/ EXPANSION JOINTS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Construct control joints as indicated. Use cover sheets, of brake formed profile, and same material and finish as adjacent material. Use mechanical fasteners to secure sheet materials. Assemble and secure wall system to structural frame so stresses on sealants are within manufacturers' recommended limits.

3.4

TOLERANCES

.1

Maintain following installation tolerances: .1 Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop drawings: 10 mm/m of length and up to 20 mm/100 m maximum.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PREFORMED METAL CLADDING

Section 07 46 13 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.4 TOLERANCES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .2 Maximum offset from true alignment between two adjacent members abutting and to end, in line: 0.75 mm.

3.5

CLEANING

.1

Wash down exposed interior and exterior surfaces using solution of mild domestic detergent in warm water, applied with soft clean wiping cloths. Wipe interior surfaces clean as part of final clean-up. Remove excess sealant with manufacturer recommended solvent.

.2

3.6

SCHEDULE

.1

Type-1: Interior liner panel, vertical or horizontal Z-girts, 100 mm insulation, panel with trims and reveal flashings. Type-2: As Type-1 above but without interior liner panel. Z-girts and vapour seals are secured to unit masonry wall. Type-3: Type-1 and Type-2 used in combination on same wall plane.

.2

.3

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking. Section 07 20 00 - Insulation. Section 07 62 00 - Metal Flashing and Trim. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealing. Section 22 42 01 - Plumbing Specialties and Accessories (roof drains).

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM C1177/C1177M-08, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement (withdrawn). .2 CAN/CGSB-37.50-M89, Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing (withdrawn). .3 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86 AMEND., Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. .4 CGSB 37-GP-9Ma-83, Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing. .5 CGSB 37-GP-52M, Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane, Sheet Applied, Elastomeric (withdrawn). .6 CGSB 37-GP-56M AMD 2, Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing, Standard for. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-A123.3-05(R2010), Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt. .2 CAN/CSA-A123.4-04(R2008), Asphalt for Constructing Built-Up Roof Coverings and Waterproofing Systems. .3 CSA A231.1/A231.2-06, Precast Concrete Slabs/Precast Concrete Pavers. Department of Justice Canada (Jus). .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.5

Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Transport Canada (TC). .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC). .1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .2 CAN/ULC-S706-09, Standard for Wood Fibre Insulating Boards for Buildings. .3 CAN/ULC-S770-09, Standard Test Method for Determination of Long-Term Thermal Resistance of Closed-Cell Thermal Insulating Foams.

.6

.7

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate flashing, control joints, penetrations, details. Provide layout and details for tapered insulation.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 .2

Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage. Store rolls of felt and membrane in upright position. Store membrane rolls with selvage edge up. Remove only in quantities required for same day use. Place plywood runways over work to enable movement of material and other traffic. Store sealants at +5°C minimum. Store insulation protected from daylight and weather, and deleterious materials.

.3 .4 .5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations.

.2 .3 .4

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1

Do not install roofing when temperature remains below -18°C for torch application, or -10°C to manufacturer's recommendations for mop application. Minimum temperature for solvent-based adhesive is -15°C. Install roofing on dry deck, free of snow and ice, use only dry materials and apply only during weather that will not introduce moisture into roofing system.

.2 .3

1.7

WARRANTY

.1

For the Work of this Section 07 55 50 Modified Bituminous Protected Membrane Roofing the warranty period is extended to 120 months.

1.8

COMPATIBILITY

.1

Compatibility between components of roofing system is essential. provide written declaration to Departmental Representative stating that materials and components, as assembled in system, meet this requirement.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 .2

Submit laboratory test reports in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of bitumens, roofing felts and membrane with specification requirements.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL DECK COVERING

.1

Glass mat gypsum board sheathing/thermal barrier: to ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass mat faced, water resistant, 12.7 mm thick.

2.2 MEMBRANE FELTS AND FLASHING BASE SHEET

.1

Menbrane Base Sheet and Cap Sheet, Flashing Base Sheet: to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, polyester 2 reinforcement, weighing 180 g/m . .1 Type 2a - Fully Adhered. .2 Class C - Plain Surfaced. .3 Grade 2 - Heavy Duty Service. .4 Top and bottom surfaces: sanded/sanded. Roof accessories: at penetrations through roof and supports for roof supported infrastructure including but not limited to pipe and conduit supports, conduit flashings, pipe flashings, vent flashings, provide purpose made devices sized to support pipe or conduit or flash roof penetration.

.2

2.3 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING ADHESIVE

.1

Polymer-modified asphalt: Styrene-Ethylene-Butadiene-Styrene (SEBS)-modified bitumen (to contain SEBS only, no SBS accepted), Low Temperature Flex, to CAN/CGSB-37.50 pass at -25°C.

2.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

.1

Polyester-reinforced EPDM/SBR membrane, to CGSB 37-GP-52M, Type II membrane, Low Temperature Flex pass at -40°C.

2.5 POLYSTYRENE INSULATION

.1

To CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4, thickness as indicated, in two equal thickness layers, ship-lapped edges, joints staggered.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.6 INSULATING FIBREBOARD TAPERED INSULATION

.1

To CAN/ULC-S706, Type 1 - roof board, surfaces wax impregnated, thickness as indicated, tapered.

2.7

SEALERS

.1 .2 .3

Plastic cement: asphalt. Polymer-modified mastic: rubber asphalt type. Sealant: multi-component, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Type 2 non-sag, Class B Non-Glazing, or one-component, elastomeric, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Ecologo certified. Reinforcing mesh.

.4

2.8

PENETRATIONS

.1

Prefabricated/preformed corner and straight sections of polyester composites. Components bonded and sealed to membrane with adhesive, and filled with 1-part polyether pourable sealer, to form.

2.9

CANT STRIPS

.1 .2

Cut from fibreboard material, to measure 140 mm on slope and as detailed. Ensure wood cants and blocking provided by Section 06 10 00 are in place.

2.10

FASTENERS

.1

Covering to steel deck: No.10 flat head, self tapping, Type A or AB, cadmium plated screws.

2.11 SEPARATOR SHEET

.1

Polyethylene film, to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.152 mm thick.

2.12

FILTER FABRIC

.1

UV-resistant, black woven polyolefin fabric for installation between insulation and stone ballast in protected membrane system. Fabric to meet approval of insulation manufacturer.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.13

BALLAST

.1

Stone: 19 to 37 mm size, well graded round stone, opaque, non-porous, washed, free from fines, splinters, ice and snow. Provide petrographic analysis and magnesium sulphate test to establish freeze/thaw stability. Paving slabs: to CSA A231.1/A231.2, 610 x 610 x 38 mm thick, natural air entrained precast concrete paving slabs having non-slip finish with 51 mm plain margin around perimeter.

.2

.3

2.14 PAVER PEDESTALS

.1

Pedestals and levelling plates made of high density polyethylene with integral spacer ribs on upper surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

WORKMANSHIP

.1

Do roofing work in accordance with applicable standard in Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) Roofing Specifications Manual, except where otherwise specified. Roof membrane and insulation: in accordance with Canadian Roofing Contractors' Association Roofing Specifications, January 1997: .1 Concrete Deck, SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane, Fully Adhered, Protected Membrane Assembly. Flashings: as indicated on drawings and in accordance with the following CRCA Roofing Specifications: .1 At parapet: 55 Flashing Modified Bituminous, Rev./Jan 97 - FL.11, modified within specification.

.2

.3

3.2

PROTECTION

.1 .2 .3

Cover walls and adjacent work where materials hoisted or used. Use warning signs and barriers. Maintain in good order until completion of work. Clean off drips and smears of bituminous material immediately.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.2 PROTECTION (Cont'd)

.4

Dispose of rain water off the roof and away from face of building until roof drains or hoppers are installed and connected.
Protect roof from traffic and damage. Comply with precautions deem necessary by Departmental Representative. At the end of each day's work or when stoppage occurs due to inclement weather, provide protection for completed work and materials out of storage.

.5

.6

3.3 EXAMINATION OF ROOF DECKS

.1

Examine roof decks and immediately inform Departmental Representative in writing of defects. Prior to beginning of Work ensure: .1 Decks are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost, contamination and swept clean of dust and debris. .2 Curbs have been built. .3 Roof drains have been installed at proper elevations relative to finished roof surfaces. .4 Plywood and lumber nailer plates have been installed to walls and parapets as indicated.

.2

3.4 TAPERED INSULATION

.1 .2

Mop insulation to deck sheathing with hot 2 polymer-modified asphalt at rate of 1 kg/m . Install tapered insulation in accordance with shop drawings. Stagger joints between layers 150 mm minimum.

3.5

CANTS

.1 .2

Install prefabricated or wood cants over rigid insulation or deck covering. Apply hot bitumen to receiving surface and embed cant firmly by hand. Fasten wood cants to wood insulation stops. Angle cut cants to fit tightly on back and bottom where roof to wall angle varies from 90°.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.6 PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING APPLICATION

.1

Base sheet application. .1 Starting at low point of roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll base sheet, align and reroll from both ends. .2 Unroll and embed base sheet in uniform coating of polymer-modified asphalt applied at rate of 1.2 kg/m2, EVT at point of contact. .3 Lap sheets 75 mm for side and 150 mm for end laps. .4 Application to be free of blisters, wrinkles and fishmouths. Cap sheet application. .1 Starting at low point of roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll cap sheet, align and reroll from both ends. .2 Unroll and embed cap sheet in uniform coating of polymer-modified asphalt applied at rate of 1.2 kg/m2, EVT at point of contact. .3 Lap sheets 75 mm minimum for side laps and 150 mm minimum for end laps. Offset joints in cap sheet 300 mm from those in base sheet. .4 Application to be free of blisters, wrinkles and fishmouths. .5 Do membrane application in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Flashings. .1 Install flashing base sheet in polymer-modified asphalt applied at 1.2 l/m2. Extend flashing base sheet from 75 mm beyond toe of cant to 150 mm above top of cant. .2 Install flexible flashing in polymer-modified asphalt applied at 1.2 l/m2. Extend flexible flashing 75 mm beyond flashing base sheet onto field of roof and 75 mm over outside edge nailed 300 mm o.c. .3 Provide 75 mm side lap and seal. .4 Properly secure flashings to their support, without sags, blisters, fishmouths or wrinkles. .5 Top dress flexible flashing edge laps and leading edge with 150 mm reinforcing mesh and polymer-modified mastic. Roof penetration. .1 Install roof drain pans, vent stack covers and other roof penetration flashings and seal to membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and details. Top pour: polymer-modified asphalt, over entire area, applied at 2.7 l/m 2.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.6 PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.6

Separator sheet: install polyethylene separator sheet loose-laid over entire area with 300 mm side and end laps.
Insulation application. .1 Insulation to be loose laid in parallel rows with ends staggered. .2 Where insulation is in contact with cants bevel insulation edges to fit snug to cant slope. Filter fabric application. .1 Apply fabric unbonded over installed insulation. .2 Overlap edges 300 mm minimum. .3 Cut fabric around roof drains, vents and other penetrations and extend under metal flashings.

.7

.8

3.7 BALLAST AND PROTECTIVE COVERING

.1

Apply stone ballast, as soon as possible after placement of filter fabric, at minimum rate of 75 kg/m2. Spread stone ballast to an even thickness over entire area. Spread additional stone ballast around perimeter for width of 1200 mm to increase ballast weight to 100 kg/m2. Install paving slabs over fabric on paver levelling pads accurately aligned and levelled. Shim up as required to obtain smooth surface transition from slab to slab. Allow space between slabs to permit drainage of surface water.

.2 .3

.4

3.8

WALKWAYS

.1

Install concrete paving slabs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Inspection and testing of roofing application will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative will pay for tests as specified in Section 01 29 83.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Section 07 55 50 Page 10 2011-05-18

3.10

CLEANING

.1 .2

Clean Work in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Clean to Departmental Representative's approval, soiled surfaces, spatters, and damage caused by Work of this Section. Check area drains to ensure cleanliness and proper function, and remove debris, equipment and excess material from site.

.3

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

Section 07 61 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A428/A428M-10, Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM A792/A792M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .5 ASTM C1177/C1177M-08, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. .6 ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. .7 ASTM D822-01(2006), Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) .1 AWPA P5-10, Standard for Waterborne Preservatives. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86 AMEND.-1988, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building Construction. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-O80 Series-08, Wood Preservation, Includes Update No.1 (2008), Update No.2 (2011). .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S702-09, Standard for Thermal Insulation Mineral Fibre for Buildings.

.2

.3

.4

.5

1.2

WARRANTY

.1

For the work of this Section 07 61 13 the warranty period is extended to 120 months.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

Section 07 61 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 WARRANTY (Cont'd)

.2 .3

Repair leaks in roofing assembly and membrane flashing within 48 hours of notification.
Inspect roof 30 days before expiry of warranty period and correct defects within 15 days of inspection.

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 .2 .3

Design roof panels, liner panels and structural elements in accordance with CSA S136. Design panelling system to support design live loads. Design and use fasteners to resist upload forces due to wind in accordance with National Building Code.

1.4

SUBMITTALS

.1

Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.

1.5

PRODUCT DATA

.1 .2 .3

Submit product data in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Submit product data sheets for metals, membranes, insulation. Include: .1 Product characteristics. .2 Performance criteria. .3 Limitations.

1.6

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate arrangements of sheets and joints, types and locations of fasteners and special shapes, and relationship of panels to structural frame. Indicate all specified components, flashings, eaves, terminations, closures, jointing and flashing with other surfaces and components.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

Section 07 61 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)

.4

Clearly delineate the air/vapour seal in the system itself and at the interface with adjacent systems and materials.

1.7

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples of each sheet metal material.

1.8

MOCK-UPS

.1 .2

Submit mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Fabricate 1200 x 1200 mm sample roofing panel using project materials and methods, to include typical seam, corner and fascia.

1.9 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2 .3

Divert used metal cut-offs from landfill by disposal into the on-site metals recycling bin. Divert reusable materials for reuse at nearest used building materials facility. Divert unused caulking, sealants, and adhesive materials from landfill through disposal at hazardous material depot. Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and with Waste Reduction Workplan.

.4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

.1

Base metal: aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel to ASTM A792/A792M, 0.760 mm minimum base thickness, coated both sides with a layer of aluminum-zinc alloy (55% aluminum, 45% zinc) applied by the continuous hot-dip method. Nominal 0.110 kg/m2, total both sides. Triple spot minimum 0.079 kg/m2 as determined by the triple spot test in accordance with ASTM A428/A428M. .1 Sheet coverage T-rib standing seam spacing 400 mm.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

Section 07 61 13 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.2

Prefinished steel with factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride. .1 Class F2S. .2 Colour selected by Departmental Representative from manufacturer's standard range. .3 Specular gloss: 15 units +/-5 in accordance with ASTM D523. .4 Coating thickness: not less than 22 micrometres. .5 Resistance to accelerated weathering for chalk rating of 8, colour fade 5 units or less and erosion rate less than 20% to ASTM D822 as follows: .1 Outdoor exposure period 2500 hours. .2 Humidity resistance exposure period 5000 hours.

2.2

ACCESSORIES

.1 .2

Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Overlay board: Glass mat gypsum board sheathing/thermal barrier to ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass mat faced, water resistant, 15.9 mm thick. Air/vapour barrier: polyethylene film to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.152 mm thick. Steel sub-girts: to CSA S136, zinc coated galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A653/A653M, designation Z275, minimum base metal thickness 1.6 mm (16 gauge), depths indicated. Thermal insulation: semi-rigid mineral fibre to 3 CAN/ULC-S702, Type 2, unfaced, minimum 72 kg/m density, thickness 200 mm. Preservative treated plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, SHG Grade, pressure treated with CCA to CAN/CSA-O80 Series, minimum retention 4.0 kg/m3 by assay. .1 Preservative: chromated copper arsenate (CCA) to AWPA P5 as amended by CAN/CSA-O80 Series. Waterproof membrane: self-adhered composite membrane of SBS rubberized asphalt compound laminated to slip-resistant surfacing, total thickness 1.5 mm. Sealant: EcoLogo certified, containing a minimum of 20% recycled content, not containing a total of VOCs in excess of 5% by weight,

.3 .4

.5

.6

.7

.8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

Section 07 61 13 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.2 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd)

.8

Sealant:(Cont'd) asbestos-free sealant, compatible with system's materials and recommended by system manufacturer. Fasteners: concealed, galvanized to 2 ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 85, 600 g/m minimum. Touch-up paint: as recommended by sheet metal roofing manufacturer. Roof fasteners: screws and plates in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations for securing overlay board to steel deck and conforming to FM 1-90 requirements.

.9

.10 .11

2.3

FABRICATION

.1 .2

Form individual pieces with channel cross-section. Where length of roof requires two sheets to be lapped or joined provide 1.22 mm hat bar for panel support and attachment of starter strip. Arrange top sheet to be hemmed and inserted into starter strip. Make allowance for expansion at joints. Stagger joints in adjacent panels. Provide formed snap-on 31 x 38 mm high, T-style mechanically seamed side lap to conform to metal roof panels. Battens snap onto concealed clip retaining panels. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Fabricate flashings and trim pieces of same metal as roof panel and not less than 0.61 mm base metal thickness, complete with S-lock for concealed fastening unless otherwise specified, detailed or approved on shop drawings. Apply minimum 0.2 mm dry film thickness coat of plastic cement to both faces of dissimilar metals in contact.

.3 .4

.5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

Section 07 61 13 Page 6 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1

Use concealed fastenings and clips except where approved by Departmental Representative before installation. Stagger transverse seams in adjacent panels. To avoid raw edges, terminate panels at ends and eaves by folding and inserting into a modified eaves flashing or starter strip, and as detailed. Flash roof penetrations with material matching roof panels, and make watertight. Form seams in direction of water flow and make watertight.

.2 .3

.4 .5

3.2 INSULATED SYSTEM TYPE-1

.1 .2

Install air/vapour barrier. Lap minimum 100 mm. Install 1.22 mm galvanized steel U-bar at roof perimeter and sub-girts at 400 mm centres for the balance of the roof. Use self-tapping screw fasteners of length to engage steel roof deck by 6 mm. Install thermal insulation. Stagger end laps. Install with no gaps. Install gypsum board perpendicular to steel deck flutes. Use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Apply waterproof membrane over entire roof area. Lap seams minimum 75 mm. Adhere membrane to eave flashing as detailed. Install sheet metal roof panels between clips using snap-on cap spaced at 400 mm o.c.

.3 .4

.5

.6

3.3 UNINSULATED SYSTEM TYPE-2 CANOPY ROOF

.1

Install 16 mm thick pressure treated plywood to steel deck perpendicular to flutes. Use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Install 1.22 mm galvanized steel U-bar at roof perimeter and sub-girts at 400 mm centres for the balance of the roof. Use self-tapping screw

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

Section 07 61 13 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.3 UNINSULATED SYSTEM TYPE-2 CANOPY ROOF (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) fasteners of length to engage steel roof deck by 6 mm. Apply waterproof membrane over entire roof area fastening through with roof panel clips. Lap seams minimum 75 mm. Adhere membrane to eave flashing as detailed. Install sheet metal roof panels between clips using snap-on cap spaced at 400 mm o.c.

.3

.4

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Section 07 62 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A428/A428M-10, Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM A792/A792M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .5 ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. .6 ASTM D822-01(2006), Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) .1 Roofing Specifications Manual. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-51.32-M77, Sheathing, Membrane, Breather Type. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-A123.3-05, Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.2 .3

.4

.5

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature for sheet metal flashing systems materials, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Section 07 62 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.3 .4

Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Samples: .1 Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of each type of sheet metal material, finishes and colours.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 .2

Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

.1

Zinc coated steel sheet: 0.76 mm minimum thickness, commercial quality CS Type A to ASTM A653/A653M, with Z275 designation zinc coating. Electrolytic zinc coated, chromate treated, steel sheet: commercial quality CQ, copper bearing with proprietary coating comprised of 2448 g/m2 zinc total mass both sides (triple spot), painted finish.

.2

2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET

.1

Base metal: aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel to ASTM A792/A792M, 0.76 mm minimum base thickness, coated both sides with a layer of aluminum-zinc alloy (55% aluminum, 45% zinc) applied by the 2 continuous hot-dip method. Nominal 0.110 kg/m , total both sides. Triple spot minimum 0.079 kg/m 2 as determined by the triple spot test in accordance with ASTM A428/A428M. .1 Prefinished steel with factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride. .1 Class F2S. .2 Colour selected by Departmental Representative from manufacturer's standard range.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Section 07 62 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET (Cont'd)

.1

Base metal:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .3 Specular gloss: 15 units +/-5 in accordance with ASTM D523. .4 Coating thickness: not less than 22 micrometres. .5 Resistance to accelerated weathering for chalk rating of 8, colour fade 5 units or less and erosion rate less than 20% to ASTM D822 as follows: .1 Outdoor exposure period 2500 hours. .2 Humidity resistance exposure period 5000 hours. Aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel sheet (Galvalume): to ASTM A792/A792M, commercial quality, Grade 230 with AZ180 coating, regular spangle, extra smooth surface, chemically treated (passivated) for unpainted finish, 0.76 mm base metal thickness.

.2

2.3

ACCESSORIES

.1 .2

Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Underlay for metal flashing: dry sheathing to CAN/CGSB-51.32 asphalt laminated 3.6 to 4.5 kg kraft paper, or No.15 perforated asphalt felt to CAN/CSA-A123.3. Sealants: EcoLogo certified, containing a minimum of 20% recycled content, not containing a total of VOCs in excess of 5% by weight, asbestos-free sealant, compatible with system's materials and recommended by manufacturer, and in accordance with Section 07 90 00. Cleats: of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured. Fasteners: of same material as sheet metal, ring thread flat head roofing nails of length and thickness suitable for metal flashing application, galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 85, minimum. Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings, galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 85, minimum. Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer.

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Section 07 62 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.4

FABRICATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with details as indicated. Form pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints. Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm. Mitre and seal corners with sealant. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.

.5

2.5 METAL FLASHINGS

.1

Form flashings and copings to profiles indicated of 0.76 mm thick galvanized prefinished steel.

2.6

CAP FLASHINGS

.1

Form metal cap flashing of 0.76 mm thick sheet metal for base flashings as detailed. Provide slotted fixing holes and steel/plastic washer fasteners. Cover face and ends with plastic tape.

2.7

SOFFITS

.1

Exterior sheet: factory preformed, coated metal (Galvalume), to channel profile section with minor centre V-grove, 39 mm overall depth, 300 mm wide face dimension, interlocking edges, one side of interlocking joint filled to 50% with nonskinning, non-hardening sealant, 0.76 mm minimum base metal thickness, perforated.

2.8

ICE GUARDS

.1

Ice Guards: 32 mm thick galvanized steel brackets with 3, 32 mm dia. holes, c/w with plastic protectors and 1.5 mm thick 25.4 mm dia. galvanized steel tubes. Assembly complete with fasteners and neoprene washers. Fastening to roof as per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Brackets spacing according to manufacturer's instructions.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Section 07 62 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.9

PENETRATIONS

.1

Use prefabricated commercially available roof penetration assemblies and systems where practicable. Use EPDM flashing seal system consisting of EPDM grommet seals and spun metal cap where roof rails penetrate eaves flashings. Size to suit item to be sealed. Pipe flashing: prefabricated, molded EPDM pipe flashing, universal adjustable opening fitting pipe 25.4 mm to 174.6 mm dia., stainless steel clamps, pipe flange 330 mm O.D., thickness 1.4 mm minimum, black.

.2

.3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Install sheet metal work as indicated on drawings. Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation. Provide underlay under sheet metal. Secure in place and lap joints 100 mm. Counterflash bituminous flashings at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and curbs. Flash joints using S-lock standing seams forming tight fit over hook strips, as detailed. Lock end joints and caulk with sealant. Install surface mounted reglets true and level, and caulk top of reglet with sealant. Insert metal flashing into reglets under cap flashing to form weather tight junction. Turn top edge of flashing into recessed reglet or mortar joint minimum of 25 mm. Lead wedge flashing securely into joint. Seal flashing at reglet, and cap flashing with sealant.

.5 .6 .7 .8

.9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Section 07 62 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.2 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.10

Install EPDM pipe flashings as indicated on drawings, and according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.3

SOFFIT

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Install continuous starter strips, mouldings, edgings, soffit, flashings as indicated. Install fillers and closure strips with carefully formed and profiled work. Maintain joints in exterior cladding true to line, tight fitting, of hairline type. Attach components in manner not restricting thermal movement. Caulk junctions with adjoining work with sealant. Clean with soap and water, remove excess sealant with solvent recommended by manufacturer.

3.4

ICE GUARDS

.1

Install ice-guards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

Section 07 81 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S101-07, Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .2 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

.2

1.2

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Samples: submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm size sample of exposed fireproofing for approval of texture and colour. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Test Reports: .1 Submit product data including certified copies of test reports verifying fireproofing applied to substrate as constructed on project will meet or exceed requirements of Specification. .2 Submit test results in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics. .3 For assemblies not tested and rated, submit proposals based on related designs using accepted fireproofing design criteria. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

Section 07 81 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.4

Quality assurance submittals:(Cont'd) .3 Manufacturer's Instructions:(Cont'd) special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Qualifications: .1 Installer: company or person specializing in sprayed-on fireproofing with 5 (five) years documented experience, approved by manufacturer. .2 All fireproofing material shall be from one manufacturer. .3 All fireproofing installation work for entire project shall be by single installer experienced in fireproofing. Individual disciplines shall not fireproof their own work. Pre-Installation Meetings: convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this Section, with Contractor's representative and Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06 to: .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordinate with other building subtrades. .4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. Mock-ups: .1 Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. 2 .2 Apply fireproofing to approximately 10 m area of surface of mock-up matching surfaces to be treated. .3 Mock-up will be used: .1 To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application. .4 Locate mock-up where directed by Departmental Representative. .5 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with fireproofing work. .6 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this work.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

Section 07 81 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver packaged materials in original unopened containers, marked to indicate brand name, manufacturer, ULC markings. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors in dry location. .2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. .3 Damaged or opened containers will be rejected. .4 Packaging to indicate shelf-life and materials to be applied prior to expiration of shelf-life. .5 Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air beyond application area. .6 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of fireproofing materials. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.2

.3

1.5

PROTECTION

.1

At temperatures less than 5°C, ensure that 5°C air and substrate temperature is maintained during and for 24 hours after application. Ensure that natural ventilation to properly dry the fireproofing during and subsequent to its application is provided. In enclosed areas lacking openings for natural ventilation, ensure that interior air is circulated and exhausted to the outside. Maintain relative humidity within limits recommended fireproofing manufacturer. Ensure that natural ventilation to properly dry fireproofing during and subsequent to its application is provided. In enclosed areas lacking openings for natural ventilation, provide minimum of 4 air exchanges per hour by forced air circulation.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

Section 07 81 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.5 PROTECTION (Cont'd)

.5 .6

Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air beyond application area.
Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of fireproofing materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Sprayed fireproofing: ULC certified cementitious or asbestos-free mineral fibre fireproofing qualified for use in ULC Designs specified. Curing compound: type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, qualified for use in ULC Designs specified. Sealer: type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, qualified for use in ULC Design specified. Fireproofing: minimum dry density and cohesion/adhesion properties as follows: .1 Fireproofing for structural components concealed above ceiling, or within wall, chase, or furred space: minimum applied dry density of 240 kg per cubic meter and cohesion/adhesion strength of 9.57 kPa. .2 Fireproofing for exposed structural components, except where otherwise specified or indicated: minimum applied dry density of 350 kg per cubic meter and cohesion/adhesion strength of 20.83 kPa. .3 Fireproofing for structural components located in mechanical rooms and storage areas: minimum applied dry density of 640 kg per cubic meter and cohesion/adhesion strength of 350 kPa. .4 Ensure spray-applied fireproofing: does not crack, spall or delaminate under downward deflection conditions over 3 m clear span. .5 Minimum compressive strength: 48 kPa. .6 Spray-Applied fireproofing material: not contribute to corrosion of test panels. .7 Dust removal: not exceed 0.25 gram per square meter.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

Section 07 81 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2

PREPARATION

.1 .2

Substrate shall be free of material, which would impair bond. Verify that painted substrates are compatible and have suitable bonding characteristics to receive fireproofing. Prepare to SSPC-SP 6. Remove incompatible materials. Ensure that items required to penetrate fireproofing are placed before installation of fireproofing. Ensure that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing work is completed.

.3 .4

.5

3.3

APPLICATION

.1 .2

Apply bonding adhesive or primer to substrate if recommended by manufacturer. Apply fireproofing to correspond with tested assemblies, or acceptable calculation procedures to provide following fire resistance ratings.

Location Concrete filled steel floor units and steel beam or angle Concrete filled steel floor units and steel beam or angle .3

Rating 1hr

ULC Design F906

2hr

D831

Apply fireproofing over substrate, building up to required thickness to cover substrate with

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

Section 07 81 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.3 APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) monolithic blanket of uniform density and texture. Tamp smooth, surfaces. Apply sealer to surface of mineral fibre fireproofing as required by manufacturer in ventilation plenums, where fireproofing is to be painted, and as indicated.

.4 .5

3.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING

.1

Inspection and testing of fireproofing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. .1 Departmental Representative will pay costs for testing, as specified in Section 01 29 83.

3.5

PATCHING

.1

Patch damage to fireproofing caused by testing or by other trades before fireproofing is concealed, or if exposed, before final inspection.

3.6

CLEANING

.1 .2

Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Clean surfaces not indicated to receive fireproofing of sprayed material within 24 hours period after application. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

.3

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FIRE STOPPING

Section 07 84 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S115-05, Fire Tests of Firestop Systems. Sealing service penetrations in fire-rated assemblies must be done in accordance with this Section. Fire stopping and smoke seals within mechanical assemblies (i.e. inside ducts, dumpers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside cable trays) are specified in Mechanical and Electrical Divisions respectively.

.2 .3

.4

.5

1.2

DEFINITIONS

.1

Fire Stop Material: device intended to close off opening or penetration during fire or materials that fill openings in wall or floor assembly where penetration is by cables, cable trays, conduits, ducts and pipes and poke-through termination devices, including electrical outlet boxes along with their means of support through wall or floor openings. Single Component Fire Stop System: fire stop material that has Listed Systems Design and is used individually without use of high temperature insulation or other materials to create fire stop system. Multiple Component Fire Stop System: exact group of fire stop materials that are identified within Listed Systems Design to create on site fire stop system. Tightly Fitted; (ref: NBC 2010, Division B, Part 3, Sentence 3.1.9.1.(1), and Part 9, Sentence 9.10.9.6.(1): penetrating items that are cast in place in buildings of noncombustible construction or have "0" annular space in buildings of combustible construction. .1 Words "tightly fitted" should ensure that integrity of fire separation is such that it

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FIRE STOPPING

Section 07 84 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)

.4

Tightly Fitted; (ref:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) prevents passage of smoke and hot gases to unexposed side of fire separation.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit shop drawings to show location, proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. .3 Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions. Samples: .1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples showing actual fire stop material proposed for project. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Test reports: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics. .1 Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance of applied fire stopping with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FIRE STOPPING

Section 07 84 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Qualifications: .1 Installer: company orperson specializing in fire stopping installations with 5 (five) years documented experience approved by manufacturer. .2 All fire stopping material shall be from one manufacturer. .3 All fire stopping installation work for entire project shall be by a single installer experienced in firestopping. Individual disciplines shall not fire stop their own work. Pre-Installation Meetings: convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this Section, with Contractor's representative and Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 32 16.06 to: .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordinate with other building subtrades. .4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.

.2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition and in original unopened containers, marked to indicate brand name, manufacturer, ULC markings. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FIRE STOPPING

Section 07 84 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1

Firestop service penetrations as follows: .1 Sleeve single, circular penetrants. .2 Respective trades create multiple penetrations when the individual circular penetrants are no more than 100 mm apart. .1 Trading creating the fire separations form an open, square or rectangular box around the multiple penetrants. .2 Form box maximum 25 mm clear around the outer penetrants. .3 Create multiple penetrations with square penetrants similar to the method for circular penetrants except that: .1 Maximum clearance between penetrant and penetration is 50 mm. .2 Provide design specific clearance around fire dampers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115. .1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN/ULC-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended and conforming to specified special requirements described in PART 3. .2 Fire stop system rating: FT. Service penetration assemblies: systems tested to CAN/ULC-S115, and listed in ULC Guide No.40 U19. Service penetration fire stop components: certified by test laboratory to CAN/ULC-S115, and listed in ULC Guide No.40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No.40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC. Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC, not less than the fire-resistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly. Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastomeric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seals at such locations.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FIRE STOPPING

Section 07 84 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.6

Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seals at such locations.
Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use. Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances. Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.

.7 .8

.9

.10 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2

PREPARATION

.1

Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free. Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions. Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption to vapour barrier. Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FIRE STOPPING

Section 07 84 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.3

INSTALLATION

.1

Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with manufacturer's certified tested system listing and ULC certification. Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained. Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to neat finish. Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

.2

.3

.4 .5

3.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

.1

Location of special requirements for fire stopping and smoke seal materials at openings and penetrations in fire resistant rated assemblies are as follows: .1 1 hour rating except where fuel fired appliances located in which case 2 hour rating required.

3.5 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

.1

Proceed with installation only when submittals have been reviewed by Departmental Representative. Install floor fire stopping before interior partition erections. Metal deck bonding: fire stopping to precede spray applied fireproofing to ensure required bonding. Mechanical pipe insulation: Ensure pipe insulation installation precedes fire stopping.

.2 .3

.4

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Inspections: notify Departmental Representative when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing fire stopping materials and service penetration assemblies.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FIRE STOPPING

Section 07 84 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.7

CLEANING

.1 .2

Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.

.3

3.8

SCHEDULE

.1

Fire stop and smoke seal at: .1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board partitions and walls. .2 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions. .3 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions. .4 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls. .5 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs. .6 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations. .7 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations. 2 .8 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm : when specifically permitted by the fire damper manufacturer's detailed installation instructions, fire stopping to consist of bead of firestopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

JOINT SEALING

Section 07 90 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM

.1

Provide sealant products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-45-92 for Sealants and Caulking Compounds, except maximum VOC 60 g/L during application and curing. For primers and sealants, indicate VOC in g/L during application and curing.

.2

1.2

PRODUCT DATA

.1

Submit manufacturer's literature indicating recommended surface preparation, sealant selection and primer for each substrate in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

SEALANTS

.1

Provide sealant products bearing Ecologo to ECP/PCE-45-92 with maximum VOC 60 g/L.

2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS

.1

Silicones One Part '3'. .1 To ASTM C919-08 and ASTM C920-11, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, SWRI validated. Acoustical Sealant '6'. .1 One part silicone to ASTM C919-08 and AST C920-11, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, SWRI validated. Epoxy security sealant: interior. .1 Pick-proof gunned flexible epoxy joint filler: two component 100% solids, gun-grade epoxy joint filler with flexible, pick-proof properties for sloped areas. .1 Shore A hardness: 90±5. .2 Shore D hardness: 50. .3 Elongation: 50%. .4 Tensile Strength: 6.2 MPa ±0.07 MPa (900 psi ±10 psi). .5 Slant shear strength: 6.0 MPa (865 psi) to ASTM C882/C882M-05e1. .6 Mixing ratio: 1 to 1 by volume.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

JOINT SEALING

Section 07 90 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS (Cont'd)

.3

Epoxy security sealant:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Pot Life: 40 to 55 minutes at 24°C .7 (75°F). .8 Cure time foot traffic: 4 hours. .9 Cure time vehicular traffic: 24 hours. .10 Application temperature: minimum 13°C (55°F). .2 Acceptable material: 'Sonneborn Epolith-G' manufactured by Degussa Building Systems 800-243-6739 formerly ChemRex Inc www.chemrex.com, distributed by Wytech Building Envelope Solutions Inc (416-439-5442). Do not use over joint filler; interior use only. Preformed compressible and non-compressible back-up materials '10', CFC free. .1 Polyethylene, urethane, neoprene or vinyl foam. Extruded open or closed cell foam backer rod. Size: oversize 30 to 50%. .2 Neoprene or butyl rubber. Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70. .3 High density foam. Extruded closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or extruded polethylene, closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa, extruded 3 polyolefin foam, 32 kg/m density, or neoprene foam backer, size as recommended by manufacturer. .4 Bond breaker tape. Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.

.4

2.3 SEALANT SELECTION

.1

Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building (ie. brick, block, precast masonry): Designation 3. Expansion and control joints in exterior surfaces of poured-in-place concrete walls: Designations 3, 10. Expansion and control joints in exterior surfaces of precast, architectural wall panels: Designations 3, 10. Control and expansion joints in exterior surfaces of unit masonry walls: Designation 3. Coping joints and coping-to facade joints: Designation 3. Cornice and wash (or horizontal surface joints): Designation 3.

.2

.3

.4 .5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

JOINT SEALING

Section 07 90 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.3 SEALANT SELECTION (Cont'd)

.7 .8

Seal interior perimeters of exterior openings as detailed on drawings: Designation 3.
Control and expansion joints on the interior of exterior poured-in place concrete walls: Designation 3. Expansion and control joints on the interior of exterior precast, architectural wall panels: Designation 3. Control and expansion joints on the interior of exterior surfaces of unit masonry walls: Designation 3. Interior control and expansion joints in floor surfaces: Designations 3, 10. Perimeters of interior frames: Designation 3. Interior masonry vertical control joints (block-to-block, block-to-concrete, and intersecting masonry walls): Designation 3. Joints at tops of non-load bearing masonry walls at the underside of poured concrete: Designation 6. Perimeter of bath fixtures (e.g. sinks, tubs, urinals, stools, waterclosets, basins, vanities): Designation 3. Exposed interior control joints in drywall: Designation 6. Epoxy security sealant: where indicated.

.9

.10

.11 .12 .13

.14

.15

.16 .17

2.4

JOINT CLEANER

.1

Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer. Primer: to manufacturer's recommendations.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

JOINT SEALING

Section 07 90 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES

.1

Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants. Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter which may impair work. Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required. Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

.2

.3

.4 .5

3.2

PRIMING

.1 .2

Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking. Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking.

3.3 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 .2

Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions. Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape with approximately 30% compression.

3.4

MIXING

.1

Mix materials in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

3.5

APPLICATION

.1

Ventilate interior spaces during application and curing of sealants to maintain VOCs less than 50 g/l. Coordinate with building manager to ensure existing ventilation system or temporary ventilation supllies sufficient outside air.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

JOINT SEALING

Section 07 90 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.5 APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.2

Sealant. .1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination. .2 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's application manual and written instructions. .3 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat joint. remove tape after sealant applied. .4 Apply sealant in continuous beads. .5 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle. .6 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. .7 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities. .8 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.
Curing. .1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. .2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place. Cleanup. .1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean. .2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses. .3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.

.3

.4

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealing. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Section 08 80 50 - Glazing. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. Section 11 19 13 - Detention Doors, Panels and Frames. Division 26 - Electrical conduit and 120 VAC wiring for electronic hardware.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A568/A568M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .2 CGSB 41-GP-19Ma-84, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA) .1 CSDMA, Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2006. .2 CSDMA, Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors and Frame Products, 2009.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.5

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 80-10, Standard for Fire Doors and. Other Opening Protectives. .2 NFPA 252-08, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S702-09, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings. .2 CAN/ULC-S104-10, Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

.6

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1

Design Requirements: .1 Steel fire rated doors and frames: labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104 for ratings specified or indicated. .2 Provide fire labelled doors and frames for openings requiring fire protection ratings. Test products in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104 and NFPA 252, and by listed nationally recognized agency having factory inspection services, and construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.

1.4

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2 .3

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide product data: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thicknesses, mortises, reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, openings, arrangement of hardware,fire rating and finishes. .2 Indicate each type frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops, location of anchors and exposed fastenings, reinforcing, fire rating and finishes. .3 Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and door schedule.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.4 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.4

Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type of frame. Show butt cutout and glazing stops .2 Submite one 300 x 300 mm topbutt corner sample of each type door.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 .2 .3

Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Protect doors and frames during shipping and storage. Note damage incurred during shipping. Make good immediately. Clean scratches, and touch-up with rust inhibitive primer. Replace work which cannot be repaired, restored or cleaned. Store materials on wood sleepers in dry area and cover to protect from damage. Remove wrappings or coverings from doors upon delivery to site. Store doors in vertical position, spaced by blocking to permit air circulation between them. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion, in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.4 .5

.6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Metal: tension levelled sheet steel to ASTM A568/A568M, Class 1, with ZF075 zinc coating both sides designation to ASTM A653/A653M, minimum 30% total recycled content. Reinforcement channel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, zinc coating designation to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.2 DOOR CORE MATERIALS

.1

Stiffened: face sheets welded, insulated core. .1 Fibreglass: to CAN/ULC-S702, semi-rigid 3 Type 1, density 48 kg/m . Board-type thermal insulation materials must: .1 Contain when calculated on a 12 month rolling basis .1 Over 35% recycled material by weight of the finished product if made from glass fibre. Batt-type thermal insulation materials must contain when calculated on a 12 month rolling basis over 35% recycled material by weight of the finished product if made from glass fibre.

.2

.3

2.3

ADHESIVES

.1

Select adhesives which: .1 Do not contain volatile organic compounds in excess of 5% by weight as measured by EPA Method 24-24A, 40 C.F.R., Part 60, Appendix A (1991), Method 18,48 Federal Register 48, no. 202, October 18, 1983, Method 1400 NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, Volume 1, February 1984, Environmental Protection Agency Method 8240 GC/MS Method for Volatile Organics, September 1986, as demonstrated through calculation from records of the amounts of constituents used to make the product. .2 Are accompanied by detailed instructions for proper application so as to minimize health concerns and maximize performance. .3 Are accompanied by information describing proper disposal methods for containers.

2.4

PRIMER

.1

Touch-up prime CAN/CGSB-1.181.

2.5

PAINT

.1

Field paint steel doors and frames in accordance with Section 09 91 00. Protect weatherstrips from paint. Provide final finish free of scratches or other blemishes.

2.6

ACCESSORIES

.1 .2

Door silencers: single stud rubber/neoprene type. Exterior and interior top and bottom caps: 1.91 mm thick steel channels tack welded in

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.6 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) position. Weld cap of same material to top edge of exterior doors. Metallic paste filler: to manufacturer's standard. Fire labels: metal rivited. Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 90 00. Glazing: as scheduled and as specified in Section 08 80 50. Make provisions for glazing and cutouts as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops. .1 Provide removable channel profile steel glazing stops 16 mm high, with mitred corners, symmetrically drilled, tapped and countersunk for fasteners at 150 mm centers. .2 Secure glazing stops with "Torx Plus" (6 lobe) screws on tertiary duty doors, frames, screens and windows, and in all inmate accessible or occupied areas. .3 Set glazing stops on inmate or attack side of door or frame.

.3 .4 .5 .6 .7

2.7 FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDMA specifications. Fabricate frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as indicated. Exterior frames receiving BH or IH hardware groups: 1.91 mm welded type construction. Interior frames: that receive BH hardware groups: 1.52 mm welded type construction. Interior frames: that receive IH hardware groups: 1.91 mm welded type construction. Blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortised, templated hardware, and electronic hardware using templates provided by finish hardware supplier. Reinforce frames for surface mounted hardware. Fabricate frames requiring concealed and/or electronic hardware with welded on junction boxes of a size to properly encapsulate and protect the wiring connections and hardware from damage due to masonry, concrete or gypsum board

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.7 FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL (Cont'd)

.7

(Cont'd) construction. Provide sufficiently sized conduit from junction box terminating at frame header. Protect mortised cutouts with steel guard boxes. Prepare frame for door silencers, 3 for single door, 2 at head for double door. Manufacturer's nameplates on frames are not permitted. Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated. Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

.8 .9 .10 .11 .12

2.8 FRAMES: WELDED TYPE

.1 .2 .3

Welding in accordance with CSA W59. Accurately mitre or mechanically joint frame product and securely weld on inside of profile. Cope accurately and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and sills. Grind welded joints and corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste and sand to uniform smooth finish. Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile. Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during shipment. Fabricate overlapping type frames for cell doors in 200 mm thick concrete block walls.

.4

.5 .6 .7

2.9 GLAZED SCREEN FABRICATION

.1

Fabricate screens in accordance with the requirements and specifications of Correctional Service Canada Technical Criteria. Fabricate screen frames of 2.0 mm rolled steel, to profiles and sizes indicated on drawings. Reinforce frames as required.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.9 GLAZED SCREEN FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.3

Glazing stops: 4.0 mm thick angle or channel steel or solid bar with an engagement of 25 mm minimum, removable from the attack side. Removable stops shall be held by 9.6 mm security screws set at 200 mm centres. Manufacturer's nameplates on screen frames and mullions are not permitted. Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated. Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

.4 .5 .6

2.10 FRAME AND SCREEN ANCHORAGE

.1

Provide appropriate anchorage construction. Where frames in strip, strap, T-strap or wire Where anchors occur in gypsum type anchors.

to floor and wall masonry provide type anchors. board provide stud

.2

Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb. Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to 1520 mm and 1 additional anchor for each additional 760 mm of height or fraction thereof. At heads of frames and screens in which structural support is not provided by related construction, provide channel extensions from jambs and mullions and secure at underside of deck.

.3

.4

2.11 DOOR FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 .2 .3

Doors: swing type, flush, with provision for glass as indicated. Exterior doors: hollow steel construction. Interior doors: hollow steel construction. Fabricate doors with longitudinal edges mechanically interlocked and continuously, fully welded. Seams: grind welded joints to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler as necessary and sand to a uniform smooth finish. Blank, reinforce, drill doors and tap for mortised, templated hardware and electronic hardware, Builders Hardware Groups (BH) or

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 8 2011-05-18

2.11 DOOR FABRICATION GENERAL (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) Institutional Hardware Groups (IH), specified elsewhere. Factory prepare holes 12.7 mm diameter and larger. Factory prepare holes less than 12.7 mm when required for function of device for knob, lever, cylinder, turnpieces, or when these holes overlap function holes. Reinforce doors where required, for surface mounted hardware. Provide flush steel top caps to exterior doors. Provide inverted, recessed, spot welded channels to top and bottom of interior doors. Provide factory-applied touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication. Manufacturer's nameplates on doors are not permitted.

.5

.6

.7

.8

2.12 HOLLOW STEEL CONSTRUCTION

.1 .2

Form face sheets for exterior doors from 1.52 mm sheet steel. Form face sheets for interior doors that receive BH hardware groups from 1.27 mm sheet steel. For doors wider than 915 mm use 1.52 mm thick face sheets. Form face sheets for interior doors that receive IH hardware groups from 1.52 mm sheet steel. Reinforce doors with vertical stiffeners, securely welded to face sheets at 150 mm on centre maximum. Fill voids between stiffeners of exterior doors with fibreglass core. Fill voids between stiffeners of interior doors with fibreglass core.

.3

.4

.5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 9 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL

.1

Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified otherwise. Install doors and frames to CSDMA Installation Guide. Install glazed screens to form Control Post enclosure as indicated on drawings.

.2 .3

3.3 FRAME AND SCREEN INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3

Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Remove temporary welded metal frame spreaders prior to installation. Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood spreader at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary wood spreaders after frames are built-in. Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames. Caulk perimeter of frames between frame and adjacent material. Maintain continuity of air barrier and vapour retarder.

.4

.5 .6

3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION

.1

Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS

Section 08 11 00 Page 10 2011-05-18

3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.2

Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floorand thresholds as follows. .1 Hinge side: 3.0 mm. .2 Latchside and head: 3.0 mm. .3 Finished floor, sills and thresholds: 13 mm.
Adjust operable parts for correct function.

.3

3.5

FINISH REPAIRS

.1 .2

Touch up with primer finishes damaged during installation. Fill exposed frame anchors and surfaces with imperfections with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.

3.6

GLAZING

.1 .2

Install glazing for doors and frames in accordance with Section 08 80 50. Glaze screens according to Section 08 80 50 with GL-7 security glazing c/w speaking port specified in Section 10 28 00.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Section 08 14 10 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Section 08 80 50 - Glazing. Section 11 19 13 - Detention Hardware.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada AWMAC/ Woodwork Institute WI. .1 Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) 2009. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). .1 NFPA 80-10, Standard for Fire Doors and. Other Opening Protectives. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC). .1 CAN/ULC-S104M-10, Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

.2

.3

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1

Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's: .1 For caulking materials during application and curing. .2 For door materials and adhesives. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate door types and cutouts for lights, sizes, core construction.

.2

1.4

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type wood door.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Section 08 14 10 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4 SAMPLES (Cont'd)

.3 .4

Show door construction, core, glazing detail and faces.
Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Regulatory Requirements: .1 Wood fire rated doors: labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

.2

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1

Storage and Protection: .1 Protect doors from dampness. Arrange for delivery after work causing abnormal humidity has been completed. .2 Store doors in well ventilated room, off floor, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .3 Protect doors from scratches, handling marks and other damage. .4 Store doors away from direct sunlight.

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion, in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene and plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program. Unused or damaged glazing materials are not recyclable and must not be diverted to municipal recycling programs. Divert unused adhesive material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Section 08 14 10 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.8

WARRANTY

.1

For wood doors specified in this Section 08 14 10, warranty period is extended to three (3) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE RATED WOOD DOORS

.1

Wood doors: tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S104 to achieve rating as scheduled, ULC or WHI listed and labelled.

2.2 WOOD FLUSH DOORS

.1

To AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS Section 9 - Doors, Custom Grade, meeting the requirements of ANSI/WDMA Extra Heavy Duty performance level: .1 Construction: .1 Solid particleboard core: stile and rail frame bonded to particleboard core with wood lock blocks and special wood blocking for closers, locks and exit devices on labelled doors, 5-ply construction. .2 Face Panels: .1 Hardwood; face veneer: to AWS Section 4, Plain Sliced American White Ash. .3 Edge Type: .1 Edge Type D -Solid wood band, ash, veneer face edge shows. .4 Adhesive: .1 Type II (water resistant) for interior doors. .5 Factory Finish: System 4 - Latex Acrylic, Water-Based, to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS-2009, Section 5.

2.3

GLAZING

.1

Glass: in accordance to Section 08 80 50.

2.4

FABRICATION

.1 .2

Vertical edge strips to match face veneer. Prepare doors for glazing. Provide hardwood ash species glazing stops with mitred corners to match face veneer. Bevel vertical edges of single acting doors 3 mm in 50 mm on lock side and 1.5 mm in 50 mm on hinge side.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Section 08 14 10 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.4 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.4 .5

Factory pre-machine doors for specified hardware.
All doors to be factory sealed at top, bottom and at hardware cut-outs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1

Unwrap and protect doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 2, and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Install labelled fire rated doors to NFPA 80. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Adjust hardware for correct function. Install glazing in accordance with Section 08 80 50. Install stops.

.2 .3 .4 .5 .6

3.3

ADJUSTMENT

.1

Re-adjust doors and hardware just prior to completion of building to function freely and properly.

3.4

CLEANING

.1

Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Remove traces of primer, sealants; clean doors and frames. Clean glass and glazing materials with approved non-abrasive cleaner.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Section 08 14 10 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.4 CLEANING (Cont'd)

.4

On completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM B221-08, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. .3 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. .4 ASTM E413-10, Classifications for Rating Sound Insulation. .5 ASTM F1592-05, Standard Test Methods for Detention Hollow Metal Vision Systems. .6 ASTM F1915-05, Standard Test Methods for Glazing for Detention Facilities. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) .1 AAMA 506-08, Voluntary Specifications for Impact and Cycle Testing of Fenestration Products. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-12.8-97, Insulating Glass Units. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .3 CAN/CGSB-79.1-M91, Insect Screens. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International .1 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440-08, NAFS North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .2 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1-09, Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440, NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .3 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09/A440.3-09, Fenestration Energy Performance/User Guide to CSA A440.2-09, Fenestration Energy Performance. .4 CSA A440.4-07, Window, Door and Skylight Installation.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.5

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA) .1 North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use, IGMA TM-3000-90(04).

1.3

SAMPLE

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit one representative, complete full size model of each type of window. Include frame, sash, sill, glazing and weatherproofing method, insect screens, surface finish and hardware. Show location of manufacturer's nameplates. Fabricate remaining windows following review. Remaining windows to match reviewed sample. Sample window may be installed after review.

.3 .4 .5

1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings according to Section 01 33 00. Indicate materials and details in full size scale for head, jamb and sill, profiles of components, interior and exterior trim, junction between combination units, elevations of units, anchorage details, location of isolation coating, description of related components and exposed finishes, fasteners and caulking. Indicate locations of manufacturer's nameplates. Clearly delineate the air/vapour seal in the system itself and at the interface with adjacent sytems and materials.

.3

1.5

TEST REPORT

.1

Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with specifications, for: .1 Windows classifications. .2 Anodized finish, weathering characteristics. .3 Insect screens. .4 Air tightness level. .5 Water tightness. .6 Wind load resistance. .7 Condensation resistance. .8 Block operation - sliding windows only. .9 Sash strength and stiffness.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 TEST REPORT (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .10 Ease of operation - windows with operable lights. .11 Mullion deflection - combination and composite windows.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Store and handle glazed units on site in accordance with IGMAC recommendations.

1.7 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1

Provide operation and maintenance data for windows.

1.8

WARRANTY

.1 .2

For the work of this Section 08 51 13 the warranty period is extended to 3 (three) years. For insulating glass units the warranty period is extended to 5 (five) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA

.1

Windows shall have strength adequacy for post disaster, fail secure containment of inmates. Therefore windows shall meet 1.5 times the specified wind load without fracture of the product or excessive permanent deformation in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1 clause 4.2.3 Note (2). Windows shall meet Correctional Service Canada Level 3 (D3) providing extended resistance to attack in the form of rodsaw resistant steels and tempered glass. .1 Tool resisting steel bars shall be spaced maximum 115 mm apart. The center two bars on each window shall be 115 mm apart. Steel bars according to Section 10 28 00. Pass ASTM F1915: .1 Table 1 Impact test criteria: large blunt and sharp impactors, Security Grade 1. .2 Table 2 Impact test criteria: torch and small blunt impactor, Security Grade 1. Pass ASTM F1592:

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA (Cont'd)

.4

Pass ASTM F1592:(Cont'd) .1 Table 1 Impact Series for Frame and Glazing/Panel Impact Testing Multi Light Frame, Grade 1. Windows: fabricated for reglazing from exterior.

.5

2.2

MATERIALS

.1 .2 .3 .4

All windows by same manufacturer. Frames and Sashes: thermally broken aluminum. Frames: Curtain wall type aluminum extrusions to ASTM B221. Aluminum alloy and finish: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440S1, clear anodized, AA-M12C22A41, Architectural Class 1, minimum 50% recycled content. Hollow structural sections: to CAN/CSA-G40.20-04/G40.21-04(R2009), Type 350W, Class H, minimum 25% recycled content. Fasteners: stainless steel, Type 303, tamper proof. Thermal break: cork-neoprene composition or extruded or poured rigid polyvinyl chloride. Weatherstripping: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1. Sealant. .1 Multi-component, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Type 2; or one component, elastomeric, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87; or one component, silicone base, solvent curing to CAN/CGSB-19.18-M87, Ecologo certified. Colour as selected by Departmental Representative. .2 Sealant primer: type recommended by sealant manufacturer. .3 Joint filler: extruded, closed cell urethane, 20 Shore A hardness, 140 kPa, tensile strength, outsized 30 to 50%, CFC free. .4 Pick-proof security sealants: Security caulking to Section 07 90 00, in locations indicated and according to Section 07 90 00. Air Seal: foamed-in-place.

.5

.6 .7 .8

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.2 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.11 .12 .13

Glazing: to Section 08 80 50. Glass Type GL-4 and as scheduled. Bituminous paint: acid and alkali resistant to CAN/CSB-1.108-M89, type II, Ecologo certified. Screens: to CAN/CGSB-79.1-M91, Type 2 heavy duty, Class A fixed, Style 1 aluminum screening, 18 x 16 mesh; clear anodized aluminum Architectural Class 1 finish, Heavy Duty - S2 screen strength rating to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/ I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1.

2.3

FABRICATION

.1

Fixed windows with removable insulating glass: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Performance Class CW, Performance Grade PG2160 (CW45) product type FW, to the following performance levels: .1 Minimum Design Pressure: 2160 Pa. .2 Maximum Deflection at Design Pressure: 1/175. .3 Minimum (test and design) Structural Pressure: 3240 Pa. .4 Minimum (test and design) Water Pressure: 330 Pa. .5 Condensation resistance: I65. .6 Insulating glass units. Sliding windows (horizontal) with removable insulating glazing: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Performance Class CW, Performance Grade PG2160 (CW45), product type HS, to the following performance levels. .1 Minimum Design Pressure: 2160 Pa. .2 Maximum Deflection at Design Pressure: 1/175. .3 Minimum (test and design) Structural Pressure: 3240 Pa. .4 Minimum (test and design) Water Pressure: 330 Pa. .5 Air Tightness/ Minimum Air Leakage 2 Resistance: A3 - 0.5 L/s.m . .6 Condensation resistance: I65. .7 Insulating glass units. .8 Insect screens. .9 Operating force: 180 N to open, 115 N to maintain operation.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.3 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.3

Curtain wall type aluminum frames: curtain wall type aluminum extrusions to ASTM B221, mullion profile as indicated on drawings. .1 Fabricate frames with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. .2 Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. .3 Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Install anchors and fasteners. Arrange fasteners to ensure concealment from view.
Exterior metal sills: extruded aluminum of type and size as detailed to suit job conditions; minimum 3 mm thick, complete with joint covers, jamb drip deflectors, chairs, anchoring devices. Finish to match windows. Form sills to profiles indicated. Design window sash and screen for removal, servicing and repair from the exterior only. Units square and true with maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm for units with a diagonal measurement of 1800 mm or less and plus or minus 3 mm for units with a diagonal measurement over 1800 mm. Brace frames to maintain squareness and rigidity during shipment and installation. Face dimensions detailed are maximum permissible sizes. Form flashing to profiles indicated. Build in structural deflection allowance to prevent transfer of structural load to windows. Build thermal expansion allowance to withstand 85°C temperature difference without stressing sealants. Finish steel clips and reinforcement with shop coat primer to CAN/CGSB-1.40, or galvanize to 2 ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 55 (390 g/m ). Hardware: .1 Stainless steel or white bronze sash locks and aluminum handles to provide security and permit easy operation of units.

.4

.5 .6

.7 .8 .9 .10 .11

.12

.13

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.3 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.13

Hardware:(Cont'd) .2 Locks: provide operating sash with spring loading locking device, to provide automatic locking in closed position. .3 Where window latching devices are located in excess of 1900 mm above floor level, equip horizontal sliding units with hardware and design sash to permit pole operation. Air Barrier and Vapour Retarder: .1 Equip window frames with side installed air barrier and vapour retarder material for sealing to building air barrier and vapour retarder as follows: .1 Material: identical to, or compatible with, building air barrier and vapour retarder materials to provide required air tightness and vapour diffusion control throughout exterior envelope assembly. .2 Material width: adequate to provide required air tightness and vapour diffusion control to building air barrier and vapour retarder from interior.

.14

2.4 WINDOW ASSEMBLIES

.1

Fabricate and prepare curtain wall type frames and aluminum windows to be assembled, with snap-in type connections, as one unit. Install aluminum windows in aluminum curtain wall type frames to form full window assemblies ready for installation on site.

.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1

Install in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/ I.S.2/A440, AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1 and CSA A440.4. Apply bituminous paint to aluminum in contact with concrete and masonry. Units plumb, square and level to 1:400; free of warp, twist and superimposed loads; weathertight. Arrange components to prevent abrupt variation in colour. Securely anchor units in place with concealed fasteners.

.2 .3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.1 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.6

Fix sills in place, level, with uniform wash to exterior, level in length, straight in alignment with plumb upstands and faces. Use one piece length at each location. Install drip deflectors.
Cut and form trim pieces to fit window opening. Secure sills and trim pieces in place with concealed anchoring devices evenly spaced maximum 400 mm o.c. For pieces over 1200 mm in length, maintain 3 to 6 mm space at each end. Foamed-in-Place Air Seal: .1 Prior to application, remove mortar, dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign matter from joints to be sealed. .2 Apply seal in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Fill all joints between window asssembly and adjacent construction. Adjust opening sash and hardware to operate smoothly.

.7 .8

.9 .10

.11

3.2

GLAZING

.1

Window: in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, and Section 08 80 50.

3.3

SEALING

.1

Apply sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 00. Conceal sealant within window units except where exposed use is permitted by Departmental Representative. Seal all joints required for a weatherproof installation and against air/vapour leakage. Use materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and applied only by tradesmen specially trained or experienced in their use. Before applying sealant completely remove all mortar, dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign matter from surfaces it will contact. Mask adjoining surfaces.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Section 08 51 13 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.3 SEALING (Cont'd)

.5 .6 .7 .8 .9

Insert joint filler 9.5 mm below joint surface. Prime joints when recommended by sealant manufacturer. Apply sealant to manufacturer's instructions. Form smooth concave surface. Remove masking tape and sealant smears from adjacent surfaces.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3

Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. Section 11 19 12 - Detention Hardware. Electrical Division - Electrical wiring for magnetic strikes, electric releases and electric locks.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA). .1 CSDMA Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction): standard hardware location dimensions. American National Standards Institute/ Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. .1 ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2006, Butts and Hinges. .2 ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2003, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. .3 ANSI/BHMA A156.3-2008, Exit Devices. .4 ANSI/BHMA A156.4-2008, Door Controls (Closers). .5 ANSI/BHMA A156.5-2010, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. .6 ANSI/BHMA A156.6-2010, Architectural Door Trim. .7 ANSI/BHMA A156.8-2010, Door Controls Overhead Holders. .8 ANSI/BHMA A156.13-2005, Mortise Locks and Latches. .9 ANSI/BHMA A156.15-2006, Closer/Holder Release Device. .10 ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2008, Auxiliary Hardware. .11 ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006, Materials and Finishes. .12 ANSI/BHMA A156.19-2007, Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. .13 ANSI/BHMA A156.21-2009, American National Standard for Thresholds. .14 ANSI/BHMA A156.31-2007, American National Standard for Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). .1 ASTM F1577-2005, Standard Test Methods for Detention Locks for Swinging Doors.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1

Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number, brand name and number, finish and hardware package number. .3 After approval samples will be returned for incorporation in the Work. Hardware List: .1 Submit contract hardware list prepared by Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, and in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, size, finish and other pertinent information. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout Submittals .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for door closers, locksets, door holders, electrified hardware and fire exit hardware for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. .2 Conduct briefing of maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance.

.2

.3

.4

.5

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Regulatory Requirements: hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors shall be certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada. Certificates: provide product manufacturer certificates certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 EXTENDED WARRANTY

.1

For the work of this Section 08 71 00, warranty periods shall be ten (10) years for door closers, and two (2) years for the remaining hardware.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1

Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. Storage and Protection: .1 Store finishing hardware in locked, clean and dry area.

.2

1.7 WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANAGEMENT

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.

.2 .3

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 .2

Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Supply two sets of wrenches for door closers locksets and fire exit hardware.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

HARDWARE ITEMS

.1

Use one manufacturer's products only for similar items.

2.2

DOOR HARDWARE

.1

Locks and latches: .1 Mortise locks and latches: lock bodies for "BH" hardware groups to ANSI/BHMA A156.13, series 1000 mortise lock, Grade 1, designed for function as stated in Hardware Schedule and to receive interchangeable builder hardware cylinders UL 437 listed. .2 Mortise locks and latches: lock bodies for "IH" hardware groups to ASTM F1577 and ANSI/BHMA A156.13, series 1000 mortise lock, Grade 1, designed for function as stated in Hardware Schedule and to receive mogul cylinders. .3 Provide "IH" lock bodies with stainless steel spindle hubs, 25 mm throw investment cast stainless steel deadbolt with hardened steel insert, and 19 mm throw one piece stainless steel latchbolt with anti-friction insert. .4 Knobs: cast or heavy forged , with concealed fasteners, flat ball design. .5 Lever handles, where scheduled for barrier free access: cast or heavy forged, with concealed fasteners, flat faced with return-to-door profile. .6 Escutcheons: forged, 64 x 197 x 10 mm thick rectangular with concealed mounting posts attached to inside plate with 6-lobe Torx screws. Recessed cavity in face to enable flush mounting of cylinders without collars. .7 Normal strikes: box type, lip projection not beyond jamb. .8 Cylinders: key into keying system as directed by Departmental Representative. .9 Finished to 626. .10 All "BH" and "IH" lock bodies and trims shall be by same manufacturer. .11 All locks shall meet UL and CUL standard Class A, 3 hour rating. .12 Standard of acceptance: Sargent 9200 Series, Airteq 92000 Series, Southern Steel 10500 Series for "IH" locks. .13 Functions: .1 L1 = F01 Passage .2 L2 = F22 Privacy .3 L3 = F07 Storeroom .4 L4 = F04 Office

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .13 Functions:(Cont'd) .5 L5 = Classroom .6 L6 = F14 Storeroom, double cylinder .7 L7 = F18 Deadlock .8 L8 = F15 Hotel Bathroom .9 L9 = F13 Dormitory .10 L10 = Digital keypad/lockset (similar to Sargent KP8276). .11 All "IH" lock functions to receive Builders (BC) cylinders. Dual Axis Builders Hardware Key Cylinders - BC: .1 Interchangeable, heavy security, six-pin tumbler mortise cylinder of dual axis design with independent secondary sidebar pin locking mechanism; meeting ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Security and UL 437 standard for drill and pick resistance. .2 Tumbler and sidebar assemblies: Stainless steel, hardened stainless steel or nickel silver alloy .3 Body: Brass alloy. .4 Cylinder size: Manufacturer's standard as required to accommodate installation. .5 Keys: Hardware manufacturer's standard, designed to fit dual-axis builders cylinders. .6 Acceptable materials: ASSA VD.6552, BEST 1E72, Medeco 32W-0200 + 32W-0500. .7 Refer to Section 11 19 12 hardware groups for additional cylinder requirements. Electric Strikes: to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1 standards with size, type, function and finishes to match those specified in the hardware groups. .1 All electric strikes to be UL, CUL rated for fire. All to be set as "Fail Secure". .2 Equip all strikes with dual monitoring wire in parallel format to report status of latchbolt and locking cam. .3 All strikes to be provided with Type 304 stainless steel housing faceplates. .4 Electric strike types: .1 ES1: E59311 Rim mounted strike for rim exit devices. .2 ES2: E59321 Mortise mounted strike for mortise locks or exit devices having no deadbolt. .3 ES3: E59381 Mortise mounted strike in inactive leaf of pair of doors for mortise locks or exit devices having no deadbolt. Butts and hinges: .1 Butts and hinges: to ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, designated by letter A and numeral

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.4

Butts and hinges:(Cont'd) .1 Butts and hinges:(Cont'd) identifiers, followed by size and finish, listed in Hardware Schedule. .2 Provide all hinges with hospital tips, concealed bearings and non-removable stainless steel pins. .3 Hinges: .1 H1: A5112 Standard Weight .2 H2: A5111 Heavy Weight .3 EDH: electric detention hinge as specified in Section 11 19 12. .4 EDH2: same as H1 but 8 wire "CWT". Exit devices: to ANSI/BHMA A156.3, type and function as specified and scheduled, Grade 1, modern design, finished to 630. .1 Exit device types and accessories: .1 ED1: Type 1, Figure 4, Function 01, Rim Exit Only Alarm Device. .2 ED2: Type 3, Figure 4, Function 03, Mortise Night Latch Alarm Device, 24 VDC hardwired, c/w appropriate hardware power supply. .3 ED3: Type 3, Figure 6, Function 05, Mortise Locking Thumbpiece. .4 ED4: Type 3, Figure 6, Function 15, Mortise Non-Locking Thumbpiece. .5 ED5: Type 22, Locking removable mullion to suit locking devices. .6 ED6: Type 8, Figure 12, Function 12, Concealed V/R exit device with outside cylinder control. .7 ED7: Type 27, Self-latching auto flushbolts. .2 Provide delayed egress devices where scheduled, complete with power supplies PS to meet ULC and NBC requirements. .3 Provide labelled devices on rated openings. .4 Provide non-rated devices with cylinder dogging. .5 Provide keyed-function devices with cylinders to match other cylinders. Door Closers and Accessories: .1 Door controls (closers): to ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, and UL10C and UBC for positive pressure fire tests. All closer bodies shall have adjustable spring power, for size ranges 1 through 6, designated by letter C and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule, finished to 652. .2 All surface mounted closers fully reversible, non-handed. Bodies of heavy duty,

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.6

Door Closers and Accessories:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) one piece cast iron construction with full rack and pinion features. .3 All "IH" and "SH" series closers to be supplied with "Security Package" features including advanced backcheck, extra heavy duty arms/tracks and Torx-Plus (6 lobe) security fasteners. .4 Closer covers metal, finished to match arms as detailed in the hardware groups .5 Refer to "BH" and "IH" hardware groups and Door Schedule remarks column for closer types, features and mounting instructions. .6 Closer types: .1 C1 = C02011 .2 C2 = C02021 .3 C3 = C02231 .4 C4 = C02211 .5 C5 = C02021 x PT4G .6 C6 = C02041 Door Controls: Overhead holders/stops to ANSI/BHMA A156.8, designated by letter C and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule, finished to 626 or 630. .1 Overhead holder types: .1 OH1: C01511, Overhead concealed holder, heavy duty. .2 OH2: C01541, Overhead concealed stop, heavy duty. .3 OH3: C02511, Overhead surface holder, heavy duty. .4 OH4: C02541, Overhead surface stop, heavy duty. Door Operators: .1 To ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standards with sizes, arms, functions and finishes to suit those specified in hardware group. .2 Operators to operate with 120 VAC power and be actuated at the door by means of push type wall or jamb switch as detailed. .3 Operator width from jamb to jamb of the frame. Finish in clear anodized aluminum, finish designation AA A31. .4 Wall actuator switches 152 mm diameter stainless steel units with Barrier Free symbol engraved. Exterior switches c/w gaskets. .5 Jamb actuator switches, where acceptable, sized to suit pressed steel and/or aluminum frame jambs with full contact moving plate, stainless steel with Barrier Free symbol engraved.

.7

.8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 8 2011-05-18

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.8

Door Operators:(Cont'd) .6 Provide units with an electronic interface package when used in conjunction with electronic locking products. .7 Door operator types: .1 AO1: Top jamb push side mounted. .2 AO2: Top jamb pull side mounted. Release Device: to ANSI/BHMA A156.15 standards with types, functions and finishes to suit those specified in hardware groups. .1 Provide with armature and magnet projection to suit. Integrate into Fire Alarm system. .2 Release types: .1 RD1: = C00011 (voltage as required). Architectural door trim: to ANSI/BHMA A156.6, designated by letter J and numeral identifiers as listed below, stainless steel Type 304. Where applied to labeled doors provide labeled products. .1 Door protection plates, KP: kick plate type J102, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel finished to 630. .2 Push plates, PP: type J301, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, B4E edges, size to suit door as scheduled, finished to 630. .3 Mop plates, MP: kick plate type J103, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, finished to 630. .4 Bumper plates, BP: kick plate type J101, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, finished to 630. .5 Push/pull units: size, type and finishes to match those specified in hardware groups. Surface mounted, raised hand grasp design with drilled, countersunk holes in flanges for fasteners. .1 Material and finish: Cast bronze, satin chrome finish 626, or satin stainless steel 630. .2 Exposed fastener heads shall be of finish matching hardware. .3 Door pulls and pushbars: .1 DP1: as specified in Section 11 19 12. .2 DP2: Type J401 x 610 mm long x 32 mm diameter, concealed mounting. .3 DP3: Type J407 x 305 mm long pull x 25 mm diameter. Backplate to be 394 mm high x 38 mm wide x 3 mm thick and drilled to accept pull bolts. .4 DP4: Type J501, horizontal push with concealed mounting bar, sized to suit door width x 32 mm diameter.

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 9 2011-05-18

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.11

Auxiliary hardware: to ANSI/BHMA A156.16, designated by letter L and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule and as listed below, finished as specified. .1 Door silencer, RS: push-in type to suit pressed steel frames with 3 mm thick contact pads of rubber or neoprene. .2 Head and Foot Bolt: .1 Manual operation only. Operate by special spanner type key. .2 Case to be malleable iron 137 mm high x 70 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .3 Coverplates 5 mm thick steel. .4 Bolt 25 mm diameter with standard 10 mm projection and 19 mm throw. .5 Fasteners, three 10 mm diameter flat head security screws. .6 Finish: steel primed for paint. .7 Bolt types: .1 HFB1: specified in Section 11 19 12. .2 HFB2: Flush bolts for BH and IH groups, Type L04251. .3 HFB3: Dustproof strike for BH and IH groups, Type L04021. .3 Door Stops: .1 Door stop types: .1 DS1: L52141, low dome floor stop. .2 DS2: L52161, high dome floor stop. .3 DS3: L52251, concealed mount, concave wall stop. .4 DS4: L52011, wall mounted base stop. .4 Coat Hook: Security type with single pole hook that snaps down for safety if excessively loaded. Hook to be an integral part of backplate, approximately 100 x 100 x 20 mm, with hook projection of 30 mm. Attach to wall or door by means of Torx-Plus fasteners on face of coat hook. Thresholds: to ANSI/BHMA A156.21, 125 mm wide x full width of door opening x 6 mm high, minimum 3 mm thickness extruded aluminum mill finish, serrated surface. Furnish with stainless steel flathead Torx 6-lobe fasteners. .1 Threshold types: .1 TH1: J32120. .2 TH2: J32130. Weatherstripping:

.12

.13

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 10 2011-05-18

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)

.13

Weatherstripping:(Cont'd) .1 Fire and Smoke performance: .1 Fire: Tested in accordance with UL 10B or NFPA 252; UL classified as gasketing material for use in fire doors. .2 Smoke: Meeting requirements of NFPA 105 when tested in accordance with UL 1784 or ASTM E283. .2 Head and jamb seal: to ANSI/BHMA A156.22 standards with size, type and finish to match those specified in hardware groups. .3 Self-adhering Gaskets: Pressure sensitive self-adhesive type silicone compression bulb gasketing; dark bronze or black colour. .4 Bulb Seal with Retainer: Silicone type seal insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for hardware mounting on top. .5 Brush Seal: Minimum 15 mm height nylon brush gasketing insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for mounting to door or frame. .6 Door bottom seal: Minimum 25 mm height nylon brush gasketing insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for surface mounting to bottom edge face of door. .7 Finishes: clear anodized or mill finish. .8 Weatherstrip and door sweep types: .1 WS1: R0Y154, smoke seal. .2 WS2: R3D165, head and jamb gasketing. .3 WS3: R3A435, door sweep with silicone bulb seal.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE

.1

Padlocks, PL: to ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Security and UL 437 standard for drill and pick resistance. Heavy duty , high security padlock with removable cylinder plug. .1 Body: Case hardened stainless steel. .2 Shackle: Minimum 11 mm diameter, rustproof, case hardened steel. .3 Cylinder plug: Removable six-pin tumbler type with independent secondary sidebar pin locking mechanism of same design as specified for dual-axis Builders Hardware cylinders. .4 Same manufacturer and keyway as supplied Builders Hardware cylinders.

2.4

NUMBER PLATE

.1

Provide each door with engraved lamacoid number plate 38 mm high x length to suit, engraved with door number shown on drawings. Letter height 25 mm.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 11 2011-05-18

2.4 NUMBER PLATE (Cont'd)

.2

Secure number plate to access side of door, in top-most corner on latch side with Torx-Plus security screws, or as directed.

2.5

FASTENINGS

.1

Use only fasteners provided by manufacturer. Failure to comply may void warranties and applicable licensed labels. Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware. Use security "Torx-Plus" (6-lobe) fasteners. Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware. Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side, supply fastening devices, and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners. Supply flush pulls with machine screws for attaching as specified above. Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.

.2

.3 .4

.5

2.6

KEYING

.1

Lay out keying system for the building in consultation with Departmental Representative. Keying system shall include keying alike, keying differently, keying in groups, master keying and grand-master keying locks as required. All non-mogul cylinders to be construction keyed for duration of project construction. Prepare and submit keying chart and related explanatory data to the Departmental Representative for approval. Do not commence lock work until written confirmation of keying arrangements is received from Departmental Representative. The Departmental Representative shall enter into a "Contract" with the dual-axis builders cylinder manufacturer. Said "Contract" shall be separate from the Contractor's scope of work. The "Contract" is for the sole purpose of establishing and maintaining the security of the keying system as it relates to this Facility for key and keyway control. It shall in no way

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 12 2011-05-18

2.6 KEYING (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) involve or establish any monetary considerations for the Facility, Contractor or manufacturer. Supply following keys: .1 3 grand-master keys .2 3 master keys per group .3 2 change keys for each lock .4 10 construction keys Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders. Provide construction cores. Provide all permanent cores and keys to Departmental Representative. Forward grand-master, master, change keyes and mogul cylinder keyes to Departmental Representative by registered mail or bonded courier with covering letter.

.4

.5 .6 .7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

COORDINATION

.1

This Section supplier to install all hardware and doors for "BH" and "IH" hardware groups specified herein. Co-ordinate installation with allied trades such as architectural woodwork, metal doors and frames, partition suppliers and installers. Supply cylinders for locks provided under other Sections.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets. Furnish metal door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware. Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 13 2011-05-18

3.3

INSTALLATION

.1

Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association. Where door stop contacts door pulls, mount stop to strike bottom of pull. Install key control cabinet. Remove construction cores when directed by Departmental Representative; install permanent cores and check operation of locks.

.2 .3 .4

3.4

ADJUSTING

.1

Provide services of competent mechanic to inspect installation of hardware furnished under this Section and to supervise all adjustments (by the trade responsible for fixing) which are necessary to leave hardware in perfect working order. Adjust door hardware, operators, closures and controls for optimum, smooth operating condition, safety and for weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts. Adjust door hardware to provide tight fit at contact points with frames.

.2

.3 .4

3.5

CLEANING

.1 .2

Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish hardware in accordance with manufacture's instructions. Remove protective material from hardware items where present. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 14 2011-05-18

3.6

DEMONSTRATION

.1

Keying System Setup and Cabinet: .1 Set up key control system with file key tags, duplicate key tags, numerical index, alphabetical index and key change index, label shields, control book and key receipt cards. .2 Place file keys and duplicate keys in key cabinet on their respective hooks. .3 Lock key cabinet and turn over key to Departmental Representative. Maintenance Staff Briefing: .1 Brief maintenance staff regarding: .1 Proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance of projects complete hardware. .2 Description, use, handling, and storage of keys. .3 Use, application and storage of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements.

.2

.3

3.7 HARDWARE GROUPS

.1

Indicated hardware groups are for one door or one pair of doors only. Provide this quantity for each door or pair of doors as scheduled. Group BH1 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Lockset L5x626 1 - Security coat hook CHx630 1 - Floor stop DS1/DS2x630 3 - Silencers RS Group BH2 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Lockset L5x626 1 - Floor stop DS1/DS2x630 3 - Silencers RS Group BH3 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Lockset L3x626 1 - Closer C1x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Floor stop DS1/DS2x630 3 - Silencers RS Note: OH stop (OH2) on Door #116B Group BH4 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Privacy lock L2x626

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 15 2011-05-18

3.7 HARDWARE GROUPS (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) 1 - Security coat hook CHx630 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Wall stop DS3x630 3 - Silencers RS Group BH5 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Lockset L5x630 1 - Closer C5x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 3 - Silencers RS Note: L3 function lockset on Door #114 Group BH6 1 - Continuous hinge CH1x630 1 - Door pull DP2x630 1 - Push bar DP4x630 1 - B/F operator AO1x628 2 - Operating switches 1 - Overhead stop OH2x626, size to suit, concealed 1 - Threshold TH1xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Door sweep WS3xLTSx628 1 - Concealed magnetic switch CDPSx630 Portal Security Drawing: Type 7 Group BH7 1 - Continuous hinge CH1x630 1 - Door pull DP2x630 1 - Push bar DP4x630 1 - Closer C2x652 1 - Overhead stop OH2x626, size to suit, 90°, concealed 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630, size to suit 1 - Threshold TH1xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Door sweep WS3xLTSx628 1 - Concealed magnetic switch CDPSx630 Portal Security Drawing: Type 10 Group IH1 3 - Hinges H2x630 1 - Lockset L9x630 1 - Security coathook CHx630 1 - Wall stop DS3x630 3 - Silencers RS Provide lever trim on locks in barrier-free bedrooms as scheduled. Group IH2 - NOT USED 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Deadlock L7x626

.6

.7

.8

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 16 2011-05-18

3.7 HARDWARE GROUPS (Cont'd)

.10

(Cont'd) 1 - Recessed flush pull RFPx630 3 - Silencers RS Group IH3 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Lockset L6x626 1 - Closer C5x689 1 - Threshold TH1xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Door sweep WS3xLTSx628 1 - Concealed magnetic switch CDPSx630 1 - Bolt position switch CBPSx600 3 - Silencers RS Portal Security Drawing: Type 5 Group IH4 -NOT USED 3 - Hinges H2x630 1 - Latchset L1x626 1 - Closer C3x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Floor stop DS2x630 3 - Silencers RS Group IH5 2 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Electric hinge EDH2x630 (for Alarm Exit Device) 1 - Alarm exit device ED2x630 (BC cylinder in alarm rail) 1 - Closer C5x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Threshold TH1xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Door sweep WS3xLTSx628 1 - Concealed magnetic switch CDPSx630 1 - Bolt position switch CBPSx600 3 - Silencers RS Portal Security Drawing: Type 8 Group IH6 3 - Hinges H1x630 1 - Lockset L5x626 1 - Closer C3x652 (for labeled doors only) 1 - Security coathook CHx630 1 - Floor stop DS2x630 3 - Silencers RS Group IH7 3 - Hinges H2x630 1 - Lockset L3x626 1 - Wall stop DS3x630 3 - Silencers RS Add 1 Closer C3x653 to labeled doors and Door #123

.11

.12

.13

.14

.15

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOOR HARDWARE

Section 08 71 00 Page 17 2011-05-18

3.7 HARDWARE GROUPS (Cont'd)

.16

Group IH8 4 - Hinges H2x630 1 - Door pull DP3x630 1 - Pushplate PP152x508x630 1 - Closer C3x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Wall stop DS3x630 3 - Silencers RS
Group IH9 4 - Hinges H2x630 1 - Latchset L1x626 1 - Closer C3x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Release device RD1x626, wall mounted, tie into fire alarm system 3 - Silencers RS Portal Security Drawing: Type 9

.17

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American National Standards Institute (ANSI). .1 ANSI Z97.1-2009, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Tests. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM D790-10, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. .2 ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. .3 ASTM E84-10b, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .4 ASTM E330-02(2010), Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .5 ASTM F1233-08, Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass. .2 CAN/CGSB-12.4-M91, Heat Absorbing Glass. .3 CAN/CGSB-12.8-97, Insulating Glass Units. .4 CAN/CGSB-12.10-M76, Glass, Light and Heat Reflecting. .5 CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90, Wired Safety Glass. .6 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA A440.2-09/A440.3-09, Fenestration Energy Performance/User Guide to CSA A440.2-09, Fenestration Energy Performance. .2 CSA Certification Program for Windows and Doors 2000. Environmental Choice Program (ECP). .1 CCD-045-95, Sealants and Caulking. Flat Glass Manufacturers Association (FGMA). .1 FGMA Glazing Manual.

.2

.3

.4

.5 .6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1

Performance Requirements: .1 Provide continuity of building enclosure vapour and air barrier using glass and glazing materials as follow: .1 Utilize inner light of multiple light sealed units for continuity of air and vapour seal. .2 Limit glass deflection to 1/200 with full recovery of glazing materials.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1

Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's for glazing materials during application and curing. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm size samples of each type of glass and glass assembly, and sealant material. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data including cleaning instructions for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.

.2

.3

.4

.5

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

.1

Environmental Requirements: .1 Install glazing when ambient temperature is 10°C minimum. Maintain ventilated environment for 24 hours after application.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) Maintain minimum ambient temperature .2 before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert metal cut-offs from landfill by disposal into on-site Metal recycling bin. Divert uninstalled materials for reuse at nearest used building materials facility or similar type facility. Divert unused caulking and sealant materials from landfill through disposal at special wastes depot. Unused or damaged glazing materials are not recyclable and must not be diverted to municipal recycling programs. Remove form site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

.2 .3

.4

.5

.6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS: FLAT GLASS

.1

Polycarbonate security glass: to ANSI Z97.1. .1 Polycarbonate sheet, 12.7 mm overall thickness, clear. .2 Ballistic performance: to ASTM F1233. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM D790. .4 Surface burning characteristics for flame and smoke spread: to ASTM E84. Safety glass - GL-1: to CAN/CGSB-12.1, transparent or coloured as indicated for types specified, 6 mm thick. .1 Type 2-tempered. .2 Class B-float. Safety glass - GL-2: not used. Wired glass - GL-3: to CAN/CGSB-12.11, 6 mm thick. .1 Type 1-Polished both sides (transparent). .2 Wire mesh styles 3-Square.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.2 MATERIALS: SEALED INSULATING GLASS

.1

Insulating glass units - GL-4: to CAN/CGSB-12.8, double unit, 25 mm overall thickness. .1 Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1. .2 Glass thickness: 6 mm each light, clear. .3 Inter-cavity space thickness: 13 mm, with low conductivity spacers. .4 Glass coating: surface number 2, low "E" MSVD. .5 Inert gas fill: argon. .6 Performance characteristics: .1 Visible light transmission: 69%. .2 U-value winter: 0.29. .3 U-value summer: 0.29. .4 Solar heat gain: 0.37. .5 Shading coefficient: 0.44. .6 Outdoor visible light reflectance: 12%.

2.3

SECURITY GLASS

.1

GL-5: Consisting of 4 mm tempered glass each side of 12.7 mm polycarbonate, sheets separated by 1.5 mm gap both sides. Sheet components shall meet products specified above. GL-6: Consisting of 6 mm polished Georgian wire glass, 12.7 mm polycarbonate, and 4 mm tempered glass on opposite side of polycarbonate. Sheets separated by 1.5 mm gap both sides. Sheet components shall meet products specified above. GL-7: not used.

.2

.3

2.4

ACCESSORIES

.1

Setting blocks: Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, to suit glazing method, glass light weight and area, minimum 100 mm x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1.5 mm x height. Spacer shims: Neoprene Silicone, 50-60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, 75 mm long x one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application. Self adhesive on one face. Glazing tape: .1 Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device, 10-15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240; coiled on release paper; black colour. .2 Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume 2%,

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.4 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd)

.3

Glazing tape:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) designed for compression of 25%, to effect an air and vapour seal. Sealant: multicomponent, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.24, Type 2, Class A, Ecologo certified.

.4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.

3.2

EXAMINATION

.1 .2

Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.

3.3

PREPARATION

.1 .2 .3

Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

.1

Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, IGMAC and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6 mm below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant. Apply heel bead of sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete continuity of air and vapour seal.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) (Cont'd)

.4 .5

Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel head of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of light or glass unit.
Install removable stops with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops 6 mm below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing light or unit with tape flush with 16 mm below sight line. Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, maximum 9 mm below sight line. Apply cap head of sealant along void between stop and glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

.6

.7

.8

3.5 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR - WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)

.1

Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, IGMAC and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing light or unit. Install removable stops with glazing centred in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 600 mm intervals, 6 mm below sight line. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth of bite on glazing, maximum 9 mm below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue air and vapour seal. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

.2 .3

.4

.5

3.6 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

.1

Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, IGMAC and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight line.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.6 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) (Cont'd)

.3 .4

Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light or unit.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. Knife trim protruding tape.

.5 .6

.7

3.7 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)

.1

Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, IGMAC and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight line. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of light or unit. Install removable stops, with spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 600 mm intervals, 6 mm below sight line. Fill gaps between light and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line. Trim protruding tape edge.

.2

.3 .4

.5

.6

.7

3.8

CLEANING

.1 .2 .3 .4

Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Remove traces of primer, caulking. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. Remove labels after work is complete.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GLAZING

Section 08 80 50 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.8 CLEANING (Cont'd)

.5 .6

Clean glass using approved non-abrasive cleaner in accordance with manufacture's instructions.
Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1

After installation, mark light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOUVRES AND VENTS

Section 08 90 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Section 07 46 13 - Preformed Metal Cladding. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealing. Mechanical Division - Mechanical ductwork.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

The Aluminum Association Inc. (AAI) .1 AAI DAF-45-2003, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes - 9th Edition. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) .1 AAMA 2605-05, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

.2

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate fabrication and erection details, including anchorage, accessories, and finishes. Samples: .1 Submit duplicate samples of each type of louvre showing colour and finish. .2 Show frame detail, screening and finish. Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedure.

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOUVRES AND VENTS

Section 08 90 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.6

Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for louvres for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials off ground and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Protect louvres from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.2

.3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Aluminum extrusions: Aluminum Association alloy AA 6063-T5. Fasteners: same material as fabricated items. Gaskets: vinyl. Screens: .1 Birdscreens: intercrimped aluminum wire cloth secured to 1.4 mm thick extruded aluminum frame mitered at corners and secured with corner locks, 12.7 mm size mesh. Continuous blade extruded aluminum louvres: .1 Construct louvres from 6063-T5 alloy aluminum extrusions of minimum 3 mm thickness to sizes and shapes indicated. .2 Arrange blades, mullions and frame extrusions as indicated.

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOUVRES AND VENTS

Section 08 90 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) .3 Design mullions with sliding interlock with integral internal drains. .4 Install concealed vertical stiffeners spaced to meet required loads. .5 Complete louvre assembly to have 54% free area.

2.2

FINISHES

.1

Factory finished with minimum 0.025 mm thick metallic series polyvinyledene fluoride coating to AAMA 2605.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Install louvres where indicated. Set adjustable louvre blades for uniform alignment in open and closed positions. Adjust louvres so moving parts operate smoothly. Attach bird screen to inside face of louvre or vent. Repair damage to louvres to match original finish. Install wall louvers using fasteners as appropriate for wall construction and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3

CLEANING

.1 .2

Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LOUVRES AND VENTS

Section 08 90 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.4

PROTECTION

.1

Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint dissimilar metal with primer and two coats of aluminum paint. Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

.2

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1 .2

Aluminum Association .1 Designation for Aluminum Finishes-2003. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM C473-10, Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. .3 ASTM C475/C475M-02(2007), Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. .4 ASTM C840-08, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. .5 ASTM C919-08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .6 ASTM C920-10, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .7 ASTM C1002-07, Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. .8 ASTM C1047-10a, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. .9 ASTM C1177/C1177M-08, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. .10 ASTM C1178/C1178M-08, Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. .11 ASTM C1280-09, Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board. .12 ASTM C1288-99(2010), Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets. .13 ASTM C1325-08b, Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units. .14 ASTM C1396/C1396M-09a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. .15 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. .16 ASTM E2638-10, Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of the Speech Privacy Provided by a Closed Room. Association of the Wall and Ceilings Industries International (AWEI)

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.1 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.4

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86(R1988), Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. .2 CAN/CGSB-71.25-M88, Adhesive, for Bonding Drywall to Wood Framing and Metal Studs.
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

.5

1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing manufacturers brand name and identification. Store materials inside, level, under cover. Keep dry. Protect from weather, other elements and damage from construction operations and other causes. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal accessories and trim from being bent or damaged.

.2

.3

1.3 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1

Maintain temperature minimum 10°C, maximum 21°C for 48 hours prior to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for at least 48 hours after completion of joint treatment. Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.

.2 .3

1.4

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm size samples of board products and 300 mm long samples of corner and casing beads mouldings, insulating strip.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1

Minimum sound transmission rating of installed panel partition to be STC 30, tested to ASTM E90. Minimum speech privacy category SPC Standard Speech Privacy 60-65 tested to ASTM E2638.

.2

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Divert unused gypsum from landfill to gypsum recycling facility for disposal approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused wood materials from landfill to recycling, composting facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused paint and caulking material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

.4

.5

.6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Standard board: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, regular, 12.7 mm thick and Type X, 15.9 mm thick, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, edges squared for bottom or base layer, bevelled for top or finished layer,Ecologo certified minimum 25% recycled content. Glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing board: to ASTM C1178/C1178M, 12.7 mm thick, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length. Glass mat gypsum substrate sheathing: to ASTM C1177/C1177M, 12.7 mm thick, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length. Abuse-resistant fibre-reinforced gypsum board: 13 mm and 16 mm thick, 1220 x 2440 mm or 1220 x

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) 3658 mm, edges tapered, CCMC 12525-R, fibreglass reinforcing mesh backing, bearing Ecologo to ECP/PCE-50-93. Cement board: cementitious concrete core of expanded shale aggregate, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; to ASTM C1288 and ASTM C1325, 13 mm thick, edges tapered, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length. Water absorption: Not greater than 8 percent when tested for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM C473. Metal furring runners, hangers, tie wires, inserts, anchors: to ASTM C1047, steel minimum 25% recycled content. Furring channels: 0.5 mm core thickness galvanized steel channels for screw attachment of gypsum board. Steel minimum 25% recycled content. Resilient furring: 0.5 mm base steel thickness galvanized steel for resilient attachment of gypsum board. Steel minimum 25% recycled content. Steel drill screws: to ASTM C1002. Laminating compound: as recommended by manufacturer, asbestos-free. Reveal trim pieces, casing beads, corner beads, control joints and edge trim: to ASTM C1047, metal, zinc-coated by hot-dip process, 0.5 mm base thickness, perforated flanges, one piece length per location. Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 90 00. Acoustical sealant: one part silicone to ASTM C919 and ASTM C920, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, SWRI validated, Ecologo certified, maximum VOC 60 g/L. Polyethylene: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, Type 2. Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant, 3 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9 .10 .11

.12 .13

.14 .15

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.16 .17

Joint compound: to ASTM C475/C475M, asbestos-free. Fasteners for cement board: galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 85, or coated streaker type screw, 31.25 mm long. Cement board joint cement and tape: as recommended by board manufacturer.

.18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

ERECTION

.1

Do application and finishing of gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise. Do application of gypsum sheathing in accordance with ASTM C1280. Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise. Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200. Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers, grilles and the like. Install 19 x 64 mm furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud partition header track. Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings. Furr above suspended ceilings for gypsum board fire and sound stops and to form plenum areas as indicated. Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with ASTM C840, except where specified otherwise. Furr openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, and the like, on four

.2 .3

.4

.5 .6

.7

.8 .9

.10

.11

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.1 ERECTION (Cont'd)

.11

(Cont'd) sides. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers. Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated. Erect resilient furring transversely across studs, spaced maximum 600 mm on centre and not more than 150 mm from ceiling/wall juncture. Secure to each support with 25 mm screw.

.12 .13

3.2

APPLICATION

.1

Do not apply gypsum board, abuse-resistant board, and cement board until bucks, anchors, blocking, sound attenuation, electrical and mechanical work are approved. Where indicated apply single and double layer gypsum board to metal furring or framing using screw fasteners for first layer, screw fasteners for second layer. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm on centre, and as required for fire-resistance rating as indicated. Apply single layer gypsum board to concrete block surfaces, where indicated, using furring channels or laminating adhesive as indicated. Apply water-resistant gypsum board where wall tiles to be applied and adjacent to slop sinks, in janitors closets. Apply water-resistant sealant to edges, ends, cut-outs which expose gypsum core and to fastener heads. Do not apply joint treatment on areas to receive tile finish. Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cut-outs around electrical boxes, ducts, and like openings in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustic sealant. Cement board: install board where indicated. Where boards abut on framing insert screw through standard washer and screw to framing between to panels so that washer catches both panel edges. Abuse-resistant fibre-reinforced gypsum board: install abuse-resistant board where indicated.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.2 APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.7

(Cont'd) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3

INSTALLATION

.1

Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm on centre using contact adhesive for full length. Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings. Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant. Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break. Install shadow mould at gypsum board/ceiling juncture as indicated. Minimize joints; use corner pieces and splicers. Construct control joints of two back-to-back casing beads set in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint. Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints. Locate control joints where indicated and as a minimum at changes in substrate construction, and at approximate 10 m spacing on long corridor runs, and at approximate 15 m spacing on ceilings. Install control joints straight and true. Construct expansion joints as detailed, at building expansion and construction joints. Provide continuous dust barrier. Install expansion joint straight and true.

.2 .3

.4

.5

.6

.7 .8

.9 .10

.11

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.3 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.12

Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections. .1 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.
Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces. Gypsum Board Finish: finish gypsum board walls and ceilings to following levels in accordance with Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries (AWCI) International Recommended Specification on Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: .1 Levels of finish: .1 Level 1 (for concealed assemblies): Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound. Surfaces to be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable. .2 Level 2 (for water-resistant board): Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply one separate coat of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable. .3 Level 4: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. .4 Level 5 ( for gloss, semi-gloss, enamel or non-textural flat coatings) : Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to entire surface; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces. Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed.

.13

.14

.15

.16

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Section 09 21 16 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.3 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.17

Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board.
Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for surface finish. Mix joint compound slightly thinner than for joint taping. Apply thin coat to entire surface using trowel or drywall broadknife to fill surface texture differences, variations or tool marks. Allow skim coat to dry completely. Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth. Finish joints in cement board with tape and joint compound recommended by board manufacturer. Do not tape joints where subsequently applied finish is not paint. Provide protection that ensures gypsum board work will remain without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

.18

.19 .20

.21 .22 .23

.24

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

Section 09 22 16 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM C645-09a, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. .2 ASTM C754-09a, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. .3 ASTM C919-08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .4 ASTM C920-10, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .5 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. .6 ASTM E2638-10, Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of the Speech Privacy Provided by a Closed Room.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Certificates: product certificates from manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused gypsum materials from landfill to recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

Section 09 22 16 Page 2 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Non-load bearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645, stud size as indicated, roll formed from 0.53 mm thickness hot dipped galvanized steel sheet, for screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock-out service holes at 460 mm centres. Steel, minimum 25% recycled content. Floor and ceiling tracks: to ASTM C645, in widths to suit stud sizes, 32 mm flange height. Steel, minimum 25% recycled content. Metal channel stiffener: to suit stud size, 1.4 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust inhibitive coating, minimum 25% recycled content. Acoustical sealant: one part silicone to ASTM C919 and ASTM C920, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, SWRI validated, Ecologo certified, maximum VOC 60 g/L. Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 3 mm thick foam strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking adhesive on one face, lengths as required.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

ERECTION

.1 .2

Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at 600 mm on centre maximum. Install polyethylene damp proof course under stud shoe tracks of partitions on slabs on grade. Place studs vertically at centers indicated and not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer's instructions. Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000. Attach studs to bottom track using screws.

.3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

Section 09 22 16 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.1 ERECTION (Cont'd)

.6

Co-ordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.
Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections. Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than stud centres specified. Secure studs together, 50 mm apart using column clips or other approved means of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips. Erect track at head of door/window openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wall studs. Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend framing into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers. Provide 40 mm stud or furring channel secured between studs for attachment of fixtures behind lavatory basins, toilet and bathroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab bars and towel rails, attached to steel stud partitions. Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes. Extend partitions to ceiling height except where noted otherwise on drawings. Maintain clearance under beams and structural slabs to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs. Use 50 mm leg ceiling tracks. Use double track slip joint where indicated. Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from uninsulated surfaces. Install two continuous beads of acoustical sealant or insulating strip under studs and tracks around perimeter of sound control partitions to meet SPC 60-65 to ASTM E2638.

.7

.8

.9

.10

.11

.12 .13 .14

.15 .16

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

Section 09 22 16 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.2

CLEANING

.1

Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Section 09 51 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3

Section 06 40 01 - Architectural Woodwork. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. Section 09 53 00 - Acoustical Suspension.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM E1264-08e1, Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. .2 ASTM E2638-10, Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of the Speech Privacy Provided by a Closed Room. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building Construction. .2 CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.2

.3

1.3

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate full size samples of each type of acoustical units.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Section 09 51 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2

Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation. Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15°C and humidity of 20 - 40% before and during installation. Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation.

.3

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Provide extra materials of acoustic units in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide acoustical units and in quantitites as directed by Departmental Representative. Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials. Clearly identify each type of acoustic unit, including colour and texture. Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this section. Store where directed by Departmental Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1. .1 Type: ACT-1. .2 Cellulose fibre with minimum 55% recycled content. .3 Pattern: medium texture, non-directional, Pattern CD as classified by ASTM E1264. .4 Flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102. .5 Smoke developed 10 or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102. .6 Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.55. .7 Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) rating minimum 0.45, in accordance with ASTM E1264 .8 Light reflectance range of minimum 0.84. .9 Edge type square. .10 Colour: white. .11 Size 610 x 610 x 15.9 mm thick, and 1220 x 610 x 15.9 mm thick, as indicated.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Section 09 51 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .12 Shape flat. .13 Surface coverings: EcoLogo certified paint, low VOC paint. Staples, nails and screws: non-corrosive finish as recommended by acoustic unit manufacturer. Polyethylene: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.15 mm thick. Hold down clips: purpose made clips to secure tile to suspension system in vestibules, and approved for use in fire-rated systems.

.2 .3 .4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

EXAMINATION

.1

Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by Departmental Representative.

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system. Provide hold-down clips on ceiling system installed in vestibules.

3.3

APPLICATION

.1

Install acoustical units parallel to building lines with edge unit not less than 50% of unit width or/and as indicated on reflected ceiling plans, with pattern running in same direction. Scribe acoustic units to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tight, terminate edges with moulding.

.2

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

.1

Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION

Section 09 53 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C635/C635M-07, Standard Specifications for the Manufacture, Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. .2 ASTM C636/C636M-08, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.2

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 .2

Maximum deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM C635/C635M deflection test. Submit certficate stating that suspended ceiling systems provide adequate support for electrical fixtures as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Indicate lay-out, insert and hanger spacing and fastening details, splicing method for main and cross runners, location of access splines,access door dimensions and locations, lateral bracing and accessories. Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit one representative model of each type of ceiling suspension system. .2 Ceiling system to show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, recessed fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes, acoustical unit installation.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION

Section 09 53 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 .2

Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Heavy duty system to ASTM C635/C635M. Basic materials for suspension system: commercial quality cold rolled steel, zinc coated. Suspension system: non fire rated, made up as follows: .1 Two directional exposed tee bar grid. Exposed tee bar grid components: shop painted satin sheen white colour. Components die cut. Main tee with double web, rectangular bulb and 25 mm rolled cap on exposed face. Cross tee with rectangular bulb; web extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection. Hanger wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire, 2.6 mm diameter. Hanger inserts: purpose made. Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding flush reveal, to complement suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer.

.3

.4

.5 .6 .7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION

Section 09 53 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1

Installation: in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M except where specified otherwise. Install suspension system to manufacturer's instructions and certification organizations tested design requirements. Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected by Departmental Representative. Secure hangers to overhead structure using attachment methods as indicated. Install hangers spaced at maximum 1200 mm centres and within 150 mm from ends of main tees. Lay out system according to reflected ceiling plan. Ensure suspension system is co-ordinated with location of related components. Install wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height. Completed suspension system to support super-imposed loads, such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles and speakers. Support at light fixtures, diffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. Interlock cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly. Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers, speakers and at changes in ceiling heights.

.2

.3

.4 .5

.6 .7 .8 .9

.10

.11 .12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION

Section 09 53 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

3.2 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.13 .14

Finished ceiling system to be square with adjoining walls and level within 1:1000.
Expansion joints: .1 Erect two main runners parallel, 25 mm apart, on building expansion joint line. Lay in strip of acoustic tile/board, painted black, 25% narrower than space between two 'T' bars.

3.3

CLEANING

.1 .2

Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

RESILIENT FLOORING

Section 09 65 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3

Section 03 30 11 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Section 09 69 01 - Access Flooring. Section 09 96 00 - Seamless Flooring.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1 .2 .3

ASTM F1066-04(2010)e1, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. ASTM F1861-08, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. ASTM F1869-10, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealer for Floors. U.S. Federal Specifications: .1 FS RR-T-650E Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant. .2 FS SS-W-40a Wall Base, Rubber and Vinyl Plastic.

.4 .5

1.3

WHMIS

.1

Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets acceptable to Labour Canada and Health Canada for primer, cement and adhesive. Indicate VOC content. Submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.

.2

1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1

Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for incorporation into operation and maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00.

1.5

SUBMITALS

.1

Submit copy of flooring manufacturer's installation procedures in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Submit letter stating that the moisture content of concrete slab and the ph of the surface is

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

RESILIENT FLOORING

Section 09 65 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 SUBMITALS (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) within manufacturer's written guidelines for proposed flooring system. Do not proceed with flooring installation if the concrete slab moisture content is over 1.4 kg/100sqm. Contact the manufacturer's representative and inform the Departmental Representative immediately.

.3

1.6

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample pieces of sheet material, 300 mm long base, nosing,treads, edge strips.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1

Provide 100 lineal metres of resilient base of matching colour for each profile in addition to the resilient base required to complete the present installation. Deliver to job site in boxes clearly marked with information on contents and include address and date of installation. Unload and store within building where directed by Departmental Representative. Provide tile materials for maintenance use, for each product, pattern, type and colour required for the project, as directed by Departmental Representative.

.2

.3 .4

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM

.1

Provide adhesive products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-44-92 for Adhesives. Submit one copy of the licensing criteria statements and the verification of compliance with Sections 3(a) and 3(b) of the ECP to the Departmental Representative.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

RESILIENT FLOORING

Section 09 65 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Vinyl composition tile: to ASTM F1066, Class 2 through pattern tile, mottled, asbestos free, 305 x 305 x 3.17 mm, through grain construction. Vinyl composition tile and integral stair tread and nosing: to ASTM F1066, asbestos free. .1 Tile: mottled, size 305 x 305 x 3.17 mm. .2 Tread and nosing: plain, extruded, size 311 mm deep x 5.6 mm thick x width indicated. .1 Acceptable material: "Visually Impaired Heavy Duty VIHD", manufactured by Johsonite, www.johnsonite.com, 1-800-661-2162. Photoluminescent rubber stair treads. .1 Photometric properties: min 20/2.8-340-W-K to DIN 67 510 Part 1; min 15/2.2-320-W-K to DIN 67 510 Part 2. .2 Acceptable material: 'Safe-T-First' line distributed by Johnsonite, www.johnsonite.com, 1-800-899-8916. Vapor Emission Test kit, acceptable material: "Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Concrete Moisture Vapour Emission Test Kit" manufactured by Vaprecision (800) 449-6194 and distributed by Durox Floor Accessories, (416) 630-4883. Rubber stair tread: to FS RR-T-650E, 4.5 mm thick, integral 25 mm dia. round studs, stud height 0.6 mm, 50 mm grit strip in contrasting colour, self-illuminating technology. Adhesive for rubber stair tread: solvent-free, two component epoxy. Epoxy nosing compound: as recommended by manufacturer. Resilient base: to ASTM F1861, Type I-Rubber Base, 100 mm high, continuous, Style B-coved, preformed external corners. Primer, cement, and seam adhesive: type recommended by flooring and base manufacturer to suit substrate and installation, Ecologo certified. Vinyl composite tile adhesive: zero VOC, low odour, no alcohol, glycol or amonia, Ecologo certified, as recommended by tile manufacturer.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6 .7 .8

.9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

RESILIENT FLOORING

Section 09 65 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.11

Sub-floor filler: premixed latex modified cement mixed with water to produce cementitious paste.
Concrete floor sealer: to CAN/CGSB-25.20, Type 1. Wax and sealer: type recommended by flooring manufacturer. Reducing strip: same material as flooring.

.12 .13 .14 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUB-FLOOR TREATMENT

.1 .2

Remove ridges and bumps. Apply sub-floor filler to low spots and cracks to achieve floor level to a tolerance of 1:500, allow to cure. Prepare and seal porous and powdery concrete surfaces in accordance with flooring manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust, old adhesive, paint, dirt, wax, sealer and foreign matter from existing surfaces.

.3

.4

3.2 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION

.1

Maintain room and material temperature at approximately 20°C for 3 days before laying, and minimum 2 days after laying. Test subfloor for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions using the Vaprecision vapour emission test. .1 Perform moisture condition test in each major area. A minimum of 1 test per 100 sqm, prior to installation. Moisture condition shall not exceed three pounds per 100 sqm per 24 hour day in accordance with ASTM F1869. Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are acceptable. Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are acceptable. Prepare floor and install flooring in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

RESILIENT FLOORING

Section 09 65 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

3.2 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.5 .6 .7

Roll surface with 45 kg roller. Base joints at maximum length available or at internal or preformed corners. Install reducing strip at exposed edges, centre under doors at doorways.

3.3 CLEANING AND WAXING

.1

Clean, seal and wax resilient flooring to manufacturer's instructions.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACCESS FLOORING

Section 09 69 01 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring. Electrical Division - Secondary grounding.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Treasury Board of Canada Personnel Management Manual, Chapter 7, Volume 12 - Occupational Safety and Heath. ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. CAN/CGSB-1.81-M90, Air Drying and Baking Alkyd Primer for Vehicles and Equipment. CAN/CGSB-1.88-M92, Gloss Alkyd Enamel, Air Drying and Baking. CAN/CGSB-1.104-M91, Semigloss Alkyd Air Drying and Baking Enamel. CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building Construction.

.2

.3 .4 .5 .6

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1

Pedestals: .1 Pedestal assembly to support a concentrated load of 22 kN without going out of alignment. .2 Pedestals, when secured to subfloor, to resist a 0.09 kN force applied horizontally at top of pedestal. .3 Ultimate load carrying capacity: not less than twice design strength. Stringers: .1 Assembly to remain completely braced and rigid after a maximum of eight abutting panels are removed. .2 Stringers to support a mid-span force of 0.89 kN. Floor Panels: .1 Uniformly distributed load of 12 kPa: Maximum deflection of 1 mm. .2 Rolling load of 2.2 kN on 76 mm dia. 2 caster with bearing area of 1.27 mm applied

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACCESS FLOORING

Section 09 69 01 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA (Cont'd)

.3

Floor Panels:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) anywhere on panel without damage, maximum deflection of 2.0 mm. .3 Permanent deflection: maximum 0.5 mm at design load. .4 Ultimate strength of the panel shall provide a safety factor of 3.0 times its design load without failure. Allowable Tolerances: .1 Flatness of floor panels: plus or minus 0.5 mm in any direction. .2 Surface Dimension: plus or minus 0.5 mm of all panels. .3 Finished floor level tolerance: plus or minus 3 mm for overall floor, and plus or minus 1 mm in 2000 mm in any direction. .4 Squareness: plus or minus 0.5 mm in surface dimension and 0.25 mm measured diagonally. Fire Resistance: .1 Floor Panels, less finished flooring: flame spread rating of 5; fuel contribution of 10 and smoke development of 15. Electrical Resistance: .1 From surface of floor covering through to 10 understructure shall not exceed 2 x 10 ohms nor be less than 5 x 10 5 ohms.

.4

.5

.6

1.4

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit one of each of following components. .1 Full size floor panel. .2 Pedestal. .3 Stringer member. .4 Fasteners. .5 All accessories. Submit duplicate samples of each type of floor covering. Incorporate approved samples into finished installation. Identify and note locations.

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACCESS FLOORING

Section 09 69 01 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Take measurements from finished area at site. Indicate where applicable following information: .1 Layout of work. .2 Sizes and details of components. .3 Anchorage methods. .4 Edge and fascia details. .5 Elevation differences. .6 Lateral bracing. .7 Typical cutout details. .8 Floor finishes. .9 Location of connection to building grounding electrode.

1.6

CERTIFICATION

.1

Submit certification, to demonstrate compliance of the access flooring system to specification and specified standards by submitting: .1 CSA or ULC certification. .2 Government or independent testing agency test reports certifying that the product meets the standard. .3 Letter of certification from a responsible official of the manufacturer.

1.7 DATA

MAINTENANCE

.1

Provide operation and maintenance data for access flooring system for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, SPECIAL TOOLS & SPARE PARTS

.1 .2

Provide maintenance materials special tools and spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide 12 spare floor panels complete with specified floor covering, 20 spare pedestals and components for maintenance use. Store where directed. Identify each box. Provide 3 floor panel lifting devices, standard with access floor manufacturer.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACCESS FLOORING

Section 09 69 01 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PEDESTALS

.1

Pedestals: steel assembly with minimum 10,000 mm2 base plate. Pedestal head formed steel. Threaded supporting rod and vibration-proof lock nut to permit 38 mm adjustment. Galvanized finish, to ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 85.

2.2

PANELS

.1

Steel floor panels: die formed, reinforced steel bottom plate welded to flat steel top plate and die cut to 610 x 610 mm size, bonderized and baked enamel finish, complete with grounding connector.

2.3

STRINGERS

.1

Stringers: steel channel sections, galvanized finish, screw lock type. Shape stringers to receive integrally extruded vinyl seal on top surface. Seal to be electrically conductive, function as cushion between floor panels and understructure, and seal plenum below.

2.4 FINISH FLOORING

.1 .2

Resilient tile in accordance with Section 09 65 00. Finish panel edges with vinyl trim, black colour.

2.5

ACCESSORIES

.1 .2 .3

Resilient base: to Section 09 65 00. Grounding connectors: solid copper. Adhesives: waterproof electrically conductive type as recommended by manufacturer, of material to be bonded. Cable cutout protection: soft rubber. Access grommets: textured plastic, sized to suit power and communication outlets. Polyethylene sheet: to CAN/CGSB-51.34. Pedestal stringer pad: resilient, electrically conductive.

.4 .5 .6 .7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACCESS FLOORING

Section 09 69 01 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.5 ACCESSORIES (Cont'd)

.8

Panel lifting device: one per enclosed area, manufacturer's standard equipment, type recommended for each panel type.

2.6 METAL FINISHES

.1

Steel components: .1 Exposed steel components: thoroughly clean surfaces, spray apply 1 coat CAN/CGSB-1.81 primer and two coats CAN/CGSB-1.88 Type 2, gloss, black colour. Individually bake each coat. .2 Concealed steel components: 1 coat CAN/CGSB-1.81 baked primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Install components to system manufacturer's instructions. Pedestals and stringers: .1 Arrange pedestal assemblies to meet grid spacing required. .2 Install extra pedestals at areas of concentrated loads. .3 Bond pedestals base plate to structural floor with adhesive. .4 When adhesive is cured no bond impairment acceptable when 178 N horizontal force is applied to 300 mm high pedestals. Install additional pedestal assemblies where grid pattern is disturbed by columns, walls, ramps, openings, and steps, and at cut-outs that impair floor load capacity. .5 Install stringers to rigidly brace floor pedestals four ways. Floor panels: .1 Install floor panels and floor finish solidly on pedestals, level to maximum variation over entire floor of 1:2000. .2 Seal field cuts with plastic angles or channels. No exposed cut edges permitted. .3 Allow for cutting holes in floor panels for installation of computer equipment. Include cable protection edging or sheet. Provide electrical grounding connectors. Adjust floor panel system for smooth, quiet operation.

.3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

ACCESS FLOORING

Section 09 69 01 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.2 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1

Protect finished access floor with 0.15 mm thick polyethylene film or with kraft paper, sealed at edges to prevent tearing.

3.3

TESTING

.1

Inspection and Testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Departmental Representative.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Architectural Painting Specification Manual, Canadian Paint and Contractors Association (CPCA), 2000 plus amendments. ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals. CAN/CGSB-85.100-93, Painting. The Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual - February 2004.

.2 .3 .4 .5

1.2

PRODUCT DATA

.1

Submit product data and manufacturer's installation/application instructions for each paint and coating product to be used in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS.- Material Safety Data Sheets. Submit in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00, a list of proposed materials prepared by paint manufacturer, for review at least 30 days before materials required. List shall bear manufacturer's certification that materials listed are premium quality and conform to VOC guidelines and flash points listed. Submit full records of all products used. List products in relation to finish system and include the following: .1 Finish system designation. .2 Product name, type and use. .3 Manufacturer's product number. .4 Colour numbers. .5 MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating. .6 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). .7 Maximum VOC classification.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3

SAMPLES

.1

Submit full range colour sample chips in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate where colour availability is restricted. Submit duplicate 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint, stain, clear coating, special finish, with specified paint or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards submitted on the following substrate materials: .1 3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces. .2 13 mm hardwood plywood for finishes over wood surfaces. .3 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces. .4 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces. When approved, sample panels shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.

.2

.3

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted MPI requirements, and to prove that all materials utilized in this contract meet the requirements of the specifications. Produce documents when requested by Departmental Representative. Standard of Acceptance: .1 Walls: No defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90° to surface. .2 Ceilings: No defects visible from floor at 45° to surface when viewed using final lighting source. .3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.

.2

1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

.1 .2 .3

Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver and store materials in original containers, sealed, with labels intact. Labels shall clearly indicate: .1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint or coating. .3 Compliance with applicable standard.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE (Cont'd)

.3

Labels shall clearly indicate:(Cont'd) Colour number in accordance with .4 established colour schedule. Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site. Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage. Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices. Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated area with temperature range 7°C to 30°C. Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer. Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of Departmental Representative. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of Departmental Representative. Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use. Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. Fire Safety Requirements: .1 Provide one 9 kg Type ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area. .2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis. .3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.

.4 .5 .6 .7 .8

.9

.10

.11 .12

.13

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.6 SITE REQUIREMENTS

.1

Safety: Comply with requirements of Workplace hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage and disposal of hazardous materials. Apply paint finishes only when temperature at location of installation can be satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer's recommendations. Substrate and ambient temperature must be within limits prescribed in paint standard and prescribed by manufacturer, and to approval of Departmental Representative. Maintain minimum substrate and ambient air temperature of 5°C for alkyd and 7°C for latex paints. Maximum relative humidity 85%. Maintain supplemental heating until paint has cured sufficiently. Provide temporary heating where permanent facilities are not available to maintain minimum recommended temperatures. Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations, in conditions such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface. Apply paint only when surface to be painted is dry, properly cured and adequately prepared. Apply paint in occupied facilities during silent hours only. Schedule operations to approval of Departmental Representative such that painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected. Provide minimum 270 lx on surface to be painted.

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7 .8

.9

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM

.1

Provide paint products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-07-89 for Water Borne Surface Coatings, ECP/PCE-12-89 for Solvent Borne Paints and ECP/PCE-67-94 Recycled Water Borne Surface Coatings.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM (Cont'd)

.2

Submit written proof in the form of CSA Certification Reports of Certification under the Environmental Choice Program in accordance with Sections 01 33 00, 01 61 00 and 01 78 00 when requested. Alternatively, material in original containers bearing the 'Ecologo' will satisfy this requirement.

1.8 INTERIOR PAINT GLOSS TERMS

.1

Gloss terms: to ASTM D523 shall have following values: Gloss Term Gloss Value Flat Eggshell (Satin) Semi-Gloss Gloss, medium Gloss, high 0 15 45 60 80 to to to to to 10 25 55 80 90

1.9

FIRE LABELS

.1

Do not paint Fire Labels on doors or frames.

1.10

VENTILATION

.1

Ventilation: .1 Departmental Representative will arrange for ventilation system to be operated during application of paint. Ventilate area of work as directed by Departmental Representative by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans. .2 Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. .3 Provide continuous ventilation during and after application of paint. Run ventilation system 24 hours per day during installation at 30% outside air; provide continuous ventilation for 7 days after completion of application of paint.

1.11 WORK

SCHEDULING OF

.1

Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Departmental Representative for approval. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations. Obtain written authorization from Departmental Representative for any changes in work schedule. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 .2

Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Submit colour colour colour one - four litre can of each type and of primer and finish coating. Identify and paint type in relation to established schedule and finish system.

.3

Deliver to Departmental Representative and store where directed.

1.13 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Paint, stain and finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Information on these controls can be obtained from Provincial Ministries of Environment and Regional levels of Government. Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations. .5 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

1.13 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)

.6

Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.
Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

.7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW ODOUR PRODUCTS

.1

For interior finish painting use 0% Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) paint base: .1 Acceptable material: 'Ecosource' manufactured by Sico Inc., 905-792-0940x3225, www.sico.com; 'Glidden Lifemaster 2000', manufactured and distributed by ICI Paints, (905) 669-1020, www.iciduluxpaints.com; 'Color Your World Environmental Care - Latex Paints', manufactured by Color Your World, (905) 738-0080; 'Eco Spec' and 'Pristine' manufactured by Benjamin Moore Paints, 800-361-5898, (416) 766-1173; 'Healthspec "0" V.O.C. Line', manufactured by Sherwin Williams (905) 507-0168. Water based paint: .1 Flash point of 61.0°C or greater. .2 Maximum Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's): 250 g/L. Solvent based paint: .1 Flash point of 37.8°C or greater. .2 Maximum Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's): 380 g/L. Except for 0% VOC products, only paints bearing Ecologo are acceptable for use on this project.

.2

.3

.4

2.2

COLOURS

.1 .2 .3

Colour Schedule is provided with the Contract Documents. Selection of colours is from manufacturers full range of colours. Where specific products are available in a restricted range of colours, selection will be based on the limited range. Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 8 2011-05-18

2.2 COLOURS (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) painting materials is allowed only with Departmental Representative's written permission. Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show visible difference between coats.

.5

2.3

PAINT FINISHES

.1 .2

Wood to receive paint finish: .1 INT. 1-A, Alkyd Finish, semi-gloss. Woodwork to receive stained, clear finish: .1 INT. 1-D, Semi Transparent Stain Polyurethane Varnish (single component) Finish, gloss. Gypsum board, composition board walls: .1 INT. 4-B, Latex Finish, eggshell. Gypsum board ceilings: .1 INT. 4-B, Latex Finish, flat. Canvas and cotton insulation coverings (pipes, ductwork, boilers, etc.): .1 INT. 5-A, Alkyd Finish, flat. Concrete, walls: .1 INT. 7-B, Alkyd Finish, semi-gloss. Concrete, walls and ceilings: .1 INT. 7-A, Latex Finish, eggshell. Concrete block walls: .1 INT. 8-B, Alkyd Finish, semi-gloss. Concrete block walls: .1 INT. 8-A, Latex Finish, eggshell. Concrete, concrete block walls: .1 INT. 8-D, Tile-Like Epoxy Finish for Wet Surfaces, semi-gloss. Shop primed ferrous metal surfaces: .1 Touch up shop primer with primer as provided by fabricator. .2 INT. 12-A, Alkyd Finish, semi-gloss, eggshell. Galvanized and zinc coated metal: .1 INT. 13-A, Alkyd Finish, semi-gloss.

.3 .4 .5

.6 .7 .8 .9 .10

.11

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 9 2011-05-18

2.3 PAINT FINISHES (Cont'd)

.13 .14 .15

Galvanized metal deck ceilings: .1 INT. 13-D, Latex Finish, flat.
Copper piping and fittings: .1 INT. 16-A, Alkyd Finish, semi-gloss. Steel and copper solvent-cleaner: oil and grease emulsifier. .1 Acceptable material: 'Sur-Prep I Oil and Grease Emulsifier 93-500' manufactured by Coronado Paint Company, (904) 428-6461, distributed by Color Your World, (416) 259-3251.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

GENERAL

.1

Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI Painting Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise. Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application instructions.

.2

3.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1

Investigate substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of surfaces to be painted. Report to Departmental Representative damages, defects, unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work. Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted and report findings to Departmental Representative. Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer. Maximum moisture content as follows: .1 Gypsum Board: 12%. .2 Concrete: 12%. .3 Concrete Block/Brick: 12%. .4 Wood: 15%.

.2

.3

3.3 CLEANING AND PREPARATION

.1

Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements and as follows: .1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming and wiping with dry, clean cloths.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 10 2011-05-18

3.3 CLEANING AND PREPARATION (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) Wash surfaces with a biodegradable .2 detergent and bleach where applicable and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants. .3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface. .4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly. .5 Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in place of organic solvents. .6 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. .7 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However, minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water-based paints. Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs. Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm. Metal surfaces preparation: .1 Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with the following: .1 Solvent Cleaning: SSPC-SP-1. .2 Hand Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-2. .3 Power Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-3. .4 Commercial Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-6. .5 Brush-off Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-7. .2 Remove traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with clean brushes, or vacuum cleaning. .3 Touch up shop primer with primer as specified in applicable Section. Touch-up to include cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts, and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, .4 Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Departmental Representative.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 11 2011-05-18

3.4

MIXING PAINT

.1

Mix ingredients in container before and during use and ensure breaking up of lamps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and uniform composition. Thin paint for spraying according to manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Departmental Representative. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.

.2

.3

3.5

PROTECTION

.1

Protect building surfaces not to be painted from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Departmental Representative. Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames. Protect factory finished products and equipment. Protect persons in and about the building. As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs to approval of Departmental Representative.

.2 .3 .4 .5

3.6

APPLICATION

.1 .2

Paint items as specified and/or indicated on drawings and schedules. Paint items in accordance with the requirements set out in the CPCA Architectural Specification Manual, and CAN/CGSB-85.100. Method of application to be as approved by Departmental Representative. Apply paint by brush, roller or airless sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise. Brush and Roller Application: .1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application. .2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 12 2011-05-18

3.6 APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.4

Brush and Roller Application:(Cont'd) .3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins. .4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be free of roller tracking and heavy stipple unless approved by Departmental Representative. .5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint. Spray application: .1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges. .2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary. .3 Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern. .4 Brush out immediately all runs and sags. .5 Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not adequately painted by spray. Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of difficult access and only when specifically authorized by Departmental Representative. Apply coats of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied. Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer. Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects. Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges. Finish inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces.

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9 .10

.11

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 13 2011-05-18

3.6 APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.12 .13 .14

Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.
Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces. Paint mechanical and electrical work exposed in finished areas or on exterior. Where not noted on colour schedule paint items same colour as surfaces on which they occur. Boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms: paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment. Other unfinished areas: leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment. Do not paint over nameplates. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint. Paint visible portion of ducts behind registers, grilles and louvres with flat black paint. Paint fire protection piping red. Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel. Paint natural gas piping yellow. Paint both sides and edges of backboards for telephone and electrical equipment before installation. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items. Finish doors, including edges after fitting. Finish interior of valances white.

.15

.16

.17

.18 .19 .20

.21 .22 .23 .24

.25 .26

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PAINTING

Section 09 91 00 Page 14 2011-05-18

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Field inspection of painting operations to be carried out be independent inspection firm as designated by Departmental Representative. Advise Departmental Representative when surfaces and applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved. Co-operate with inspection firm and provide access to areas of work.

.2

.3

3.8

RESTORATION

.1 .2 .3

Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations. Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease. Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent. Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Departmental Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint. Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Departmental Representative.

.4

.5

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2

Section 03 30 11 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.

1.2 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

.1

Submit product data sheets in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.

1.3

WHMIS

.1 .2 .3

Submit two copies of MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets to Departmental Representative. Indicate VOC's during application and curing. Enforce use of personal protective equipment required by MSDS.

1.4

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Submit duplicate 400 x 200 mm samples of each colour and finish coating applied to porous concrete block.

1.5

QUALIFICATIONS

.1

Applied by applicator trained and licensed by epoxy material manufacturer for application of its products. Manufacturer's representative: .1 Inspect substrate prior to commencement of work, during application of materials and upon completion of work. .2 Provide technical assistance to the applicator and assist where required in correct installation of crack isolation membrane, floor base coat mortar and floor, wall and ceiling top coat sealer.

.2

1.6

MOCK-UP

.1

Apply materials of each finish and decorative 2 effect to approximately 10 m area of surface to be treated.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.6 MOCK-UP (Cont'd)

.2

Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with coating work.
Do not proceed until mock-up has been inspected and accepted by Departmental Representative. Reviewed and accepted mock-up shall become part of installed work.

.3 .4

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1

Do not apply epoxy systems unless uniform minimum 16°C air temperature at installation area for 24 hours prior to and after application. Provide adequate ventilation or isolation measures to protect against toxic fumes. .1 Ventilate area 24 hours per day, during installation and for 7 days after installation is completed with minimum 30% outside air. .2 Ventilate at a rate sufficient to produce a negative pressure in the work area and exhaust direct to the outside of the building. Do not recirculate contaminents within the building.

.2

1.8 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1

Provide maintenance data for coatings for incorporation into manual specified in Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1

Ensure compatibility for all epoxy materials including primers, resins, hardening agents, finish coats and sealer coats. Aggregate: silica sand to coating manufacturer's requirements. Block filler: one component, high build, copolymer emulsion with inorganic pigments, stabilizers, extenders and fillers. .1 Acceptable material: 'Stoncrest GS3' manufactured by StonCor Group, (905) 430-3333 www.stonhard.com; 'Selbafil' manufactured by Harris Specialty Chemicals, (905) 639-1691; 'Duochem VA Block Filler' manufactured by Duochem Inc. division of Corrosion Services, (905) 630-2736 www.duochem.com.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.4

Waterproof membrane: two component epoxy, liquid applied, 100% solids. .1 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307-03(2008), 5.65 MPa. .2 Elongation: to ASTM C307-03(2008), 100%. .3 Hardness: to ASTM D2240-05(2010), Shore A Durometer 80. .4 Temperature limitations: 60°C continuous exposure; 93°C intermittent exposure. .5 Acceptable material: 'Stonproof ME5' manufactured by StonCor Group, (905) 430-3333 www.stonhard.com.

2.2 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINT FILLER

.1 .2

Use either joint filler A or B. Joint filler A: self-leveling, two-component sealant based on a flexible epoxy resin and a blended polyamide curing agent. .1 Hardness: to ASTM D2240-05(2010), Shore A Durometer 90. .2 Elongation: to ASTM D638-10, 40%. .3 Stain and colour change: to ASTM C510-05a, none. .4 Acceptable material: 'StonFlex CJ4' manufactured by StonCor Group, (905) 430-3333 www.stonhard.com. Joint filler B: self-leveling, two-component sealant based on a flexible epoxy resin and a blended polyamide curing agent, 100% solids. .1 Tensile strength: to ASTM D638-10, 4.82 MPa. .2 Bond strength: to ASTM D952-10, 1.72 MPa. .3 Hardness: to ASTM D2240-05(2010), Shore A Durometer 50. .4 Elongation: to ASTM D638-10, 100%. .5 Shrinkage: to ASTM C531-00(2005), 0.2%. .6 Moisture permeability: ASTM D570-98(2010)e1, 0.05%. .7 Acceptable material: 'Duropli' manufactured by Duochem Inc. division of Corrosion Services, (416) 630-2736 www.duochem.com.

.3

2.3 EPOXY MORTAR/ GROUT

.1 .2

Use either epoxy mortar/grout A or B. Mortar/Grout A: 3 part epoxy grout, 100% solids, solvent free, trowelable. .1 Compressive strength: to ASTM C579-01(2006), 52.40 MPa after 7 days.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.3 EPOXY MORTAR/ GROUT (Cont'd)

.2

Mortar/Grout A:(Cont'd) .2 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307-03(2008), 12.41 MPa. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM C580-02(2008), 22.75 MPa. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D2240-05(2010), Shore D Durometer 86-88. 3 .5 Density: 2200 kg/m . .6 Acceptable material: 'Stonset TG5' manufactured by StonCor Group, (905) 430-3333 www.stonhard.com. Mortar/Grout B: 2 part epoxy mortar, 100% solids, solvent free, trowelable, sand aggregate. .1 Compressive strength: to ASTM C579-01(2006), 65 MPa. .2 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307-03(2008), 5-6 mm/min., 17 Pa. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM C348-08, 5-6 12.7 MPa. .4 Impact resistance: to ASTM D2444-99(2010), 28.25 J. .5 Water vapour transmission: to ASTM E96/E96M-10, 1.91 gm/hr.m2. .6 Permeability: to ASTM E96/E96M-10, 191 mg/Pa.s.m 2. .7 Acceptable material: 'Duochem 6010' manufactured by Duochem Inc. division of Corrosion Services, (416) 630-2736 www.duochem.com.

.3

2.4 FLOOR SYSTEM STANDARD EPOXY

.1 .2

Use either standard epoxy floor system A or B. Floor system A: .1 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer. .2 Body coat: 3 part epoxy, 100% solids, minimum 6 mm thick, colour and texture selected by Departmental Representative. .1 Compressive strength: to ASTM C579-01(2006), 68.94 MPa after 7 days. .2 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307-03(2008), 12.06 MPa. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM C580-02(2008), 27.57 MPa. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D2240-05(2010), shore D durometer 85-90. .5 Abrasion resistance: to ASTM D4060-10, CS-17 wheel, 0.1 g maximum weight loss. .6 Coefficient of friction: to ASTM D2047-04, 0.6.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.4 FLOOR SYSTEM STANDARD EPOXY (Cont'd)

.2

Floor system A:(Cont'd) .2 Body coat:(Cont'd) .7 Flammability: to ASTM D635-10, self extinguishing, extent of burning maximum 6 mm. .8 Water absorption: to ASTM C413-01(2006), 0.2%. .9 Acceptable material: 'Stonclad GS' manufactured by StonCor Group, (905) 430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .3 Top coat: 2 part epoxy, 100% solids, colour selected by Departmental Representative, aggregate to match floor body coat. .1 Flammability: to ASTM D635-10, self extinguishing. .2 Acceptable material: 'Stonkote GS4' manufactured by StonCor Group, (905) 430-3333 www.stonhard.com. Floor system B: trowel application. .1 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer. .2 Body coat: 2 part epoxy, 100% solids, minimum 6 mm thick, colour and texture selected by Departmental Representative. .1 Compressive strength: to ASTM C579-01(2006), 67 MPa. .2 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307-03(2008), 5-6 mm/min., 6.5 MPa. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM C580-02(2008), 22 MPa. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D2240-05(2010), shore D Durometer 81. .5 Abrasion resistance: to ASTM D4060-10, H22 wheels, 1000 gm/wheel, 352 mg maximum weight loss, 0.24 mm groove. .6 Coefficient of friction: to ASTM C1028-07e1, 15.3 cm/min., dry 0.82, wet 0.74. .7 Flammability: to ASTM D635-10, 30 sec flame exposure: 5 mm max., burning rate: 20 mm/minute; to CAN/ULC-S102.2-10, flame spread 57, smoked developed 116. .8 Water absorption: to ASTM D570-98(2010)e1, 0.20%, 24 hrs. immediately. .9 Acceptable material: 'Duochem 9400 Trowel Application' manufactured by Duochem Inc. division of Corrosion Services, (416) 630-2736 www.duochem.com.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.5 WALL AND CEILING SYSTEM STANDARD EPOXY

.1 .2

Use either wall system A or B; pinhole free finish. Wall and ceiling coating A: 2 part epoxy, 92% solids, colour selected by Departmental Representative. .1 Minimum dry film thickness: 0.381 mm. .2 Abrasion resistance: to ASTM D4060-10, CS-17 wheel, 1,000 g load, 1,000 cycles: 0.1 g maximum weight loss. .3 Impact resistance: to ASTM D2794-93(2010) (no cracking, crazing or loss of adhesion): exceeds 24 in.-lbs. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D2240-05(2010), 80-85 Shore D. .5 Temperature limitations: .1 Continuous exposure: 60°C. .2 Intermittent exposure: 93°C. .6 Acceptable material: 'Stonglaze VSC' manufactured by StonCor Group, (905) 430-3333 www.stonhard.com. Wall and ceiling coating B: 2 part epoxy, corrosion resistant, 90% solids, colour as scheduled and as selected by Departmental Representative. .1 Impact resistance: to CGSB 1-GP-71 (147.1). .2 Scrubbability: to CGSB 1-GP-71 (125.1), 10,000 cycles, unaffected. .3 Adhesion: to ASTM D4541-09e1, 1.6 MPa to concrete. .4 Hardness: Barcol 60. .5 Acceptable material: 'Duroplast 100' manufactured by Duochem Inc. division of Corrosion Services, (416) 630-2736 www.duochem.com.

.3

2.6

MIXES

.1

Mix expansion joint filler, grout, waterproof membrane, floor base coat mortar and top coat sealer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

.1 .2

Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove oil, dirt and grease with industrial detergent, as recommended by epoxy manufacturers representative. Mask surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean juncture lines. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray. Complete work penetrating substrate before installing coating.

.3 .4 .5

3.2 PREPARATION OF FLOORS

.1

Shot blast new concrete floor surfaces.

3.3 PREPARATION OF WALLS

.1

Apply 2 coats of block filler to walls to provide smooth surface for finish coating.

3.4 EPOXY MORTAR/ GROUT APPLICAITON

.1

Apply epoxy mortar/grout in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to provide 3 mm in 300 mm slope to floor drains and integral cove base. Form ramps to door thresholds. Integral cove base radius to be 19 mm. Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.

.2 .3

3.5 FLOOR SYSTEM APPLICATION

.1 .2

Mix in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to porous surfaces and epoxy mortar in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. In showers and janitor closets apply waterproof membrane.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.5 FLOOR SYSTEM APPLICATION (Cont'd)

.4

Trowel apply body coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum total dry thickness 6 mm.
Apply top coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum total dry film thickness 0.204 mm (8 mils). Slip resistant finish: .1 Broadcast sharp silica sand aggregate into first coat of top coat while it is still wet. .2 Remove excess aggregate. .3 Encapsulate aggregate with second coat of top coat. Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.

.5

.6

.7

3.6 WALL SYSTEM APPLICATION

.1 .2 .3

Mix in accordance with material manufacturer's written instructions. Apply wall coating by spray or roller. Minimum dry film thickness 0.102 mm (4 mils). Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.

3.7 CEILING SYSTEM APPLICATION

.1 .2 .3

Mix in accordance with material manufacturer's written instructions. Apply ceiling coating by spray or roller. Minimum dry film thickness 0.102 mm (4 mils). Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.

3.8

TESTING

.1

Perform two pull-off strength adhesion tests in floor areas selected by Departmental Representative. Do pull-off strength adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM D4541-09e1. Patch floors where pull-off strength adhesion tests are performed. Patch shall not be visible when viewed 600 mm above finished floor.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING

Section 09 96 00 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.9

SCHEDULE

.1

Room Finish Schedule identifies epoxy floor finishes as 'EFF', and epoxy wall and ceiling finishes as 'EWF'.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TACKBOARDS

Section 10 11 23 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

Aluminum Association (AA) .1 Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes AA DAF45-2003. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C208-08a, Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

.2

.3

1.2

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample of tackboard and 300 mm long sample of each type of trim, map rail and chalk rail.

1.3

PRODUCT DATA

.1

Submit product data sheets for each item specified in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Provide maintenance data for tackboards for incorporation into close-out submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Affix removable maintenance instruction labels to tackboards.

.2

.3

1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate location, type, size, panel arrangements, backing, hardware, anchor or mounting details, frame or trim and accessories.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TACKBOARDS

Section 10 11 23 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1

Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and with the Waste Reduction Workplan. Remove from site all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of all corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic, packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.

.2 .3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Laminating adhesive: to manufacturer's standard. Joint reinforcement: concealed mechanical jointing system to provide straight, rigid, continuously supported, tight butt, flush joints at surface. Anchor clips, brackets and fasteners: concealed, type recommended by manufacturer for fixed mounting. Facings .1 Natural cork tackboards: single layer natural cork, fine grain, high density sheet, 6 mm thick, natural colour. .2 Surface burning characteristics in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102, and to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Core: fibreboard to ASTM C208, type and grade suitable for tackboards.

.3

.4

.5

2.2

TRIM

.1

Extruded aluminum: Aluminum Association alloy AA 6063-T5, AA-A31 clear anodized finish, minimum 1.5 mm wall thickness. Tackboard trim and framing: of manufacturer's standard sections appropriate for installation conditions.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

TACKBOARDS

Section 10 11 23 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.3

FABRICATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Fabricate tackboard panels to sizes indicated. Factory laminate tackboards, consisting of 6 mm facing cork sheet, with fibreboard core. Make finished panels flat and rigid and fit with joint reinforcement. Fit joints between abutting panels with joint reinforcement except where covering trim is required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1

Install tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with uniform vertical surface, plumb and level, to provide rigid, secure surface. Install trim and framing around tackboard panels. Make mitres and joints to hair-line fit, free of rough edges. Use concealed brackets to reinforce and hold joints tight and flush. No exposed fasteners permitted. Overlap trim 6 mm onto panels. Mechanical attachment: .1 To hollow masonry use toggle bolts or equivalent. .2 To wood or sheet metal use screws. Secure into framing members in stud walls.

.2

.3

3.2

CLEANING

.1

Clean surfaces after installation using manufacturer's recommended cleaning procedures.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

.1

Submit product data sheets of each item specified, in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.

1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1

Comply with requirements of CSA B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment.

2.1

MATERIAL

.1

Aluminium: extrusions to Aluminium Association Designation AA 6063-T5 in finish Designation AA-A31, Architectural Class II clear anodized, minimum 30% recycled content. Stainless steel: to ASTM A167-99(2009), Type 304, AISI No.4 finish. Stainless steel tubing: to ASTM A269-10, Type 302, commercial grade, seamless welded with AISI No.4 finish. Steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), Grade 300W, minimum 25% recycled content. Sheet steel: to ASTM A1008/A1008M-10, cold rolled sheet, not oiled, minimum 25% recycled content. Galvanized sheet steel: to ASTM A653/A653M-10, commercial grade CS Type A, stretcher levelled, Z275 zinc coating designation, minimum 25% recycled content. Baked enamel: 1 coat metal conditioner to CGSB 31-GP-107M; 1 coat primer to CAN/CGSB-1.81-M90, Type 2; 2 coats enamel to CAN/CGSB-1.88-M92, Type 2 Baking, paints Ecologo certified, bake to smooth, hard finish. Chrome plating: to ASTM B456-03(2009), polished finish. Galvanizing: hot dip, to ASTM A123/A123M-09, 2 minimum coating Grade 85 (600 g/m ).

.2 .3

.4

.5

.6

.7

.8 .9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIAL (Cont'd)

.10

Bituminous paint: acid and alkali resistant to CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89, Type 1 or 2, Ecologo certified.
Fasteners: exposed fasteners to be tamper-resistant screws having deep hex 6-lobe recess with solid post formed in centre, Comcar/Division Textron Inc., Torx-Plus "Registered" Drive System.

.11

2.2

FABRICATION

.1

Metal toilet partition: floor mounted type with baked enamel finish, emergency door liftoff for handicapped stall in accordance with requirements of CSA B651. .1 Headrail: 25 x 41 x 1 mm galvanized steel tube. .2 Door and panel: 25 mm thick, 0.8 mm core thickness, galvanized sheet steel bonded to sound deadening core, reinforced with 2.642 mm galvanized steel, close edges, coat hook. 0.8 mm stainless steel shield over panel adjacent urinal, 1000 mm high x full width of panel. Door 610 x 1473 mm, or 815 x 1473 mm where indicated, with self-closing devices for barrier free. .3 Pilaster: 2083 mm high x 32 mm thick, 1.0 mm core thickness galvanized sheet steel bonded to sound deadening core, reinforced with 2.642 mm galvanized steel, close edged build in adjustable screw jacks. .4 Pilaster shoes: 0.8 x 75 mm high, stainless steel. .5 Hinges, latch keeper and coat hookbumper: chrome plated. .6 Coat hook 1400 mm above floor, on side wall of compartment for barrier free. Toilet tissue dispenser: single roll type, surface mounted with roll under spring tension for controlled delivery, chrome plated steel frame, capacity of 500 sheet double ply roll. Towel dispenser: .1 Material: 18% chromium, 8% nickel, Type 304, 0.8 mm stainless steel. .2 Finish: #4, satin. .3 Construction: .1 Drawn and bevelled one-piece flange with seamless construction. .2 Top hinged door secured to cabinet with a concealed, full-length, stainless steel piano-hinge and equipped with a stainless steel cable door stop and a tumbler lock.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.2 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.3

Towel dispenser:(Cont'd) .3 Construction:(Cont'd) .3 Front loading, universal style accepts standard single fold or roll towels. .4 Mounting: surface. Waste receptacle - floor standing: .1 Material: galvanized, sheet steel. .2 Finish: white baked enamel. .3 Construction: self-closing door, 1.6 mm concealed pedestal base, galvanized sheet steel liner, black vinyl trim. .4 Sizes: .1 370 x 345 x 680 mm, sheet steel 0.759 mm thick. Napkin disposal bin: .1 Material: 0.759 mm, stainless steel. .2 Construction: bottom door with continuous hinge and hidden catch; cover with continuous hinge, handle and air freshener holder, to accept disposable waxed paper bag. .3 Mounting: surface. Ashtray/disposal: Exterior wall mounted, stainless steel construction, rectangular approximately 230 mm wide x 125 mm deep x 460 mm high, six perforated cigarette disposal holes, removable metal liner, keyed cam locking mechanism. Soap dispenser (surface): .1 Material: 1.0 mm, stainless steel. .2 Finish: No.4, satin. .3 Construction: drawn, one piece, seamless construction, rectangular shape; soap level gauge; key locked, hinged lid; corrosion resistant valve. .4 Mounting: concealed, vandal resistant. .5 Capacity: minimum 909 ml. Soap holder: similar to ANSI/BHMA-A156.16-2008, Type L58011, recessed stainless steel 158 x 158 mm soap tray, except no integral grab bar, extended lip and steel backplate, satin finish. Deodorizing fixture: .1 Material: 0.607 mm, stainless steel. .2 Construction: to hold deodorizing block, piano hinge and theft proof lock, adjustable opening. .3 Mounting: surface.

.4

.5

.6

.7

.8

.9

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.2 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.10

Grab bars: 32-40 mm dia., 1.2 mm wall tubing of stainless steel, 76 mm diameter wall flanges, concealed screw attachment with steel back plates and accessories. Provide approximately 40 mm space between bar and wall. Grab bar material and anchorage to withstand pull of 1.3 kN vertically or horizontally. .1 Bar behind W.C. fixture: 600 mm minimum length. .2 Bar at side of W.C. fixture: shall extend from a point not more than 300 mm from the rear wall to at least 450 mm in front of the toilet seat. .3 Minimum length of straight grab bars: 600 mm. Retractable shower seat: support arm and seat frame of Type 304 stainless steel tubing with satin finish. Seat consists of 6 phenolic slats 8 x 76 mm - 4 slats 813 mm long and 2 slats 356 mm long. Unit approximately 546 mm deep x 813 mm wide. Seat approximately 450 mm above floor. Mounting flanges Type 304, 16 mm satin finish stainless steel, 76 mm dia. with 3 screw holes. Stainless steel guide bracket. Design to carry a minimum load of 1.3 kN. Shower modesty doors: double-acting swinging doors consisting of 6 mm thick translucent polyethylene sheet 1200 mm high, with rounded edges and corners, with centre lap of 30 mm. .1 Secure sheet to stainless steel channel spine with bar pivots at 150 mm centres with stainless steel rivets. .2 Assembly fits into captive head and base assembly secured to stainless steel backplate to provide self-centering hinge action. .3 Secure backplate to walls with expansion shields and stainless steel anchorbolts. Mirror: Approximately 460 mm x 760 mm by 0.912 mm thick, Type 430, bright annealed stainless steel, with 6 mm return. Laminated to 6 mm thick masonite backing. With 6 mounting holes for Torx screw and expansion anchor fastening to masonry wall. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror: 6 mm tempered float glass, silvered, in Type 304 matte finish stainless steel channel frame, 610 mm x 915 mm, fixed with concealed, tamperproof screws. Shower curtain: 0.178 mm thick translucent vinyl, anti-bacterial fire resistive self extinguishing, vinyl laminated fabric shower

.11

.12

.13

.14

.15

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.2 FABRICATION (Cont'd)

.15

Shower curtain:(Cont'd) curtain, rustproof chrome plated grommets reinforced into top hem at 150 mm on centre. Size: 150 mm wider than openings up to 1200 mm; 300 mm wider than openings larger than 1200 mm. Shower rods: 38 mm dia. x 2 mm wall thickness, chrome plated steel tubing of required length with satin chrome finished flanges, 12 shower curtain hooks and curtain hold-back hook and chain. Shower rod material and anchorage to withstand downward pull of 0.9 kN. Coat/towel hook: front secured with Torx-Plus security screws, 2.7 mm thick, Type 304 stainless steel bracket with 4.5 mm stainless steel hook. Hook pivots down for safety if excessive load applied. Tension on hook adjustable with Torx-Plus adjusting screw. 110 mm high x 25 mm wide, hook projects 76 mm from wall. Towel bar: tamper and abuse resistant, 25.4 mm dia. thick-wall aluminum tubing and cast aluminum brackets; 610 mm long, natural aluminum finish. Acoustical panels: fiberglass panels bound with a non-toxic thermosetting resin, hardened edge, 3 density 96 kg/m (6 lbs/sq.ft), with acoustical fabric covering; meets flammability standards ASTM E84-10b and CAN/ULC S102-10. Sizes as indicated, colours from manufacturer's standard range of colours, as selected by Departmental Representative. Install panels according to manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on drawings.

.16

.17

.18

.19

2.3

MAILBOXES

.1

Provide front-loading mailboxes as indicated on drawings and as follows: .1 Compartment sizes and quantities as follows (refer also to drawings): .1 96 boxes 152 x 152 x 375 mm in each housing unit. .2 Locks: 5-pin cam type with spring loaded stainless steel weathershield. Provide three (3) keys per lock. Provide masters and grandmasters as directed by the Departmental Representative. .3 Identification: Include embossed numbers. .4 Construction: .1 Welded and riveted heavy gauge aluminum, top, sides and bottom.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.3 MAILBOXES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .4 Construction:(Cont'd) .2 Front master loading door: manufacturer's standard, lockable. .3 All exterior surfaces to receive a prime coat of paint and a silver polyurethane finish coat. .4 Compartment doors: extruded aluminum, natural anodized finish. .5 Provide trim complete with mountings and fasteners.

2.4

ACCESS PANELS

.1

Provide as indicated to gain access to all concealed electrical equipment for operating, inspecting, adjusting, servicing. Sizes: Except as indicated otherwise, 600 mm x 600 mm. Construction: 2.66 mm commercial grade cold-rolled steel, phosphate dipped with baked on rust-inhibitive primed finish, rounded safety corners, concealed hinges, medium security style with tamper-resistant screws, anchor flanges for building into masonry, able to open 180 degrees. Fasteners: tamper-resistant screws with heads having a deep hex 6-lobe recess, with a solid post formed in the centre, based on Camcar/Division Textron Inc. Torx-Plus "Registered" Drive System requiring a special mated driver to install or remove screw.

.2 .3

.4

2.5 APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT

.1

Washer: top loaded type, gentle washing system with infusor type agitator function, stainless steel wash basket and self-cleaning filter; 4.1 cubic feet capacity, auto balance system, white finish. .1 Acceptable material: Energy Star washer, by General Electric, www.geappliances.ca, 1-877-994-5366. Dryer: electric dryer, minimum 7.0 cubic feet capacity, multi-cycle functions, reversible door, white finish. Refridgerator: Top mount type, top freezer, frost-free refridgerator, with automatic defrost, reversible doors, minimum 17.9 cubic

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.5 APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)

.3

Refridgerator:(Cont'd) feet capacity. Dimensions to suit kitchen layouts as indicated on drawings. .1 Provide two refridgerators in a kitchen of every second floor apartment unit, one in a kitchen of every ground floor apartment unit, and as indicated on drawings. Side-by-Side Refridgerator: side-by-side type, frost-free, swing type freezer doors, white finish. Dimensions to suit kitchen layouts as indicated on drawings. .1 Provide one refridgerator in a kitchen of every ground floor apartment unit. Range: free standing, electric range, 5.0 cubic feet capacity oven, two 150 mm and two 200 mm dia. burners, removable full width storage drawer, removable one-piece drip bowls. Standard width of 762 mm (30" nominal). Cooktop: built-in electric cooktop, two 150 mm and two 200 mm dia. burners, front controls, removable one-piece drip bowls, white finish. Standard nominal width of 762 mm (30"). Provide one cooktop in a kitchen of every ground floor apartment unit and as indicated on drawings. .1 Turn in to Section 06 40 01 for building-in. Wall Oven: electric, self-cleaning, wall mounted oven, minimum 3.9 cubic feet capacity, side hinged door, accessible-type controls, white finish, to accommodate use by persons with disabilities. Dimensions to suit kitchen layouts as indicated on drawings. Height of installation with provided knee space, as indicated. Provide one oven in a kitchen of every ground floor apartment unit and as indicated on drawings. .1 Turn in to Section 06 40 01 for building-in. Range/Cooktop Hood: Standard nominal width of 762 mm (30"), washable aluminum mesh filter, unit mounted light switch, bulb lighting, white finish.

.4

.5

.6

.7

.8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES

Section 10 28 00 Page 8 2011-05-18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Supply templates, components and instructions for items built into work of other sections. Mounting heights to CSA B651, Accesible Design for the Built Environment, and as indicated on drawings. Apply bituminous paint to aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry. Install items plumb, straight and level to a tolerance of 1:500. Securely fix items in place with concealed fasteners. Install manufactured items as indicated on drawings. Provide security bars and tubes to appropriate trade for building-in. Spacing as indicated on drawings.

.3 .4 .5 .6 .7

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL LOCKERS

Section 10 51 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

CAN/CGSB-44.40-2001, Steel Clothing Locker.

1.2

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate type and class of locker, thicknesses of metal, fabricating and assembly methods, assembled banks of lockers, tops, rods, hooks, shelves, bases, trim, numbering, filler panels, end/back panels, doors, handles, locking method, ventilation method, finishes.

1.3

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of colour and finish on actual base metal.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 .2

Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

.3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

.1

Lockers: to CAN/CGSB-44.40, Type 2 - Double tier locker, Class 2 - A bank of two or more lockers, freestanding, baked enamel finish as scheduled. .1 Size: 305 mm wide x 380 mm deep x 915 mm high, panel steel thickness No.24 MSG. .2 Assembly: welded construction. .3 Top: flat. .4 Doors: one-piece double-wall envelope construction single-wall construction, steel thickness No.20 MSG, door swing as indicated.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

METAL LOCKERS

Section 10 51 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS (Cont'd)

.1

Lockers:(Cont'd) Door handle: recessed handle steel with .5 nickel-plated finish.

2.2

ACCESSORIES

.1 .2

Locking system: padlocks supplied by Departmental Representative. Options: to CAN/CGSB-44.40, steel base, steel end panels, steel trim including number plates to manufacturer's standards, 3 coat hooks, metal, chromium finish. Numbering: number each group of lockers in any one area consecutively commencing at numeral one ("1").

.3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Assemble and install lockers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Securely fasten lockers to grounds and nailing strips. Install filler panels (false fronts) where indicated and where obstructions occur. Install finished end panels to exposed ends of locker banks.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Section 11 19 13 - Detention Doors, Panels and Frames. Division 26: Electrical conduits in wall construction. Division 26: Electrical conduit and 120 VAC wiring for magnetic locks, electric strikes, electric releases, electric locks, etc.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1

Use only ULC listed and labelled hardware for fire doors.

1.3

HARDWARE LIST

.1 .2

Submit hardware schedule in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Clearly indicate hardware proposed including make, model, material, function, finish and all other pertinent information.

1.4 SAMPLES AND MODELS

.1

Submit one full size sample of each type hardware specified, in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number and type, brand name and number, finish and building location installation. Pay all costs relative to submitting and removing samples and models.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

.1 .2 .3

Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Clearly indicate all information required for proper preparation and application of hardware. Submit shop drawings for each type locking device to show fabrication, layout, setting and erection details. Submit wiring diagrams and service requirements for electrically operated hardware and equipment. Furnish door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware.

.4

.5

1.6 MAINTENANCE DATA AND INSTRUCTIONS

.1

Provide maintenance data, parts list and manufacturer's instructions for each type of lock, cremone bolt set, door closer, door holder, electric deadbolt, and locking device for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Brief maintenance staff regarding proper care of hardware and locking devices, such as lubrication, adjustments, cleaning, and general instructions.

.2

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 .2

Supply two spanner tools for each size spanner screw on job. Supply two sets of wrenches for each type of do or closer.

1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1

Deliver security hardware and related accessories to project site in manufacturer's original packaging with labels intact and legible. Labels shall include project name, suppliers name, door, item, and product number. Include manufacturer's or suppliers's printed instructions for installation and coordination. Items shall be shipped in cartons for protection and marked "Security Hardware" for identification on the job site.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE (Cont'd)

.4

Inventory security hardware upon delivery to verify order and quantity with accepted security hardware schedule. Check for proper operation of hardware. Reject damaged or improperly operating hardware and return to supplier for replacement. Maintain inventory list with hardware schedule.
Store all hardware and locking devices indoors, in secure, lockable, clean and dry storage area designated solely for storing hardware.

.5

1.9 ENGINEERING AND TECHNICAL SUPERVISION

.1

Provide qualified engineering and technical supervision commencing at date contract is awarded and continuing until Final Certificate of Completion is issued. Qualified supervisor will have been actively engaged in prison security hardware business for not less than five years. Upon completion of work, and prior to issuance of Final Certificate of Completion, provide qualified supervisor to examine each lock, locking device, and all other detention hardware items, to ensure their proper installation and operation.

.2

.3

1.10

DEMONSTRATION

.1

Prior to Date of Substantial Performance schedule training session by security hardware manufacturer to instruct CSC personnel in the proper operation, use and maintenance of locks and locking devices. Provide a factory representative specially trained in the operation of security hardware equipment and with a thorough knowledge of its mechanisms for a minimum eight hour instruction and training period. The factory representative shall be capable of training custodial personnel in operation, repair and upkeep. Video tape the training program. Provide three copies of the video tape to the Departmental Representative. Review emergency provisions during training session, including access and procedures to be followed in event of failure in operations, malfunctions and other building emergencies. Train CSC personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 4 2011-05-18

1.10 DEMONSTRATION (Cont'd)

.4

Check operation of locks and locking devices with CSC personnel present to determine that control systems and operating components are functioning properly.
Instruct CSC personnel in proper use, operation and daily maintenance of gate operators. Prior to Date of Substantial Performance. make a final check of each gate operator operation with CSC personnel present. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.

.5 .6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

HARDWARE ITEMS

.1

Use one manufacturer's products only for all similar items.

2.2 FASTENING DEVICES

.1

Provide tamper-resistant security screws with heads having a deep hex 6-lobe recess with a solid post formed in the centre based on Camcar/Div. Textron Inc., Torx-Plus "Registered" Drive System, requiring a special mated driver to install or remove a screw. Fasteners and tools shall be produced by a Camcar licensed manufacturer. Types: Flathead Torx-Plus "Registered" machine screws; provide where countersinking is required. Size screws to match countersunk holes to provide a proper fitted installation with heads seated flush and aligned with adjacent surfaces. Provide button-head Torx-Plus "Registered" machine screws where no countersinking is required. Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit countersinking. Base metal for screws shall be steel or stainless steel as required for hardware finishes specified except that where installed at exterior or wet locations screws shall be stainless steel. Finishes for screws shall match finish of hardware to which screws are applied. Where finishes cannot be matched, provide

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.2 FASTENING DEVICES (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) specified screws with satin stainless steel finish 630 (C32D). Drivers: Provide five complete sets of drivers for use with specified screws. Drivers shall be of design allowing substantial insertion into recesses of screwheads to eliminate drive tool slippage. Deliver drivers to Departmental Representative with specified spare parts for maintenance use. Where Torx-Plus fasteners are not available due to product size requirements, supply regular Torx fasteners (6-lobe).

.6

.7

2.3

KEYING

.1

Prepare keying schedule in consultation with Departmental Representative. Keying system to include keying alike in groups, and keying differently. Submit schedule for approval. Master keying not allowed. Construction keying not allowed. Provide keys in triplicate for each key-code. Stamp key-code numbers on keys, prison lock cases, and institutional lock cylinders. Stamp year of issue on prison keys. Deliver keys via bonded courier or registered mail to person and place designated by Departmental Representative. Certify that lock manufacturer maintains a register listing all key-codes issued to this project to ensure that replacement keys may be ordered by key-code number only in future, and that locks added in future will not accidentally duplicate existing codes. Assign key-code numbers which identify the institution, plus the particular key-code within the institution. Key-code numbers which directly relate to the actual physical cuts on the keys, not allowed. Key Systems: Establish three separate key systems for the project; one for paracentric cylinders, one for Mogul cylinders and one for dual-axis builders hardware cylinders. Each key

.2 .3 .4 .5

.6

.7

.8

.9 .10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.3 KEYING (Cont'd)

.10

Key Systems:(Cont'd) system shall be keyed in sets as directed by the Departmental Representative. Provide and establish key control system. The sale of cut keys and blanks shall be factory regulated to control usage and reproduction. Key Exclusivity and Duplication Control: Level of key combination shall be established excusive within the province of project construction. No other facilities within region shall have the same combination of keyway and bitting. Provide keyway and bitting which can only be duplicated by cylinder manufacture with established release procedure. All keys shall be accounted for at all times and delivered to the designated personnel as directed by Departmental Representative. The Departmental Representative will issue keys required to Contractor for use during construction. All keys assigned to Contractor shall be surrendered to the Departmental Representative upon completion of the project. Departmental Representative will provide a receipt for all keys received. If at any time a key cannot be accounted for, the lock cylinder shall be re-keyed, or the entire lock replaced if re-keying is not possible, at no additional cost to the Departmental Representative.

.11

.12

.13

.14

.15

2.4

FINISHES

.1

Hardware finishes shall comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006, unless otherwise specified. Finish designations indicated are those defined in standards. Provide finishes indicated as follows for specified hardware unless otherwise indicated. ANSI/BHMA finishes are indicated in parenthesis ( ). .1 Hinges, including institutional, electric institutional and continuous hinges: C32D (630) satin stainless steel. .2 Paracentric mechanical deadlatches, paracentric mechanical deadlocks, standard and small, and mechanical latches, including associated keepers. .1 Interior locations: CP (600) primed for painting, or galvanized.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.4 FINISHES (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .2 Exterior locations and where mounted to galvanized doors and frames: manufacturer's zinc plated or galvanized finish. .3 Mechanical mortise locksets and latchsets, bored deadbolt locks, including strikes: C26D (626) satin chromium plated. .4 Remotely controlled swinging door locks: .1 Wide profile locks: Interior locations, CP (600) primed for painting, or manufacturer's zinc plated or galvanized finish. Exterior locations and where mounted to galvanized doors and frames, manufacturer's zinc plated or galvanized finish. .2 Narrow profile locks: C32D (630) satin stainless steel. .5 Door Closers: 652 chrome plated finish on steel. Exterior locations and where mounted to galvanized doors and frames, manufacturer's special rust inhibiting coating. .6 Door Pulls: C32D (630) satin stainless steel, or C26D (626) satin chrome, as scheduled. .7 Flush Bolts: C26D (626) satin chrome, clear coated. .8 Escutcheons and Cylinder Shields: C32D (630) satin stainless steel. .9 Key Cylinders: C26D (626) satin chromium plated.

2.5

HINGES

.1

Detention Hinges DH: .1 Type: Full mortise, detention strength, investment cast stainless steel, three-knuckle anti-friction bearing hinges with integral cast security studs for security hollow metal doors and frames; complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2006, Grade 1, and ASTM F1577-05. .2 Hinge tips and pins: Hospital type sloping barrel tips with concealed non-removable hinge pins. Hinge tips shall be either continuous solid cast construction enclosing spring loaded hinge pin, or welded tips with hinge pin secured in place with permanent concealed hardened cross pins. Set screws shall not be permitted for securing hinge pins. .3 Size: 114 mm x 114 mm .4 Provide minimum three hinges per door leaf up to 915 mm wide or 2100 mm high. Add one additional hinge for each door leaf greater than 915 mm wide, or one additional hinge for each

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 8 2011-05-18

2.5 HINGES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .4 (Cont'd) 610 mm or fraction thereof exceeding 2100 mm in height. Quantities indicated in hardware schedule sets are minimum; provide additional hinges for larger door leaves as specified. .5 Acceptable material: Airteq Ind. 604FMWS-US32D, Brookfield 1-400-US32D, Gallery 918-C32D, Hager HTHB953xRSSxUS32D, Southern Steel 204FM.SS, Stanley IHTCB1955SRSxUS32D. Electric Detention Hinge EDH: .1 As specified for institutional hinge, except equipped with minimum six concealed tamperproof wires contained within hinge, UL listed. Security studs not required for electric hinges. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq Ind. 604FMWS-C3-US32D, Brookfield 1-400-ETHxUS32D, Gallery 919-CCU-C32D, Hager HTHB953xETWxUS32D, Southern Steel 204E, Stanley 1HTCB1955SRS-CE58xUS32D. Continuous Hinge CH; .1 All to ANSI A156.26-2006 standards, CH1, Figure 1, Type 304 stainless steel. .2 Continuous hinges full mortise edge mount - Barrel Type, full height of door.

.2

.3

2.6 MECHANICAL DETENTION LOCKS

.1

Paracentric Mechanical Deadlatch, keyed one side PMD1: .1 Heavy duty, maximum security, paracentric keyed, lever tumbler spring type deadlatch, automatically deadlocks when door is closed, unlocks by key only. Supply with manufacturer's appropriate mounting plate to suit door. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq 5070-HM, Southern Steel 1070A.1-HM. Paracentric Mechanical Deadlatch, keyed both sides PMD2: .1 Heavy duty, maximum security, paracentric keyed, lever tumbler spring type deadlatch, automatically deadlocks when door is closed, unlocks by key only. Supply with manufacturer's appropriate mounting plate to suit door. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq 5076-HM, Southern Steel 1070A.2-HM. Paracentric Mechanical Deadlock, keyed one side PMDL1: .1 Heavy duty, maximum security, paracentric keyed, lever tumbler deadlock, locks and unlocks

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 9 2011-05-18

2.6 MECHANICAL DETENTION LOCKS (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) by key only. Supply with manufacturer's appropriate mounting plate to suit door. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq 5082-HM, Southern Steel 1080A.1. Paracentric Mechanical Deadlock, keyed both sides PMDL2: .1 Heavy duty, maximum security, paracentric keyed, lever tumbler deadlock, locks and unlocks by key only. Supply with manufacturer's appropriate mounting plate to suit door. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq 5086-HM, Southern Steel 1080A.2. Gate Mounted Paracentric Mechanical Deadlock, keyed both sides GPMDL2: .1 Heavy duty, maximum security, paracentric keyed, lever tumbler deadlock, locks and unlocks by key only. Supply with manufacturer's appropriate mounting plate to suit door. .2 Acceptable material: Southern Steel 1080A.2-GM, Airteq 5068-FGM Paracentric Mechanical Deadlock, keyed one side, small PMDLS1: .1 Heavy duty, maximum security, paracentric keyed, lever tumbler deadlock, locks and unlocks by key only. Supply with manufacturer's appropriate mounting plate to suit door. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq 5012-HM, Southern Steel 1010A-1. Paracentric Mechanical Deadlock, keyed both sides, small PMDLS2: .1 Heavy duty, maximum security, paracentric keyed, lever tumbler deadlock, locks and unlocks by key only. Supply with manufacturer's appropriate mounting plate to suit door. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq 5016-HM, Southern Steel 1010A-2.

.4

.5

.6

.7

2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS

.1

Following features are common to all type electro-mechanical locks: .1 Motor operated lock: 24 Volts DC, continuous duty. .2 Wiring: Factory wired to a plug connector. Furnish with 16 AWG wire leads for field connections. .3 Lock status switch: Single pole double throw type, 5 amps rated, UL listed. Use of magnetic reed witches are not acceptable.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 10 2011-05-18

2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .3 Lock status switch:(Cont'd) Provide switch for interlocking capabilities with indications listed below: .1 Locked/deadlock .2 Unsecure .4 Operation: Full cycle, locks/unlocks when the motoris energized by a momentary-contact switch. Once unlocked, the latchbolt is held mechanically retracted until the door is opened. .5 Case of minimum 4.7 mm thickness steel plate construction with cover of same material and gauge. .6 Latchbolt: Case hardened, plated high strength alloy steel or stainless steel. .7 Deadlock actuator: Stainless steel, mechanical roller type. .8 Key cylinders: provide as specified for each type lock, complete with appropriate collars for builders cylinders. .9 Strike/keeper: Manufacturer's mortise type case, hardened cold-rolled steel or investment cast stainless steel. Provide with dust box and four flathead tamper-resistant (Torx-Plus "Registered") security screws. Furnish templates for door and frame hardware preparation. .10 Fire rating: Up to three hour rating when tested in accordance with standard CAN/ULC-S104-10. RCSD1: Remotely controlled, 24 Volt DC, motor operated wide-profile swinging door locks, keyed one side, with Mogul keyway. Provide cylinder extensions to suit frame jamb depth when lock is keyed on stop side of frame. .1 Acceptable material: Airteq Ind. 9724-K1SxGR1, Folger Adam 122M.1.01, Southern Steel 10120AM.1. RCSD2: Remotely controlled, 24 Volt DC, motor operated wide-profile swinging door locks, keyed two sides, with Mogul keyway. Provide cylinder extensions to suit frame jamb depth when lock is keyed on stop side of frame. .1 Acceptable material: Airteq Ind. 9724-K2SxGR1, Folger Adam 126M.1.01, Southern Steel 10120AM.2. NRCSD1: Remotely controlled, 24 Volt DC, motor operated, narrow stile, swinging door locks, keyed one side, with Builders cylinder keyway. Provide cylinder extensions to suit frame jamb depth when lock is keyed on stop side of frame. .1 Acceptable material: Airteq Ind. 9424-K1SxGR1, Southern Steel 10300M.1.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 11 2011-05-18

2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS (Cont'd)

.5

NRCSD2: Remotely controlled, 24 Volt DC, motor operated, narrow stile, swinging door locks, keyed two sides, with Builders cylinder keyway. Provide cylinder extensions to suit frame jamb depth when lock is keyed on stop side of frame. .1 Acceptable material: Airteq Ind. 9424-K2SxGR1, Southern Steel 10300M.2.
EGL: Remotely controlled 115 VAC motor operated swinging gate lock, keyed two sides, with paracentric keyway. .1 Acceptable material: Folger Adam 806ES, Southern Steel 1050SD.

.6

2.8 CREMONE BOLT SETS

.1

Following features are common to all cremone bolt sets type CB: .1 Each assembly encased in steel frame not less than 203 mm high x 438 mm wide x 38 mm thick. Finish CP. .2 Steel frame to have steel cover plates 5 mm thick front and back. Finish CP. .3 Each assembly to contain prison lock operated by paracentric key. .4 Include lever handles and roses for operating head and foot bolts. Finish 626. .5 Head and foot bolts to be 22 mm diameter. Throw of bolts 19 mm. .6 Include escutcheon Type CES at each key cylinder. Finish 630. .7 Acceptable material: Southern Steel 10370AA.2.

2.9 DOOR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCHES

.1

Concealed Bolt Position Switch CBPS. .1 Coordinate with security hollow metal manufacturer to verify fit. .2 Coordinate with lock type to suit bolt size. .3 Acceptable material: Securitron LML-1, Southern Steel 500B. Surface Door Position Switch SDPS. .1 Surface mounted, tamperproof magnetic contact switch with triple biased reeds, UL listed. .2 Switch: single pole, double throw type. .3 Wiring: Factory wired with minimum 915 mm length stainless steel armoured cable leads. .4 Mounting brackets: Manufacturer's aluminum brackets as specified. .5 Acceptable material: Sentrol 2505AH c/w 1904A Brackets, Securitron MSS-1G c/w required

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 12 2011-05-18

2.9 DOOR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCHES (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) .5 Acceptable material:(Cont'd) mounting brackets, Securitron MSS-1 for roof/floor hatches. Concealed Door Position Switch CDPS. .1 Full mortise ANSI size stainless steel plate mounted, concealed magnetic contact switch with triple biased reeds, UL listed. .2 Switch: Single pole, double throw type, rated maximum 1 amp at 24 volts AC/DC. .3 Wiring: Factory concealed colour coded wires with minimum 305 mm length leads. .4 Acceptable material: Airteq DPS6200, Sentrol 2757, Securitron MSS-1C, Southern Steel 200MRS.

.3

2.10 HEAVY DUTY FLOOR STOP

.1

Heavy duty floor stop HDFS. .1 Type: Silicone rubber bumper with threaded steel shank for mounting. Minimum 50 mm diameter by 57 mm length bumper projection. .2 Material and finish: Cast stainless steel, satin finish. .3 Mounting requirements: Where scheduled in hardware sets mount to doors as a first preference and to wall or floor when door mounting is not practical. Wall or floor mounting shall be set with epoxy at locations acceptable to the Departmental Representative. .4 Acceptable material: Airteq 650, Hager 269F, Gallery GSH 111631.

2.11 HEAD OR FOOT BOLTS

.1

Head and Foot Bolt HFB. .1 Manual operation only. Operate by special spanner type key. .2 Case to be malleable iron 137 mm high x 70 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .3 Coverplates 5 mm thick steel. .4 Bolt 25 mm diameter with standard 10 mm projection and 19 mm throw. .5 Fasteners, three 10 mm diameter flat head security screws. .6 Finish, steel primed for paint CP. .7 Acceptable material: Southern Steel 10105HMx10105Rx10105CLx10105K.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 13 2011-05-18

2.12 ELECTRIC KEY SWITCHES

.1

Electric Key Switch EKS. .1 Key cylinder controlled, two position switch having momentary contact with spring return operation, tamper-resistant design for mounting in standard single-gang electrical outlet box. .2 Electrical rating: Maximum 10 amps at 125/250 VAC. .3 Key cylinder: Dual-axis builders hardware cylinder as specified. .4 Faceplate: Manufacturer's standard satin finish stainless steel plate. .5 Mounting requirements: Coordinate mounting requirements with security hollow metal doors and frames manufacturer. Electric key switches shall be mounted recessed into jambs of door frames. Where specified in hardware sets with locks. mount switch in the lock pocket so that only the key cylinder is exposed through a punched opening in the frame. .6 Acceptable material: Securitron MKS2, Southern Steel 921.

2.13 PUSH BUTTON SWITCHES

.1

Push Button Switches PBS. .1 Faceplate: Narrow style, 11 gauge stainless steel mounting plate for installation on standard 50 mm frame face profile. .2 Electrical rating: Minimum 4 amps at 125VAC/24VDC, SPDT .3 Function: Momentary switch to allow inmate operation of cell door locks when enabled from a control station. .4 Acceptable material: Airteq 6301, Securitron PB4N, Southern Steel 906.

2.14

KEY CABINETS

.1

Area key Cabinet KC. .1 Size: As required to accommodate security hardware keys and builders hardware keys for areas designated after determination of keying by the Departmental Representative. Minimum capacity of 120 keys. .2 Surface mounted wall unit equipped with hinged or pivoting key panels as specified. .3 Construction: Fabricated from coldrolled, patent level steel, electro-welded construction. .4 Key panels: Furnish key panels of design to store paracentric, mogul, and builders hardware keys, with each cabinet as required for specified capacities.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 14 2011-05-18

2.14 KEY CABINETS (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .5 Door hinge: Non-sag, continuous piano hinge with concealed, welded, tamperproof brass pins. .6 Locking mechanism: Manufacturer's built-in, high security, manipulation resistant, combination lock. .7 Finish: Manufacturer's factory baked enamel finish after phosphate treatment of steel surface. .8 Identification and Indexing System: Furnish each cabinet with manufacturer's complete identification and indexing system which includes dual tag identification system, visible key receipt system, key gathering envelopes and a three-way cross indexing system, and instruct the Departmental Representative designated personnel in a seminar format on the proper use of the system.

2.15

KEY SAFE

.1

Heavy duty, surface mounted wall unit, equipped with hinged or pivoting key panels. Door fabricated from minimum 7 gauge thickness plate steel and cabinets from minimum 10 gauge steel. .1 Door hinge: Non-sag, continuous piano hinge with welded, tamperproof brass pins. Equip with dogging plate mounted to door to protect hinge. .2 Locking mechanism: Manufacturer's built-in paracentric mechanical deadlock with key change feature, 1R UL listed. .3 Finish: Manufacturer's factory baked enamel finish. .4 Identification and Indexing System: Same as specified for key cabinets. Capacities: as required to accommodate security hardware keys and builders hardware keys for areas designated after determination of keying by Departmental Representative. Minimum capacity of 720 keys. Key panels: Furnish key panels of design to store paracentric, mogul and builders hardware keys with each safe as required for specified capacities. Locate unit(s) as directed. Acceptable material: Southern Steel 505F-82.

.2

.3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 15 2011-05-18

2.16 ESCUTCHEONS, CYLINDER SHIELDS, PULL HANDLES

.1

Escutcheon CE1: .1 Material, 3 mm thick stainless steel, C32D finish. .2 Single wing. .3 Partial cover for paracentric lock cylinder with 1 wing opening to control key removal only in locked position. .4 Acceptable material: Airteq 601, Southern Steel 218.1. Cylinder Shield CES: .1 Material, 3 mm thick stainless steel. .2 Protective cover for paracentric lock cylinder; equipped with mounting collar and swivel attachment to open and close shield for access to keyway. .3 Acceptable material: Airteq 602CS, Southern Steel 219. Recessed Flush Pull RFP: .1 Type: Flush pull with recessed finger cup type grip and drilled countersunk holes in flanges for fasteners. Drill plate for cylinder when used in conjunction with a deadlock except on service chase doors .2 Size: 127 mm width x 406 mm height x 25 mm depth recess, approximate dimensions. .3 Material and finish: Minimum 3 mm thickness, satin stainless steel. .4 Acceptable material: Gallery GSH 111894 (special). Loop Pull DP1: .1 Surface mounted, raised hand grasp design with drilled, countersunk holes in flanges for fasteners. .2 Material and finish: Cast bronze, satin chrome finish or satin stainless steel. .3 Size: 222 mm overall length x 44 mm width x 57 mm projection, approximate dimensions. .4 Fasteners: Provide each pull with minimum two 3/8-16 x 16 mm tamper-resistant, Torx-Plus "Registered", security screws. .5 Acceptable material: Airteq 612, Bronze Craft 261-026-2104, Gallery GSH 920, Southern Steel 212C. Loop Pull DP2 and DP4: as specified in Section 08 71 00.

.2

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 16 2011-05-18

2.17

KEY CYLINDERS

.1

Paracentric Cylinders PC: .1 Security hardware manufacturer's standard as specified with locks and locking devices. Furnish with investments cast silicone bronze alloy keys of design to fit paracentric cylinders in quantities as specified with restricted keying. Mogul Cylinders MC: .1 51 mm barrel diameter containing 6 stainless steel balls engaging tumblers and key. .2 Acceptable material: Airteq 6 tumbler, ASSA 8551-V10, Southern Steel 6 tumbler. Refer to Section 08 71 00 hardware groups for additional cylinder requirements.

.2

.3

2.18 SLIDING GATE LOCKING DEVICES

.1

Size to suit 4900 mm high x 4200 mm wide gate or as detailed, consisting of: .1 Overhead Track: For openings up to 7 m, consisting of two 203 mm structural steel channels joined together as shown on the drawings; shall weigh a minimum of 48.95 kg/meter. For openings up from 7 m to 9 m, consiting of two 254 mm structural steel channels joined together as shown on the drawings, wighing a minimum of 52.08 kg/meter. .2 Trolleys: gate panel to be hung on three heavy duty trolleys, type depending on gate opening width. Trolley wheels to be milled from a single block of steel and use two sealed bearings per wheel, two wheels per trolley. .3 Roadway Beam: A S3 x 5.7 structural steel beam across the entire area of gate travel will be installed flush with the roadway surface and be provided with welded steel guides as shown on the drawings. .4 Gate Guide Angle: 64 mm x 38 mm x 6 mm steel angle attached to the bottom of the gate panel along its full width. .5 Vertical Support Posts: To be sets of double 114 mm OD posts. .6 Locking Column: W4 x 13 structural steel beam with removable steel cover, fastened with tamper-resistant security screws. Size 101 x 101 x 330 mm. .7 Locking Tangs: Three locking tangs to be affixed to the leading edge of the gate panel to provide positive locking into the locking column. .8 Motor: Minimum 1/3HP, 208V/3PH as produced by a nationally recognized manufacturer and mounted within specified motor box. Clutch to be

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 17 2011-05-18

2.18 SLIDING GATE LOCKING DEVICES (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .8 Motor:(Cont'd) mounted at motor location and be adjustable without the use of tools. .9 Motor Box: Minimum 10 gauge, weatherproof, galvanized steel box to be located not more than 850 mm above the ground. Door to be attached to the box with weld on detention hinges and fitted with weatherstrip and cylinder shield. Secure door with paracentric mechanical deadlock, small. .10 Emergency manual Release: Located within motor box. Provide fold-out crank handle to disengage motor or clutch and permit the gate to be cranked open or closed. Hinged access door to be provided complete with paracentric deadlock and shielded escutcheon. .11 Drive Chain: #40 roller chain in rack and pinion format and under no tension. .12 Finish: Track and other exposed operator parts to be hot dipped galvanized. Operation: .1 When gate is locked closed, activation of electric switch shall cause operator to unlock and drive the gate open at a speed of not less than 0.30 m per second. .2 When gate is open, activation of electric switch shall cause operator to drive the gate closed at a speed of not less than 9 m per second, and to deadlock the gate in the closed position. .3 When gate is closed and locked, operator is to provide secure signal to control point. When gate is not closed and locked, operator is to provide not-secure signal to control point. Indication to be by means of microswitch contacts, self-contained within operator housing. .4 Operator shall be capable of manually releasing and opening, or closing the gate by opening the motor box, unfolding the crank handle and cranking the gate to the open or closed position. .5 Operator shall be capable of being reversed in either direction. .6 Operating force shall be adjustable without tools, to suit gate size and weight. If an obstruction is placed in teh path of the gate, the gate shall stall. Acceptable material: Tymetal Pluss, Southern Steel 9100.

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 18 2011-05-18

2.19

NUMBER PLATE

.1

Provide each door with engraved lamacoid number plate 38 mm high x length to suit, engraved with door number shown on drawings. Letter height to be 25 mm. Secure number plate to access side of door in top-most corner on latch side with Torx-Plus security screws, or where directed.

.2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LEGEND OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11

C26D - satin chromium plated. C28 - satin anodized aluminium. C32D - satin stainless steel. CP - prime painted. Alum - aluminium lacquer. TL - tan lacquer. BL - bronze lacquer. Galv - galvanized. K1S - keyed one side. K2S - keyed two sides. TB - through bolts.

3.2

EXAMINATION

.1

Examine in place construction and verify that conditions are acceptable to receive security hardware installation. The electrical circuits for each locking system shall be tested by the representative of the security hardware manufacturer or supplier and shall be certified in writing as having compatible voltage, protection against overload, and duty cycle capability consistent with the operation and installation of hardware. Review security hollow metal doors and frames to verify acceptable tolerances are met for proper hardware operation. Beginning of hardware installation to any door and frame implies acceptance by security hardware supplier of the

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 19 2011-05-18

3.2 EXAMINATION (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) door's and frame's conditions to accommodate installation. Inspect and verify that installed work of other trades is complete to the point where security hardware installation can commence. Verify that specified items can be installed in accordance with reviewed and accepted design. Examine functions of security hardware against job site conditions and interferences. Report discrepancies or deficiencies to the Departmental Representative at once and retain subject hardware in its original packaging. In the event of discrepancies, do not proceed in those areas until discrepancies have been fully resolved by General Contractor, and it is acceptable to Departmental Representative.

.4

.5

.6

3.3

PREPARATION

.1

Coordinate equipment installation before and during construction to ensure that inserts, electrical conduits, backing plates and related accessories are in place and in proper locations. Verify that masonry and masonry openings are of accurate sizes, plumb and true. Immediately notify Departmental Representative of deficiencies with construction that would not permit proper installation of components. Do not proceed with installation of hardware until deficiencies are corrected. Coordinate installation of electrical components with lock control system to ensure proper operation as specified. Adjust and check each operating item prior to installation to verify proper operation or function. Replace damaged or inoperable components.

.2

.3

3.4

INSTALLATION

.1

This Section supplier to install security hardware, both mechanical and electrical, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final reviewed shop drawings. Installation shall be by skilled workmen working with proper equipment, fitted and applied to work of others, accurate, secured and adjusted for proper operation. Hardware let into work of others shall be neatly machined using templates to provide perfect fit. Do not enlarge holes or

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 20 2011-05-18

3.4 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) alter mounting hardware. Exercise care not to damage work of others. Supply and install sufficiently sized terminal strip to Division 26 supplied S.I.P. junction box (8" x 8") above each door that has electronic security or detention hardware. Terminate all low voltage wiring from applicable hardware items to the terminal strip to aid in the commissioning requirements with Division 1. Install door closers and surface applied door controls, stops and wall bumpers with security head fasteners, through-bolts and sex nuts. Position stops to prevent hardware trim from striking wall or other objects. Attach flat goods using flathead, tamper-resistant (Torx-Plus "Registered") security screws at uniform spacing around the perimeter, but not exceeding 150 mm o.c. Attach weatherstripping using stainless steel, flathead, tamper-resistant (Torx-Plus "Registered") security screws to achieve air-tight seal without binding lock bolt. Install threshold anchored to substrates using stainless steel, flathead, tamper-resistant (Torx-Plus "Registered") security screws with expansion shields spaced at 3.5 mm o.c. maximum, and symmetrical about the centre of door opening. Set threshold in full bed of sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00. Cope threshold to fit door frame. Install hardware for fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80-2010. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished by other methods, coordinate removal, storage and re-installation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in Section 09 91 00. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level. plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

.8 .9

.10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 21 2011-05-18

3.4 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.10

(Cont'd) substrate as necessary for secure and proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards except where more stringent requirements are specified. Wiring adjacent to moving or operating parts of hardware shall be trained or fastened out of the way to prevent contact or wear. Prohibit installation techniques that undermine long-term security and maintenance of the facility. These include but are not limited to the following: .1 Shimming the door to exceed edge tolerances as specified. Shimming the hinge so that it protrudes more than 1.5 mm for door edge or frame at any point. .2 Bending the hinges. Filing the lock bolt down. Grinding the strike plate out to accept the lock bolt. Bending the hinge-reinforcing plate. Bending the lock tabs. Bending the strike reinforcing. .3 Warping the door to meet frame dimensional inaccuracies. .4 Using non-standard hardware or shims. (Use full or saw-tooth shims). .5 Grinding the frame or door to meet edge tolerances specified. .6 Shimming locks. .7 Relocating hinge screw holes. .8 Relocating strike plates. .9 Relocating lock mounting plates or studs. .10 Relocating lock mounting holes. .11 Building up of frame or door to comply with tolerances specified. .12 Modification of any operable parts of locks or locking devices.

.11

.12

.13

3.5

SCHEDULE

.1

Indicated hardware groups are for one door or one pair of doors only. Provide this quantity for each door or pair of doors as scheduled. Group SH1A-EX - NOT USED 4 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Remote control swing door lock RCSD2, full cycle function, K2S 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(regular)x626 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(extended)x626

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 22 2011-05-18

3.5 SCHEDULE (Cont'd)

.2

(Cont'd) 1 - Loop pull DP1x626 1 - Recessed flush pull RFPx626, mounted on push side 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Door closer C3/C4x652 1 - O/H stop OH2x626, 90 degrees, concealed 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Threshold TH1xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 3 - Silencers RS Portal Security Drawing: Type 1. Group SH1B-EX 4 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Remote control swing door lock NRCSD2-Mogul, narrow style, full cycle function, K2S 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(regular)x626 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(extended)x626 2 - Loop pulls DP1x626 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Door closer C5x652 1 - O/H stop OH2x626, 90 degrees, concealed 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Door bottom sweep WS3xLTSx628 3 - Silencers RS Note: Revise to half cycle function lock on Door #122 Portal Security Drawing: Type 2. Group SH1C-EX 4 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Remote control swing door lock RCSD2, full cycle function, K2S 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(regular)x626 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(extended)x626 1 - Door pull DP2x630 1 - Push bar DP4x630 1 - B/F operator AO1 115VACx689 2 - operating switches activated by card reader by Electrical Division 1 - O/H stop OH2x626, concealed, size to suit 1 - Threshold TH1xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Door bottom sweep WS3xLTSx628 3 - Silencers RS Note: Revise to half cycle function lock on Door #121 Portal Security Drawing: Type 3. Group SH2 4 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Remote control swing door lock NRCSD2,

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 23 2011-05-18

3.5 SCHEDULE (Cont'd)

.5

(Cont'd) narrow stile, full cycle function, K2S 1 - Builders cylinder BCx626 1 - Builders cylinder with extension, BCx626 2 - Loop pulls DP1x626 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Door closer C3x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - HD floor stop HDFSx626 1 - Threshold TH2xLTSx628 1 - Set gasket seal WS1xLTS black 1 - Door bottom sweep WS3xLTSx628 3 - Silencers RS Note: Revise lock and frame to accept Mogul cylinders and revise BC cylinders to MC cylinders Portal Security Drawing: Type 2. Group SH3 4 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Remote control swing door lock RCSD2, full cycle function, K2S 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(regular)x626 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(extended)x626 2 - Loop pulls DP1x626 1 - Push button switch PBSx630, jamb mounted on living room, side 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Door closer C3/C4x652 1 - Bumper plate 900xLTSx630, labelled 1 - HD floor stop HDFSx626 3 - Silencers RS Back-to-back card readers by Division 26 Portal Security Drawing: Type 4. Group SH4 3 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Remote control swing door lock RCSD1, full cycle function, K1S, security knob trim on inside 1 - Mogul cylinder MC(extended)x626 1 - Loop pull DP1x626 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Door closer C3/C4x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - HD floor stop HDFSx626 3 - Silencers RS Note: Revise locks to double cylinder type RCSD2 complete with two MC Mogul cylinders and extensions to suit. Revise to 2 DP1 pulls and delete knob trim - Doors #110A, #116A. Portal Security Drawing: Type 1. Group SH5 3 - Detention hinges DHx630

.6

.7

.8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 24 2011-05-18

3.5 SCHEDULE (Cont'd)

.8

(Cont'd) 1 - Trim operable paracentric mechanical deadlatch PMD2x626, complete with operating knob trim, hollow metal mounting, hinge side mount, full cycle function, K2S 2 - Escutcheons CE1x630 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Lockbolt position switch CBPSx600 1 - Door closer C3/C4x652 1 - Kickplate KP203xLTSx630 1 - HD floor stop HDFSx626 3 - Silencers RS Note: Door #206A and #210 - Revise to "IH" lockset and MC cylinder Portal Security Drawing: Type 5. Group SH6 - NOT USED 4 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Remote control swing door lock NRCSD1, narrow stile, key holdback, full cycle function, K1S except fire rated doors 1 - Builders cylinder BCx626 c/w security cylinder collar 1 - Loop pull DP1x626 1 - Recessed flush pull RFPx626, mounted on push side 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Push button switch PBSx630, located in cell as indicated 1 - Wall stop DS3x626 3 - Silencers RS Portal Security Drawing: Type 6. Group SH7 - NOT USED 3 - Detention hinges DHx630 1 - Lockset L9x626 1 - Mogul cylinder MCx626 1 - Lockbolt position switch CBPS 1 - Concealed magnetic position switch CDPSx630 1 - Door closer C5x652 with built-in stop 1 - Threshold TH1xLTSx628 1 - Set weatherstrip WS2xLTSx628 1 - Door bottom sweep WS3xLTSx628 3 - Silencers RS Portal Security Drawing: Type 5. Group SH8 1 - Fence gate lock GPMLD2 2 - Escutcheons, 2 wing, CESx630 complete with cylinder shields 1 - Set foot bolts HFB, bottom portion only Balance of hardware by Section 08 71 00. Group SH9 1 - Key cabinet KC

.9

.10

.11

.12

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION HARDWARE

Section 11 19 12 Page 25 2011-05-18

3.5 SCHEDULE (Cont'd)

.13

Group SH10 Provide the following extra components, store as directed by Departmental Representative. 4 - Secondary security remote control locks RCDS, 2LH, 2RH 8 - Security remote controlled locks NRCSD, narrow stile, 4LH, 4RH 4 - Closers of each type scheduled in this Section (11 19 12), 2LH, 2RH 2 - Electric switches for locks, of each type 6 - Concealed magnetic position switches CDPS

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES

Section 11 19 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9

Section 03 30 11 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealing. Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Section 08 80 50 - Glazing. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. Section 11 19 12 - Detention Hardware. Division 26: Electrical Services.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1 .2

Fabricate and install fire doors and frames to NFPA 80-2010 except where specified otherwise. Fire doors and frames to be ULC or ULI listed and labelled for fire protection ratings as indicated.

1.3

SAMPLES

.1 .2

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type door, and of each type door and glazed frame, showing corner detail, butt cutout and glazing stops.

1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 .2

Submit shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Clearly indicate each type material, core thickness, reinforcements, integral and removable stops, location of anchors exposed fastenings, finishes, and arrangement of hardware. Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and in door schedule.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES

Section 11 19 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)

.4

Submit drawings for each type of door, panel, frame, and component.

1.5

TESTS

.1

Preform tests under the supervision of Departmental Representative and submit test reports certifying following minimum performance of typical flush detention door, 915 x 2130 x 50 mm in size: .1 Static load: Centrally apply load of 4309 Kg (0.22 kg per square centimeter) at quarter points on door. Maximum deflection must not exceed 0.38 mm after release of load. .2 Rack test: Concentrate load of 1905 Kg on one unsupported corner of door. Door must not fail. Deflection must not exceed 37 mm. Notify Departmental Representative sufficiently in advance of tests to allow for assignment of supervisory personnel.

.2

1.6

ALTERNATIVES

.1

Alternative designs for the specified method internal reinforcement for doors and panels may be acceptable. Submit for approval complete drawings, description, and test reports certifying performance for doors or panels of proposed alternative design.

.2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

.1 .2

Sheet steel: commercial quality cold-rolled to ASTM A1008/A1008M-11, Class 1 finish. Steel plate, shapes and bars: to CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), Type 230G or 260W. Shop paint primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40-97. Fastening Devices: .1 Provide centre pin, 6-lobe, Torx drive round, pan security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various components.

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES

Section 11 19 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)

.4

Fastening Devices:(Cont'd) .2 Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. .3 Standard screws are not acceptable.

2.2 HOLLOW METAL DETENTION DOORS

.1 .2

Fabricate hollow metal detention doors as detailed. Doors to have 3 mm side clearance with bevelled edges where necessary to permit operating without binding. Construct doors with 2 mm thick cold-rolled sheet steel face sheets both sides, each sheet one piece, formed to corner and meet at middle of door thickness. Provide continuous weld at meeting edges. Welds to be ground smooth and filled. Provide internal 3.5 mm thick steel channel banding around entire outside perimeter edge of door, spot welded to face sheets at 76 mm o.c. Banding to be continuous, full height and width. Punch steel channel where required to receive entire strike or keeper, matching cut-out in strike plate. Inner reinforcement to be continuous full height true truss design with triangular form, of shape which cannot be altered without changing length of sides. Flat apexes to be resistance spot welded at 70 mm o.c. horizontally and 76 mm o.c. vertically. Fill void between each flute of reinforcement 3 with minimum 48 kg/m density rock wool, or rigid fibreglass for sound-deadening and fire insulation. Provide additional backup reinforcement of 5 mm plate welded in place at hinge reinforcing channel, factory drilled and tapped to receive hinge screws. Pull reinforcement to be 10 mm thick x 35 x 254 mm. Closer reinforcement to be 2.5 mm thick x 89 mm x 356 mm. Build special pocket into door where prison lock is to be installed. Detention side of door

.3

.4

.5

.6

.7

.8 .9 .10

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES

Section 11 19 13 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.2 HOLLOW METAL DETENTION DOORS (Cont'd)

.10

(Cont'd) to be finished flush and have a 3 mm internal back-up plate to protect lock. Design pocket so that removal of lock bolt is extended. Build special 3.5 mm thick lock case support brackets internally in door where mortised institutional lock is to be installed. Brackets to firmly support case of lock on both faces to prevent it from moving in event of impact attack on door. Provide 2.5 mm thick formed steel channels continuously around all four sides of openings for observation windows and lock pockets. Glazing stops to be removable one side only (opposite side from detention side) and held in place with 6-lobe, centre pin Torx drive round, pan or oval head 1/4-20 or 1/4-28 Grade #8 cadmium plated machine screw security fasteners. Provide all boxes and conduits required to accommodate wiring in doors and panels where electric locks or limit switches are to be installed. Provide drilled and tapped holes for all hardware according to templates furnished by hardware supplier.

.11

.12

.13

.14

2.3 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

.1 .2

Fabricate hollow metal panels to be fixed in place at frame openings as detailed. Construct panels using same materials, design and fabrication procedures as specified for hollow metal detention doors.

2.4 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES

.1

Fabricate pressed steel frames for detention doors, glass and hollow metal fixed panels as detailed. Construct frames with minimum 2.0 mm thick cold-rolled sheet steel, or as detailed in gauge column of door schedule. Corners to be fully mitered, Continuously welded and ground smooth. Stops on detention side to be formed integrally in frames, minimum 16 x 32 mm size.

.2

.3 .4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES

Section 11 19 13 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.4 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES (Cont'd)

.5

Removable stops on opposite side to detention side to be held in place with 6-lobe, centre pin Torx drive round, pan or oval head 1/4-20 or 1/4-28 Grade #8 cadmium plated machine screw security fasteners. Form stops with minimum 2.5 mm thick cold-rolled sheet steel minimum 16 x 25 mm size.
For each mortise hinge, provide 5 mm thick reinforcement full depth of jamb spot welded to frame and completely drilled and tapped. For each surface hinge provide 10 mm thick x 35 x 254 mm long reinforcement welded to frame and completely drilled and tapped. Provide drilled and tapped reinforcement for all hardware mountings, including door closers. Protect all mortises with steel cover boxes. For each jamb mounted electric lock, provide special 2.5 mm thick perimeter housing with 5 mm thick back-up plate for field attachment of lock. Also provide fully welded 2.5 mm thick cylinder collar to suit and completely protect Builders (BC) or Mogul (MC) cylinders. Where electric locks or limit switches are specified, provide all fully welded junction boxes and conduits required to accommodate and protect wiring and connectors in frames and screens from damage. Provide sufficiently sized conduit to terminate at frame head. Provide 1.6 mm thick steel masonry anchors at each jamb, at approximately 400 mm centre to centre, minimum 4 per jamb. Each anchor 76 mm wide x 305 mm long. Provide 2.5 mm thick x 76 mm steel angle jamb floor anchors. Fasten with epoxy anchors. Provide two steel channel or angle removable temporary spreaders welded to jambs at bottom of door opening to maintain proper alignment.

.6

.7

.8

.9

.10

.11

.12 .13

2.5

FRAME FILL

.1

Prepare heads, jambs abutting structure for solid anchorage with full grout fill. Mully grout mullions. .1 Grout guards: at frames, tightly weld 0.45 mm steel grout guards at screw holes, cut-outs and all hardware preparations. At hinge preparations, provide polyurethane or

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES

Section 11 19 13 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.5 FRAME FILL (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .1 Grout guards:(Cont'd) polystyrene foam fill or otherwise seal guards to keep screw holes grout free. .2 Grout and anchor access holes: provide access holes in frames for anchoring frames in completed concrete and masonry openings, and where due to sequence of construction, frames can not be grouted from above. Provide holes with back-up plates and closer plates. Weld closer plates in place after anchorage or grout filling and grind smooth.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS

.1

Provide accessory components for hollow metal detention doors and panels as detailed, including observation windows.

2.7

SHOP PAINTING

.1

Apply one coat of paint primer to steel and ferrous metal with exception of stainless steel, and those zinc-coated or galvanized. Clean, prepare surfaces and apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove blemishes and foreign matter by automatic pressure sanding both faces of each hollow metal door and panel. Spot glaze imperfections with metallic filler and sand smooth.

.2 .3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FRAME INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3

Set frames plumb, square, level at correct elevation. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Remove temporary metal frame spreaders prior to frame installation. Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal and vertical wood spreaders as necessary to maintain frame alignment. Remove temporary wood spreaders after frames are built-in. Contractor to keep daily log of frame installation review and acceptance.

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DETENTION DOORS PANELS AND FRAMES

Section 11 19 13 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.2 DOOR AND PANEL INSTALLATION

.1

Install doors, panels, accessory components and hardware in accordance with templates and manufacturer's instructions. Adjust operable parts for correct function. Co-operate with engineering supervisor provided by detention hardware supplier to ensure proper installation, adjustment, and operation of hardware. The detention doors and frames supplier shall be employed as subcontractor to hang and adjust all doors equipped with detention hardware locking devices including but not limited to mechanical installation of the following locking device components: .1 Mechanism housings at each door complete. .2 Vertical locking columns complete. .3 Bottom door guide assemblies complete. .4 Mechanism housings connecting rows of cell doors to mechanical control cabinets. .5 Mechanical control cabinets. .6 Rubber bumpers in sliding door receiving channels. .7 All detention hardware detailed in "SH" hardware groups.

.2 .3

.4

END

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001
ROOM NO. NAME FLOOR NORTH FIN. BASE MAT. FIN. EAST MAT. FIN. WALLS WEST MAT. FIN. SOUTH MAT. FIN. MAT. FIN. CEILING

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 1 of 9
REMARKS

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123

OFFICE MEETING OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE OFFICE SUPPORT W/C W/C JANITOR MECH. CORRIDOR INTERVIEW RECYCLING CONTROL POST CIRCULATION VESTIBULE VESTIBULE LAUNDRY

VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 HARD VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-11 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6

RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 RUB-6 ---PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 ---PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2

GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB CB CB GWB GWB CB CB CB CB/GL CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1

GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB CB CB GWB GWB CB OPEN CB CB CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1

GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB CB CB GWB GWB CB OPEN CB CB CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1

GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB CB CB GWB GWB CB OPEN CB GL CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1

ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 ACT-1 CONC CONC ACT-1 GWB GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB GWB GWB PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 STL SURFACES OF STAIRS AND GUARDRAILS TO RECEIVE PTL-6 -------

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001
ROOM NO. NAME FLOOR NORTH FIN. BASE MAT. FIN. EAST MAT. FIN. WALLS WEST MAT. FIN. SOUTH MAT. FIN. MAT. FIN. CEILING

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 2 of 9
REMARKS

A101 A102 A103 A104 A105 AC106 AC107 AC108 A1-A8 C101 C102 C103 C104 C105 C1-C8 E101 E102 E103 E104 E105 EG106 EG107 EG108 E1-E8

LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN CORRIDOR MECHANICAL STAIR BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN CORRIDOR MECHANICAL STAIR BEDROOM

VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 HARD HARD VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 HARD HARD VCT-6

PTE NOTE4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 ------PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 ------PTE-2

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB

PTL-5 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-5 ------PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1

GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001
ROOM NO. NAME FLOOR NORTH FIN. VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 HARD HARD VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6/ RT-1 VCT-6/ RT-1 VCT-6 VCT-6 BASE PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 ------PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 RUB--6 RUB--6 PTE-2 PTE-2 MAT. FIN. EAST MAT. FIN. WALLS WEST MAT. FIN. SOUTH MAT. FIN. MAT. FIN. CEILING

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 3 of 9
REMARKS

G101 G102 G103 G104 G105 G1-G8 J101 J102 J103 J104 J105 JL106 JL107 JL108 J1-J8 L101 L102 L103 L104 L105 L1-L8 201 202 203 204

LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN CORRIDOR MECHANICAL STAIR BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN BEDROOM STAIR A STAIR B WALKWAY LAUNDRY

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB OPEN CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB OPEN CB CB CB

PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1

CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB

PTL-4 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1

GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB STRUCT STRUCT STRUCT GWB

PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6 PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001
ROOM NO. 205 206 207 209 210 B101 B102 B103 B104 B105 BD106 BD107 BD108 B1-B8 D101 D102 D103 D104 D105 D1-D8 F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 NAME SIS VESTIBULE MECHANICAL ROOM TES ROOM ELECTRICAL ROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN CORRIDOR MECHANICAL STAIR BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN FLOOR NORTH FIN. VCT-6 HARD HARD HARD HARD VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 HARD HARD VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 BASE PTE-2 ------RUB-2 RUB-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 ------PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 MAT. CB CB CB GWB GWB/ CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1/ ---PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 EAST MAT. CB CB CB/ GWB GWB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB FIN. PTL-1 -------/ PTL-1 PTL-1 ---PTL-5 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 WALLS WEST MAT. CB CB CB GWB GWB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 SOUTH MAT. CB CB CB/ GWB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB FIN. PTL-1 -------/ PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTE-1 PTL-1 MAT. GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 CEILING

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 4 of 9
REMARKS

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001
ROOM NO. FH106 FH107 FH108 F1-F8 H101 H102 H103 H104 H105 H1-H8 K101 K102 K103 K104 K105 KM106 KM107 KM108 K1-K8 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M1-M8 301 NAME CORRIDOR MECHANICAL STAIR BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN CORRIDOR MECHANICAL STAIR BEDROOM LIVING/ DINING KITCHEN CORRIDOR WASHROOM JAN BEDROOM ATTIC FLOOR NORTH FIN. VCT-6 HARD HARD VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 HARD HARD VCT-6 VCT NOTE 3 VCT NOTE 3 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 VCT-6 HARD BASE PTE-2 ------PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 ------PTE-2 PTE NOTE 4 PTE NOTE 4 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 PTE-2 ---MAT. CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB ------CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB/ METAL FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---EAST MAT. CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB ------CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB/ METAL FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---WALLS WEST MAT. CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB ------CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB/ METAL FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---SOUTH MAT. CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB ------CB CB CB CB CB CB CB CB/ METAL FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTE-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---MAT. GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB STRUCT STRUCT GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB GWB STRUCT FIN. PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ------PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-1 ---CEILING

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 5 of 9
REMARKS

PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

PAINT ALL EXPOSED STL SURFACES PTL-6

FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3 FOR ACCENT WALL COLOUR SEE NOTE 3

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001
ROOM NO. NAME FLOOR NORTH FIN. BASE MAT. CB/ METAL CB/ METAL CB/ METAL FIN. EAST MAT. CB/ METAL CB/ METAL CB/ METAL FIN. WALLS WEST MAT. CB/ METAL CB/ METAL CB/ METAL FIN. SOUTH MAT. CB/ METAL CB/ METAL CB/ METAL FIN. MAT. FIN. CEILING

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 6 of 9
REMARKS

301 302 303

ATTIC ATTIC ATTIC

HARD HARD HARD

----------

----------

----------

----------

----------

STRUCT STRUCT STRUCT

----------

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 7 of 9

COLOURS AND FINISHES OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. CHAIN LINK FENCE (SCREEN POSTS AND GATES) EXPOSED EXTERIOR CONCRETE SURFACES ARCHITECTRUAL CONCRETE BLOCKS SECURITY BARS AND FRAMING IN WINDOWS EXTERIOR GUARDRAILS, LADDERS & BOLLARDS EXTERIOR STEEL STAIRS METAL SIDING STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING METAL FLASHING AND TRIM FIRESTOPPING SEALANTS HM AND SECURITY DOORS AND FRAMES BUILDERS & SECURITY HARDWARE LOCKERS MAILBOXES FIRE HOSE CABINETS WALL FIN UNIT HEATER ENCLOSURES UNIT HEATERS ROOFTOP UNITS HYDRANTS GALVANIZED SEE LANDSCAPING DRAWINGS COLOUR TO MATCH GRAY BY ATLAS CO. LTD PTL-7 PTL-7 PTL-7 PER SPECIFICATIONS PER SPECIFICAITONS PER SPECIFICATIONS MANUFACTURER S STANDARD COLOURS TO LATER SELECTION BY ENGINEER MANUFACTURER S STANDARD COLOURS TO LATER SELECTION BY ENGINEER SEE DOOR SCHEDULE SEE HARDWARE SCHEDULE PER SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD COLOUR(S) TO LATER SELECTION BY ENGINEER PER SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD COLOUR(S) TO LATER SELECTION BY ENGINEER PTL-1 OR TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACES PTL-1 OR TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACES PTL-1 OR TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACES PER SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD COLOUR(S) TO LATER SELECTION BY ENGINEER PER SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL NOTES:
1. 2. FOR TYPES OF FINISHES AND COLOURS, REFER TO LEGEND BELOW. FOR PATTERNS OF FLOOR FINISHES AND ACCENT WALL COLOURS IN PUBLIC AREAS OF CELL BUILDINGS REFER TO DRAWINGS B06-A4-01-50, B06-A4-01-51, B06-A4-02-52 AND LEGEND BELOW. (TYPICAL FOR ALL CELL BUILDINGS) FOR PATTERNS OF FLOOR FINISHES AND ACCENT WALL COLOURS IN PUBLIC AREAS OF APARTMENT BUILDING REFER TO DRAWINGS B09-A4-01-50, B06-A4-02-51 AND LEGEND BELOW. THE EPOXY BASE (PTE-*) AT ACCENT WALL COLOURS IS TO MATCH THE COLOUR OF THE WALL PAINT (PTL-*) ABOVE. EPOXY BASE IS 200 mm HIGH (TYP).

3.

4.

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 8 of 9

LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS:
ACT-1 ACT-2 ANOD CB CB-1 CB-2 CLG CEMBD CONC CT EXIST GL GWB HARD MS PLAM PLAM-1 PLAM-2 PLAM-3 PLAM-4 PLAM-5 PTE PTE-1 PTE-2 PTE-3 PTE-4 PTE-5 PTE-6 PTE-7 PTE-8 PTL PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-3 PTL-4 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE (SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 09510) ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE (SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 09510) ANODIZED CONCRETE BLOCK CONCRETE BLOCK (ARCHITECTURAL) 190 MM THICK CONCRETE BLOCK (ARCHITECTURAL) 90 MM THICK CEILING CEMENT BOARD CONCRETE CERAMIC TILE EXISING CONDITION, PRODUCT, MATERIAL ETC. REPAIR AND MAKE GOOD DAMAGED SURFACES TO RECEIVE FINISHES GLZING GYPSUM WALL BOARD CONCRETE HARDNER METAL SIDING PLASTIC LAMINATE NEVAMAR ARP PLUS ARBORITE ARBORITE ARBORITE ARBORITE PAINT (EPOXY COATING) COLOUR TO MATCH PTL-1 COLOUR TO MATCH RUB-6 COLOUR TO MATCH PTL-3 COLOUR TO MATCH PTL-4 COLOUR TO MATCH PTL-5 COLOUR TO MATCH PTL-6 COLOUR TO MATCH PTL-7 COLOUR TO MATCH PTL-8 PAINT (LATEX) BENJAMIN MOORE BENJAMIN MOORE BENJAMIN MOORE SICO

SILVER ALU METALX TEXTURED NEW YORK BURNT UMBER MIST EMERALD GRIT NAVY GRIT

MXT-003T MXT-003T P-273 P-995 P-994

LAMINATE USED ON ALL WINDOW SILLS LAMINATE USED WITH PTL-3 LAMINATE USED WITH PTL-4 LAMINATE USED WITH PTL-5 LAMINATE USED WITH PTL-6

OC-29 FLORAL WHITE HC-168 CHELSEA GRAY HC-11 MARBLEHEAD GOLD 4082-74 ANTIQUE COPPER

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. PWGSC No.R.043794.001
PTL-5 PTL-6 PTL-7 PTL-8 PTL-9 PTL-10 QT RT-1 RUB RUB-1 RUB-2 RUB-3 RUB-4 RUB-5 RUB-6 RUB-7 RUB-8 ST STS STS-1 STS-2 VCT VCT-1 VCT-2 VCT-3 VCT-4 VCT-5 VCT-6 VCT-7 VCT-8 VCT-9 VCT-10 VCT-11 WD-1 WT SICO 4009-73 ASPARAGUS BENJAMIN MOORE 2058-30 DEEP OCEAN BENJAMIN MOORE 2134-50 GULL WING GRAY SICO 4209-53 DARK GRAY NOT USED COLOUR MATCH EXISTING ON ADJACENT SURFACES QUARRY TILE (DALTILE, QUARRY TILE, GOLDEN DUNE 0Q43) RUBBER TREAD AND NOSING JOHNSONITE SOLID HAMMERED 55 SILVER GREY

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Page 9 of 9

RUBBER BASE OR FLOORING JOHNSONITE 134 GOLD RUSH JOHNSONITE 76 CINNAMON JOHNSONITE 86 HUNTER GREEN JOHNSONITE 18 NAVY BLUE JOHNSONITE 20 CHARCOAL JOHNSONITE 55 SILVER GREY JOHNSONITE 20 CHARCOAL JOHNSONITE MATCH EXISTING COLOUR EXPOSED STRUCTURE STAINLESS STEEL # 4 FINISH STAINLESS STEEL RIMEX WINDSOR SATIN FINISH

BASE USED WITH PTL-3 BASE USED WITH PTL-4 BASE USED WITH PTL-5 BASE USED WITH PTL-6 BASE USED WITH PTL-8 BASE TYPICAL USE FLOORING USED IN BUILDINGS C35 AND C36 VESTIBULES BASE USED IN TEMPORARY OFFICES

304 STAINLESS STEEL

USED ON ALL WORK SURFACES WHERE STAINLESS STEEL NOTED ON DETAILS USED ON ALL CONTROL POSTS WHERE STAINLESS STEEL NOTED ON DETAILS

VINYL COMPOSITE TILE DOMCOR AZROCK - CORTINA COLORS DOMCOR AZROCK - CORTINA COLORS DOMCOR AZROCK - CORTINA COLORS DOMCOR AZROCK - CORTINA COLORS DOMCOR AZROCK - CORTINA COLORS FLEX TILE FLEX-THRU CANADA CLASSIC FLEX TILE FLEX-THRU CANADA CLASSIC FLEX TILE FLEX-THRU CANADA CLASSIC FLEX TILE FLEX-THRU CANADA CLASSIC DOMCOR AZROCK - CORTINA COLORS DOMCOR AZROCK - CORTINA COLORS BIRCH WOOD NATURAL FINISH

V-885 HONEY V-976 BRONZE TAN V-988 SPICENUT V-935 GRASSY GREEN V-934 CHIVES FT 136 FT 123 FT 110 FT 116 V-887 DENIM V-925 CARIBBEAN BAY USED ON ALL EXPOSED WOOD MILLWORK SURFACES

WALL TILE (SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 09310)

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No.R.043794.001
DOOR NO. WIDTH HEIGHT TYP DOOR MAT L FINISH GLASS TYP MAT L FRAME FINISH HEAD JAMB FIRE RATING HARD WARE FRAME/ DOOR GAUGE 16/18 16/18 16/18 16/18 16/18 16/18 16/18 16/18 12/14 16/18 16/18 16/18 16/18 16/18 12/14 16/18 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 14/16 12/14 14/16 12/14

DOOR SCHEDULE Page 1 of 6
REMARKS

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 110A 110B 112 113 114 115 116A 116B 116X 117 118A 118B 121 121X 122 122X 123 A101

915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 610 915 915 915 915 1000 1000 915 915 915 915

2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 8 5 6 5 10 6 8 8 7 7 7 7 6 7

WD WD WD WD WD WD WD WD DET WD WD WD WD WD DET HM HM HM HM HM HM DET HM DET HM DET

PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-2 PTL-3 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-2

GL-1 GL-1 GL-1 GL-1 GL-1 GL-1 GL-1 GL-1 GL-6 GL-1 ------GL-3 ---GL-6 ---GL-4 GL-3 GL-3 GL-3 GL-1 GL-5 GL-1 GL-5 GL-3 GL-6

A A A A A A A A N A A A A A U A A L A A K J P Q P R

HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM DET HM HM HM HM HM DET HM HM HM HM HM HM DET HM DET HM DET

PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-3 PTL-2 PTL-3 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SEE ELEVATION 1 1 1 2 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 J25 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN

BH1 BH2 BH1 BH1 BH1 BH1 BH1 BH1 SH4 BH1 BH4 BH4 BH5 BH5 SH4 BH3 IH5 IH6 IH7 IH7 SH1C EX BH6 SH1A EX BH7 IH7 SH3

LESS ACTUATOR AND BF OPERATOR

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No.R.043794.001
DOOR NO. WIDTH HEIGHT TYP DOOR MAT L FINISH GLASS TYP MAT L FRAME FINISH HEAD JAMB FIRE RATING HARD WARE FRAME/ DOOR GAUGE 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16

DOOR SCHEDULE Page 2 of 6
REMARKS

A103 A103X A104 A105 A1 TO A8 AC106A AC106B AC107 AC108X C101 C103 C103X C104 C105 C1 TO C8 E101 E103 E103X E104 E105 E1 E2 TO E8 EG106A EG106B EG107

915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915

2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150

7 10 8 8 8 10 10 5 10 7 7 10 8 8 8 7 7 10 8 8 9 8 10 10 5

HM DET HM HM WD DET DET HM DET DET HM DET HM HM WD DET HM DET HM HM WD WD DET DET HM

PTL-5 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1

GL-3 GL-5 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-6 ---GL-5 GL-6 GL-3 GL-5 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-3 GL-5 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-1 GL-6 GL-6 ----

A A A A A A A A A R A A A A A R A A A A A A A A A

HM DET HM HM HM DET DET HM DET DET HM DET HM HM HM DET HM DET HM HM HM HM DET DET HM

PTL-5 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1

2 J25 2 2 2 2 2 2 J25 SEE ELEVATION 2 J25 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 J25 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

45MIN

IH9 SH1B. EX IH8 IH7 IH1 SH5 SH5 IH7 SH1B. EX SH3 IH9 SH1B. EX IH8 IH7 IH1 SH3 IH4 SH1B. EX IH8 IH7 IH1 IH1

45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HR

8 DOORS TOTAL

45 MIN 45MIN

45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN

8 DOORS TOTAL

45 MIN

LEVER IN LIEU OF KNOB 7 DOORS TOTAL

45 MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HR

SH5 SH5 IH7

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No.R.043794.001
DOOR NO. WIDTH EG108X G101 G103 G103X G104 G105 G1 G2 TO G8 J101 J103 J103X J104 J105 J1 TO J8 JL106A JL106B JL107 JL108X L101 L103 L103X L104 L105 L1 TO L8 204 205 206A 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 HEIGHT 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 TYP 10 7 7 10 8 8 9 8 7 7 10 8 8 8 10 10 5 10 7 7 10 8 8 8 6 8 5 DOOR MAT L DET DET HM DET HM HM WD WD DET HM DET HM HM WD DET DET HM DET DET HM DET HM HM WD HM HM DET FINISH PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL01 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-2 GLASS GL-5 GL-6 GL-3 GL-5 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-1 GL-6 GL-3 GL-5 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-6 ---GL-5 GL-6 GL-3 GL-5 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-3 GL-3 ---TYP A R A A A A A A R A A A A A A A A A R A A A A A P A A MAT L DET DET HM DET HM HM HM HM DET HM DET HM HM HM DET DET HM DET DET HM DET HM HM HM HM HM DET FRAME FINISH PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL01 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2/7 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-2 HEAD JAMB J25 SEE ELEVATION 2 J25 2 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 J25 2 2 2 2 2 2 J25 SEE ELEVATION 2 J25 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION 2 45 MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HRS 45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HR 45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN FIRE RATING HARD WARE SH1B. EX SH3 IH4 SH1B. EX IH8 IH7 IH1 IH1 SH3 IH9 SH1B. EX IH8 IH7 IH1 SH5 SH5 IH7 SH1B. EX SH3 IH9 SH1B. EX IH8 IH7 IH1 IH7 IH6 SH5 FRAME/ DOOR GAUGE 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14

DOOR SCHEDULE Page 3 of 6
REMARKS

LEVER IN LIEU OF KNOB 7 DOORS TOTAL

8 DOORS TOTAL

8 DOORS TOTAL

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No.R.043794.001
DOOR NO. WIDTH 206B 206X 209 210 B101 B103 B104 B105 B1 TO B8 BD106A BD106B BD107 BD108A BD108B D101 D103 D104 D105 D1 TO D8 F101 F103 F104 F105 F1 TO F8 FH106A FH106B FH107 FH108A FH108B 1200 1200 915 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 915 HEIGHT 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 TYP 5 5 5 5 7 7 8 8 8 10 10 5 10 10 7 7 8 8 8 7 7 8 8 8 10 10 5 10 10 DOOR MAT L HM HM HM DET DET HM HM HM WD DET DET HM DET DET DET HM HM HM WD DET HM HM HM WD DET DET HM DET DET FINISH PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 GLASS ------------GL-6 GL-3 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-6 ---GL-6 GL-6 GL-6 GL-3 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-3 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-6 ---GL-6 GL-6 TYP A A A A R A A A A A A A A A R A A A A R A A A A A A A A A MAT L HM HM HM DET DET HM HM HM HM DET DET HM DET DET DET HM HM HM HM DET HM HM HM HM DET DET HM DET DET FRAME FINISH PTL-1 PTL-7 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-5 PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 HEAD JAMB 2 2 1 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 45 MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HR 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HR 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HRS 45 MIN 45MIN FIRE RATING HARD WARE IH7 IH3 IH7 SH5 SH3 IH9 IH8 IH7 IH1 SH5 SH5 IH7 SH2 SH2 SH3 IH9 IH8 IH7 IH1 SH3 IH9 IH8 IH7 IH1 SH5 SH5 IH7 SH2 SH2 FRAME/ DOOR GAUGE 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 12/14 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 12/14

DOOR SCHEDULE Page 4 of 6
REMARKS

8 DOORS TOTAL

8 DOORS TOTAL

8 DOORS TOTAL

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No.R.043794.001
DOOR NO. WIDTH H101 H103 H104 H105 H1 TO H8 K101 K103 K104 K105 K1 TO K8 KM106A KM106B KM107 KM108A KM108B M101 M103 M104 M105 M1 TO M8 301 302 303 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 915 813 915 915 915 HEIGHT 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2150 2050 2050 2050 TYP 7 7 8 8 8 7 7 8 8 8 10 10 5 10 10 7 7 8 8 8 5 5 5 DOOR MAT L DET HM HM HM WD DET HM HM HM WD DET DET HM DET DET DET HM HM HM WD HM HM HM FINISH PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-7 PTL-7 PTL-7 GLASS GL-6 GL-3 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-3 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 GL-6 GL-6 ---GL-6 GL-6 GL-6 GL-3 GL-1 GL-3 GL-1 ---------TYP R A A A A R A A A A A A A A A R A A A A W W W MAT L DET HM HM HM HM DET HM HM HM HM DET DET HM DET DET DET HM HM HM HM HM HM HM FRAME FINISH PTL-2 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-4 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-2 PTL-6 PTL-2 PTL-1 PTL-6 PTL-7 PTL-7 PTL-7 HEAD JAMB FIRE RATING 45 MIN 45MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 1.5 HR 45 MIN 45 MIN 45 MIN 45MIN 45 MIN HARD WARE SH3 IH9 IH8 IH7 IH1 SH3 IH9 IH8 IH7 IH1 SH5 SH5 IH7 SH2 SH2 SH3 IH9 IH8 IH7 IH1 IH3 IH3 IH3 FRAME/ DOOR GAUGE 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 12/14 12/14 14/16 12/14 12/14 12/14 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16 14/16

DOOR SCHEDULE Page 5 of 6
REMARKS

SEE ELEVATION 2 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION 2 2 2 2 SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION SEE ELEVATION

8 DOORS TOTAL

8 DOORS TOTAL

8 DOORS TOTAL W/O THRESHOLD W/O THRESHOLD W/O THRESHOLD

BB36- ACCOMMODATION UNIT No.4 Date: 2011-05-18 Project No. R.043794.001
WINDOW WINDOW NO. WIDTH HEIGHT FRAME MAT L FINISH GLASS TYP FRAME GAUGE HEAD

SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR WINDOWS AND GLAZED SCREENS Page 1 of 1
FIRE RATING

-

REMARKS

JAMB

SILL

BUILDING BB36
GROUND FLOOR S02 S07 900 700 1200 1200 HM HM PTL-2 PTL-2 GL-6 GL-6 12 12 45 MIN 45 MIN

GENERL NOTES: 1. HEAD DETAILS ARE SIMILAR TO JAMB CONDTIONS. 2. FOR HEAD AND JAMB DETAILS FOR WINDOWS REFER TO DOOR FRAME DETAILS. 3. FOR ABBREVIATIONS REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE. 4. FOR JAMB TYPES FOR INTERIOR WINDOWS AND SCREENS REFER TO ELEVATIONS.

Public Works and Government Services Canada Architectural and Engineering Services

BATH INSTITUTION
Hwy 33, Bath, Ontario
BB36 - ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 BB37 - ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5

PWGSC Project No. R.043794.001

SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 3 OF 5:
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36)

Issued for Bid 2011-05-18

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-05-18

Section

Title

Pages

VOLUME 3 OF 5 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36) Division 21 - Fire Suppression 21 12 01 STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY 21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Division 22 - Plumbing 22 10 10 PLUMBING PUMPS 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 13 17 DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON AND COPPER 22 30 05 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 42 01 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 22 42 03 COMMERCIAL WASHROOM FIXTURES 22 42 16 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES AND SINKS 22 42 20 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS AND BATHTUBS 9 14 3 8 4 3 10 5 4 4

Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 03 01 USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION 2 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - MECHANICAL 26 23 05 05 INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK 6 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 4 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 3 23 05 17 PIPE WELDING 5 23 05 19.01 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS 3 23 05 23.01 VALVES - BRONZE 5 23 05 23.02 VALVES - CAST IRON 5 23 05 23.03 VALVES - CAST STEEL 5 23 05 23.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES 4 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 8 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5 23 05 53.01 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 7 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 8 23 05 94 PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS 3 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 7 23 07 15 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 9 23 08 02 CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS 4 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 5 23 21 13.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: COPPER 6 23 21 13.02 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: STEEL 5 23 21 14 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 5 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 5 23 23 00 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT 5 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS 5 23 31 13.01 METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA 7 23 32 48 ACOUSTICAL AIR PLENUMS 3 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 4 23 33 14 DAMPERS - BALANCING 2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-05-18

23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23

33 33 33 33 34 34 36 37 37 41 51 52 72 73 81 82 82 83 84

15 16 46 53 00 25 00 13 20 00 00 00 00 10 24 36 39 14 13

DAMPERS - OPERATING DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE FLEXIBLE DUCTS ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING HVAC FANS PACKAGED ROOF AND WALL EXHAUSTERS AIR TERMINAL UNITS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES LOUVRES, INTAKES AND VENTS PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS HEATING BOILERS AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT AIR HANDLING - BUILT-UP AIR CONDITIONING SPLIT SYSTEMS FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS UNIT HEATERS IN-FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM HUMIDIFIERS

2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 3 3 3 10 4 15 5 3 4 8 9 57 13 4 2 5 4 2 2 3 5 3 3 2 5 2 4 8 3 1 4 4 2 2 2 2 4 5 22 10 7

Division 25 - Integrated Automation 25 05 01 EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Division 26 - Electrical 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 03 ARC FLASH ELECTRICAL COORDINATION AND STUDIES 26 05 20 WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V 26 05 21 WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000 V) 26 05 28 GROUNDING - SECONDARY 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 31 SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS 26 05 32 OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43.01 INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS 26 05 80 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS 26 05 81 MOTORS: 0.746 TO 149 KW 26 09 23.02 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - PHOTOELECTRIC 26 09 23.04 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - FLUORESCENT DIMMING 26 09 24 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT - LOW VOLTAGE 26 12 16.01 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY 26 24 05 SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT 26 24 16.01 PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 16.02 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 20 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS - CLASS "A" 26 28 23 DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED 26 29 01 CONTACTORS 26 29 03 CONTROL DEVICES 26 29 10 MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V 26 33 53 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS STATIC 26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS 26 50 00 LIGHTING

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 3 2011-05-18

26 52 00 26 53 00

EMERGENCY LIGHTING EXIT LIGHTS

3 4 4 2 2 6 2 4 8 6 5 2 17 18 23 19 17

Division 27 - Communications 27 05 14 COMMUNICATION CABLES INSIDE BUILDINGS 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 10 05 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 13 13 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 27 41 16 TELEVISION SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS 27 51 23 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security 28 08 01 COMMISSIONING FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 28 13 01 PATHWAYS FOR GUARD TOUR SYSTEM 28 13 27 SECURITY DOOR SUPERVISION 28 13 29 EMERGENCY INMATE CELL CALL 28 16 02 PORTABLE PERSONAL ALARM SYSTEM 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS DETAIL SHEETS Building BB36 E-101 TYPE 'A' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-102 TYPE 'B' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-103 TYPE 'C' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-104 TYPE 'D' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-105 TYPE 'E' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-106 TYPE 'F' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-107 TYPE 'G' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-108 TYPE 'H' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-109 TYPE 'J' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-110 TYPE 'K' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-111 TYPE 'L' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-112 TYPE 'M' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-113 TYPE 'N' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-114 TYPE 'P' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-115 TYPE 'Q' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-116 TYPE 'X' & 'X1' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-117 DIGITAL LIGHT CONTROLLER E-118 TELEPHONE PEDESTAL DETAIL E-119 CALL ORIGINATING AND CANCELLATION DEVICES E-120 APT. PANEL 'C' (BB36C) E-121 APT. PANEL 'D' (BB36D) E-122 APT. PANEL 'F' (BB36F) E-123 APT. PANEL 'G' (BB36G) E-124 APT. PANEL 'H' (BB36H) E-125 APT. PANEL 'J' (BB36J) E-126 APT. PANEL 'K' (BB36K) E-127 APT. PANEL 'L' (BB36L) E-128 APT. PANEL 'M' (BB36M)

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 4 2011-05-18

E-129 E-130 E-131 E-132 E-133 E-134 E-135 E-136 E-137 E-138 E-139 E-140 E-141 E-142

APT. PANEL 'N' (BB36N) APT. PANEL 'P' (BB36P) APT. PANEL 'Q' (BB36Q) APT. PANEL 'R' (BB36R) APT. PANEL 'S' (BB36S) APT. PANEL 'EC' (BB36EC) APT. PANEL 'ED' (BB36ED) APT. PANEL 'EF' (BB36EF) APT. PANEL 'EG' (BB36EG) APT. PANEL 'EH' (BB36EH) APT. PANEL 'UPS-A' (BB36UPSA) APT. PANEL 'LC-1' (BB36LC1) EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL TYPE 'R' LIGHTING FIXTURE

Building BB37 E-101 TYPE 'A' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-102 TYPE 'B' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-103 TYPE 'C' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-104 TYPE 'D' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-105 TYPE 'E' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-106 TYPE 'F' & 'F1' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-107 TYPE 'G' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-108 TYPE 'H' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-109 TYPE 'J' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-110 TYPE 'K' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-111 TYPE 'L' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-112 TYPE 'M' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-113 TYPE 'X' LIGHTING FIXTURE E-114 DIGITAL LIGHT CONTROLLER E-115 TELEPHONE PEDESTAL DETAIL E-116 CALL ORIGINATING AND CANCELLATION DEVICE E-117 CELL UNIT PANEL 'C' (BB37C) E-118 CELL UNIT PANEL 'D' (BB37D) E-119 CELL UNIT PANEL 'F' (BB37F) E-120 CELL UNIT PANEL 'G' (BB37G) E-121 CELL UNIT PANEL 'H' (BB37H) E-122 CELL UNIT PANEL 'J' (BB37J) E-123 CELL UNIT PANEL 'EC' (BB37EC) E-124 CELL UNIT PANEL 'ED' (BB37ED) E-125 CELL UNIT PANEL 'EF' (BB37EF) E-126 CELL UNIT PANEL 'UPS-A' (BB37UPSA) E-127 CELL UNIT PANEL 'UPS-B' (BB37UPSB) E-128 CELL UNIT PANEL 'UPS-C' (BB37UPSC) E-129 CELL UNIT PANEL 'UPS-D' (BB37UPSD) E-130 CELL UNIT PANEL 'UPS-F' (BB37UPSF) E-131 CELL UNIT PANEL 'LC-1' (BB37LC1) E-132 EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL E-133 TYPE 'R' LIGHTING FIXTURE Refer to Volumes 1 to 2, and 4 to 5 for the remainder of the specifications: VOLUME 1 OF 5 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, EXISTING CONDITIONS, ELECTRICAL/

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

LIST OF CONTENTS

Section 00 01 11 Page 5 2011-05-18

COMMUNICATIONS - SITE, AND CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 2 OF 5 - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #4 (BB36) VOLUME 4 OF 5 - ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5 (BB37) VOLUME 5 OF 5 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCOMMODATION UNIT #5 (BB37)

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 10-10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. .2 NFPA 13-10, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .3 NFPA 14-10, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. National Building Code of Canada 2010. National Fire Code of Canada 2010.

.2 .3

1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Submit complete plans to Authority of Jurisdiction for review and approval before commencement of work. .3 Indicate grooved joint couplings and fittings on drawings. Samples: .1 Submit the following samples: .1 Firehose nozzles. .2 Section of hose. Test reports: .1 Submit certified test reports for standpipe and hose assembly from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.7

Field Quality Control Submittals: Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's .1 field reports specified.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1

Provide maintenance data for standpipe and hose system for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Qualifications: .1 Installer: company or person specializing in standpipe and hose assembly. Supply grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, grooving tools and specialties from a single manufacturer. Use date stamped castings for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, for quality assurance and traceability.

.2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors in dry location. .2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1

Design system to NFPA 14 and following parameters: .1 Combined with sprinkler systems: hydraulic. .2 The water supply shall be sufficient to provide a flow, measured at each of the two hydraulically most remote 38mm diameter hose connections; .1 of not less than 380 L/min., .2 at pressure of not less than 450 kPa, and .3 of not less than 190 L/min. from each of the two outlets simultaneously. .3 The water supply shall be sufficient to provide a flow, measured at each of the two hydraulically most remote 65mm diameter hose connections: .1 of not less than 1,890 L/min., .2 of a pressure of not less than 450 kPa, and .3 of not less than 945 L/min from each of the two outlets simultaneously.

2.2 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES

.1

Pipe: .1 Ferrous: to NFPA 14. .2 Minimum Sch. 40 for screwed piping and Sch. 10 for roll grooved piping. Fittings and joints to NFPA 14: .1 Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved. .1 Grooved joints designed with two ductile iron housing segments, pressure responsive gasket, and zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for rigidity and visual pad-to-pad offset contact. Valves: .1 ULC listed for fire protection service. .2 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, grooved, OS&Y gate. .3 NPS 2 1/2 and over: cast iron, flanged or roll grooved ends, indicating butterfly valve. .4 Check valves: spring actuated swing type, composition disc or seal. Pipe hangers: .1 ULC listed for fire protection services.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.2 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES (Cont'd)

.5 .6 .7

Drain valve: NPS 1, complete with hose end, cap and chain. Inspector's test connections: NPS 1 gate valve. Combined sprinkler and standpipe system shall be rated at 1034 kPa.

2.3 AUXILLIARY SUPERVISORY SWITCHES

.1 .2

General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Valves: .1 Mechanically attached to valve body, with N.O. and N.C. contacts and supervisory capability. .2 Plug in type are not acceptable.

2.4

CABINETS

.1

To NFPA 14 and ULC listed: Type as indicated, constructed of 4.8 mm thick steel, 180° opening door of 4.8 mm thick steel with hinge same side as water supply. .1 Type FHC-1: fully recessed type with trim for mounting in finish wall. .2 Type FHC-2: Surface type cabinet for mounting on finish wall. Cabinets to maintain fire resistive rating of construction in which they occur. Cabinet door: metal steel panel without glass. Hinges - heavy duty full length fully concealed piano hinge with 180° swing welded to door and tub, padlock hasp. Large enough to accommodate NPS 1 1/4 angle valve, hose reel, fire hose nozzle and spanner, fire extinguisher, NPS 2-1/2 fire department valve, and NPS 1 1/2 valve. Cabinets to have 8 anchor points. Maximum fire hose cabinet size shall be as follows: 864 mm wide x 864 mm high x 356 mm deep maximum.

.2

.3 .4 .5

.6

.7 .8

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.5 SWINGING HOSE REEL

.1

Non-automatic hose reel suitable for hard rubber hose, 180° swing, designed so hose can be removed from reel when water is flowing.

2.6 FIRE HOSE AND NOZZLE

.1 .2

Hose: ULC listed, 25 mm nominal diameter, 30m long hard rubber hose. Nozzle: ULC listed, 25 mm nominal diameter, forged brass adjustable combination fog-straight stream with shut-off.

2.7

ANGLE VALVES

.1

ULC listed for fire service. NPS 1-1/2 cast or forged brass complete with hand wheel, cap and chain, open or drip connections, or hydrolator valve. Cap to be part of ULC listing for valve. Where water pressure exceeds 690 kPa, provide ULC listed pressure reducing device. Provide adapter for connection of 25mm hose.

.2

2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT.1 VALVE

ULC listed, NPS 2 1/2 forged or cast brass angle valve: with thread compatible with local fire department, complete with handwheel, cap and chain. Cap to be part of ULC listing for valve.

2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT.1 CONNECTION

As specified in Section 21 13 13.

2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1

90 mm diameter, to Section 23 05 19.01.

2.11

FINISHES

.1 .2

In finished areas, chrome plate valves, nozzles, fittings. Cabinets. .1 Tub: prime coated. .2 Door and frame: prime coated.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.12 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

.1 .2

Extinguishers shall be ULC listed and labelled. Type FE-1: water pressurized, stored pressure type, squeeze-grip operated of stainless steel construction, ULC labeled. 9.1L size. Provide one extinguisher in each fire hose cabinet. Type FE-2: multi-purpose stored pressure rechargeable dry chemical ABC powder type with heavy duty steel cylinder, positive on/off operation, waterproof stainless steel gauge, hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labeled for A, B and C class protection. Size 4.5kg. Provide where indicated. Provide all wall brackets and mount extinguishers 1 to 1.5 m above floor. Identify extinguishers in accordance with recommendations of NFPA 10 and CAN/ULC-S508. Attach bilingual tag or label to extinguishers, indicating month and year of installation. Provide space for service dates.

.3

.4 .5 .6

2.13 Extinguisher Cabinets

.1

Flush type as indicated, constructed of 1.6mm thick steel, 180° opening door of 2.5mm thick steel with latching device. Cabinet to maintain fire resistive rating of construction in which they occur. Cabinet door: with metal panel. Finish: .1 Tub: prime coated. .2 Door and frame: prime coated.

.2 .3 .4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Install and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 14. Install pipework in accordance with Section 23 05 05, supplemented as specified. Run inspectors test connections to sight glass. Install drain pipes and valves to drain parts of systems and so arranged that any one standpipe

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.1 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) riser can be drained without shutting down any other parts of systems. Install 90 mm diameter pressure gauge in accordance with Section 23 05 19.01 at top of risers and in accordance with NFPA 14. The source of the water supply shall be reliable and capable of providing the required supply for not less than 30 minutes. Water supply for standpipe system: .1 Class I Systems: .1 Receive water supply sufficient to provide 1892.50 lpm and 946.25 lpm for each additional standpipe. .2 Total supply not to exceed 9462.5 lpm. .3 Supply system: capable of maintaining residual pressure of 690 kPa at each topmost outlet with 1892.50 lpm flowing from most remote standpipe and 946.25 lpm flowing from each additional standpipe up to maximum of 9462.5 lpm. .2 Class II Systems: .1 Receive water supply sufficient to provide minimum of 378.50 lpm. .2 System: capable of maintaining residual pressure of 414 kPa at topmost outlet with 378.50 lpm flowing. .3 Class III Systems: .1 Receive water supply from source sufficient to provide 1892.50 lpm for single standpipe and 946.25 lpm for each additional standpipe. .2 Total supply not to exceed 9462.5 lpm. .3 System: capable of maintaining residual pressure of 690 kPa at each top most outlet with 1892.50 lpm flowing from most remote standpipe and 946.25 lpm flowing from each additional standpipe up to maximum of 9462.5 lpm flowing.

.5

.6

.7

3.2

SITE TEST

.1

General: .1 In accordance with NFPA 14, supplemented as specified. .2 In accordance with Section 01 91 00. Testing witnessed by Fire Commissioner of Canada and Departmental Representative.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.2 SITE TEST (Cont'd)

.3

Disposal of water used in flushing and testing: .1 Discuss appropriate measures with Departmental Representative. Timing: .1 Connect fire hoses when flushing out and pressure tests have been completed. .2 Charge system with water when there is no possibility of freeze-up. .3 Perform tests after pressure booster pumps have been tested. Co-ordination: .1 Co-ordinate tests with performance verification of: .1 Standpipe and hose systems specified in this section. .2 Fire alarm systems specified Section 28 31 00.01. .3 Wet pipe sprinkler systems specified Section 21 13 13. Procedures: .1 Verify that system is complete prior to start-up and testing procedures. .2 Verify that ULC labels are visible. .3 Fill system with water for pressure. Record water supply pressure. .4 Pressure test piping system as required by authority having jurisdiction. .5 Start up fire pumps and jockey pumps. .6 Verify flow switches are operational. .7 Verify valves in system are visible and monitored. .8 Flushing: fill with water, let stand at operating pressure for 1 week. Drain risers separately, then drain main. .9 Flush buried mains and lead-in connections before making connection to indoor sprinkler system. .10 Perform flow tests as required by: .1 Authority having jurisdiction. .2 Applicable NFPA standards such as 13, 14, 20, 1273. .3 National Building Code. .4 National Fire Code. .11 Record incoming pressure to building for 10 days prior to activating system. .12 Adjust pressure switches. Sundry checks: .1 Verify that properly sized pressure restricting discs are installed where required.

.4

.5

.6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY

Section 21 12 01 Page 9 2011-05-18

3.2 SITE TEST (Cont'd)

.8

Identification: .1 Verify devices are properly labelled, identifying area served, etc. Report: .1 Refer to Section 01 91 00, reports supplemented as specified. .2 In addition to reports required by NFPA 14, include the following: .1 Copy of schematic and valve schedule. Posted Instructions: .1 Prepare schematic, mount behind glare-free glass and install where directed. .2 Prepare valve schedule, mount behind glare-free glass and install where directed. Training: .1 Refer to Section 01 91 00. Documentation: .1 Provide written certification to Departmental Representative that system was installed, flushed and tested in accordance with appropriate codes, approved plans and calculations. .2 Certificate to include: .1 Contractors name. .2 Contractors address. .3 Contractors license number. .4 List of approved materials and devices installed. .5 Description of system test conducted. .6 Dates of flushing and testing. .7 Certification that connections welding conform to acceptable standards. .8 Certification that system is complete and in service. .9 Approved signage has been provided and attached as appropriate. .10 Hose threads of system and test connections match those of responding fire department.

.9

.10

.11 .12

3.3

CLEANING

.1

Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. END

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .2 NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. .3 NFPA 20-2010, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection. .4 NFPA 25-2011, Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S543-09-AM1, Standard for Internal Lug Quick Connect Couplings for Fire Hose.

.2

1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate: .1 Materials. .2 Finishes. .3 Method of anchorage .4 Number of anchors. .5 Supports. .6 Reinforcement. .7 Assembly details. .8 Accessories. Samples: .1 Submit samples of following: .1 Each type of sprinkler head. .2 Signs. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.

.3

.4

.5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1

Provide operation, maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 in accordance with NFPA 20. Manufacturer's Catalog Data, including specific model, type, and size for: .1 Pipe and fittings. .2 Alarm valves. .3 Valves, including gate, check, and globe. .4 Water motor alarms. .5 Sprinkler heads. .6 Pipe hangers and supports. .7 Pressure or flow switch. .8 Fire department connections. .9 Excess pressure pump. .10 Mechanical couplings. Drawings: .1 Sprinkler heads and piping system layout. .1 Prepare 760 mm by 1050 mm detail working drawings of system layout in accordance with NFPA 13, "Working Drawings (Plans)". .2 Show data essential for proper installation of each system. .3 Show details, plan view, elevations, and sections of systems supply and piping. .4 Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. .2 Electrical wiring diagrams. Design Data: .1 Calculations of sprinkler system design. .2 Indicate type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for not less than 18 months. Field Test Reports: .1 Preliminary tests on piping system. Records: .1 As-built drawings of each system. .1 After completion, but before final acceptance, submit complete set of as-built drawings of each system for record purposes. .2 Submit 760 mm by 1050 mm drawings on reproducible Mylar film with title block similar to full size contract drawings. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: .1 Provide detailed hydraulic calculations including summary sheet, and Contractors Material

.2

.3

.4

.5 .6

.7

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 3 2011-05-18

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)

.7

Operation and Maintenance Manuals:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) and Test Certificate for aboveground and underground piping and other documentation for incorporation into manual in accordance with NFPA 13.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Qualifications: .1 Installer: company or person specializing in wet sprinkler systems. Supply grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, grooving tools and specialties from a single manufacturer. Use date stamped castings for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, for quality assurance and traceability.

.2

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

.1

Extra Materials: .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools in accordance with NFPA 13.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials indoors in dry location. .2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.2

.3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 4 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1

Design system in accordance with NFPA 13 using following parameters: .1 All areas shall be designed for hazard coverage indicated with design area and associated densities. .2 Pipe size and layout: .1 Hydraulic design. .2 Sprinkler head layout to NFPA 13 or as directed by authorities having jurisdiction and with sprinkler head centred in at least one (1) direction of ceiling tile. .3 The hydraulic design shall be sized to accommodate the higher and most remote zones. .4 Allow for additional sprinkler heads and pipe distribution to suit all existing interferences. .5 When sidewall sprinklers listed for light hazard occupancies are used, pipe sizing and spacing shall be according to ordinary hazard rules. .3 Water supply: .1 Base design on NFPA 13 and obtain water supply for appropriate fire hydrants from municipality. Conduct flow and pressure test of water supply in vicinity of project to verify municipal data and to obtain criteria for basis of design. Adjust water test values to allow for peak period water usage. Hydraulic calculations shall commence at water main connection at source. Provide as part of hydraulic calculation submission, fire hydrant flow test data and deduct 10% as safety factor based on available pressure value. .4 Zoning: .1 System zoning as indicated. .2 Provide supervised isolating valve and flow switch for each zone and as indicated. .5 Minimum operating pressure for institutional horizontal sidewall sprinkler-heads shall be 207 kPa to provide maximum horizontal spray discharge.

.2

Include with each system materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside building to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and other construction and

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)

.3

(Cont'd) equipment in accordance with detailed shop drawings. Locate sprinkler heads in consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Devices and equipment for fire protection service: ULC approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems. Spacing of sprinkler heads not to exceed that permitted by NFPA 13 for hazard occupancies of areas served.

.4 .5

2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

.1

Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections. .1 Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings will not be permitted. Perform welding in shop; field welding will be permitted. Conceal piping in areas with suspended ceiling.

.2 .3

2.3 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES

.1 .2

Pipe: .1 Ferrous: to NFPA 13. Fittings and joints to NFPA 13: .1 Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved. .1 Grooved joints designed with two ductile iron housing segments, pressure responsive gasket, and zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for rigidity and visual pad-to-pad offset contact. .2 Provide welded or threaded fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser nipples, or drop nipples are threaded. .3 Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into pipe when pressure is applied will not be permitted. .4 Rubber gasketted grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings are permitted in pipe sizes 32 mm and larger. .5 Fittings: ULC approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems. .6 Ensure fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets are supplied by same manufacturer.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 6 2011-05-18

2.3 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES (Cont'd)

.2

Fittings and joints to NFPA 13:(Cont'd) Side outlet tees using rubber gasketted .7 fittings are not permitted. Valves: .1 ULC listed for fire protection service. .2 Gate valves: open by counterclockwise rotation. .3 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, OS&Y rising stem gate valve. .4 NPS 2 1/2 and over: cast iron, flanged or roll grooved ends, OS&Y rising stem gate or indicating butterfly type. .5 Check valves: swing type as above. .6 Ball drip check valve. .7 Backflow preventer: Double check valve assembly for moderate hazard. Refer to Section 22 42 01. Pipe hangers: .1 ULC listed for fire protection services in accordance with NFPA. Sprinkler and standpipe system shall be rated at 1380 kPa.

.3

.4

.5

2.4

SPRINKLER HEADS .1 .2 .3

Provide sprinklers of current manufacture as indicated in this section. Sprinklers shall be ULC listed and labelled. Provide minimum 13 mm nominal diameter discharge orifice.

2.5 UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD

.1

Upright bronze, quick response for hazard coverage as indicated, 5.6 K factor, corrosion resistant coating, chrome finish, fusible link type; 68°C rated, 13mm orifice.

2.6 PENDANT SPRINKLER HEAD

.1

Bronze, quick response for hazard coverage as indicated, 5.6 K factor, corrosion resistant coating, FM approved, chrome finish, fusible link type; 68°C rated, 13mm orifice.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 7 2011-05-18

2.7 SIDEWALL SPRINKLER HEAD

.1

Sidewall quick response for hazard occupancy as indicated, corrosion resistant coating 5.6 K factor, chrome finish, fusible link type with adjustable escutcheon plate, 68°C rated, 13mm dia. orifice.

2.8 UPRIGHT HIGH TEMPERATURE SPRINKLER HEAD

.1

Upright bronze, quick response for hazard coverage as indicated, 5.6 K factor, corrosion resistant coating, chrome finish, fusible link type; 141°C rated, 13mm orifice.

2.9 RECESSED PENDANT SPRINKLER

.1

Chrome finish recessed pendent sprinkler with matching adjustable threaded two piece sprinkler cup. Quick response for hazard coverage as indicated, 5.6K factor, corrosion resistant coating, fusible link type.

2.10 HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL INSTITUTIONAL SPRINKLER HEAD

.1

13mm dia. orifice automatic sprinkler with deflector and conical escutcheon. Flush style arrangements. The institutional sprinkler head shall be designed to breakaway under an applied load of not more than 50 kg. The sprinkler shall utilize a meltaway fusible alloy solder principle of operation. The sprinkler and conical escutcheon shall be chrome plated. The conical escutcheon assembly shall be firmly attached to the sprinkler body with tamper resistant fasteners. Sprinkler shall be complete with heavy duty retaining flange which connects to sprinkler pipe and prevents sprinkler movement.

.2

.3 .4

.5

2.11 PENDANT INSTITUTIONAL SPRINKLER HEAD

.1 .2

13mm dia. orifice automatic sprinkler with conical escutcheon. Flush style arrangement. The institutional sprinkler head shall be designed to breakaway under an applied load of not more than 50 kg. The sprinkler shall utilize a meltaway fusible alloy solder principle of operation.

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 8 2011-05-18

2.11 PENDANT INSTITUTIONAL SPRINKLER HEAD (Cont'd)

.4

The sprinkler and conical escutcheon shall be chrome plated. The conical escutcheon assembly shall be firmly attached to the sprinkler body with tamper resistant fasteners. Sprinklers shall be complete with heavy duty retaining flange which connects to sprinkler pipe and prevents sprinkler movement.

.5

2.12 SPRINKLER GUARDS

.1 .2

For protection of sprinkler heads. Rugged welded wire and sheet steel construction capable of withstanding heavy impacts.

2.13 ALARM CHECK VALVE

.1 .2

Alarm check valve to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Provide alarm check valve system, c/w check valve, cut groove inlet & outlet, drain, alarm line strainer, pressure switch, two (2) water gauges, water motor alarm, wet pipe alarm valve, main drain valve, alarm test valve, excess pressure pump (as specified this Section) and main drain. Provide valve complete with internal components that are replaceable without removing the valve from the installed position.

.3

2.14 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES

.1 .2 .3

General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service. Die-cast enclosure over, die-cast base, all part corrosion resistant finish, paint finish. Valves: .1 Mechanically attached to valve body, with normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. .2 Cover tamper activated by cover removal. .3 Two sets of SPDT contacts, 15.0 Amps @ 125/250 VAC, 2.5 Amps @ 30 VDC resistive. .4 Plug-in type are not acceptable. Flow switch type: .1 With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. .2 0.63 l/s Minimum flow rate. .3 Cover tamper activated by cover removal.

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 9 2011-05-18

2.14 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES (Cont'd)

.4

Flow switch type:(Cont'd) Two sets of SPDT contacts, 15.0 Amps @ .4 125/250 VAC, 2.0 Amps @ 30 VDC resistive. .5 Mechanical retard, adjustable from 10-90 seconds. Zero time delay where indicated. Pressure alarm switch: .1 With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. .2 On-off differential 6.9 kPa minimum. .3 Visible pressure indication: 206-1338 kPa. .4 Adjustable range: 172-1207 kPa. .5 Maximum operating pressure: 1207 kPa. .6 SPDT for use with normally open or normally closed circuits, 250 VAC 15 A ¼ HP, 125 VAC 15 A 1/8 HP, 250 VDC 0.2 A, 125 VAC 0.4 A, 30 VDC 2.0 A. .7 Die-cast aluminum cover with enamel red paint finish, zinc plated steel base.

.5

2.15 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Provide connections approximately 1.5 m above finish grade, location as indicated. To NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and ULC S543 listed,Siamese type. Polished chrome plated recessed type. Thread specifications: compatible with local fire department. Install a 90-degree elbow with drain connection at the low-point near each fire department connection to allow for system drainage to prevent freezing. "STANDPIPE" and "SPRINKLER" identification plate.

.6

2.16 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP

.1

Pump: Double acting displacement type, open cylinder design, direct drive, ULC listed, complete with relief valve. Pump and motor unit: .1 Approved for automatic wet pipe fire extinguishing sprinkler systems; complete with pilot light, high pressure switch, and low pressure switch. .2 EEMAC Class B squirrel cage induction 1725 rpm, continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 50 degrees C, 0.25 kW, 120/1/60.

.2

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 10 2011-05-18

2.16 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP (Cont'd)

.2 .3

Pump and motor unit:(Cont'd) Capacity: 7.6 L/min. .3 Provide electrical power supply connections for pump and pilot light at supply side of building service panel. Electrical wiring by Div. 26. Provide breaker with locked lever for each connection. Pump shall operate manually. Shut-off valve and strainer on pump inlet. Relief valve, check valve and shut-off valve on discharge connections.

.4 .5 .6

2.17 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 .2

ULC listed and to Section 23 05 19.01. Maximum limit of not less than twice normal working pressure at point where installed.

2.18

PIPE SLEEVES

.1 .2 .3

Provide pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, and roofs. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, and roofs. Provide 2.5 cm minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. .1 Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. .2 Seal space at both ends of sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to firm but pliable mass. .3 In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with ULC listed fill, void, or cavity material. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: .1 Provide cast-iron sleeves. Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: .1 Schedule 40 steel pipe.

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 11 2011-05-18

2.19 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

.1

Provide one piece type metal plates for piping passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished chrome in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.

.2 .3

2.20 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION

.1

Locate inspector's test connection at hydraulically most remote part of each system, provide test connections approximately 3 m above floor for each sprinkler system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with alarm device. Provide test connection piping to location where discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without property damage. Provide discharge orifice of same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice.

.2

.3

2.21

SIGNS

.1 .2

Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm device to NFPA 13. Permanently fix hydraulic design data nameplates to riser of each system.

2.22 SPARE PARTS CABINET

.1

Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench adjacent to each alarm valve. Number and types of extra sprinkler heads as specified in NFPA 13.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3 .4

Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 25. Test station to be piped to test drain riser. Install and test equipment to manufacturers' standards. Coordinate sprinkler head locations with reflected ceiling plans, plumbing, structural,

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 12 2011-05-18

3.1 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.4

(Cont'd) electrical, HVAC plans and existing building systems. Coordinate sprinkler branch line runs with structural steel, plumbing, electrical and HVAC plans. .1 Drawings show where mains and branch runs may be installed. Fill voids around openings through floors and walls for fire protection piping with approved fire stopping and smoke seal. Install excess pressure pump across alarm valve in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. After completion of sprinkler system, the sprinkler contractor shall furnish a written statement or certificate as per NFPA and to the effect that the work covered by the contract has been completed in accordance with approved tender documents. Provide copies of all test certificates. Locate spare parts cabinets as per direction of Departmental Representative.

.5

.6

.7 .8

.9

3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION

.1

Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping from plaster ceilings. Keep interior and ends of new piping and existing piping thoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entry of water and foreign matter. Inspect piping before placing into position. Provide guards on sprinkler heads in all mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, service spaces/closets, janitor closets, recycling/garbage rooms, storage areas and below staircases in circulation areas.

.2

.3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 13 2011-05-18

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

.1

Coordinate with electrical Division 26 the electrical requirement for equipment supplied in this division. Provide fire alarm system under Section 28 31 00.01. Provide control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems, in accordance with National Electrical Code. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit.

.2 .3

.4

3.4

DISINFECTION

.1 .2

Disinfect new piping and existing piping. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 part per million or residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from piping, analyzed by certified laboratory, and submit results prior to piping being placed into service.

.3

.4

3.5

FIELD PAINTING

.1

Refer to Section 09 91 00.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Site Test, Inspection: .1 Perform test to determine compliance with specified requirements in presence of Departmental Representative and Fire Commissioner of Canada. .2 Test, inspect, and approve piping before covering or concealing. .3 Preliminary Tests: .1 Hydrostatically test each system at 300 kPa in excess of nominal working pressure but at not less than 1.4 MPa for a 2 hour period with no leakage or reduction in pressure under supervision of FCC. .2 Flush piping with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13. .3 Piping above suspended ceilings: tested, inspected, and approved before installation of ceilings.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Section 21 13 13 Page 14 2011-05-18

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd)

.1

(Cont'd) .3 Preliminary Tests:(Cont'd) .4 Test alarms and other devices. .5 Test water flow alarms by flowing water through inspector's test connection. When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit signed and dated certificate in accordance with NFPA 13. .4 Formal Tests and Inspections: .1 Do not submit request for formal test and inspection until preliminary test and corrections are completed and approved. .2 Submit written request for formal inspection at least 15 days prior to inspection date. .3 Repeat required tests as directed. .4 Correct defects and make additional tests until systems comply with contract requirements. .5 Furnish appliances, equipment, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for tests. .6 Authority of Jurisdiction, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are accepted.

3.7

CLEANING

.1

Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

.2

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PLUMBING PUMPS

Section 22 10 10 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SUMMARY

.1

Related Sections: .1 Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning - General Requirements.

1.2

REFERENCES

.1

Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.3

SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet for fixtures and equipment. Shop Drawings. .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate: .1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries. Identify whether factory or field assembled. .2 Wiring and schematic diagrams. .3 Dimensions and recommended installation. .4 Pump performance and efficiency curves. Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00, include: .1 Manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity and serial number. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list with names and addresses.

.3

.4 .5

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PLUMBING PUMPS

Section 22 10 10 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1

Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 47 20.

2.1 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS

.1 .2

Capacity: as indicated. Construction: closed-coupled, in-line centrifugal, 100% lead free, all bronze construction, ceramic or stainless steel shaft, stainless steel or bronze shaft sleeve, ceramic bearings. 1034 kPa maximum working pressure and 105 degrees C continuous service. Motor: 1/12 hp, drip-proof, with thermal overload protection, 3-speed operation. Supports: provide as recommended by manufacturer.

.3 .4 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION

.1 .2

Make piping and electrical connections to pump and motor assembly and controls as indicated. Ensure pump and motor assembly do not support piping.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1

Site Tests/Inspection: .1 Check power supply. .2 Check starter protective devices. Start-up, check for proper and safe operation. Check settings and operation of hand-off-auto selector switch, operating, safety and limit controls, audible and visual alarms, over-temperature and other protective devices. Adjust flow from water-cooled bearings. Adjust impeller shaft stuffing boxes, packing glands.

.2 .3

.4 .5

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

PLUMBING PUMPS

Section 22 10 10 Page 3 2011-05-18

3.3

START-UP

.1

General: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00, supplemented as specified herein. .2 Procedures: .1 Check power supply. .2 Check starter O/L heater sizes. .3 Start pumps, check impeller rotation. .4 Check for safe and proper operation. .5 Check settings, operation of operating, limit, safety controls, over-temperature, audible/visual alarms, other protective devices. .6 Test operation of hand-on-auto switch. .7 Test operation of alternator. .8 Adjust leakage through water-cooled bearings. .9 Adjust shaft stuffing boxes. .10 Adjust leakage flow rate from pump shaft stuffing boxes to manufacturer's recommendations. .11 Run-in pumps for 12 continuous hours. .12 Check installation, operation of mechanical seals. Adjust as necessary. .13 Adjust alignment of piping and conduit to ensure full flexibility. .14 Eliminate causes of cavitation, flashing, air entrainment. .15 Measure pressure drop across strainer when clean and with flow rates as finally set. .16 Replace seals if pump used to degrease system or if pump used for temporary heat.

3.4

REPORTS

.1 .2

In accordance with Section 01 91 00: reports, supplemented as specified. Include: .1 PV results on approved PV Report Forms. .2 Product Information report forms. .3 Pump performance curves (family of curves) with final point of actual performance.

3.5

TRAINING

.1

In accordance with Section 01 91 00, supplemented as specified.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 1 2011-05-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

REFERENCES

.1

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers International (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B16.15-06, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250. .2 ANSI/ASME B16.18-01(R2005), Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.22-01(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.24-2006, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500. ASTM International Inc. (ASTM) .1 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .2 ASTM B88M-05, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA) .1 ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4-08, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. .2 ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5-05, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. .3 ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-08, Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 inch through 48 inch for Water. .4 ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-07, Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. .5 ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51-09, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B242-05, Groove- and Shoulder-Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, c. 33 (CEPA). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.2

.3

.4

.5

.6

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 2 2011-05-18

1.1 REFERENCES (Cont'd)

.7

Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS). .1 MSS-SP-67-2002a, Butterfly Valves. .2 MSS-SP-70-2006, Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS-SP-71-2005, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .4 MSS-SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction .1 NRCC 47668, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) - 2010. Transport Canada (TC) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34 (TDGA). Ontario Plumbing Code, 2006. National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction. .1 NRCC NPCC-2010, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) - 2010.

.8

.9

.10 .11

1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 .2

Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for insulation and adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.

.3

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1

Packaging Waste Management: .1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations.

.2 .3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 3 2011-05-18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

PIPING

.1

Domestic hot, cold and recirculation systems, within building. .1 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M. .2 Buried or embedded: copper tube, soft annealed, type K: to ASTM B88M, in long lengths and with no buried joints. Service water pipe: ductile iron cement mortar lined from 1 m outside of building or as indicated. .1 Ductile iron: ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. .2 Cement mortar lining for ductile iron pipe: to ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Provide means of protection for ductile iron pipe in corrosive soils or environments in accordance with local practices and/or authorities having jurisdiction. Polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe and appurtenances to ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.

.2

.3

2.2

FITTINGS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300: to ANSI/ASME B16.24. Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15. Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.18. Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.22. NPS 3 and larger: mechanical joints or flanged, to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10.

2.3

JOINTS

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Rubber gaskets, latex-free: to AWWA C111. Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series. Solder: 95/5 antimonial tin solder. Teflon tape: for threaded joints. Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: use bronze or brass valve or fittings.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 4 2011-05-18

2.3 JOINTS (Cont'd)

.6

For hangers, use tape or copper clamps with copper pipes.

2.4

GATE VALVES

.1

NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 Rising stem: to MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screw-in bonnet, solid wedge disc as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 Rising stem: to MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screw-in bonnet, solid wedge disc as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2-1/2 and over, in mechanical rooms, flanged: .1 Rising stem: to MSS-SP-70, Class 125, 860 kPa, flat flange faces, cast-iron body, OS&Y bronze trim specified Section 23 05 23.02. NPS 2-1/2 and over, other than mechanical rooms, flanged: .1 Non-rising stem: to MSS-SP-70, Class 125, 860 kPa, flat flange faces, cast-iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet specified Section 23 05 23.02.

.2

.3

.4

2.5

GLOBE VALVES

.1

NPS2 and under, soldered: .1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, renewable composition disc, screwed over bonnet as specified Section 23 05 23.01. .2 Lockshield handles: as indicated. NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 150, 1 MPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet, renewable composition disc as specified Section 23 05 23.01. .2 Lockshield handles: as indicated.

.2

2.6 SWING CHECK VALVES

.1

NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 To MSS-SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged:

.2

.3

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 5 2011-05-18

2.6 SWING CHECK VALVES (Cont'd)

.3

NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged:(Cont'd) To MSS-SP-71, Class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron .1 body, flat flange faces, renewable seat, bronze disc, bolted cap specified Section 23 05 23.02.

2.7

BALL VALVES

.1

NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 Class 150. .2 Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE seat, steel lever handle as specified Section 23 05 23.01. NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 To ANSI/ASME B16.18, Class 150. .2 Bronze body, stainless steel ball, PTFE adjustable packing, brass gland and PTFE seat, steel lever handle, with NPT to copper adaptors as specified Section 23 05 23.01.

.2

2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES

.1

NPS 2-1/2 and over, lug: .1 To MSS-SP-67, Class 150. .2 Cast iron body, ductile iron or bronze disc, stainless steel stem, replaceable EPDM liner and nylon coated ductile iron seat, as specified Section 23 05 23.02.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

APPLICATION

.1

Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2

INSTALLATION

.1 .2 .3

Install in accordance with NPC, Ontario and local authority having jurisdiction. Install pipe work in accordance with Section 23 05 05, supplemented as specified herein. Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install CWS piping below and away from HWS and HWC and other hot piping so as to maintain temperature of cold water as low as possible.

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 6 2011-05-18

3.2 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)

.5

Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. Buried tubing: .1 Lay in well compacted washed sand in accordance with AWWA Class B bedding. Where existing ground below bedding is unstable, install pipe on continuous concrete support. .2 Bend tubing without crimping or constriction. Minimize use of fittings. .3 Apply one layer of protective coating to all buried ductile iron piping and fittings. Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls. Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble without binding. Where piping enters building, provide support and seal against ingress of moisture to approval of authority having jurisdiction.

.6

.7

.8

.9

3.3

VALVES

.1 .2

Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves. Balance recirculation system using lockshield globe valves. Mark settings and record on as-built drawings on completion.

3.4

PRESSURE TESTS

.1 .2

Conform to requirements of Section 23 05 00. Test pressure: greater of 1-1/2 times maximum system operating pressure or 860 kPa.

3.5 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

.1

Flush entire system for 8 h. Ensure outlets flushed for 2 h. Let stand for 24 h, then draw one sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to verify that system is clean to Provincial potable water guidelines. Let system flush for additional 2 h, then draw off another sample for testing.

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 7 2011-05-18

3.6 PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS

.1 .2 .3 .4

Systems to be complete, prior to flushing, testing and start-up. Verify that system can be completely drained. Ensure that pressure booster systems are operating properly. Ensure that air chambers, expansion compensators are installed properly.

3.7

DISINFECTION

.1

Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction and approval of Departmental Representative. Coordinate with Section 33 11 17. Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality for Departmental Representative approval.

.2 .3

3.8

START-UP

.1

Timing: Start up after: .1 Pressure tests have been completed. .2 Disinfection procedures have been completed. .3 Certificate of static completion has been issued. .4 Water treatment systems operational. Provide continuous supervision during start-up. Start-up procedures: .1 Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated. .2 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer, flashing and/or cavitation. .3 Bring HWS storage tank up to design temperature slowly. .4 Monitor piping HWS and HWC piping systems for freedom of movement, pipe expansion as designed. .5 Check control, limit, safety devices for normal and safe operation. Rectify start-up deficiencies.

.2 .3

.4

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Section 22 11 16 Page 8 2011-05-18

3.9 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1

Scheduling: .1 Verify system performance after pressure and leakage tests and disinfection are completed, and Certificate of Completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction. Procedures: .1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet Design Criteria. .2 TAB HWC in accordance with Section 23 05 93. .3 Adjust pressure regulating valves while withdrawal is maximum and inlet pressure is minimum. .4 Sterilize HWS and HWC systems for Legionella control. .5 Verify performance of temperature controls. .6 Verify compliance with safety and health requirements. .7 Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors. Run one outlet for 10 seconds, then shut of water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water hammer arrestor or re-charge air chambers. Repeat for outlets and flush valves. .8 Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, and ensure no residuals remain as result of flushing or cleaning. Reports: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00, using report forms as specified. .2 Include certificate of water flow and pressure tests conducted on incoming water service, demonstrating adequacy of flow and pressure.

.2

.3

3.10 OPERATION REQUIREMENTS

.1

Co-ordinate operation and maintenance requirements including, cleaning and maintenance of specified materials and products with Section 23 05 00.

3.11

CLEANING

.1 .2

Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

END

PWGSC Ontario Region Project Number R.043794.001

DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON AND COPP